How to defend against privacy violation claims

How to defend against privacy violation claims

Created byВ FindLaw’s team of legal writers and editors | Last updated March 20, 2019

Let’s say you accidentally leave a personal letter containing private information on a public park bench, and that letter is picked up and read by someone else. Even if the sharing of this information damages your reputation or causes other harm, it is not a violation of your privacy. That requires a “reasonable expectation of privacy”, which would apply if the letter was not left out in public.

But if you’re having a private conversation in your home and a neighbor uses an electronic device to eavesdrop (and this causes injury), then your expectation of privacy has been violated. This is because you have a reasonable expectation that your neighbor is not using surveillance on your home.

An invasion of privacy occurs when there is an intrusion upon your reasonable expectation to be left alone. This article covers the four main types of invasion of privacy claims, an intentional tort primarily controlled by state laws.

The four main types of invasion of privacy claims are:

  1. Intrusion of Solitude
  2. Appropriation of Name or Likeness
  3. Public Disclosure of Private Facts
  4. False Light

The following information explores these types of claims and the basics of invasion of privacy law in general.

1. Intrusion of Solitude

Intruding upon another’s solitude or private affairs is subject to liability if the intrusion is considered highly offensive to a reasonable person. This tort is often associated with “peeping Toms,” someone illegally intercepting private phone calls, or snooping through someone’s private records.

Taking photographs of someone in public would not be invasion of privacy; however, using a long- range camera to take photos of someone inside their home would qualify. Making a few unsolicited telephone calls may not constitute a privacy invasion, but calling repeatedly after being asked to stop would.

Example: A man with binoculars regularly climbs a tree in his yard and watches a woman across the street undress through her bathroom window.

2. Appropriation of Name or Likeness

Plaintiffs may make a claim for damages if an individual (or company) uses their name or likeness for benefit without their permission. Usually this involves a business using a celebrity’s name or likeness in an advertisement. Some states even limit this type of privacy tort to commercial uses.

This is not always the case. For example, a private detective who impersonates someone else to obtain confidential information has invaded that person’s privacy. The recognition of this tort is like a property right; in other words, a person’s name and likeness is treated as that person’s property. For celebrities, this is often referred to as “right of publicity”.

Example: An advertising agency approached musician Tom Waits to participate in a campaign for a new automobile. Waits, who has a distinctive and easily recognizable voice, declined. The advertisers hired someone who sounds like him to do the soundtrack, prompting Waits to sue the automaker for appropriating his likeness.

3. Public Disclosure of Private Facts

This type of invasion of privacy claim must be weighed against the First Amendment’s protection of free speech. Unlike defamation (libel or slander), truth of the disclosed information isn’t a defense. If an individual publicly reveals truthful information that is not of public concern and which a reasonable person would find offensive if made public, they could be liable for damages.

For example, a woman about to deliver a baby via caesarian section agrees to allow the operation to be filmed for educational purposes only, but instead it’s shown to the public in a commercial theater. This is an invasion of her privacy. However, publishing an article about a politician known for his family values who is having an affair with a staffer is of public concern and therefore not an invasion of his privacy. Some states including New York don’t recognize this type of claim.

Example: The maiden name of a former prostitute who was acquitted of murder was revealed in a film about the case. Since the trial, she had moved to another city, gotten married and adopted a new lifestyle. Her new friends were unaware of her past, so the disclosure of this true but embarrassing information was deemed an invasion of her privacy.

4. False Light

A false light claim is similar to a defamation claim in that it allows an individual to sue for the public disclosure of information that is misleading (or puts that person in a “false light”), but not technically false. The key difference is that defamation claims only apply to the public broadcasting of false information and as with defamation, sometimes First Amendment protections prevail.

Generally, a false light claim must contain the following elements: (1) the defendant made a publication about the plaintiff; (2) it was done with reckless disregard; (3) it placed the plaintiff in a false light; and (4) it would be highly offensive or embarrassing to a reasonable person.

Example: A 96-year-old woman sued an Arkansas newspaper for printing her picture next to the headline, “Special Delivery: World’s oldest newspaper carrier, 101, quits because she’s pregnant!” The woman, who was not pregnant, was awarded damages of $1.5 million.

Get Legal Help with an Invasion of Privacy Claim

Privacy issues are complicated and emotional, which can result in highly contentious court proceedings. Whether your privacy has been violated, or someone is accusing you of violating their privacy, you may benefit from a lawyer’s assistance in preparing your case. Contact a local defamation attorney with invasion of privacy law experience to learn how they can help you defend your rights in court.

Published On: January 24, 2020

Nurses have a legal and ethical responsibility to maintain patient privacy and confidentiality. Social media and new technology create additional challenges, as disclosing information is often unintentional. Creating a heightened awareness can help you be more diligent in protecting yourself, your patients and your employer.

What Is HIPAA?

HIPAA, or the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act , was passed by Congress in 1996 in order to better protect patient privacy, and it outlines Privacy, Security and Breach Notifications Rules . According to the California Department of Health Care Services, HIPAA requires that “health care providers and organizations, as well as their business associates, develop and follow procedures that ensure the confidentiality and security of protected health information (PHI) when it is transferred, received, handled, or shared.”

What does this mean for you as a nurse? Simply put, all forms of PHI (paper, electronic or oral) must be kept confidential and secure, and you should only use the minimum health information necessary to your practice. HIPAA violations can have serious consequences . Nurses can face fines, sanctions or even loss of license, and employers can face fines up to $1.5 million.

What does a HIPAA Violation Look Like?

HIPAA violations come in many forms — some of which may be unexpected. Here are just a few situations to illustrate how violations can happen:

Social Media: Nurses, patients and caregivers form close bonds, so it’s only natural that they reach out to connect through social media. Unfortunately, it is very easy to blur the lines between a professional and personal relationship. Think about information on your social media — your friends, family, opinions, activities and photos — that may influence their opinion of you as their nurse.

Now, think about patient information on social media. Suppose your patient goes out drinking this weekend and alcohol interacts with their medication. Now that you have that information, do you report it? Or is that a breach of patient confidentiality as well? The legal and ethical considerations can quickly become murky.

Social media may negatively impact future employment as workplace discrimination still occurs. Sharing a patient photo with a caption like “Why I love nursing” or “Finishing chemotherapy” may cause harm years later, even if the patient consented. Although you may feel your social media is appropriately private, it is incredibly easy to send screenshots from one person to another. To protect your hard-earned nursing license and to follow the law, consider what downstream effects your social media presence could cause.

Overheard Conversations: Have you ever been to the doctor’s office and seen or heard other patients’ names or medical information? It can make you feel uncomfortable and think that your private information may also be at risk. When discussing patient health information , it is always important to keep in mind the setting you are in — hallway, elevator, nurses’ station or cafeteria, for example.

Technological Mishaps: We’ve all left our phones somewhere or our computers unlocked. Nurses need to watch how and where they view patient information. Be cautious about accessing patient information on home devices such as personal computers or tablets to avoid putting yourself at risk for a HIPAA violation.

5 Tips to Avoid Violating HIPAA Regulations

Now that you know a few of the areas of concern, here are a few ways to prevent HIPAA violations.

  1. Double check authorization requirements. HIPAA requires written consent from the patient before the use or disclosure of information (other than treatment, payment, healthcare operations or Privacy Rule-exempt). Always pause and double-check before providing information, especially to co-workers not caring for the patient.
  2. Watch where you discuss patient information. Nurses are busy, and often it is easiest to catch a colleague or caregiver in passing to relay patient information. Make every effort possible to control the environment to reduce the risk of HIPAA violations.
  3. Mind your technology. Technology has made information sharing easier than ever, but it also comes with risks . Sharing login credentials or passwords, leaving portable devices unattended, and texting patient information are all easy ways to commit a HIPAA violation. Use caution when discussing or viewing confidential information on devices and use your workplace healthcare messaging platform instead of regular text messaging.
  4. Unfriend/unfollow/block current patients and caregivers. If you are already connected with patients or caregivers on social media, now is a good time to break that link. Let them know you will be “un-friending” or unfollowing, not because you don’t value the relationship, but because you are concerned about professional boundaries. Make your social media profiles private and block patients from seeing your public social media.
  5. Politely decline friend/follow requests. If a patient or caregiver sends you a friend or follow request, politely decline it. Explain that it would be in violation of your employer’s social media policies. Not sure if your employer has a policy? Most do. If not, the National Council of State Boards of Nursing (NCSBN) and the American Nurses Association (ANA) do.

Does your employer have good policies in place or do they need updating? Consider starting or joining a team to help. An online RN to BSN program can teach you the leadership skills you need to become an effective agent for change at your place of employment.

Have a question or concern about this article? Please contact us.

  • ‘)” data-event=”social share” data-info=”Pinterest” aria-label=”Share on Pinterest”>
  • ‘)” data-event=”social share” data-info=”Reddit” aria-label=”Share on Reddit”>
  • ‘)” data-event=”social share” data-info=”Flipboard” aria-label=”Share on Flipboard”>

How to defend against privacy violation claims


  • How to Tell a Boss That a Co-worker Is Stealing Money
  • How to Report a Boss Who Is Bullying
  • How to Confront Your Manager for Being Too Pushy
  • Derogatory Behavior in Bosses
  • How to Work for a Dominating Boss

Not many things can be more frustrating – and often even infuriating – than dealing with untruths that are related to your work performance and behaviors. If someone in your workplace is spreading false information about your actions or results, then you have to be prepared to set the record straight.

Proper Documentation

Strong organization is often an effective defense against false accusations. If you’re in a situation where you have to defend yourself, make sure to meticulously organize all key emails, letters, invoices and receipts, to start. Make sure these things are always easily accessible if you need them, too. If a customer tells your boss that you didn’t complete a job for her, show your manager the email in which she thanks you for your finished work. Never discard documentation that you might need at a later date – ever.

Direct Communication

Candid communication can often go a long way in defense against false statements. If your coworker told your supervisor that you routinely take two-hour lunch breaks, take it upon yourself to speak to her about the notion. Look your boss in the eye and tell her the truth. If the complaints about your breaks are unfounded, tell her that clearly. Don’t allow your coworker to be the only one participating in a dialogue with your boss regarding this matter. If your supervisor has a jam-packed, busy schedule, then you might have to arrange beforehand for an appointment with her to have this discussion.

Human Resources Discussion

Not all matters can be settled through discussions with the boss. Some situations call for “outside” help within the workplace. If this applies to you, take things to your company’s human resources division. When you talk to the professionals in this department, give as many clear details regarding your situation as possible. Clearly indicate the untrue complaints that are being made about you, as well. If available, provide them with as much documentation supporting your case as you can. By discussing the serious issue of unfounded complaints with human resources, you can gain helpful “proof” of your dilemma.

Grace Under Pressure

While it might seem tough, a terrific defense against lies and unfounded complaints is often to continue being the exemplary employee you need to be. Never lose your cool by behaving in a belligerent manner in defending yourself against untrue complaints. Instead, protect your reputation by continuing to do your job with poise and conviction. Instead of engaging the person who is complaining about you, focus on what’s most important – the job you are supposed to do. Exhibiting grace under pressure is key to taking the high road amid major workplace stress factors.

If overpayments are found, then the extrapolation recoupment number will go up; if underpayments are found, the extrapolation will go down.

EDITOR’S NOTE: This is the last of a three-part RACmonitor series on zero-paid claims. See Part I and Part II here.

Zero-paid claims are defined as any claims submitted by healthcare providers that are not paid. The problem is that when performing statistical extrapolations, auditors (ZPICs, or Zone Program Integrity Contractors, and others) routinely screen out zero-paid items when they extract the claims from a sample.

This is a violation of at least 12 parts of the Medicare Program Integrity Manual (MPIM), according to a recent administrative law judge (ALJ) decision that discarded statistical extrapolation. Section says that removing zero-paid claims is a “direct violation” of Chapter 8 of the MPIM.

Screening out zero-paid claims is a crooked practice. It is hidden from the provider, because the auditors leave out the details from their “documentation” of the statistical work. Also, and more importantly, it biases the entire audit and extrapolation against the provider. Why? Because zero-paid claims may not be checked to see if they should have been paid. The result: the extrapolation number can only go up, and never down, in favor of the provider.

Mounting a Defense

In order to mount a defense against exclusion of zero-paid claims, your team must convince the ALJ that first, it is a violation of the MPIM, and second, that it really makes a difference in the extrapolation.

The harsh reality is that the MPIM provides a well-known section that gives the auditor a “Get Out of Jail Free” card. In § it states that:

Failure by the contractor to follow one or more of the requirements contained herein . . . should not be construed as necessarily affecting the validity of the statistical sampling and/or the projection of the overpayment.

If I had a dollar for every time an auditor has been exposed with numerous MPIM violations, yet has pulled out this clause and convinced the ALJ to ignore its sloppy work, I would be able to afford that villa in Italy.

Here is what to do:

Step 1 – Detail All MPIM Violations

The first step is to document every single violation of the MPIM made by the auditor. Review every single paragraph of Chapter 8, “Statistical Sampling for Overpayment Estimation,” and see if the auditor either met or failed to meet the requirements.

In this process, if you apply the same level of scrutiny to the auditor’s actions as it has applied to your claims that were rejected, a large number of violations will be found. We have been doing this work since 2001, and have never even once seen a statistical extrapolation done in full compliance with the MPIM. Most violations likely will be found in shoddy documentation provided by the auditor.

Step 2 – Document All Zero-Paid Claim References in the MPIM

Next, the ALJ must be schooled on the zero-paid claims problem, and shown each of the 12 sections of the MPIM that have been violated. There are two parts to this discussion: first, elucidation of the relevant rules, and second, showing with specificity where in the auditor’s work the violations took place.

At the end, the ALJ must understand that there are a number of MPIM violations, that they are significant, and that the auditor has hidden the documentation showing how they made the omissions.

Step 3 – Verify All Zero-Paid Claims

The so-called “universe file” that the auditor will give you will not have the zero-paid claims. They will be hidden. Yet it is crucial – repeat, crucial – to document how many zero-paid claims there were.

After all, if you are making a defense against the extrapolation based on elimination of zero-paid claims, but it turns out that there were none, then the appeal will be laughed out of court. So as a precautionary measure, make sure there were actually zero-paid claims.

It has been our experience that the best way to get this information is from the provider’s own database of submitted claims, and not from the auditor. Two reasons: first, the provider’s database will be definitive, and second, there is no need to tip off the auditor to your defense strategy.

Step 4 – Model the Effect of Zero-Paid Claims on the Extrapolation

Next, you will need to hire a statistical expert who is capable of modeling the effect of zero-paid claims omission on the extrapolation.

Doing this requires sophisticated mathematical skills and experience with Medicare extrapolations. One complicating factor is that it is impossible to know which of the zero-paid claims might have been included in the sample – and of those, how many would have been found deserving of payment. What this modeling will answer is to what degree screening out zero-paid claims introduced error into the extrapolation.

Making Your Case

The result must be explained to the ALJ in order to show how unfair the practice was, and how it made the extrapolation so unreliable that it must be discarded.

The practice of screening out zero-paid claims has gone on for years. It is a relief to see that finally, ALJs are starting to recognize this problem, and are rightfully throwing out these crooked statistical extrapolations.

Note: for a free white paper on zero-paid claims, contact the author.

Programming Note: Listen to the live reporting of Edward M. Roach this coming Monday on Monitor Mondays, 10 Eastern.

Defenses Against Claim of Ownership of a Valid Copyright

  • Unregistered Copyright – Based on the U.S. Supreme Court’s recent ruling in Fourth Estate Public Benefit Corp. v., LLC, et al., an alleged copyright owner must apply for copyright registration with the Copyright Office and the Copyright Office must make or refuse registration before litigation may be instituted. A copyright infringement lawsuit initiated before registration may be subject to dismissal.
  • Lack of Originality – A work is protected by the Copyright Act only if it is an original work of authorship. The owner must show that the work was independently created and that it possesses at least a minimal degree of creativity. Thus, for example, compilations (e.g. phonebooks), reproductions, and factual recitations are not a protected work without some additional minimal creativity.
  • The Merger Doctrine – Copyright law does not protect against expressions of ideas that can only be expressed in one or very few ways. For example, a “no smoking” sign conveyed through a red circle with a diagonal line crossed through it over a cigarette is not copyrightable because there are only a few effective ways of visually presenting the idea.

Defenses Against Allegation of Violation of an Exclusive Right

  • Independent Development – Copyright does not protect against independently created works, even if the work is identical. In other words, if you create your work independently without any knowledge of the copyrighted work, there is no infringement.
  • Fair Use – The Copyright Act specifically provides that the fair use of a copyrighted work is not an infringement of copyright. Use of a copyright work “for purposes such as criticism, comment, news reporting, teaching (including multiple copies for classroom use), scholarship, or research” is not an infringement. Several factors are considered in assessing whether use of a work is considered fair use or liable for copyright infringement, including:
  • The purpose and character of the use – Is the use commercial? Educational? Transformative?
  • The nature of the copyrighted material or work – Is the work factual or creative/fictional?
  • The amount and substantiality of use in relation to the whole
  • The effect on the potential market for or value of the work – Is it a substitute for demand for the work?
  • Scènes à Faire – Copyright does not protect elements of a work that are standard/indispensable in the type of work at issue. Common scenes and themes, standard or stock expressions, and clichéd language are not protected.


The content of this article is intended to provide a general guide to the subject matter. Specialist advice should be sought about your specific circumstances.

Browse US Legal Forms’ largest database of 85k state and industry-specific legal forms.

  • Last Will and Testament
  • Power of Attorney
  • Promissory Note
  • LLC Operating Agreement
  • Living Will
  • Rental Lease Agreement
  • Non-Disclosure Agreement

Invasion of privacy is the intrusion upon, or revelation of, something private[i]. One who intentionally intrudes, physically or otherwise, upon the solitude or seclusion of another or his/her private affairs or concerns, is subject to liability to the other for invasion of privacy[ii].

The law of privacy consists of four distinct kinds of invasion. The right of privacy is invaded when there is[iii]:

  • unreasonable intrusion upon the seclusion of another,
  • appropriation of the other’s name or likeness,
  • unreasonable publicity given to the other’s private life, and
  • publicity which unreasonably places the other in a false light before the public.

An invasion of the right of privacy by anyone of the above four courses of conduct may give rise to a cause of action and, on occasion, there may be an overlapping or concurrent invasion by any or all of the above means working toward the injury of the plaintiff.

Liability for a claim of invasion of privacy by intrusion must be based upon an intentional interference with the plaintiff’s interest in solitude or seclusion, either as to his/her person or as to his/her private affairs or concerns[iv].

Invasion of privacy by intrusion does not depend upon any publicity given to the person whose interest is invaded or to his/her affairs. To be actionable, the prying or intrusion into the plaintiff’s private affairs must be of a type which is offensive to a reasonable person.

The Restatement of Torts clearly provides that the acts constituting the invasion of privacy must be highly offensive to a reasonable person. However, in the case of wrongful appropriation of one’s name or likeness restatement provisions provides that the act need not be highly offensive to constitute invasion of privacy.

The unwarranted publication of a person’s name or likeness may constitute the most common means of invasion of the right of privacy. The protection of name and likeness from unwarranted intrusion or exploitation is the heart of the law of privacy[v].

One who appropriates to his/her own use or benefit the name or likeness of another is subject to liability to the other for invasion of his/her privacy. However, merely suggesting certain characteristics of the plaintiff, without literally using his/her name, portrait, or picture, is not actionable[vi]. To constitute an invasion of the right of privacy, the use of a name or likeness must amount to a meaningful or purposeful use of the name of a person.

Similarly, mere incidental commercial use of a person’s name or photograph is not actionable under the Civil Rights Law[vii]. Some meaningful or purposeful use of the name is essential to the statutory cause of action. Further, it is a person whose name is used for advertising purposes or for the purposes of trade who has a cause of action.

Tortious liability for appropriation of a name or likeness is intended to protect the value of an individual’s notoriety or skill[viii]. Thus, in order that there may be liability for such appropriation, a defendant must have appropriated to his/her own use or benefit the reputation, prestige, social or commercial standing, public interest or other values of the plaintiff’s name or likeness.

Public disclosure of private facts occurs when a person gives publicity to a matter that concerns the private life of another, a matter that would be highly offensive to a reasonable person and that is not of legitimate public concern.

To establish a cause of action for invasion of privacy on the ground of public disclosure of private facts, the courts consider three elements[ix].

  • the disclosure of private facts must be a public disclosure.
  • the facts disclosed must be private facts, and not public ones.
  • the matter made public must be one which would be offensive and objectionable to a reasonable person of ordinary sensibilities.

n an action for invasion of privacy based on the alleged wrongful disclosure of private facts, the plaintiff must show that the disclosure complained of was actually public in nature. There is no liability when a defendant merely gives further publicity to information about a plaintiff that is already public.

False light/invasion of privacy is one of four types of invasions of privacy and the elements of the false light invasion of privacy are[x]:

  • publication of some kind must be made to a third party;
  • the publication must falsely represent the person; and
  • that representation must be highly offensive to a reasonable person.

The protection afforded to a plaintiff’s interest in his/her privacy must be[xi]:

  • relative to the customs of the time and place,
  • to the occupation of the plaintiff, and
  • to the habits of his/her neighbors and fellow citizens.

Some Courts define the tort of invasion of privacy as the wrongful intrusion into one’s private activities in such a manner as to outrage or cause mental suffering, shame, or humiliation to a person of ordinary sensibilities[xii].

Whether there is an offensive invasion of privacy is to some extent a question of law[xiii]. However, some jurisdictions are of the view that the question of invasion of privacy is one of fact[xiv].

[i] Huskey v. National Broadcasting Co., 632 F. Supp. 1282 (N.D. Ill. 1986).

[ii] Jackson v. Playboy Enterprises, Inc., 574 F. Supp. 10 (S.D. Ohio 1983).

[iii] Klipa v. Board of Education, 54 Md. App. 644 (Md. Ct. Spec. App. 1983).

[iv] Uranga v. Federated Publs., Inc., 138 Idaho 550 (Idaho 2003).

[v] Lugosi v. Universal Pictures, 25 Cal. 3d 813 (Cal. 1979).

[vi] Allen v. National Video, Inc., 610 F. Supp. 612 (S.D.N.Y. 1985).

[vii] Moglen v. Varsity Pajamas, Inc., 13 A.D.2d 114 (N.Y. App. Div. 1st Dep’t 1961).

[viii] Remsburg v. Docusearch, Inc., 149 N.H. 148 (N.H. 2003).

[ix] Zieve v. Hairston, 266 Ga. App. 753 (Ga. Ct. App. 2004).

[x] Dominguez v. Davidson, 266 Kan. 926 (Kan. 1999).

[xi] TBG Ins. Services Corp. v. Superior Court, 96 Cal. App. 4th 443 (Cal. App. 2d Dist. 2002).

[xii] Nipper v. Variety Wholesalers, 638 So. 2d 778, 781 (Ala. 1994).

[xiii] Cibenko v. Worth Publishers, Inc., 510 F. Supp. 761 (D.N.J. 1981).

[xiv] Strickler v. National Broadcasting Co., 167 F. Supp. 68, 71 (D. Cal. 1958).

How to defend against privacy violation claims

Created byВ FindLaw’s team of legal writers and editors | Last updated December 27, 2019

Invasion of privacy is the unjustifiable intrusion into the personal life of another without consent. However, invasion of privacy is not a tort on its own; rather it generally consists of four distinct causes of action. States vary on both whether they recognize these causes of action as well as what elements are necessary to prove them, so you should be sure to check your state’s laws or consult with a lawyer before bringing legal action.

The four most common types of invasion of privacy torts are as follows:

  1. Appropriation of Name or Likeness
  2. Intrusion Upon Seclusion
  3. False Light
  4. Public Disclosure of Private Facts

Below, you’ll find explanations and examples of each of these causes of action.

Appropriation of Name or Likeness

Intrusion Upon Seclusion

Intrusion upon seclusion laws protect your right to privacy while you are in solitude or seclusion. This right extends to you or your private affairs. For example, it’s an invasion of privacy for a neighbor to peek through your windows or take pictures of you in your home. Likewise, it’s also an invasion of privacy to use electronic equipment to eavesdrop on a private conversation. The general elements of this tort are as follows:

The defendant does not need to communicate the details of the intrusion to a third party; once the defendant has committed the intruding act (and the plaintiff proves the necessary elements), the defendant is liable for invasion of privacy.

False Light

False light laws protect your right to not have potentially misleading or damaging information about yourself publicly disclosed. This includes the disclosure of information that may be true but is nonetheless misleading or damaging. For example, it may be an invasion of privacy if a caption published with a photograph in a news article about a protest describes a person as a participant, when in fact, the person was only observing the protest. Generally, the elements of false light are as follows:

Many states also require the plaintiff to prove that the defendant acted with actual malice, so be sure to check your state’s laws or consult with a lawyer if you believe you may have a claim.

Public Disclosure of Private Facts

Public disclosure of private facts laws protect your right to keep the details of your private life from becoming public information. For example, publicizing facts about a person’s health, sexual conduct, or financial troubles is likely an invasion of privacy. While state laws vary, the general elements of this tort are as follows:

  1. The defendant publicized a matter regarding the private life of the plaintiff;
  2. The publicized matter would be highly offensive to a reasonable person; and
  3. It is not of legitimate concern to the public.

To publicize a private matter, laws generally require that private information is disseminated in such a way that it is substantially certain to become public knowledge.

Popular Example in the Media

It probably seemed like a great idea when a well-regarded suburban school district decided to loan its students laptop computers for the entire school year, even permitting the students to take the laptops home. The students, however, were unaware that the laptops were armed with internal anti-theft protection that allowed school district personnel to activate the laptops’ webcams anytime without the consent or knowledge of the user. The school district used this anti-theft function to take thousands of pictures of its students studying, speaking to family members, and even sleeping.

The so-called “Webcamgate” scandal resulted in a Pennsylvania school district paying a six-figure sum to settle the invasion of privacy lawsuit against it. While Webcamgate would have seemed far-fetched in the 1980s and 1990s, today and in the future, we can expect technology to continue to challenge our right to privacy, making understanding this right essential.

Learn More About Invasion of Privacy Claims

If you believe you have suffered an invasion of privacy, it’s important to seek out the help of a qualified lawyer. Filing a legal claim protects your rights and can compensate you for the emotional and mental distress the invasion caused as well as for any financial or reputational harm you suffered as a result. Speak with a defamation attorney to learn more.

How to defend against privacy violation claims

  • Article

A federal appeals court last Thursday revived nationwide litigation accusing Facebook Inc. of violating users’ privacy rights by tracking their internet activity even after they logged out of the social media website.

The 9th U.S. Circuit Court of Appeals in San Francisco said Facebook users could pursue several claims under federal and California privacy and wiretapping laws.

A spokeswoman for Facebook said the proposed class action was without merit, and the Menlo Park, California-based company will continue defending itself.

Facebook users had accused the company of quietly storing cookies on their browsers that tracked when they visited outside websites containing “like” buttons, and then selling personal profiles based on their browsing histories to advertisers.

U.S. District Judge Edward Davila in San Jose, California had dismissed the lawsuit in 2017, including claims under the federal Wiretap Act, and said the users lacked legal standing to pursue economic damages claims.

But in Thursday’s decision, Chief Judge Sidney Thomas wrote for a three-judge panel that users had a reasonable expectation of privacy, and had sufficiently alleged a “clear invasion” of their right to privacy.

The panel also said California law recognized a right to recoup unjustly earned profits, regardless of whether a defendant’s conduct directly caused economic harm.

“Facebook’s user profiles would allegedly reveal an individual’s likes, dislikes, interests, and habits over a significant amount of time, without affording users meaningful opportunity to control or prevent the unauthorized exploration of their private lives,” Thomas wrote.

Citing Facebook’s data use policy, he also said the plaintiffs “plausibly alleged that Facebook set an expectation that logged-out user data would not be collected, but then collected it anyway.”

(Reporting by Jonathan Stempel in New York Editing by Noeleen Walder and Matthew Lewis)

How to defend against privacy violation claims

Twitter is a free service that makes money primarily through advertising. (File photo: REUTERS/Dado Ruvic/Illustration)

WASHINGTON: Twitter has agreed to pay US$150 million to settle allegations it misused private information, like phone numbers, to target advertising after telling users the information would be used for security reasons, according to court documents filed on Wednesday (May 25).

Twitter’s settlement covers allegations that it misrepresented the “security and privacy” of user data between May 2013 and September 2019, according to the court documents.

The company will pay US$150 million as part of the settlement announced by the Justice Department and the Federal Trade Commission (FTC). In addition to the monetary settlement, the agreement requires Twitter to improve its compliance practices.

The complaint said that the misrepresentations violated the FTC Act and a 2011 settlement with the agency.

“Specifically, while Twitter represented to users that it collected their telephone numbers and email addresses to secure their accounts, Twitter failed to disclose that it also used user contact information to aid advertisers in reaching their preferred audiences,” the complaint said.

Twitter’s chief privacy officer, Damien Kieran, said in a statement that with the settlement “we have aligned with the agency on operational updates and program enhancements” to protect user privacy and security.

Twitter executive changes aimed at building ‘a stronger Twitter’, CEO says
Musk pledges more equity to fund Twitter deal, scraps margin loan
Explainer: Do claims against Musk raise a legal issue for his companies and Twitter deal?

Twitter is a free service that makes money primarily through advertising. Billionaire Elon Musk, who is buying the service for US$44 billion, has criticised its ads-driven business model and pledged to diversify its revenue sources.

US officials pointed out that of the US$3.4 billion in revenue that Twitter earned in 2019, about US$3 billion was from advertising.

The company made US$5 billion in revenue for 2021. It said in a filing earlier this month that it had put aside US$150 million after agreeing “in principle” upon a penalty with the FTC.

“Twitter obtained data from users on the pretext of harnessing it for security purposes but then ended up also using the data to target users with ads,” said FTC Chair Lina Khan in a statement. “This practice affected more than 140 million Twitter users, while boosting Twitter’s primary source of revenue.”

The complaint also alleges that Twitter falsely said it complied with the European Union-US and Swiss-US Privacy Shield Frameworks, which bar companies from using data in ways that consumers do not authorise.

Twitter’s settlement follows years of fallout over the privacy practices of tech companies.

Revelations in 2018 that Facebook, the world’s biggest social network, was using phone numbers provided for two-factor authentication to serve ads enraged privacy advocates.

Facebook, now called Meta, similarly settled with the FTC over the issue as part of a US$5 billion agreement reached in 2019.

If you have recently received a speeding ticket, you may want to challenge it in court. Going to traffic court may be a good investment in time since you may have a reasonable chance to get the fine reduced or the ticket dismissed entirely.

Review the traffic code you are alleged to have violated

Your first line of defense to contest a traffic ticket is to perform some research and learn more about the specific statute written on the summons. Get a copy of the traffic code that you were alleged to have violated and read through it carefully. It is possible that you were not in violation of all the elements listed in the traffic code. In addition, you should also become more familiar with your state traffic laws that concern the area of your traffic violation.

Speeding Tickets and State Traffic Laws

If you received a speeding ticket, check with your state department of transportation to determine the type of speed limit laws in your state. If your state speeding laws have “absolute” speed limits, it may make your speeding ticket defense a little more difficult than if your state has “presumed” speed limit laws. The law in states that have “absolute” speed limits is that you are guilty if you have even gone one mile over the posted limit. The speed limit is the absolute highest speed you are allowed to go. In states that have “presumed” speed limit laws, being slightly above the absolute speed limit does not make you automatically guilty. You can make a speeding ticket defense on the fact that you were briefly driving above the posted speed limit to maintain a safe flow with the traffic conditions and that it was also safe given the road conditions.

Discovery of evidence for your traffic ticket defense

To begin preparing your defense, you will want to take advantage of the “discovery” process to obtain relevant evidence. By law, the prosecuting attorney must provide you with the information and evidence they have against you. You may wish to ask the court clerk at your local courthouse how to make or fill out a request for discovery. The information you should request and receive will have the ticketing officer’s notes, whether a radar gun was used and should include maintenance records. In addition, you may request and also should receive a list of any witnesses to the incident that led to your traffic ticket.

Take pictures for your traffic ticket defense

After reading the evidence you received via discovery carefully, you should gather your own evidence for your defense. Go the location where you were given the traffic ticket or speeding ticket. Take pictures of the roadway or intersection where you got your traffic ticket or speeding ticket. When taking pictures, try to include a landmark that will indicate that the pictures are where you say they are (such as a street sign.) If the traffic ticket was issued away from the area of the landmark, take a picture of the landmark and then additional pictures side by side until you reach the area where the traffic ticket was issued. In this way, a judge can piece together your pictures and conclude your testimony is truthful and good evidence.

When you take pictures of the area where you received your traffic ticket or speeding ticket, try to go on a day that had the same weather conditions. If you can, get a copy of the weather report for the day the ticket was issued. You should list any special circumstances that you can remember such as traffic hazards, unsafe drivers who were driving erratically in the area, etc. An explanation of why you were speeding, such as to avoid an unsafe condition, could be valuable in providing a valid defense. Draw a diagram that you will later be able to show a judge if any details can be shown that might help your case.

Question witnesses for your traffic ticket defense

You should consider questioning any witnesses listed in discovery about anything in the state’s records. It is possible that the witness might not be as sure about the items written in the record. If there was a passenger in a car, question them and record their answers. Take all papers, diagrams and photos with you to court. If the witnesses may help you, call them to the stand. If their testimony might hurt you, try to impeach them and show the court that their memory might be fuzzy or that they aren’t so sure about what is on the record.

Caught by radar?

You can defend a speeding ticket even when a radar gun was used. Many people do not realize that most radar equipment cannot pinpoint one vehicle over another when it is pointed at several vehicles at the same time. It picks up the most reflective surface in the area. Metal traffic signs, utility lines, power stations and other vehicles with more reflective surface may have resulted in faulty readings. This is especially true if there was heavy traffic in the area and it would be difficult for the radar to pinpoint your vehicle.

You may wish to go to the scene of the speeding ticket and take pictures of where you were and where the radar gun was used. Are there any traffic signs in the way that could have blocked your view? Any other obstructions, like bushes or trees? Photograph them and show how they blocked your view to the judge while making your defense. You will want to prove the obstruction so you can argue that the radar gun had an inaccurate reading because the aim was obstructed by these items. You will also want to take pictures of metallic and reflective devices in the area.

When trying to defend a speed ticket when radar or laser technology is used, you may find it best to hire an experienced traffic ticket lawyer to defend you. They are frequently familiar with all the latest technology used, its limitations and any laws or conditions that may be of help in your defense.

Arguments you can make for your defense

There are several arguments that you can make for your speeding ticket defense:

  • In a “presumed” speed limit state, if you driving in excess of the posted speed because it was necessary to do so as not to hinder the flow of traffic, argue that you driving safely for the conditions. Back up your claim by having copies of traffic records in your city or county that documents it as a high traffic area. You can obtain traffic maps from your city or county government that show the amount and flow of traffic in any given area at particular time periods.
  • Another defense you can make is that you were speeding due to a physical emergency. If you were speeding due to an emergency need for medical treatment, you may get the speeding ticket dismissed. Document this excuse by bringing any evidence that shows you received medical treatment right after you received the speeding ticket.
  • Questioning the officer’s report and/or training is another good line of defense. Request information on the training and experience of the ticketing officer. This information is a matter of public employee records and it is available to you. To obtain this information, make a request from the public information officer at the particular agency where the officer works. Use this information, if applicable, when it is your turn to question him in court. This defense works best if the officer was not trained properly in using the radar equipment.

Browse US Legal Forms’ largest database of 85k state and industry-specific legal forms.

  • Last Will and Testament
  • Power of Attorney
  • Promissory Note
  • LLC Operating Agreement
  • Living Will
  • Rental Lease Agreement
  • Non-Disclosure Agreement

Privacy is the right to be let alone or to be free from misuse or abuse of one’s personality. The right of privacy is the right to be free from unwarranted publicity, to live a life of seclusion, and to live without unwarranted interference by the public in matters with which the public is not necessarily concerned[i].

A person has an actionable right to be free from the invasion of privacy[ii]. Invasion of privacy is a tort based in common law allowing an aggrieved party to bring a lawsuit against an individual who unlawfully intrudes into his/her private affairs, discloses his/her private information, publicizes him/her in a false light, or appropriates his/her name for personal gain.

The tort of invasion of privacy is the publicizing of one’s private affairs with which the public has no legitimate concern, or the wrongful intrusion into one’s private activities, in such manner as to outrage or cause mental suffering, shame, or humiliation to a person of ordinary sensibilities.

The tort of invasion of privacy is not intended to be duplicative of some other tort. To a certain extent, this is a tort in which the focus is the right of a private person to be free from public gaze.

The tort of invasion of privacy consists of four distinct wrongs[iii]:

  • the intrusion upon the plaintiff’s physical solitude or seclusion;
  • publicity which violates the ordinary decencies;
  • putting the plaintiff in a false, but not necessarily defamatory position in the public eye; and
  • the appropriation of some element of the plaintiff’s personality for a commercial use.

In several states the right of privacy is pronounced by statute, though the statutory right may be limited to a right to protection against appropriation of one’s name or likeness.

In only a few states have the courts definitely denied the existence of any common-law right of privacy, the invasion of which, independently of other considerations, will constitute a tort.

Under some jurisdictions, the right of privacy is based on the federal constitutional guaranties. Other jurisdictions have drawn a sharp distinction between one’s constitutional right of privacy, which defends the individual against government action, and the right to privacy that is involved in a tort action.

While the constitutional right of privacy provides a limitation on governmental action, it is the right of privacy under tort law which confers personal rights on an individual as against other individuals.

Some other jurisdictions have suggested natural law as the basis of the right of privacy. Some courts expressly recognize that the right of privacy has derived from the root of some already established right, such as a property right. Also, there is a public policy interest in protecting the reputations of citizens.

By virtue of the Fourth, Fifth, and Fourteenth Amendments to the Federal Constitution, the common-law cause of action for invasion of privacy includes the right to be left alone. However, the Constitution of the U.S. protects privacy from governmental invasion and protection of a person’s general right of privacy, that is, his or her right to be left alone by other people, is left largely to the law of the individual states.

Two separate standards exist for finding the tort of an invasion of privacy[iv]:

  • If there has not been public or commercial use or publication, then the proper standard is whether there has been an intrusion upon the plaintiff’s physical solitude or seclusion, or a wrongful intrusion into one’s private activities in such manner so as to outrage or to cause mental suffering, shame or humiliation to a person of ordinary sensibilities.
  • If there has been public or commercial use or publication of private information, then the proper standard is whether there has been unwarranted publicity, unwarranted appropriation or exploitation of one’s personality, publication of private affairs not within the legitimate concern of the public, an intrusion into one’s physical solitude or seclusion, the placing of one in a false but not necessarily defamatory position in the public eye, or an appropriation of some element of one’s personality for commercial use.

A provision in the state constitution that no person should be disturbed in his/her private affairs, nor his/her home invaded, without authority of law, is not intended to give rise to a private cause of action between private individuals, but is intended as a prohibition on the state.

[i] Strutner v. Dispatch Printing Co., 2 Ohio App. 3d 377 (Ohio Ct. App., Franklin County 1982).

[ii] Black v. Aegis Consumer Funding Group, Inc., 2001 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 2632 (S.D. Ala. Feb. 8, 2001).

[iii] Norris v. Moskin Stores, Inc., 272 Ala. 174 (Ala. 1961).

[iv] Hogin v. Cottingham, 533 So. 2d 525 (Ala. 1988).

Thursday, May 26, 2022

  • Home
  • »
  • Stories
  • »
  • 2021
  • »
  • September

How to defend against privacy violation claims

Insurers allege no duty to defend BIPA violation claim


EAST ST. LOUIS — The insurers of a St. Clair County ice cream and yogurt shop business allege they have no duty to defend a lawsuit alleging violations of the Illinois Biometric Information Privacy Act (BIPA) filed by an employee.

State Auto Property and Casualty Insurance Company and State Automobile Mutual Insurance Company filed a complaint Sept. 14 in the U.S. District Court for the Southern District of Illinois against Fruit Fusion Inc., Taylor Patt, individually and on behalf of all others similarly situated, alleging no duty to defend.

According to the plaintiffs’ complaint, their insured, Fruit Fusion, holds commercial general liability insurance polices for its ice cream and yogurt shop businesses in Belleville and Fairview Heights. They claim that a Fruit Fusion employee, Patt has filed a suit in the St. Clair County Circuit Court, alleging the company’s use of employee fingerprint scans to clock in and out is in violation of BIPA. The plaintiffs allege they do not have a duty to defend Fruit Fusion because their policies include only coverage for bodily injury, property damage and personal and advertising injury. The plaintiffs further allege Fruit Fusion’s policies do not cover claims of BIPA violations or injury arising out of employment-related practices. They also claim Fruit Fusion “may contend” that the Illinois Workers’ Compensation Act provides remedy for Patt’s BIPA claim against them.

The plaintiffs seek monetary and all other just relief. They are represented by Robert Chemers of Pretzel & Stouffer, Chartered in Chicago.

How to defend against privacy violation claims

Even the best contractors and construction companies are vulnerable to claims of fraud. The typical situation occurs where a contractor completes a job, but the owner does not want to make the final payment. When the contractor attempts to collect, the owner threatens a fraud or consumer fraud claim as a way to try to avoid having to pay for the work. Contractors are especially vulnerable in residential construction, because of the technical requirements of the New Jersey Consumer Fraud Act governing home improvement contractors are little known and strictly enforced.

Defending Claims of Fraud Against Contractors

Fraud occurs when one party makes a misrepresentation of important facts on which the other party relies to its detriment. Normally in construction contracts these misrepresentations must be made before the contract is signed, and the other party must have relied on these misrepresentations in deciding to enter into the contract. A successful claim of fraud can result in the contract being ordered to pay the owners damages plus punitive damages.

Our attorneys have handled many claims of fraud, and utilize all the defenses available under New Jersey construction law. We fight aggressively for our clients’ rights. The most important thing to do, however, is to build a strong case backed by solid evidence to show that not only didn’t the contractor commit fraud, but that the owner got exactly what she contracted for.

Defending Contractors Against Claims of Consumer Fraud on Residential Construction Projects

A greater problem is the regulations governing the New Jersey Consumer Fraud Act. These requirements are quite technical, indeed bordering on minutia. However, they must be strictly followed, or a home improvement contractor on a residential construction project can be held liable for triple the owner’s “damages” (also known as “ascertainable losses”) and responsible for the homeowner’s attorneys fees.

Violations of New Jersey’s Consumer Fraud Act occur whenever a home improvement contractor makes any affirmative material misrepresentation whether intentional or not, and whenever a contractor knowingly withholds material information.

In addition, the Department of Community Affairs has issued regulations which make certain acts in connection with contracts for home improvements.

  • Every home improvement contract must be in writing, and signed by both parties.
  • The contract needs to include the name, registration number and address of the contractor.
  • All change orders must be in writing, and signed by both parties as well.
  • Contracts must have the date on which the work will begin and be completed by.
  • Every contract must contain specific required language about the owner’s three day right to cancel the contract in specified print and size.
  • The contract must attach a copy of the contractor’s general liability insurance policy, and include the insurance carrier’s telephone number.
  • The full price and what is included in that price must be set forth in detail in the contract.
  • The contract must include the warranties on both goods and materials.
  • The specific brand, type and quantity of materials must be described in the contract.
  • In addition, the regulations make the failure to follow any of these requirements consumer fraud violations.
  • A home improvement contractor must register with the Department of Community Affairs.
  • Home improvement contractors cannot disparage their competition.
  • Every written communication from the contractor to the customer must include the contractor’s Department of Community Affairs registration number.
  • The contractor must obtain all required permits, and must obtain them before starting work.
  • The contract must be fully signed before commencing work.
  • The contractor cannot require the homeowner to pay in full before the job is complete.

There are several ways in which our construction attorneys defend contractors in consumer fraud cases. The first way to do this, of course, is to show that there was no consumer fraud, either by a misrepresentation or omission, and that there were no “technical” violations of the consumer fraud regulations. To do this, we make aggressive use of the “discovery” process allowed by New Jersey law, which gives us the opportunity to build the case that no consumer fraud occurred.
Even when technical violations or actual misrepresentations occurred, however inadvertent, there are defenses which can be raised. Additionally, we can use the discovery process to show that the owner did not suffer any “actual” and “ascertainable” loss, which is required for recovery of damages under the New Jersey Consumer Fraud Act.

The best defense to a technical violation of the regulations is to ensure that the contract itself has no violations, and the best way to do this, of course, is to have a contract written without any violations. We have spent years writing home improvement contracts for contractors which help them get paid and comply with New Jersey’s consumer fraud regulations, and helping them revise existing contracts so that they comply.

Our construction attorneys aggressively utilize every defense and use the discovery process to the fullest to defend our clients against claims of fraud and consumer fraud. For help, please e-mail us or call (973) 890-0004.

We all know the freedom of speech is an important and protected right in America, but it is important to understand there are limitations. That means as an author, you must use caution when writing about others, or you might end up with a lawsuit. This article should summarize the basic principles of defamation law in the United States, but should not be taken as legal advice. For questions regarding your specific situation, we always advise contacting an attorney in your jurisdiction for legal counsel, but this information should help you become better informed about this potentially costly topic.

Over the years, lawmakers have tried to find a balance between freedom of speech and protecting individuals. It has been a constant struggle, and libel isn’t an exact science. There can be a lot of grey area. So how can an author avoid a defamation lawsuit when writing a book? How do you know what you can and cannot publish? To successfully navigate the murky waters of libel law, you must understand the definition of libel and follow some basic dos and don’ts to avoid a defamation lawsuit.

What is libel?

Libel is the publication of a false statement that hurts someone’s reputation. It is one of the two forms of defamation. Slander is the other form, which is a defaming statement that is spoken, instead of written. Defamation is the umbrella term for libel or slander.

Who can sue for libel?

Laws vary from state to state, but in most cases, any individual, business, not-for-profit, small group, or corporation can sue for defamation. Government bodies cannot sue, but individual politicians can.

What must be proven in a libel lawsuit?

For someone to win a libel lawsuit, they must prove these four things:

  1. Falsity: The plaintiff must show that the claim is an untrue statement masquerading as fact.
  2. Fault: For private individuals, only negligence needs to be proven. For public figures (such as politicians and celebrities) “actual malice” must also be shown, which means the defaming statement was published without regard of the truth and with the intention of hurting the individual.
  3. Damage: The plaintiff must prove that harm was caused by the defaming publication, such as loss of revenue, emotional trauma, or loss of esteem in the eyes of others.
  4. Publication: The libelous claim must be read by someone other than the plaintiff and defendant. You don’t have to be a bestseller to be the subject of a libel lawsuit. If your book is published, then you’re at risk.

Dos and Don’ts: How to avoid a defamation lawsuit as an author

Authors are not often sued for libel, but it can and does happen. While you can never be 100 percent sure you are not at risk, there are some basic dos and don’ts that can help you reduce the probability your book could result in a lawsuit.

Do tell the truth

In a libel case, truth is a defense. A true statement, no matter how scathing, isn’t libelous. However, there are other factors to consider.

  • Don’t make claims based on assumptions or opinions. Adding “in my opinion” before a statement won’t save you in a libel case.
  • Don’t embellish or exaggerate. If your book is nonfiction or memoir, then make sure it is truthful in every detail.
  • Don’t overlook invasion of privacy laws. Even though a true statement might not be libelous, it could qualify as invasion of privacy, especially for a private individual.

Do consider parody

When you really want to make a bold statement, consider writing a book of parody or satire, which doesn’t require you to make truthful statements. It’s protected against libel suits, as long as the parody is so ridiculous that no one could mistake it as fact.

Do use a disclaimer

Fiction example: “This is a work of fiction. Names, characters, businesses, places, events, and incidents are either the products of the author’s imagination or used in a fictitious manner. Any resemblance to actual persons, living or dead, or actual events is purely coincidental.”

Memoir example: “This book is a memoir . It reflects the author’s present recollections of experiences over time. Some names and characteristics have been changed, some events have been compressed, and some dialogue has been recreated.”

Don’t assume a disclaimer will protect you. While it may help, the disclaimer alone isn’t a foolproof solution. Courts can rule these types of disclaimers null and void.

Do hide identities thoroughly

To protect the privacy of individuals in your book and avoid a libel lawsuit, you have to put in the extra work and get creative.

  • Don’t assume changing names is enough, because it’s not. If you make a claim about your doctor and only change the name, people who know you or the doctor might still be able to identify the doctor. Change multiple aspects. Ensure that those who know you or the doctor won’t be able to reasonably identify the individual.
  • Don’t use a recognizable aspect of a person. It is tempting to use certain details about a person that make them interesting, such as wearing a handlebar mustache or riding a Segway—but don’t do it. It’s easy proof that you are indeed writing about a real person. Instead, get creative and come up with some interesting quirks of your own.

Do use extreme caution for certain claims

Calling someone a crook, prostitute, or corrupt individual is easy bait for a lawsuit, especially if you don’t have concrete evidence to back it up. It’s better to simply tell your story and let the readers come to their own conclusions. This way, you can avoid labeling a person or business a term that could trigger a big reaction.
Don’t make false statements that qualify as libel per se, or libel that is so obviously harmful that the plaintiff doesn’t even have to prove damages. According to Cornell Law School, examples include the following claims about an individual:

  • Committed crimes of moral turpitude (a crime that’s especially vile and against morals)
  • Performed acts of unchastity
  • Carries a loathsome disease
  • Or any other claims that negatively affect the person’s profession or business

Do obtain written permission from individuals

Don’t publish sensitive material unless it is critical to the success of your book. Weigh the importance of including material. Is it really worth the risk? Or could you express your point in another way?

Do speak with a lawyer when publishing sensitive material.

Don’t forget to support your claims with evidence. It’s good practice to cite sources in your work, plus it can help you defend yourself in a lawsuit. If you cannot find evidence to support a claim, then perhaps it is speculation instead, in which case you should clearly state it as such.

When in doubt, speak to a lawyer who specializes in publishing or the First Amendment. It’s better to be safe than sorry.

The Statute of Limitations for Invasions of Privacy

Related Articles

  • The Statute of Limitations for Invasions of Privacy
  • What Are the Kinds of Emotional Distress One Can Sue for in a Lawsuit?
  • Settlement Vs. Judgment
  • Settlement & Release Agreement

In the United States, every person has a right to privacy. In the most straightforward sense, this is the right to be left alone; in broader terms, it is a person’s reasonable expectation of privacy. When an individual feels that her right to privacy has been violated in some way, she may sue for invasion of privacy.

Four Types of Privacy Violations

There are four primary ways in which an individual’s privacy can be violated:

  • Intrusion of his solitude
  • Appropriating his name or likeness
  • Publicly disclosing his personal information
  • Portraying him in a false light

Intruding on an individual’s solitude includes intercepting his mail or phone calls, looking through his windows or harassing him with incessant phone calls. When a victim chooses to sue for invasion of privacy, the court is tasked with determining whether the perpetrator’s actions would be considered offensive by a reasonable individual.

Gather Evidence to Support a Privacy Lawsuit

An invasion of privacy lawsuit is a civil claim, not a criminal one. This means that there is no allegation that the defendant violated any criminal law, but that her actions did cause the plaintiff to suffer damages. When an individual opts to sue for invasion of privacy, she may claim that she suffered both monetary and non-monetary damages, including:

  • Lost profits.
  • Mental anguish.
  • Physical injury.
  • Damaged professional or social reputation and the financial losses that can follow.
  • Punitive damages (in some states).

A successful invasion of privacy claim requires evidence that not only did the alleged perpetrator invade the victim’s privacy, but that the invasion caused her to suffer damages. In a civil case like this, the burden of proof – the onus to prove the event occurred through a sufficient body of evidence – is on the plaintiff.

File a Complaint With the Court

An invasion of privacy lawsuit is typically handled by the local circuit court or district court, depending on the jurisdiction where it occurs. When cases involve parties in multiple states, locations under federal jurisdiction or violations of federal law, they are handled in federal court.

The complaint is the initial form that outlines all the details of the alleged incident or series of incidents, including the accused’s name, the location where the incident occurred, the details surrounding the incident and how it caused the claimant to suffer damages. After the claimant files the complaint with the court, he receives copies of the document and serves a copy of the complaint to the alleged perpetrator. After serving the defendant, the claimant files an affidavit of service with the court, a document stating that he served the complaint on the defendant.

Settle or Prepare for Trial

Once the defendant has been served, both parties prepare for court. The first step in this process is known as discovery, during which both parties gather relevant evidence about each other, like their testimonies and information about the evidence they plan to use in court. This is often followed by efforts to settle the issue out of court, potentially through mediation or by negotiating a settlement for the plaintiff.

Not every invasion of privacy lawsuit can be settled out of court, though. When negotiations and other attempts to settle do not lead to a resolution, the case heads to court to be heard and ruled on by a judge and/or jury. After examining the evidence presented, including both parties’ testimonies, the judge rules on the case or the jury renders a verdict. If the court finds that the plaintiff did suffer damages from an invasion of privacy, it awards her an amount deemed to be appropriate compensation for those damages.

How to defend against privacy violation claims

How to defend against privacy violation claimsExamples of False Claims Act violations show the penalties are enormous. But do examples do us any good? It depends on the situation. Many times people learn far better by example than anything else. When you are trying to learn the tango, watching a couple dance with passion teaches more than any book. But when it comes to fraud violations, the examples are frightening.

The False Claims Act exists to punish people who commit fraud against the government. This fraud exists when companies bill the government for services that didn’t take place or overcharge for materials. Billing for services not delivered, overcharging for material goods, failing to provide information related to products or services and charging for skilled professionals who did not perform the work are all examples violations.

Although the law has existed since the Civil War days, Congress made amendments in 1986. The changes allow ordinary citizens to file complaints on behalf of the government. These citizens are the whistleblowers and can receive significant rewards.

Whistleblowers usually work for the company they report for fraud. The False Claims Act protects the whistleblower from retaliation by that company. Whistleblowers that make a complaint of fraud might experience harassment at work. Employers can deny benefits or promotions. Whistleblowers can even lose their jobs. The False Claims Act makes those actions illegal. It also provides a financial reward for whistleblowers.

What Are the Most Common Examples of False Claims Act Violations?

● Most False Claims Act violations are in the healthcare and medical industries. Examples include people who lie to Medicare or Medicaid, facilities that bill for services they did not provide, or those that inflate the cost of the services they did get. They may even lie about who is providing services. The company bills the government for skilled professionals but uses non-professionals instead.

● Drug companies can often be huge offenders of False Claims Act violations. A good example is company salespeople that offer incentives to doctors. Incentives include kickbacks and gifts to the doctors in exchange for using the company’s drugs. Kickbacks can include elaborate vacations and other perks.

● Dental fraud is another example. Dentists claim payments for services they have not completed. For example, a hygienist performs a teeth cleaning, but the bill indicates the dentist did the work and charged his rate.

● More serious examples of healthcare fraud can involve nursing home care or hospice care. The administration may charge for care not given or unnecessary care. The company charges the government for procedures and tests, even though they did not perform the work. Hospice owners may provide care to people who do not need hospice level care.

What Are the Different Types of Violations that the False Claims Act Covers?

Medical and healthcare issues are the most common breaches of the False Claims Act. But there are other violations as well. Here are some examples of False Claim Act Violations:

● Scams that offer free grants for education
● Construction companies working on state highways claim for materials not used
● Business kickbacks or rewards
● Claiming unused materials or labor from defense forces
● Giving untrue information when applying for a government grant or program
● Using lower quality materials than contracted and billed for
● Giving false information to the Department of Veteran Affairs
● Government staff claiming pay for hours that they did not work
● Buying or taking property that belongs to the government

The False Claims Act protects whistleblowers from retaliation by their employers. Examples of retaliation include people losing their jobs because they made complaints, denial of promotions, or not allowing sick days. In addition, whistleblowers might have trouble getting work somewhere else. The company might spread rumors about the whistleblower’s quality of work. They may have them blackballed throughout their industry. All these are violations of the False Claims Act.

What Should You Do If Your Company Is Violating the False Claims Act?

You should consult an attorney experienced in violations of the False Claims Act. They will be able to tell you if your company is breaking the law and committing fraud. They can show you several examples of False Claims Act violations resulting in prosecution. They will also know how to protect you against any retaliation by your employer.

You must report any violations of the False Claims Act that you see. Your attorney will protect you from retaliation. If your allegations result in a conviction, you may receive a huge reward. Contact the skilled False Claims Act attorneys at Bothwell Law Group by calling 770.643.1606 today. We will sit down with you and discuss examples of False Claims Act violations, so you can move forward with confidence.

“You have been prescreened, and qualify for a car loan” or “You have been prescreened and qualify for a $1000 loan”

Fair Credit Reporting Act Claims – Credit History Violations

The Fair Credit Reporting Act (FCRA) permits companies to access certain information about your credit history for purposes of making a “firm offer of credit”. However, some companies send mailers or e-mails stating that they prescreened your credit and you qualify for a loan, but are empty promises or not firm offers of credit. These companies may be in violation of the FCRA, and you may be entitled to compensation.

Some mailers or offers that may be in violation of the FCRA include the following:

  • An offer to buy a car, where the loan amount stated is insufficient to buy a car
  • An offer for a loan, where the terms of the loan are not provided such as failure to commit to one interest rate or to the method for calculating interest
  • Credit card offers
  • Mortage offers or mortage refinancings where the terms of the mortgage and a set interest rate are not specifically stipulated

If you believe you may be the victim of a credit history violation through receiving an improper prescreened credit mailer for a loan, please schedule a free confidential consultation by calling us at 630-333-0000, or filling out our intake form on our Contact Us page. Please note that we will need a copy of the document in question. If it is a mailer, please scan the document and e-mail it to us.

Receiving junk faxes? Fight back!

Although junk faxes are illegal, many companies still use them because they are inexpensive (the recipient even pays for the ink and paper!) and even a small response can be very profitable for the company.

Headquartered in Oakbrook Terrace and Chicago, Illinois, we aim to educate consumers, stop companies who wrongfully profit on consumers, and assist consumers in obtaining compensation for physical and financial harm caused by violating consumer rights.

We accomplish our goals by bringing lawsuits directly on behalf of consumers or as part of a class action against companies that violate consumer protection and privacy laws.

Unsolicited Cell Phone Text Messages

Unsolicited cell phone text messages cost consumers millions of dollars a year, and can result in additional unwanted charges on your cell phone bill. We are preparing class action lawsuits to stop these unfair advertising practices that invades your privacy and takes away your hard earned dollars. If you are a victim of unsolicited cell phone text message advertising contact one of our attorneys today.

Experienced Privacy Violations Lawyers

Our attorneys have decades of experience handling consumer claims for violation of their rights. Our attorneys aggressively pursue claims on your behalf to obtain fair and just compensation for your injuries, and to prevent companies from injuring other similarly situated individuals. For information about us and the benefits of retaining our attorneys to help you, please visit the Our Philosophy page on this site.

If your rights as a consumer have been violated, including your privacy rights through the receipt of junk faxes or identity theft, it is time for you to fight back. Please schedule a free consultation with an experienced privacy violation lawyer by calling us at 630-333-0000, or filling out our intake form on our Contact Us page.

We are dedicated to protecting your rights
and exposing consumer rip-offs and scams

Nationwide Consumer Rights
Consumer Protection Lawyers
Phone: 630-333-0000

How to File a Complaint Regarding HIPAA Policy

Related Articles

  • How to File a Complaint Regarding HIPAA Policy
  • How to Report Violations of the Americans With Disabilities Act
  • How to File a Civil Suit in South Carolina
  • How to Address a Letter to an Attorney

Lawsuits violating privacy are protected under the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996 (HIPAA) and filed with the U.S. Department of Health & Human Services’ Office for Civil Rights (OCR). HIPAA protects citizens’ private health information including information contained in medical records. An actual lawsuit technically is not based on the HIPAA violation; rather the lawsuit is based on violation of personal privacy. Anyone has the right to file a lawsuit but should realize the basis is not the HIPAA act itself.

Complaint Form Packages

Obtain the OCR Health Information Privacy complaint form package by visiting their website and clicking the links available to open the PDF documents or by completing the online complaint form.

While the online portal is quick and easy, you may prefer to complete a hard copy and get a certified mail receipt of delivery as documentation. If choosing the physical copy method, print the complaint and consent form and send it to the OCR regional office located closest to where the violation occurred. For a list of OCR regional offices, visit their website. Email, mail or fax the forms to the appropriate OCR office.

File complaints within 180 days of the alleged violation. The OCR investigates alleged violations, initiating corrective action and enforcing penalties where deemed necessary. Filing a complaint is not filing a lawsuit, but is the first step in recording the alleged violation.

Filing the Lawsuit

Contact an attorney if you wish to file a lawsuit against the individual, business or organization based on the privacy violation. Wait until you have filed the official HIPAA complaint before filing the lawsuit. Bring the complaint form package and any supporting documentation to the attorney at your first meeting. Provide your attorney with copies of all documents as well as contact information of witnesses who corroborate your claim.

Cases with many people claiming HIPAA violations can become larger class action lawsuits. If you are aware of others affected in the same manner as you by the company in question, refer them to you attorneys to build a stronger case.

Settle or Go to Court

Settle the case or go to court. Your attorney will attempt to negotiate a settlement with the violator’s attorney. Larger companies will often settle rather than extend litigation and potential negative publicity. If settlement is not an option, a court trial will occur. Appear with documentation, witnesses and your OCR complaint. A judge and possibly a jury will decide the validity and penalty, if applicable.

  • |
  • |
  • You can take a case to court under the Human Rights Act if you are claiming that a public authority, such as a local authority, the police or the NHS, has violated one or more of your human rights. You may also be able to make a claim against other bodies carrying out public functions. Find out more about who the Act applies to.

    Taking court action can be a long and stressful process. It can also be expensive. But sometimes it is the only way forward. Remember – the courts and tribunal systems are there for all to use and thousands of people use them successfully on their own every year.

    Is legal action the best way forward? You should consider other options first – see how you can protect your human rights without going to court. Bear in mind, however, that there are strict time limits for taking legal action (see below). Whatever you do, it’s best to act as early as possible.

    If you’re considering court action, you should get advice from an experienced adviser. The cost is a worry for many people, but if you get benefits or are on a low income, you might be able to get a lawyer on legal aid.

    Find out where you can get help and advice on legal aid in England and Wales and Scotland.

    The Human Rights Act states that only the ‘victim’ of a human rights breach can take legal action under the Act. You could be the victim as an individual, group of people, company or other organisation. Interest groups and charities cannot take legal action themselves unless they meet the ‘victim test’. But they can help you if you are bringing a claim.

    If you face legal action from someone else, you may be able to use the Human Rights Act to defend yourself (for example in the criminal courts).

    The way that a court enforces your right (known as a ‘remedy’) depends on the type of court action you’re taking.

    The most common remedies include:

    • financial compensation or damages,
    • a declaration that your rights have been breached,
    • an order overturning the decision you have complained about – in England and Wales this is called a quashing order and in Scotland reduction, and
    • an order that the public authority should do something – in England and Wales this is called a mandatory order and in Scotland specific performance.

    A court will not automatically order financial compensation even if it decides your human rights have been breached. This depends on whether you’ve suffered a loss that the court thinks you should be compensated for. The value of compensation in human rights cases is usually relatively low.

    You usually have to bring proceedings within a year of the potential breach of your human rights. But there may be stricter time limits depending on the type of court action you take, and this can be as short as three months (or even less in some cases). The court can allow you to bring proceedings after a longer period if it thinks this is fair, but this is rare.

    Last updated: 21 Feb 2020

    Further information

    If you think you might have been treated unfairly and want further advice, you can contact the Equality Advisory and Support Service.

    Phone: 0808 800 0082
    Textphone: 0808 800 0084

    Also available through the website are BSL interpretation, web chat services and a contact us form.


    Opening hours:

    9am to 7pm Monday to Friday
    10am to 2pm Saturday
    closed on Sundays and Bank Holidays

    Alternatively, you can visit our advice and guidance page.

    Under the federal civil rights statute (Title 42, section 1983, of the United States Code), state and local government officials can be sued for money damages on grounds of the violation of the plaintiff’s constitutional rights under color of authority. (Federal officers can be sued under Bivens v. Six Unknown Named Agents.) For example, if an officer makes an unreasonable arrest, the arrested person may be able to sue for a violation of his or her Fourth Amendment rights, because that amendment explicitly guarantees everyone a right to be free from unreasonable seizures.

    Due Process and Civil Liability

    Of course, there is no constitutional right to be protected by police against exposure to danger. So how could a person frame a federal lawsuit against an officer by simply claiming the officer failed to protect him from whatever injury he suffered? The Supreme Court and the U.S. Court of Appeals have said that the Fifth and Fourteenth Amendment due process clauses can provide grounds for a civil rights lawsuit under either of two separate doctrines: (1) the “special relationship” doctrine; or (2) the “state-created danger” doctrine.

    “Special Relationship” Liability

    “A special relationship exists when the state assumes control over an individual sufficient to trigger an affirmative duty to provide protection to that individual (e.g., when the individual is a prisoner or involuntarily committed mental patient).” (Uhlrig v. Harder) In other words, when you assume custody of a person, you also assume the responsibility to take reasonable steps to provide for his or her care and safety and to ensure the person’s protection against foreseeable risks.

    This kind of claim is primarily made against corrections officials, but it may also be made against local police in their operation of a jail or even while a person is under arrest and in the custody of an officer. For example, if you arrest and handcuff a person and place him into the back seat of the police car for transportation to the station but you fail to secure him with a seat belt, any injuries he sustains if someone rear-ends your police car could make you and your employing agency liable for a due process violation. Since your prisoner was unable to put on his own seat belt, you had an affirmative duty to belt him in before driving away.

    “State-Created Danger” Liability

    More common than a claim of liability based on the “special relationship” doctrine is a claim that someone who was not in police custody nevertheless came to injury or death at the hands of another, or via human or natural hazards, because of something police did or failed to do in circumstances of obvious danger. This is the “state-created danger” theory of liability.

    “Although the state’s failure to protect an individual against private violence does not generally violate the guarantee of due process, it can where the state action affirmatively places the plaintiff in a position of danger, that is, where state action creates or exposes an individual to a danger which he or she would not otherwise have faced.” (Kennedy v. Ridgefield)

    In other words, if you become involved in an incident and your action or omission places the person in a more precarious position than if you had not intervened at all, you could face liability for creating a greater danger.

    Examples of application of the “state-created danger” doctrine are more numerous than “special relationship” cases, and they are often far more tragic in their facts. Just a few will be enough to illustrate how this doctrine works.

    Wood v. Ostrander.

    Washington troopers stopped a car at 2:30 a.m., arrested the driver for DUI, and impounded the car, leaving the passenger/wife to walk away alone in a high-crime area. She was later picked up by a man who drove her to a secluded spot and raped her. The Court of Appeals ruled that these allegations created potential liability based on state-created danger, since the police actions placed the wife at greater risk of being assaulted than she had faced before police intervention.[PAGEBREAK]

    A man and his drunken wife were walking to their home in Philadelphia one winter night when police officers detained them. Because the pair were less than a block from home, the officers allowed the husband to go on home to care for their child, while they detained the wife a bit longer. Although the wife was visibly intoxicated and had difficulty walking without assistance, police eventually released her to stagger away in the darkness. She fell down an embankment and suffered severe brain damage.

    Her ability to sue for violation of her constitutional right of due process was upheld on the theory that once police separated the woman from the assistance of her husband and saw how inebriated she was, their decision to release her to make her own way in the darkness increased the level of danger that she would fall and injure herself.

    Munger v. Glasgow.

    Officers were called to a bar to eject a drunken and belligerent Lance Munger, who was causing a disturbance. Although the temperature outside in the Montana night was only 11 degrees with a wind-chill of minus 25, and even though Munger wore only jeans and a T-shirt, officers prevented him from getting into his truck or reentering the bar. He walked away into the night and froze to death two blocks away. Upholding his parents’ right to sue, the Court of Appeals said that police had “placed Munger in a more dangerous position than the one in which they found him,” and so could be held liable under the “state-created danger” doctrine.

    Kennedy v. Ridgefield.

    When police investigated charges that a 13-year-old neighbor had molested the Kennedys’ 9-year-old daughter, the Kennedys expressed great fear that the boy was unstable and dangerous. They asked police to let them know before officers interviewed the boy, so they could take precautions.

    Officers promised to do so, but instead contacted the boy and his mother without notifying the Kennedys. When the Kennedys learned of this, officers sought to allay their fears by assuring them of extra patrols around their house. That night, the boy broke into their house, shot Mr. Kennedy dead, and shot and wounded Mrs. Kennedy.

    The Court of Appeals concluded that by giving assurances that were not kept and by discouraging the Kennedys from taking prudent precautions for their own protection, police had placed the victims in greater danger than they otherwise would have faced.

    Take Care

    As to individuals in your custody, you have a “special relationship” that requires you to take reasonable care of them. Failure to do so could result in federal civil

    In most states, police are statutorily immune from tort damages for failing to protect the citizenry. However, once you do become involved in a situation, your acts or omissions that place others in dangers they did not otherwise face can cause liability under the federal civil rights laws for “state-created danger.” (State tort liability for negligence is governed by state laws, which vary from state to state. Check these with your local civil advisers.)

    Devallis Rutledge is a former police officer and veteran prosecutor who currently serves as Special Counsel to the Los Angeles County District Attorney. He is the author of 12 books, including “Investigative Constitutional Law.”

    What is the Equal Pay Act?

    The Equal Pay Act (EPA) protects workers and employees from gender discrimination . It also provides that employees shall be given equal pay for equal work. In the evaluation of equal work, the following factors are taken into consideration under the EPA:

    • Skill: Comparable experience, training, education, and ability will be considered, as required for a particular job.
    • Effort: The level of physical and mental exertion required for the job will be evaluated.
    • Responsibility: The amount of obligation and accountability required for the job will also be a factor.
    • Working conditions: Comparable environment and hazards presented by the job are taken into account.

    Thus, since each job description is different, the determination of “equal work” will involve many different factors. Courts will seek to determine how equal pay should be applied using these factors and others when possible.


    1. What are Some Violations of the Equal Pay Act?
    2. Does the Equal Pay Act Only Protect Women?
    3. What is Included in the Equal Pay Act?
    4. How Can I File a Claim for Violation of the Equal Pay Act
    5. Who Has the Burden of Proof When You File a Claim Under the Equal Pay Act?
    6. Is there a Statute of Limitations for Equal Pay Act Claims?
    7. Do I Need a Lawyer for Help with an Equal Pay Act Claim?

    What are Some Violations of the Equal Pay Act?

    If an employer does not provide equal pay for equal work, then they may be in violation of the Equal Pay Act, and may be sued for discrimination.

    Some examples of EPA violations may include:

    • Paying an employee less than another employee who performs the same work, based on that person’s gender.
    • Treating one group of employees differently than another group in terms of pay, based only on gender (for instance, treating one group better than the other).
    • Denying an employee insurance or other benefits based on gender.
    • Refusing to pay or issue pension benefits due to the employee’s gender.
    • Various other discrepancies in pay or company benefits based on the employee’s gender or gender identification.

    Does the Equal Pay Act Only Protect Women?

    The Equal Pay Act was initially created to protect women. It was created mainly to address the unfair pay gap usually directed at women. However, the courts have since ruled that the Act applies to both genders, and “ reverse discrimination ” against men is also a violation.

    Thus, if an employer discriminates against a man with regard to pay based solely on their gender, then it may be a violation of Equal Pay Act provisions. This can apply in situations where women “traditionally” are employees, like in nursing.

    What is Included in the Equal Pay Act?

    The Equal Pay Act directly addresses issues regarding pay rates and salaries. However, the Equal Pay Act also requires the following to be equal for equal work amongst employees:

    • Employee pensions;
    • Insurance coverage;
    • Profit sharing;
    • Vacation time;
    • Bonuses; and
    • Use of company equipment.

    How Can I File a Claim for Violation of the Equal Pay Act

    To be successful in a claim for violation of the Equal Pay Act, it is necessary to first establish an employer/employee relationship, and prove the following:

    • The pay difference is based on gender;
    • The type of work was performed under comparable working conditions;
    • There was equal work involved, as determined by equal skill, effort, and responsibility; and
    • The employee received less compensation than another opposite sex employee who performed the same work.

    All of the above must be present in order to have a successful claim for a violation of the Equal Pay Act. The best chance you have of furthering your claim is to make sure you have all of the relevant documents/evidence that is ready to support your claim.

    Who Has the Burden of Proof When You File a Claim Under the Equal Pay Act?

    Once an employee makes a claim against an employer, they will then have the burden of proof to show all the above factors apply. If a claim is established, then the burden of proof is shifted to the employer to provide a solid defense against the claim.

    Thus, when filing a claim, it’s important for the employee to have a solid foundation of evidence and proof to begin with. If you are the person filing the claim, you should start gathering important information and documents that might be useful for your claim. These include:

    • Any documents regarding pay or salary, such as pay receipts or wage stubs, hiring contracts, and company employment policies;
    • Any communications from your employer regarding pay, such as emails, written or printed documents, or text messages;
    • Statements from persons who may be involved, such as human resources personnel, co-workers, or supervisors; and/or
    • Any other information that might be useful for your claim, such as bank account information and deposit receipts.

    Is there a Statute of Limitations for Equal Pay Act Claims?

    As with most lawsuits, a statute of limitations (filing deadline) also applies to filing a violation of the Equal Pay Act. Typically, an EPA claim must be filed in state or federal court within two years of when the violation occurred . This date is usually when the discriminatory pay action happened or when the employee discovered the equal pay violation.

    Do I Need a Lawyer for Help with an Equal Pay Act Claim?

    If you have been discriminated against at work regarding your pay based on gender, you should contact an employment lawyer immediately. Proving a violation of the Equal Pay Act can be difficult, but an discrimination lawyers can help build your case and provide legal advice. They can also counsel you on your best course of action, and represent your best interests in a court of law.

    How to defend against privacy violation claims

    Most people share data without thinking about it. They provide information to companies while purchasing merchandise, signing up for email lists, downloading apps and more. They also expect the respective enterprises to safeguard those details.

    Unfortunately, the businesses in question often fall short of the task, exposing valuable data. The resulting violation of privacy laws can lead to huge fines and eroded public trust.

    Here are six recent examples of companies that failed to do everything they could to respect users’ privacy.

    1. Zoom gave data to third parties without users’ knowledge

    An April 2020 piece from The New York Times alleged that popular video conferencing site Zoom engaged in undisclosed data mining during user conversations. The coverage asserted that when a person signed into a meeting, Zoom transmitted their data to a system that matched individuals with their LinkedIn profiles.

    The incident happened via a subscription-based tool called LinkedIn Sales Navigator that Zoom offered customers to assist with their marketing needs.

    Moreover, when someone signed into a Zoom meeting with an anonymous name, the tool still connected that person to their respective LinkedIn profile. Thus, the person had their real name revealed to a fellow user despite efforts to keep it private. Zoom promised to disable the tool and remove it from the company’s offerings.

    2. Google violated children’s privacy laws

    Google is under fire for violation of privacy laws, recent reports say. A California federal court received a lawsuit from two children suing the tech giant through their father. The pair assert that the G Suite for Education platform unlawfully collects biometric data from kids who use it. If so, that action would likely mean Google disregarded the Children’s Online Privacy Protection Act (COPPA), a federal mandate that requires getting parental consent before gathering data from minors under 13. Moreover, the company may face allegations of violations associated with state biometric laws. The issues could affect millions of kids and their privacy.

    3. Hackers dump confidential law firm data

    A law firm’s document management system (DMS) contains all the legal documents about its clients. Some include records spanning 10 to 20 years, making it especially necessary to protect the data. Privacy violations sometimes occur due to inadequate cybersecurity. For example, the Maze hacker group targeted Texas law firm Baker Wotring and published a “full dump” of the organization’s data. The incident was a ransomware attack, and the leak likely happened when the cybercriminals did not receive the requested payment. The compromised records included case diaries, consent forms and more.

    4. Facebook fined for its role in Cambridge Analytica data harvesting

    Federal officials in the United States carried out a 16-month investigation and determined Facebook repeatedly misled its users and compromised efforts to safeguard privacy. That decision came after Cambridge Analytica used a third-party app to harvest data from a Facebook quiz for political purposes.

    The Federal Trade Commission (FTC) fined Facebook $5 billion for the infractions, the largest amount ever imposed on a company for a consumer privacy regulation.

    5. Ring Doorbell app allegedly loaded with trackers

    The Ring doorbell has an accompanying app that lets people see, hear and speak to individuals who arrive on their doorsteps — even without being home. Unfortunately, when the Electronic Frontier Foundation (EFF) investigated the Android version, it discovered numerous third-party trackers. The researchers say that Ring sent data to four outside entities, providing them with personally identifiable information.

    The transmitted details include names, IP addresses and data from users’ device sensors. The EFF warned that recipients could combine all the information to get a unique user picture.

    6. WhatsApp flaw sacrificed the privacy of top government officials

    Privacy violations also happen if malicious parties exploit weaknesses in widely used apps. Such a situation unfolded when NSO Group, an Israeli hacking tool developer, allegedly built and sold a product that allowed the infiltration of WhatsApp’s servers due to an identified weakness. This problem caused at least 1,400 users to have their mobile phones hacked within approximately two weeks in April and May 2019.

    A sizeable segment of the identified victims were reportedly high-profile government officials located in at least 20 countries. Early investigative efforts failed to confirm the perpetrators that used the tool from NSO Group.

    How to protect online privacy

    There’s a good chance that most of the companies mentioned here are familiar. It’s understandable, then, to worry whether it is safe to keep using products from the brands. That’s a highly personal decision. Companies and individuals alike can take decisive steps to protect their privacy by:

    • and unscrupulous behavior
    • Reading all privacy and user agreements before signing up for a service or app
    • Restricting the type and number of permissions that installed apps have on devices
    • Reviewing all current privacy settings for apps and sites at least monthly, and tweaking them as necessary
    • Staying abreast of cybersecurity news to learn about relevant violations of privacy laws, breaches Downloading apps from reputable sources, such as official websites or app stores that vet content and remove harmful software

    Knowing how to protect your privacy increases the chances that valuable details will remain in your control. Otherwise, the likelihood goes up of private data falling into the wrong hands and getting misused.

    How these civil rights claims proceed in Ohio

    By Super Lawyers staff on September 24, 2020
    Updated on February 8, 2021

    Municipalities operate a tight budget. As they face a number of different liability risks, they must be prepared to protect the financial interests of the community at large. If a local employee or local agency—such as a police officer or a police department—is accused of violating an individual’s civil rights, the municipality could face a federal civil lawsuit under Section 1983.

    How to defend against privacy violation claims“It can be an employment case; it can be a law enforcement case; it can be a children’s services case; now we’re defending a lot of local health districts in COVID cases; it can be almost anything that involves the conduct of a public employee,” says Todd M. Raskin, a Cleveland attorney at Mazanec, Raskin & Ryder who has defended such claims for more than 30 years.

    Below, you will find an overview of Section 1983 lawsuits and an explanation of how municipalities can defend these types of civil claims.

    Understanding the Basics

    Passed as a part of the Civil Rights Act of 1871, 42 U.S. Code § 1983—or, as it is more commonly referred to, “Section 1983”—is the main legal tool that individuals have to hold local governments and local government agencies legally liable for a civil rights violation. “It doesn’t create any substantive rights for anybody,” Raskin explains. “It’s a federal statute which provides a vehicle for people who claim that their constitutional rights have been violated.”

    As such, Section 1983 claims cover a wide swath, including:

    • First Amendment claims, such as freedom of speech and freedom of association—”cases where municipalities restrict time and days when people can solicit homeowners,” Raskin says. Plus, there are employment claims such as whistleblower retaliation.
    • Fourth Amendment claims, which are “typically brought against law enforcement because of a wrongful detention, wrongful prosecution, right to counsel, or excessive force,” Raskin adds.
    • Fifth and Fourteenth Amendment due process claims, “depending upon whether or not a person is a pretrial detainee—in other words, accused of a crime, but not convicted—and those can relate to incarceration,” he says. Property owners can also assert a due process claims, arguing a municipality isn’t granting a zoning request to use their property as they wish.
    • Eighth Amendment claims for deliberate indifference to serious medical needs.

    “There are all kinds of these claims, and that’s just a very broad overview,” Raskin explains.

    In order to bring a winning Section 1983 civil rights claim, a plaintiff must prove the following two key elements:

    1. They were deprived of federally guaranteed civil rights, privileges, or immunities; and
    2. The violation occurred under the “color of law” on the part of the municipal defendant.

    Taking Steps to Defend Yourself

    Section 1983 suits are federal claims that, in the case of Ohio, are brought before the Sixth Circuit. “Many times, the first inkling a public entity has about the potential for a lawsuit is through a public records request,” Raskin says. “So we recommend to the public entities that that’s when they should get counsel involved.”

    Another early step Raskin asks of clients is to preserve electronically stored information (ESI).

    “That becomes particularly important when you’re dealing with custody cases or cases involving law enforcement interaction with the public. While many communities have both body cam and dashcam, because of storage issues, especially in smaller communities, that information is recycled periodically,” he says. “In the Sixth Circuit, the statute of limitations on these cases is two years. So, oftentimes, if the municipality isn’t aware of the potential of a claim, electronically stored information will be recycled and lost forever. So it’s very important that any potential claim be identified as early as possible and all of that electronically stored information be retained.”

    Personnel and training records are another important item. Though many of the claims listed above are made against individuals, some claims can also be made against the municipality itself, and those are typically referred to as Monell claims. This is because of an important legal precedent, the 1978 Supreme Court case Monell v. Department of Social Services of the City of New York.

    “The court recognized that there could be claims directly against the municipality for failure to train or failure to supervise if those failures were the moving force behind the constitutional violation,” Raskin says.

    “So, if the municipality or the law enforcement department failed to properly train its officers in when to initiate pursuit, how to supervise a pursuit, and when to stop or cut off a pursuit, there could be potential liability, not only on the part of the officers and their supervisors, but also on the part of the municipality,” he adds. “So we want to see the training files and the discipline files because we need to know whether or not we’re dealing with people who have repeatedly been engaged in conduct, which is the subject of litigation.”

    How these civil rights lawsuits should be defended depends entirely on the unique allegations being raised by the plaintiff. It is important to emphasize that plaintiffs must base any claim for broader municipal liability on its implementation of unlawful policy or custom. Plaintiffs must prove:

    1. A policy/custom was enacted or pursued with the required degree of culpability; and
    2. A causal link between the denial of federal rights and the municipal policy.

    If you have any specific questions or concerns about defending a Section 1983 claim, an experienced Ohio state, local, and municipal attorney can help. For more information on state, local, and municipal law, see our overview.

    ZoomInfo Privacy Violations Class Action Lawsuit Overview

    • Why: The plaintiff accuses ZoomInfo of violating her privacy, and others’, by using their personal information without consent for monetary gain.
    • Who: A California resident lodged a class action lawsuit against ZoomInfo.
    • Where: The class action lawsuit was filed in Washington federal court.

    A California resident filed a class action lawsuit against ZoomInfo, a business sales and marketing platform, accusing the company of violating intellectual property and privacy rights by stealing individuals’ names and personal information and using them as subscription advertisements.

    The lead plaintiff, Kim Carter Martinez, is not a subscriber of ZoomInfo and has never used, but was “seriously distressed” to find ZoomInfo using her name and personal information on its website and subscription advertisements. She seeks to represent a Class that includes all California residents who do not subscribe to and whose names and personal information were used by ZoomInfo in its promotional teaser profiles.

    The class action lawsuit accuses ZoomInfo of misappropriating Martinez’s and Class Members’ names, contact information, work histories, job titles, and other personal information, all without permission or consent from these individuals.

    Martinez alleges that she and other Class Members have the right not to be exploited to “promote a product with which they have no relationship and no interest in supporting.”

    ZoomInfo ‘Unable to Verify’ Legality of Information Source

    Martinez does not know how ZoomInfo got her information. ZoomInfo stated in its annual report that it “receive(s) data from third-party vendors,” but is “unable to verify” where that data came from, how it was received, and whether it was collected and shared in compliance with data privacy laws, according to court documents.

    ZoomInfo also allegedly exploits its Community Edition subscribers who must install ZoomInfo software onto their computers. The software automatically collects the names and contact information of every person the subscriber emails, receives an email from, or has emailed in the past, even without those individuals’ consent.

    ZoomInfo Uses Private, Sensitive Information for Monetary Gain

    ZoomInfo displays Martinez’s and Class Members’ names and information on teaser profiles on its website, sometimes including photographs of the individual, according to the complaint.

    Not billed as “sample” profiles, these pages promise “full access” to individuals’ information, including their colleagues’ contact information and a chart showing their positions within the company, once someone has subscribed to ZoomInfo at a cost of $10,000 or more per year, says the class action.

    ZoomInfo has acknowledged that it “relies heavily” on its public teaser profiles to “generate a significant portion” of the website’s traffic, according to court documents.

    The class action lawsuit seeks statutory damages, disgorgement of profits, royalties for the use of their personas, restitution of the value of their personas, prohibition of ZoomInfo’s unlawful conduct, attorneys’ costs, and declaratory relief.

    Similar class actions lawsuits have been filed against yearbook company and online director RocketReach by consumers who say the companies made private information and images of them public on the internet without permission.

    Have you ever used ZoomInfo or seen your information displayed on its website without your knowledge? Tell us about it in the comments section below!

    The plaintiff is represented by Samuel J. Strauss of Turke & Strauss LLP.

    The ZoomInfo Privacy Violations Class Action Lawsuit is Martinez v. ZoomInfo Technologies Inc. , Case No. 3:21-cv-05725, in the U.S. District Court for the Western District of Washington.

    Don’t Miss Out!

    Check out our list of Class Action Lawsuits and Class Action Settlements you may qualify to join!

    Read About More Class Action Lawsuits & Class Action Settlements:

Welcome to wikihow the most trusted how-to site on the internet

Next it was time for the weaving – and this proved to be trickier than expected. To grow it, they initially settled on a plot of land on a small island in the middle of the Meghna, in Kapasia, 30 km north of Dhaka. “It was a very best spot. The land is fertile as a result of it was fashioned via the buildup of river sediment,” says Islam.

These are debug(), info(), warning(), error() andcritical(). To determine when to make use of logging, see the desk beneath, which states, for each of a set of widespread duties, the best tool to make use of for it. Logging is a way of tracking events that occur when some software runs.

Test Your Vocabulary With Our Fun Picture Quizzes

We work with credentialed experts, a group of educated researchers, and a loyal community to create essentially the most dependable, complete and delightful how-to content on the Internet. The logging package is designed to swallow exceptions which happen while logging in manufacturing. This is so that errors which happen while handling logging occasions – such as logging misconfiguration, community or other similar errors – don’t cause the applying using logging to terminate prematurely.

Fast-forward to 2021 and the group have made several saris from their hybrid muslin, which have already been exhibited all over the world. Some have been sold for hundreds of kilos – and Islam feels the reception they received proves the fabric has a future. “In this point in time of mass production, it is all the time attention-grabbing to have something particular. And the model is still powerful,” he says. The team harvested their first batch of cotton the identical yr. Though they didn’t but have sufficient of the resurrected vegetation to make one hundred% authentic Dhaka muslin, they collaborated with Indian spinners to mix ordinary and phuti karpas cotton into a hybrid thread.

Step 5:

These objectives are generally very particular, such as configuring a selected modem, and typically very broad, corresponding to how to administer a network for an ISP. Welcome to wikiHow, essentially the most trusted how-to site on the web.

  • You should journey directly to your house of quarantine when you arrive in England and instantly out of your place of quarantine to the port or airport whenever you depart.
  • If the file modifications, it’s closed and reopened using the file name.
  • Before we proceed, nonetheless, a couple of caveats are in order.
  • When you arrive in England, you must travel directly to the place you’re staying and not go away till 10 days have handed.

This article was co-authored by Ran D. Anbar, MD, FAAP. Dr. Ran D. Anbar is a pediatric medical counselor and is board certified in both pediatric pulmonology and general pediatrics, offering clinical hypnosis and counseling services at Center Point Medicine in La Jolla, California and Syracuse, New York. With over 30 years of medical training and practice, Dr. Anbar has also served as a professor of pediatrics and medicine and the Director of pediatric pulmonology at SUNY Upstate Medical University. Dr. Anbar holds a BS in Biology and Psychology from the University of California, San Diego and an MD from the University of Chicago Pritzker School of Medicine. Dr. Anbar completed his pediatric residency and pediatric pulmonary fellowship training at the Massachusetts General Hospital and Harvard Medical School and is also a past President, fellow and approved consultant of the American Society of Clinical Hypnosis.

There are 9 references cited in this article, which can be found at the bottom of the page.

This article has been viewed 16,329 times.

Finding out your child is blind or visually impaired is certainly a challenge. There is no right or wrong way to cope with the news and it can be extremely stressful for you and your family. You might feel a mix of emotions such as sorrow, anger, guilt, confusion, anxiety, or even fear. It’s important to understand that these emotions are normal and other parents around the world face the same problem, accepting and coping with their child’s diagnosis. There are ways you can balance out your life, and at the same time, deal with your concerns for your blind or visually impaired child.

Last updated: 2022-05-26 07:18:41

WikiHow (fr) uses the following 191 extensions:

  • Abuse Filter (Unknown)
  • Ad Exclusions Tool (Unknown)
  • AddRelatedLinks (Unknown)
  • Admin Expert Doc Creator (Unknown)
  • Admin Instant Articles (Unknown)
  • Admin Social Proof (Unknown)
  • Admin Verify Review (Unknown)
  • AdminAnomalies (Unknown)
  • AdminClearRatings (Unknown)
  • AdminCoauthorIntl (Unknown)
  • AdminCommunityDashboard (Unknown)
  • AdminCopyCheck (Unknown)
  • AdminCustomMeta (Unknown)
  • AdminEditInfo (Unknown)
  • AdminEnlargeImages (Unknown)
  • AdminLookupNab (Unknown)
  • AdminMarkEmailConfirmed (Unknown)
  • AdminMassEdit (Unknown)
  • AdminNabAtlasList (Unknown)
  • AdminRatingReasons (Unknown)
  • AdminReadabilityScore (Unknown)
  • AdminRedirects (Unknown)
  • AdminRemoveAvatar (Unknown)
  • AdminResetPassword (Unknown)
  • AdminSamples (Unknown)
  • AdminSearchResults (Unknown)
  • AdminUserCompletedImages (Unknown)
  • Alien (Unknown)
  • AntiSpoof (Unknown)
  • App Articles API (1)
  • Article Authors (Unknown)
  • Article Reviewers (Unknown)
  • Article Text API (1)
  • Article Widgets (Unknown)
  • ArticleDisplayWidget (Unknown)
  • ArticleHelpfulness (Unknown)
  • ArticleStats (Unknown)
  • AssistedTranslation (Unknown)
  • AuthorEmailNotification (Unknown)
  • AutotimestampTemplate (Unknown)
  • Avatar (Unknown)
  • Bloggers (Unknown)
  • Bot Block IP Whitelist (Unknown)
  • BunchPatrol (Unknown)
  • CCPA (Unknown)
  • Category Listing API (1)
  • CategoryHelper (Unknown)
  • CategoryListing (Unknown)
  • ChangeRealName (Unknown)
  • CheckUser (2.4)
  • CirrusSearch (0.2)
  • Cite (1.0.0)
  • CommunityDashboard (Unknown)
  • ConfirmEdit (1.6.0)
  • CopyArticleImages (Unknown)
  • CreatePage (Unknown)
  • Drafts (0.2)
  • EUCookiePolicyTemplate (Unknown)
  • Echo (Unknown)
  • EditDialog (Unknown)
  • EditFinder (Unknown)
  • EditMapper (Unknown)
  • Elastica (
  • EmbedVideo (0.1.2)
  • End of Queue (Unknown)
  • FBLogin (Unknown)
  • Facebook Account Linker (Unknown)
  • Facebook App Contact Creator (Unknown)
  • FindTranslatedArticles (Unknown)
  • Finner (Unknown)
  • FollowWidget (Unknown)
  • FormatEmail (Unknown)
  • GDPR (Unknown)
  • GPlusLogin (Unknown)
  • GenerateFeed (Unknown)
  • GoogSearch (Unknown)
  • Google Presentation Tag (Unknown)
  • Graphs query API (Unknown)
  • Hello (Unknown)
  • HelpCategory (Unknown)
  • Image Upload (Unknown)
  • ImageCaption (Unknown)
  • ImageHelper (Unknown)
  • ImageMap (Unknown)
  • ImportVideo (Unknown)
  • LSearch (Unknown)
  • Lag checking API (Unknown)
  • Leaderboard (Unknown)
  • ListDemotedArticles (1.0)
  • LoginDialog (Unknown)
  • LoginReminder (Unknown)
  • MWMessages.php (Unknown)
  • MagicArticlesStartedMagicWords (Unknown)
  • ManageRelated (Unknown)
  • MassMessage (0.0.1)
  • Math (3.0.0)
  • MethodHelpfulness (1)
  • MinervaNeue (Unknown)
  • MobileFrontend (2.1.0)
  • MultipleUpload (Unknown)
  • MyPages (Unknown)
  • NFDGuardian (Unknown)
  • New Article Boost (Unknown)
  • New fred page (Unknown)
  • NewContributors (Unknown)
  • Nuke (1.3.0)
  • PageHelpfulness (Unknown)
  • ParserFunctions (1.6.0)
  • PatrolCount (Unknown)
  • PatrolThrottle (1.1.2)
  • PopBox (Unknown)
  • PostComment (Unknown)
  • ProfileBadges (Unknown)
  • ProfileBox (Unknown)
  • Q&A (Unknown)
  • Q&A Admin Page (Unknown)
  • QG (Unknown)
  • Questions Page (Unknown)
  • QuickEdit (Unknown)
  • QuickNoteEdit (Unknown)
  • RCBuddy (Unknown)
  • RCPatrol (Unknown)
  • RCWidget (Unknown)
  • Randomizer (Unknown)
  • RateItem (Unknown)
  • ReCAPTCHA front-end (Unknown)
  • ReCaptchaNoCaptcha (Unknown)
  • Related Articles (Unknown)
  • Renameuser (Unknown)
  • RevertTool (Unknown)
  • S3Images (Unknown)
  • SMS Listing API (Unknown)
  • Schema Markup API (Unknown)
  • Scribunto (Unknown)
  • SearchBox (Unknown)
  • Sitemap (Unknown)
  • Slider (Unknown)
  • SocialAuth (Unknown)
  • SocialLogin (Unknown)
  • SpamBlacklist (Unknown)
  • SpamDiffTool (Unknown)
  • Special Article Feedback (Unknown)
  • Special Tech Feedback (Unknown)
  • Special Tech Testing (Unknown)
  • Special Tech Verify Admin (Unknown)
  • StaffWidget (Unknown)
  • Standings (Unknown)
  • StatsList (Unknown)
  • Stu (Unknown)
  • Stu API (Unknown)
  • Stu Logger (Unknown)
  • SubscriptionManager (1.1.4)
  • Suggested Topics (Unknown)
  • Summary Section (Unknown)
  • Summary Videos API (Unknown)
  • SyntaxHighlight (2.0)
  • TalkPageFormatter (Unknown)
  • Terms of use (Unknown)
  • ThankAuthors (Unknown)
  • Title Feed API (Unknown)
  • Title Search API (Unknown)
  • TitleSearch (Unknown)
  • Titles by Category (Unknown)
  • ToolbarHelper (Unknown)
  • Top Answerers (Unknown)
  • TranslationLinkOverride (Unknown)
  • Trusted Sources (Unknown)
  • Unguard (Unknown)
  • Unpatrol (Unknown)
  • UserLoginBox (Unknown)
  • UserReviewForm (Unknown)
  • UserTiming (Unknown)
  • UserTrustStats (Unknown)
  • VideoCatalog (Unknown)
  • VideoEmbedHelperTool (Unknown)
  • WHVid (Unknown)
  • Welcome (Unknown)
  • WelcomeWagon (Unknown)
  • WikiHow desktop (Unknown)
  • WikihowShare (Unknown)

Default skin: Wh

WikiHow (fr) uses the following 4 skin(s):

By Avram Piltch published 22 December 20

Welcome to wikihow the most trusted how-to site on the internet

Windows 10 is the most powerful operating system that Microsoft has ever made, but it’s also the most complex. While the user interface is extremely intuitive, you’ll have to dig a little deeper to customize your experience, get maximum performance and make the most of features such as the Cortana voice assistant, Edge browser and multiple desktops.

If you’re still using Windows 7 and dread its impending death, then we’ve put together this helpful guide to ease your transition into Windows 10.

Below, you’ll find over 100 Windows 10 tips and tutorials, split into nine categories and designed to help you learn the basics, disable common annoyances, save storage or be more productive.

  • How to Upgrade to Windows 10 for Free
  • Windows 10 can run Android apps on your PC — here’s how
  • Windows 10 Out of the Box Set Up
  • How to update Windows 10
  • Customize Windows 10
  • Fix Annoyances and Problems
  • Cortana Tips
  • Edge Browser Tips
  • Performance and Productivity
  • Security and Networking
  • Storage and Backup
  • File Explorer Tips
  • Paint 3D Tips
  • 7 Computer Pranks That Will Drive Your Friends Crazy

Windows 10 Basics

Learn how to install Windows 10, tweak the most important settings, add users and perform key, everyday tasks.

  • 7 Settings to Change Right Away
  • Find Your GPU Model on Windows 10
  • Windows 10 Keyboard Shortcuts to Save You Clicks
  • 5 Ways to Take Screenshots
  • How to Get to the Desktop in Windows 10
  • Change Your Password in Windows 10
  • Uninstall Programs in Windows 10
  • Enable or Disable Tablet Mode
  • Add a User (Child or Adult)
  • How to Set Screen Time for Kids
  • Change the Screen Resolution
  • Sync Your Settings Across Devices
  • Sync Your iPhone with Windows 10
  • Control Windows 10 with Your Voice
  • Eliminate Blue Light with Night Light
  • Upgrade to Windows 10 From Windows 7 or 8
  • Add a Printer
  • Set an Alarm

Customize Windows 10

Tweak the Windows UI so it looks and feels just the way you like it. Change the theme, adjust the icon size, or turn the new OS into a dead ringer for Windows 7.

Fix Annoyances and Problems

We love Windows 10, but like a close relative, sometimes it can overstep boundaries and get on your nerves. Learn how to prevent the operating system from restarting to update without your permission, speed up a slow-opening Downloads folder or disable personalized ads. Also, find out how to fix serious problems by booting into your BIOS, running older programs in compatibility mode or even rotating your screen.

Cortana Tips

Windows 10’s built-in digital assistant can help you gather important information, manage your schedule, send messages and more. Find out how to wake Cortana with a voice command, use her to send email, have her ring your phone, change her accent and more.

Edge Browser Tips

The default Microsoft browser is blazing fast and dead simple. Here’s how to perform a variety of tasks in Edge, from common actions like blocking pop-ups, managing favorites and clearing cookies to tweaking key settings like the default search engine or crash-recovery options.

Performance and Productivity

Make both Windows 10 and yourself faster and more powerful. Configure the operating system to boot faster, mirror your screen to an external monitor, record your Xbox games, or activate the platform’s built-in “God Mode.”

Security and Networking

Connect your PC to a network or use it as a hotspot while keeping your system secure. Learn how to create limited-privilege guest accounts, password-protected folders and more.

Storage and Backup

Find extra space on your hard drive or SSD by making Windows as small as possible, installing apps on an SD card and deleting the unnecessary Windows.old folder. Make the most of Microsoft’s OneDrive cloud backup service by controlling which folders you sync, mapping your account as a network drive and more.

Windows File Explorer Tips

Every time you browse through your hard drive, copy files over from a USB Flash drive or organize your photos folder, you’re using File Explorer. Make this most of this important utility by taking advantage of all its features and customizing the UI.

Paint 3D Tips

Learn how to make the most of Microsoft’s built-in drawing program.

I won a Samsung Galaxy S6 Edge, signed into it with my Google account, played around with it, wiped it, and sold it.

Now the person can’t get past setup because it’s saying he must login with an account previously synced to the phone.

Is there anything I can do from my side to remove this lock?

Welcome to wikihow the most trusted how-to site on the internet

Welcome to wikihow the most trusted how-to site on the internet

5 Answers 5

There are full guides for several devices from RootJunky on YouTube. This first method works on some Samsung and LG devices. Your user can probably start at step 4.

Reboot into Recovery mode (hold Home, Volume Up, and Power, releasing Power when you see the device turn on/reboot).

Perform a Factory Reset (press Volume Down until wipe data/factory reset is selected, press Power, scroll down to Yes — delete all user data and press Power again).

Proceed through the device Setup Wizard until it prompts you for the Google account credentials.

For a Samsung device, save this RootJunky APK onto a USB flash drive, and connect it to the device via OTG.

Back up, connect to Wi-Fi, then back up again and hit Accessibility (Yes to the prompt that follows).

Turn “Switch Access” on, then enter its Settings and set a key for Overview, such as Volume Down.

Back out to Accessibility again, go to Vision → Talkback → Settings → Privacy Policy to open the browser, and download the APK linked above ( → Apps).

Press the key you set up for Overview, hit Dual Window, and select the file browser.

When the File Explorer launches, browse to and tap the APK to install it. When you get the prompt about unknown sources, choose the Settings option and enable the Unknown Sources option.

Complete the install and choose to Open the application, which will open Settings.

  • Add a new user account under Users, switch to it and add your own Google account via Setup, then switch back to the main user (Owner) from Settings → Users, and back out from there to the main Settings.

Go to Backup and Reset and do a Factory Data Reset. As per my other answer, this will remove FRP from the device.

The APK in (4) is very simple and just opens Settings, you could use any other that does the same if you don’t want to trust that source.

Nexus 5, 5X, 6, and 6P running 6.0.1; Goclever Quantum 2 400S running 5.1:

Insert an activated SIM card and call it from another phone. Answer the call, hit the Add Line (call conferencing) button, and enter *#*#4646#*#* or *#*#4636#*#* (worked on Nexus 5X). Tap “Usage Statistics”, then hit the back button, and you’re in Settings and can do a factory reset.

If Factory Reset is disabled thanks to a security patch, you can instead create a new user account (going through and setting it up), then follow the very next guide below for the Turbo, starting at the second paragraph.

You can also do this without a sim through this exploit.

Go through the Setup Wizard until you encounter the “About your privacy” page (you might need to connect to Wi-Fi). Hit the “Privacy settings” link, then “View Motorola Privacy Policy”. On that page, select any text and hit the Search button, which will open the browser. Type Settings into the address bar, and tap the suggested Settings app.

Enable developer options (by tapping the version code in About Phone seven times), then go into Developer Options and turn on USB debugging. Connect your device to a PC with ADB installed (from here) and run this in a shell window:

Now you can go into Settings and do a Factory Reset.

Navigate through the Setup Wizard to the Wi-Fi connection screen, and select a password-protected network. Select “Show password”, then type in a password and select the password text. Hit “Share” in the menu that pops up and select Gmail. Add a POP or Exchange account (not a Gmail account), and (from the message pre-populated with the text you “shared”) select Settings from the 3-dot menu and then choose “Manage accounts” from that same menu.

You should now be in the Settings app. Follow the above Turbo guide starting at the second paragraph, and you’re done!

For devices where none of the above or similar methods work, or after these exploits are fixed, see my other answer.

How to switch from ios to android

Switch over, don’t start over.

Switching from iPhone

Connect, select, go.

Connect your iPhone to your new Android phone via cable and choose what you want to move over—contacts, messages, photos and even your favorite apps. 1

Connect both devices.

A cord animates to plug into a front-facing Android phone. The phone displays the message “Insert cable into your old phone” and an image of two phones connected via cable.

Select your data.

Circles representing photos, apps, contacts and messages hover around the top of a front-facing Android phone and animate to show completion of transfer. The phone displays the message “Choose what to copy” with a choice of items to transfer and amount of data that transfer will require.


Circles representing photos, apps, contacts and messages move around as files are transferred onto the new Android phone. A front-facing Android phone shows the process of copying files. A large circle behind the Android phone shows the progress of data copying. The circles representing photos, apps, contacts and messages travel into the Android phone and “Copying’s done” is now displayed on the screen along with a list of all the data transferred.

Copying’s done!

All your contacts, messages, photos and favorite apps ready to go on your new Android phone, with more to explore in the Google Play Store.

Connect your iPhone to your new Android phone via cable and choose what you want to move over—contacts, messages, photos and even your favorite apps. 1

Ready for you.

Everything you need, right where it should be: messages, contacts, photos, videos, apps and more. With Android, you get more out of every moment.

Get to know your new Android.

Better together.

Easily set up and move from one device to the next.

Devices for everyone.

Built for everything and everyone.


Protection at every turn by Android.


Our latest OS is built around you.

Get more answers.

I don’t have a cable to connect my old and new phone. Can I still transfer my data to a new Android?

Yes! Indicate that you do not have a cable or adapter during the transfer process. You will be directed to transfer your data over to your new Android using Wi-Fi connection. You will need reliable Wi-Fi for a smooth transfer process.

Does Android have all the apps that I use on my iPhone? Will I have to repurchase my apps? What about my subscriptions?

Almost all the apps you use and love are also available on Android, along with thousands more that are exclusively available in the Play Store. So you’ll be able to continue using all the amazing apps you use today, and discover new ones you never knew about!

Most apps that are available for free will move over when you use a cable to transfer your data. For apps that you purchased on your iPhone, we recommend contacting the app developer to see what they offer for customers moving to a new device.

Your existing subscriptions will continue to work, but your billing will still be managed the way they are today – either via the app developer or iTunes.

I have everything backed up to iCloud. Can I use iCloud with Android?

iCloud is integrated into your iPhone. You can access your iCloud content at, using your old Apple ID and password.

On Android, you can use Google One to backup your data to the cloud and move iCloud content to Google One. Visit to request a copy of your data from Apple if you want to move them over.

Will my messages in iMessage continue to work? What about other messaging apps, like WhatsApp?

Yes! To make sure your text messages get sent to your new Android, turn iMessage off before you remove the SIM card from your iPhone. Simply hop into your iPhone Settings > Messages > Off.

Now, you can also bring your WhatsApp history with you. When prompted during the transfer process, scan a QR code on your iPhone to launch WhatsApp. This will move all your cherished memories, photos, voice messages and more over to your new Android. We are working with more app developers to enable similar experiences for you.

What happens to the data on my old phone when I make a transfer?

When you transfer your apps, photos, videos and more to your new Android, a copy of that data is made. This means that everything remains safe on your old phone. Our transfer process is secure and reliable, but if anything ever goes wrong, all your content will remain on your old device, so there’s absolutely no risk of losing your data during the transfer process – you can have peace of mind that all your data will be safe, no matter what happens.

Is it safe to move my data from iPhone to Android?

We built our technologies to be robust, reliable and secure, so you can have confidence that your data will move to Android without any problems. During the transfer, your data remains protected, so no one can access your information and files.

And once your data is on Android, it will continue to stay safe. Keeping you safe is the heart of what we do, which is why we bake security into every detail of Android. Even the parts you can’t see. Device encryption keeps your data safe when your phone is locked so it looks scrambled to anyone trying to steal your info. Google Play Protect helps you download apps without worrying if they’ll hurt your phone or steal data. And with Android, you choose when to share sensitive data with apps you download.

Перенесите свои данные из iOS ®

Android готов помогать вам всегда и во всем. Это круглосуточная защита и новые средства управления конфиденциальными данными. И конечно, приложения от Google, которые отлично работают вместе. Перейти с iPhone ® на Android очень просто – нужно сделать всего четыре шага.

Шаг 1 Скачайте Google Диск

Убедитесь, что на вашем iPhone установлена последняя версия Google Диска, и войдите в это приложение, используя аккаунт Google.

Если у вас нет аккаунта Google, вы можете создать его после скачивания Google Диска.

Шаг 2 Сохраните резервную копию данных

Создайте резервную копию своих данных на Google Диске 1 . Для этого откройте настройки Google Диска и перейдите в раздел резервного копирования. Вы можете сохранить копию всех данных или только отдельных типов контента – выбор за вами.

Шаг 3 Отключите iMessage ®

Отключите iMessage и FaceTime ® в настройках iPhone. Так вы не пропустите ни одного сообщения и звонка после перехода на Android.

Шаг 4 Войдите в аккаунт Google на новом телефоне

На устройстве Android войдите в аккаунт Google, который использовался во время резервного копирования. Вот и всё! Ваши данные автоматически появятся в Google Контактах, Календаре и Фото.

Знакомьтесь, это Android

Добро пожаловать в мир Android. Все ваши данные – мероприятия из календаря, контакты, фотографии и видео – аккуратно разложены по своим местам. А чтобы пользоваться телефоном было ещё проще и удобнее, мы создали для вас множество потрясающих функций.

Google Ассистент всегда придет на помощь

Google Ассистент поможет успевать больше. Управляйте телефоном, работайте в приложениях и открывайте сайты с помощью голосовых команд. Теперь это просто, где бы вы ни находились.

Цифровое благополучие: жизнь в равновесии

Инструменты Цифрового благополучия помогут найти баланс между цифровой и реальной жизнью. Включите режим “Отдых”, чтобы комфортнее засыпать вечером, или ограничьте время работы в приложениях с помощью специальных таймеров.

Комфортное окружение для каждого пользователя

С Android использовать телефон становится все удобнее. От субтитров для элементов интерфейса до функций, помогающих четче слышать звуки вокруг, – мы помогаем вам сделать жизнь проще.

Умный аккумулятор

Функция “Адаптивное энергопотребление” эффективно распределяет расход энергии между вашими приложениями и сервисами, чтобы вы могли пользоваться телефоном дольше.

Остались вопросы о переходе на Android?

Ответы на них вы найдете в нашем Справочном центре.

Больше информации об Android

Узнайте, как использовать телефон с ОС Android и сервисы Google. Наши пошаговые инструкции и другие полезные ресурсы помогут вам раскрыть все возможности своего устройства.

Для разработчиков

  • Ресурсы для разработчиков
  • Android Studio и SDK
  • Android Open Source Project
  • Для организаций

    • Обзор
    • Менеджерам
    • Безопасность
    • Развертывание
    • Сотрудникам
    • Рекомендуем
    • Корпоративные устройства
    • Ресурсы
    • Для партнеров
    • Каталог решений
  • Для прессы

    • Блог Android
    • Блог Android Enterprise
    • Материалы для прессы
    • Android – платформа для всех
    • Связаться с командой пресс-центра
    • Как работает Google Play
  • Экосистема

    • Android Auto
    • Android TV
    • Wear OS by Google
  • Помощь

    • Переход с iOS
    • Справочный центр Android
    • Android File Transfer
    • Найти устройство
    • Участвовать в исследованиях
  • Некоторые функции и устройства доступны не во всех странах. Наличие не гарантируется.

    Поддержка некоторых функций и технологий зависит от производителя оригинального оборудования и/или устройства.

    1 Инструкции для рабочих и учебных аккаунтов отличаются.

    There are a few ways to transfer contacts, photos, and more to your new phone

    How to switch from ios to android

    • Tweet
    • Share
    • Email
    • Tweet
    • Share
    • Email

    In This Article

    Jump to a Section

    What to Know

    • Download Switch to Android app to transfer contacts, calendar, images, and videos.
    • Turn off iMessage so messages don’t continue going there: Settings >Messages > turn off Messages.
    • Consider personalizing your interface with an Android launcher. Regularly back up your data.

    This article explains how to switch from iPhone to Android, including transferring data and setting up apps. The directions below should apply no matter who made your Android phone: Samsung, Google, Huawei, Xiaomi, etc.

    Use the Switch to Android App

    Google and Apple have simplified the process of switching from iPhone to Android with the Switch to Android app. Download the Switch to Android app for iPhone and follow the instructions to automatically transfer your contacts, calendar, photos, and videos.

    Alternatively, if you don’t want everything to carry over from your old iPhone to your new Android, you can transfer your data manually by following the steps below.

    Set Up Gmail and Sync Contacts and Calendar

    Android smartphones require you to have a Gmail address. Aside from email, your Gmail address serves as a login for all Google services, including the Google Play Store. If you already have a Google account and have your Gmail contacts synced with your iPhone, you can log in, and your contacts will transfer to your new device. You can also transfer your contacts from iCloud by exporting them as a vCard, then importing them into Gmail, or sync your contacts from iTunes.

    Not sure where you saved your contacts? Go to Settings and tap your name up top, then tap iCloud and toggle Contacts to the on position.

    How to switch from ios to android

    Google Drive for iOS has a feature that lets you back up your contacts, calendar, and camera roll. It may take a few hours the first time you do it, but it’ll save a lot of time switching to Android.

    If you have email on other platforms, such as Yahoo or Outlook, you can set up those accounts using the Android Email app or the Gmail app.

    Next, you want to sync your calendar with Gmail, if you haven’t already, so you don’t lose any appointments. You can do this easily in your iPhone settings. Google Calendar is also compatible with iOS devices, so you can still coordinate with other iOS users and access your calendar on an iPad.

    Back Up Photos to Ease the iPhone to Android Transfer

    The easiest way to move your photos from your iPhone to Android is to use the Google Photos app for iOS.

    How to switch from ios to android

    Sign in with your Gmail, tap the back up & sync option from the menu, download Google Photos on your Android, and sign in.

    Transfer Your Music From iPhone to Android

    If you’re an Apple Music user, you don’t have to quit—it’s available on Android (Apple’s first Android app). Sign in with your Apple ID, and you’re good to go.

    How to switch from ios to android

    If you don’t use Apple Music, you can import your music into another service such as Spotify or Amazon Music. In any case, it’s always a good idea to regularly back up your music and other digital data.

    Bye Bye iMessage, Hello Google Messages

    If you’ve been using iMessage to communicate with friends and family, you’ll have to find a replacement, as it’s not available on Android.

    If you can’t cope with the green bubble effect when texting with iMessage users, there is a complicated workaround to get the app on your Android.

    Before you get rid of your iPhone or iPad, turn iMessage off so your messages don’t continue getting redirected there if another iOS user texts you using your email address.

    Go to Settings > Messages, and toggle iMessage off. If you’ve already ditched your iPhone, you can contact Apple and ask them to deregister your phone number with iMessage.

    How to switch from ios to android

    Google Messages is a suitable replacement for iMessage since it’s available on your smartphone and computer.

    What to Do After Switching to Android

    Android and iOS are very different, and there is a learning curve when switching between the two operating systems. You have to trade Siri for Google Assistant, but the virtual assistants work similarly. You may already use Google Assistant with a Google Home or other smart speaker.

    Take some time to set up your new Android, play around with the phone’s settings, and back up your data regularly.

    Play around with widgets for weather, fitness, news, and other apps, and consider personalizing your interface with an Android launcher.

    No. The iPhone doesn’t allow users to store data on a SIM card.

    To switch from Android to iPhone, use the Move to iOS app to move your contacts, calendar, photos, etc. For cross-platform apps, install the app on iPhone and log in to the same account used on Android.

    Well, if we look around, we will find that Android and iOS are now the most widely used mobile operating system. Compared to any other mobile operating system, Android offers users much more features and customization options. Not only the customizations, but the availability of the app is also high on Android as compared to any other mobile OS.

    If we talk about Android’s biggest rival, without hesitation, it would be iOS. iOS, seen on Apple devices like iPhones, is now the second most popular mobile operating system after Android. However, despite its popularity, it still can’t beat Android.

    This is the reason why iOS users often switch to Android. The good thing is that Google has already made it easier to switch from iOS to Android with a new tool. Google’s new tool allows iPhone and iPad users to back up their data to Google Drive before switching to Android.

    How to switch from iOS to Android using Google Drive

    So, in this article, we are going to share a useful method that will help you to switch data from iOS to Android. The method given below will help you to change data like contacts, calendar information, photos, etc. So, let’s see how to switch from iOS to Android using Google Drive 2019.

    Step 1. First of all, open Google Drive on your iOS device, and then sign in with Gmail account. Make sure you sign in with the same Google account that you will use on your Android. Then tap on the three-dot menu and select ‘Settings > Backup’

    Switch from iOS to Android using Google Drive

    Step 2. Now Google Drive will ask you to select the type of data you want to backup. There select contacts, calendar events, photos and videos.

    Step 3. Once done, click on the ‘Start Backup’ option. You can also select individual things to back up. For example you can only create a backup of contacts and calendar events etc.

    How to switch from ios to androidSwitch from iOS to Android using Google Drive

    Step 4. Now wait a few minutes for the backup to complete.

    Step 5. Now head over to Settings > Accounts on your Android smartphone and then add the Google account where you stored the backup.

    How to switch from ios to androidSwitch from iOS to Android using Google Drive

    That’s it, you’re done! Now your iOS data backed up to Google should automatically sync with contacts, calendars, Google Photos, etc. of your Android.

    Top 10 Android Apps for College Students

    So finally, after reading this article, you might have known the method through which you can switch from your iOS device to Android device. I hope this article has also helped you to share it with your friends.

    Are you done with Android? Here’s how to make the switch from Android to iPhone as smooth as possible.

    How to switch from ios to android

    Early Android phones were sluggish, inelegant, and error-prone. (Trust me—I owned a few of them.) But today, that’s no longer the case—from high-end phones like the Galaxy S20 to budget standouts like the Moto G Power, Android has come a long way. It isn’t perfect, though: between software fragmentation (Opens in a new window) , lackluster tech support, and the occasional security concern brought on by its more open nature, Android has its downsides just like everything else.

    In comparison, the iPhone has long been a shining example of beautiful software and hardware design, controlled by Apple to ensure that its devices provide as similar an experience as possible across the board. After more than a decade, the iPhone still beckons—and you have more choices than ever, from the top-tier iPhone 12 Pro Max to the 12 mini and even the budget-friendly iPhone SE. Thinking of making the move? This guide will help ensure that your transition from Android to iOS is as smooth as possible.

    Get Ready for Your New iPhone

    Before you migrate all your data, you have a choice to make: are you going to go all-in on Apple’s ecosystem, using bundled apps like Safari, Mail, and iCloud Photos for the full Apple experience? Or are you sticking to Google apps like Gmail and Google Calendar, with the iPhone as the backbone of it all? Knowing which approach you plan on taking will help you migrate your data in the most efficient way possible.

    Move to iOS App

    Apple took some of the work out of moving from Android to iOS by launching an Android app called Move to iOS (Opens in a new window) . It promises to set up a direct wireless connection from your old Android (4.0 or later) to your new iPhone, and will transfer over contacts, message history, camera photos and videos, your email, and your calendar events (though you’ll need to go to Settings > Mail and re-enter your Google password for those last two to work). You will, however, have to re-download (and in some cases, re-buy) any third-party apps you used to use.

    Note that the Move to iOS app only works when setting up an iPhone for the first time—it’s not for transfers to an already operating iPhone. If you don’t want to reset your phone and start over, a third-party program called AnyTrans (Opens in a new window) from iMobie can help. This desktop software for Windows or macOS handles a lot of functions outside of phones, like downloading YouTube videos, but it can also help with migration from Android to iOS, once both phones are plugged into the PC. iMobie claims the iOS Mover feature can migrate call logs, music, videos, ringtones, files/documents, and ebooks. Plus it gives you more control over the photos, contacts, calendars, and messages you do send to your new iPhone.

    Use Google’s Services

    If you’ve committed some or all of your digital life to Google services like Gmail, Drive, and Calendar, you don’t have to use Apple’s built-in apps for everything. All the major Google services have their own apps for the iPhone with similar, if not identical, functionality.

    For example, it’s a breeze to use Gmail with the dedicated Gmail app on iPhone (Opens in a new window) —just download it and log in. You can use Google Calendar (Opens in a new window) to keep your schedule, Google Photos (Opens in a new window) for all your pictures, and so on. You could also use third-party apps for these purposes (like Microsoft Outlook for your e-mail, which is actually very good), but if you liked the way Google’s own apps worked on Android, you’ll probably like them on iOS too.

    Note that there’s no Google Contacts app for iOS, however. If you have your contacts stored in Gmail, they’ll appear in the Gmail app on your iPhone, but they won’t appear in iOS’ Phone app unless you sync your Gmail account with iOS itself. That’s why the Move to iOS app is worth using, even if you don’t plan on using Apple’s Mail or Calendar apps. If you want to add that Google account later, you can do so from Settings > Mail > Accounts.

    Centralize Your Media

    Depending on how you store your music and movies, migrating to the iPhone could be quite easy. If, for example, you use streaming services like Spotify, Amazon Music Unlimited, or YouTube Music, you can just log into those apps on your iPhone and be on your merry way.

    If you’re old-school and still have a lot of MP3s saved on your phone’s storage, though, you’ll have to move those over. Open iTunes on your computer (Music app on macOS) and drag all your music files into it. Then sync those songs back to your iPhone by connecting it via USB cable to the PC while iTunes is running.

    Your photos and videos should be on your iPhone already thanks to the Move to iOS app, but you should make sure they’re all there. Once you’ve confirmed all your photos and videos are present, make sure you’re backing them up to the cloud as well—you can never replace lost photos. Apple has its own iCloud service, or you can back them up to Google Photos or any number of cloud-storage services.

    Once You Have Your iPhone

    Learn the Interface

    Navigating the iPhone is more similar to Android than it is different, but there are a few changes you’ll want to know up front. First of all: you won’t find Home, Back, and Multitasking buttons along the bottom of the screen. Instead, use the “swipe up” gesture to return to the home screen (on modern iPhones with edge-to-edge screens) or a physical home button (on older iPhones and the iPhone SE).

    That physical home button also doubles as a Touch ID fingerprint scanner—if you don’t have one, you’ll have to use the iPhone’s Face ID facial-recognition feature to log in instead. It’ll prompt you to set these up when you start the phone for the first time.

    The home screen itself is pretty simple, showing a grid of all your app icons, allowing you to swipe right to see more of them. To delete an app, either hold until a pop-up menu appears and select Remove App. Or long-press until all the apps start wiggling and then tap the minus sign (-) atop the app to delete.

    To move an app, long-press on any icon until they all start wiggling, then drag them around or into folders (pull one icon atop another icon). Tap Done on the top right when you’re finished. If you swipe all the way to the right, you’ll see your full App Library—a list of every app on your phone, similar to Android’s app drawer.

    In edit mode—also known as “jiggle mode” for its jaunty animation—you can add widgets to your home screen with the plus sign that appears in the upper-right corner. Stick them in between app icons or put them on your widget dashboard to the left of your home screens.

    Everything else should be familiar. The iPhone has an Android-like notification bar, but you won’t see icons appear in the menu bar when new notifications are in—that means you’ll need to check it regularly or act on notifications right away. If you swipe up from the top right of the screen, you’ll get the Control Center, which allows you quick access to certain settings. (On older iPhones and the iPhone SE, you can get to the Control Center by swiping up from the bottom.)

    Don’t believe what you hear — switching between iPhone and Android is actually quite easy.

    I should know: I’ve been writing about technology for the past eight years, and I’ve switched between a dozen different smartphones in that time. Whether I’m using an iPhone or an Android phone, everything comes with me.

    I never lose a contact, and my calendar switches seamlessly. Even my notes come with me!

    Here’s how I do it:

    The answer to your problems is Google — not Android, but Google.

    If you’re a devout user of Apple services — Mail, Contacts, Calendar, Maps, etc. — it can feel difficult to transfer to Android.

    But even if you’re not looking to move to Android, there’s a good reason to stop using Apple’s services: they lock you into Apple devices.

    You can, of course, continue using Apple’s services, but adding a few Google tie-ins can free your life from being viewable on only Apple’s hardware.

    Take, for instance, Google Contacts — if you have a Gmail account, you already have a Google Contacts account. You have a Gmail account, right? Come on.

    By simply backing up your iPhone’s contacts to Google, those valuable numbers are now available on any device you wish to use. You can even edit the list on the web.

    As an additional bonus, it offers a second backup method for your contacts list just in case something happens to your phone’s backup file.

    By using Google as my primary ecosystem, my digital life goes with me wherever I do.

    I use Google Chrome on my computer (a MacBook Air) and my phone (a Google Pixel 3a). By logging in with my Google account, I have full access, on any device, to all my bookmarks and saved passwords and every other convenience that comes with modern, customizable web browsers.

    I use Google Keep as my primary notes app. I add notes to it on my phone, and they show up instantly on the web version of Google Keep. My notes come with me to any device I’m using, just like my contacts (Google Contacts) and my photos (Google Photos) and my email (Gmail).

    I could be using an iPhone 11, an iPad Mini, a Samsung Galaxy S10, or whatever else — it doesn’t matter. I no longer consider the difficulty of switching devices, because it no longer exists. I move my SIM card to the new device, log in to Google services, and I’m good to go.

    If I were using iCloud, Maps, Contacts, and Apple’s other “ecosystem” hooks, switching devices would be far less easy — it would make much more sense for me to just get another iPhone. But it’s precisely that lack of flexibility in Apple’s approach that pushes me away.

    I use Android phones primarily nowadays, but I used iPhones for years. I use whatever phone is best, regardless of operating system or manufacturer.

    Apple makes incredibly nice phones. I’ve owned and loved the iPhone 3G, the iPhone 4, the iPhone 5, the iPhone 6, and I briefly used an iPhone 7 as my main phone. (I didn’t love it.)

    Google also makes incredibly nice phones. I’ve used and loved several Google Nexus phones, and the Google Pixel 3a I’m using is as close to perfect as it gets for me.

    I typed this on a MacBook Air, which I consider the best laptop in existence. I like Apple hardware a lot! But I also like my TCL television, and my Sonos speakers, and my Xbox One — I kinda don’t care even a little bit who makes the product, as long as it’s great.

    In the case of using Google’s services over Apple’s, Google simply makes a stronger argument by offering a better product. It’s great whether you’re an Apple devotee or an Android superfan or, more likely, just a person looking to easily manage their digital life.

    The most crucial things that Google does: contacts and calendar.

    If you’re using Apple’s Calendar instead of the one tied to your Gmail account, you’re making life harder than it needs to be.

    Let’s say you and some friends are planning a trip. Some of your friends have iPhones, and some don’t. But everyone has a Gmail account! And if they don’t have a Gmail account, it’s free. Why tie something as important as your digital calendar solely to Apple devices?

    It’s the kind of little choice that has a major impact. That same logic applies to Google Contacts, which enables the easy transfer and backup of your entire contacts list.

    And in both cases, if you prefer using Apple Calendar and Apple Contacts for your organization and backup needs, you can do that and still use Google services to easily transfer your stuff, should the time ever come to move.

    But I’d urge you to take the plunge now — it’ll make your life easier in the long term.

    OK, yes, there are two issues: the App Store problem, and text message history.

    I own a bunch of apps tied to my Apple ID that work only on iOS devices. I paid for the weather app Dark Sky (like an idiot) and a whole mess of games over the years. My copy of “Super Mario Run” is tied to iOS. It stinks.

    Similarly, I own a bunch of apps tied to my Google login. They work only on Android devices. It stinks.

    There is no solution to this problem, as iOS and Android are just different platforms. The most heartening thing I can say here is that most of the apps I use regularly — the same ones I’m betting you do too — don’t cost any money. The various social media apps, and stuff like Uber or Lyft and “Fortnite,” are all available on both platforms for free.

    If you own a large library of paid apps on either platform — apps crucial to your life — you should stick with that platform. For me, I’m not missing anything from platform to platform.

    The same applies to text messages: If you’re big into keeping your text message/iMessage history in perpetuity, you can’t easily bring that from one to the other. That’s a deal-breaker for some folks, but I assure you: It’s OK to let them go. There’s a solid chance you’re never going to review text message logs from last month, let alone years ago.

    You’ve been hanging back, waffling back and forth. Android or iPhone? But it’s decision time, and you’ve made the call: it’s time to trade in the Cupertino Kool-Aid for some Kit Kats. Here’s how to do it right.

    Contacts and Calendars

    Migrating your contacts and calendar dates from iPhone to Android is as simple as setting up Google Sync. As long as you’re running iOS 3.0 or above, and already have an active Google or Gmail account, you can do it directly through your phone:

    • On your iPhone select Settings -> Mail, Contacts, Calendars.
    • Set up a new “Microsoft Exchange” account (yes, even if you’re trying to import from Gmail).
    • Input your email address and login info. Enter a domain if you have one for an actual ME server; Gmail users can leave it blank.
    • Select “Server” then either input the ME server address or “” for Gmail.
    • On the final screen, select what you want to import—Mail, Contacts, Calendars, and/or Reminders—then hit Accept.

    Or you can do it through iTunes if you prefer, though you’ll only be able to pull your contacts’ vital fields like their names, job titles, email, postal addresses, phone numbers, and IM handle. To do so:

    • Mount your iPhone onto your computer as an external drive using a USB cable and open iTunes
    • Select your iPhone from the list on the left pane and select the “Info” tab
    • Select “Sync Contacts With” and then choose “Google Contacts” from the drop-down
    • Enter your Google log-in info when prompted then hit Apply to sync

    Make sure you disable the Sync With Google option when you’ve finished otherwise the system will dump redundant entries into your contacts list.

    Experience Next-Level Sound
    Spatial audio with dynamic head tracking provides theater-like sound that surrounds you

    All Your Media

    For your music, videos, and pictures, you’ll need to again mount your iPhone onto you computer as an external drive. If you are using a PC, open Explorer, locate the appropriate files on the phone and copy them to your desktop. Mac users, on the other hand, can just use Image Capture to download these files to the desktop or. Once that’s done, connect your Android to your computer and transfer the media files to the appropriate phone folder. For PC users, it’s plug-and-play. For OSX users, if your new Android runs ICS or above, download Android File Transfer Utility do your Mac, and then drag-and-drop. Images and video go to DCIM, music goes to, well, Music.

    You may notice that your Android can’t sync with iTunes, so you’ll need an alternative service to load new media onto the device. Google Music is a solid option, allowing you to store up to 20,000 uploaded tracks for free (and loads your collection directly from iTunes), as well as Amazon Cloud Player , which offers 5GB of space for uploaded tracks at no charge. Or use Spotify.

    When transferring SMS messages off the iPhone, My SMS is quite handy. This free app syncs text messages among your various devices—phones, tablets, laptops, and whathaveyou—and is compatible with both Mac and Windows. Simply download the app on both phones, follow the setup instructions and MySMS does the rest.

    Extracting voice mail messages from your iPhone, on the other hand, can be a bit of a pain though it depends on how much money you are willing to spend. The least costly option (albeit most labor intensive) involves simply forwarding messages individually to your Google account. To do so, select the appropriate conversation in “Messages”, click Edit and then Forward.

    Now if you’d prefer to skip the drudgery of sending yourself old voicemail messages individually, programs like PhoneView (Mac – $30) and iExplorer (Mac and PC – $35) can be quite helpful. These programs pull data from your iTunes backup logs giving you access to virtually every file you’ve synced. You’ll be able to copy not just voicemail to the desktop, but also your call history, contacts, bookmarks, notes, and media files as well.

    Used to be, many popular apps like Instagram, Fruit Ninja, and Flipboard were iOS exclusives, leaving Android owners to either do without or settle for cheap imitations. However, with Android’s recent meteoric rise in popularity developers can no longer afford to ignore it like a red-headed step-child and now regularly offer their wares for both systems. Games are an exception to this trend, unfortunately. Many developers have proven reluctant to port their games to Android and its menagerie of supported hardware, which is why you’ll be hard-pressed to find iOS stalwarts like Plants vs Zombies, Chrono Trigger, or Infinity Blade on Google Play.

    What you get instead are a bevy of features that don’t exist in Apple’s sandbox—widgets, for example. These home screen-based apps provide instant access to a variety of services; from Accuweather Forecasts to Rdio Playlists and native Android utilities like Gmail, Calendar, and Voice Search (which is like Siri but, you know, competent). And if you had the pleasure of using iOS 6 before jumping off the Apple wagon, Google Maps will be a welcome return. As will be the near infinite customizability of the OS. If you don’t like your native app launcher, or background, or ringtone suite, or virtually any other aspect of how your phone functions or looks, there are thousands of options (most free) are available on Google Play to replace them. [Google 1 , 2 – Tricky Ways – CNet – MSNBC – Ars Technica ]

    Google and Samsung made moving iPhone data to your new Android phone simple and easy. You can even transfer your iMessage history.

    Patrick Holland has an eye for photography and a passion for everything mobile. He is a colorful raconteur who will guide you through the ever-changing and fast-paced world of phones. He also is one of the hosts of CNET’s I’m So Obsessed podcast.

    Switching from an old phone to a new one can be stressful, especially if you’re going from an iPhone to one that runs on Android. You have to transfer your number, move your photos and videos and remember passwords to accounts and apps. Switching phones with different operating systems makes everything even more of a hassle. In recent years, companies like Google and Samsung have made it quite easy to go from your iPhone 8 with a cracked screen to a Galaxy Z Flip 3 with its sleek clamshell design and folding screen.

    The secret to an easy-peasy transfer process lies with the tiny plastic adapter that Google and Samsung (sometimes) include in the box. It’s like hiring professional movers to move your stuff, unpack it and decorate your new house just like your old one! The adapter has a USB-A connector on one end and a USB-C connector on the other that allows you to connect your new phone to your old iPhone. You can also use an USB-C to lighting cable for newer phones like the iPhone 11 and 12.

    With the adapter, photos, videos, files, music and wallpaper transfer over. You can even use it to automatically download any Android versions of free iOS apps you had on your old Apple phone. And as far as iMessage, while Apple’s messaging service won’t work on an Android phone, you can even move your message history and threads to your new phone.

    Switch from iPhone to a Google Pixel phone

    If you’re switching specifically from an iPhone to a Google Pixel the first thing you want to do is to charge up both phones. Next, you’re going to turn off iMessage across all of your Apple devices – any device that uses your AppleID. Go to Settings, then Messages and then toggle off iMessage.

    If your new Pixel came with a SIM card , install it, turn the phone on and tap the Start button. Next, connect to a Wi-Fi network and then select Copy your data. Now unlock your old iPhone, and put your lighting power cable into the bottom. Then, plug the other end into the “magic adapter” which Google calls a Quick Switch Adapter (QSA). Finally, plug in the QSA into the Pixel. You can also use a USB-C to Lighting cable.

    The Pixel uses an adapter to directly connect to your iPhone and transfer the data you choose.

    When prompted, tap Trust on your iPhone. Then sign into your Google Account on the Pixel. Next, choose what exactly you want to copy (photos, music, messages, etc.), then tap Copy.

    Now it’s time for your Pixel to actually transfer everything. Depending on how much stuff you’re moving, this can take anywhere from a few minutes to a couple of hours. While the transfer happens, you can continue setting up your phone like adding a PIN or setting up Google Assistant and Google Pay. Once the transfer completes, you’re done. Check to make sure everything you wanted to migrate actually did and enjoy your new Google life.

    Thanks to Google and Samsung, we found two easy ways to switch from an iPhone to Android.

    Switch from an iPhone to a Samsung Galaxy phone

    If you got a new Samsung Galaxy phone it also comes with an adapter, though you can also move your data over Wi-Fi, too. I recommend using the adapter because it’s faster. You can also use a USB-C to Lighting cable to connect the two. Just like the Pixel transfer, the first thing you need to do is make sure both phones are charged up and turn off iMessage on your iPhone.

    However, unlike the Pixel, you have the option to set up your Galaxy phone as new and then transfer the data which means you can start using your phone right away instead of waiting. To start the transfer, open the Smart Switch app on your Samsung phone. Your phone might take a minute to download the app.

    Once you have it opened, you might be prompted to send or receive data. Tap Receive. Then, choose how you want to transfer: Wi-Fi or cable. Next, connect both phones with the adapter and your iPhone’s lightning cable – if you’re transferring over Wi-Fi, there’s no need to connect the phones together with a cable.

    Samsung Galaxy phones, like Google’s Pixel phones, let you select exactly what kinds of data to import from your old iPhone.

    On the iPhone, tap Trust and on the Samsung phone you’ll see a message pop up that reads Connecting to your iPhone. If your iPhone uses encryption for backup, you might be prompted to enter your password. It should be your Apple ID password.

    Next, the Samsung phone will scan your iPhone for data. This can take a few minutes after which you can choose exactly what kind of data you want to bring over. Then, tap the transfer arrow. The actual transfer can take a couple of minutes to an hour. Once it’s done, go through your new Samsung phone and check on your data. If you’re not finding your photos and videos in the Gallery app, check the Google Photos app.

    Now that you have all your data moved onto your new phone, you can learn six new camera tricks on the Galaxy Note 10.

    One of the most important things you want to carry forward with you when switching phones is your chat history. While most apps and chat platforms make it relatively trivial to carry years of chat history with you, WhatsApp is an outlier. Sure, you can use cloud backups to keep moving your chat history from one phone to the next as long as you stay on Android or iOS. However, switching WhatsApp between iOS and Android has meant losing all your conversations. Thankfully, this is about to change.

    WhatsApp is the most popular chat platform in the world. With over 2.5 billion users, the service relies on Google Drive and Apple iCloud, respectively, to maintain online chat backups. As a free platform, this makes sense to mitigate storage costs for WhatsApp — my own WhatsApp backup clocks in at over 15 gigabytes.

    However, it isn’t possible to directly connect and transfer encrypted backups between Drive and iCloud. Moreover, neither platform integrates deeply with the competing platform’s smartphones. Apple doesn’t even offer an iCloud app for Android devices. This essentially leaves local transfers the only real option to move data from one platform to another.


    For the moment, WhatsApp has worked with Google and Samsung to allow for local transfers of WhatsApp backups from an iPhone to an Android device. However, you’ll have to wait a bit longer if you are looking to transfer your WhatsApp chats from an Android device to an iPhone. WhatsApp claims that the feature should be available sometime soon.


    How to transfer chats from an iPhone to an Android 12 phone

    How to switch from ios to android

    Starting with Android 12, Google has added operating-system-level changes to allow users to bring their WhatsApp chat histories from iPhones to Android devices. For now, the feature is limited to Pixel phones but should be rolling out to all new smartphones that launch with Android 12.

    How to switch from ios to android

    How to switch from ios to android

    How to switch from ios to android

    Here’s a step-by-step guide:

    • You’ll need a freshly reset phone with Android 12 onboard.
    • Connect the iPhone to your Android 12 device via a USB-C to Lightning cable.
    • Follow the on-screen instructions to import all or selected data from the iPhone to your Android 12 phone.
    • Tap the continue button to finish transferring data.
    • When prompted during the transfer process, scan the QR code shown on the Android device using your iPhone.
    • Scanning the QR code will pop open WhatsApp on the iPhone. Tap the start button, and you’re good to go.

    How to transfer WhatsApp chats from an iPhone to a Samsung phone

    How to switch from ios to android

    How to switch from ios to android

    How to switch from ios to android

    How to switch from ios to android

    WhatsApp announced the ability to move chats between platforms earlier this year alongside a partnership with Samsung. This waves off the requirement for Android 12 on Samsung devices but does make for a more involved process.

    • Reset your Samsung device.
    • When prompted by the onboard smart-switch app, connect your iPhone to your Samsung device via a USB-C to Lightning cable.
    • Select all the apps and data you want to transfer, including WhatsApp.
    • When prompted, scan the QR code displayed on the phone’s screen.
    • The QR code should open WhatsApp on your iPhone. Tap the start button to continue transferring data.
    • You can now finish setting up your Samsung device.
    • Once done, open WhatsApp and log in using the same number as on the iPhone.
    • Press the import button when prompted to complete the process.

    Transferring WhatsApp chats from iPhone to Android is a pretty straightforward process that shouldn’t take more than a few minutes, depending on the size of the WhatsApp backup. The entire transfer takes place locally and remains encrypted. All media, including chat history, photos, and videos, should carry forward, but you will end up losing out on your WhatsApp call history.

    How to switch from ios to android

    • Google has quietly launched a Switch to Android app on the Apple App Store.
    • The application helps iOS users migrate data wirelessly from an iPhone to an Android phone.
    • The only phones the app will work with first are Pixels.

    Update: April 21, 2022 (1:53 AM ET): Google has confirmed to The Verge that the rollout of the Switch to Android app should be complete in the next few weeks. A company spokesperson told the publication that Google is waiting for an update to Pixel devices that allows them to work with the app. Once the phones get it, then the app will be available in markets where Pixel phones are sold.

    The only phones the app will work with first are Pixels. There’s no word on when it’ll be available for other Android phones.

    Original article: April 13, 2022 (12:29 PM ET): At any given moment, there are probably millions of iPhone users around the world who are thinking about ditching Apple for Android. However, many of them will likely curb the thought once they start thinking about how tricky it will be to move their iPhone data to an Android phone.

    Now, they won’t need to be concerned (via TechCrunch). Thanks to Google’s long-awaited Switch to Android app, iPhone users will be able to easily migrate integral data from iOS to Android without much fuss.

    Interestingly, Google hasn’t announced this new application yet. We’ve known that it was in the works, but it is now live on the Apple App Store with no official launch announcement. It’s not listed on relevant Google websites and it doesn’t even appear in the App Store when you search for it. It’s definitely there, though.

    It should be noted that Apple has its own version of this app on the Google Play Store — and it’s been there since 2015. Google might be a bit late to the game here, but at least it’s caught up.

    Switch to Android app: What does it do?

    Essentially, the app moves integral pieces of data from the iPhone to a Google Drive account. Then, once you get your Android phone up and running, it pulls the data from Drive and syncs it. This allows you to transfer all the things you need without a cable or even having the two phones in the same place at the same time.

    Here’s what it moves:

    • Contacts
    • Calendar
    • Photos and videos
    • Text messages

    You’ll notice the Switch to Android app does not move applications. This is likely to do with Apple’s restrictions on apps pinging iOS for other installed applications. In other words, this is not something Google’s app will likely be able to support. Thankfully, most of the apps on your iPhone will also have Android versions or equivalents.

    Injustice: Gods Among Us


    • Topic Archived
    1. Boards
    2. Injustice: Gods Among Us
    3. Is switching from iOS to android possible.

    It’s like playing a game on PS3 then switching to Xbox to play the same game.

    I have both, both linked to one WB account and they’ve been separate, one has not overwritten the other.

    So are you saying I will lose my game if I switch from iOS to android? Or not?

    I have both, both linked to one WB account and they’ve been separate, one has not overwritten the other.

    So are you saying I will lose my game if I switch from iOS to android? Or not?

    If your iPhone still works you should be able to keep running the game off wifi even if you’ve switched your service to a different phone

    I have both, both linked to one WB account and they’ve been separate, one has not overwritten the other.

    So are you saying I will lose my game if I switch from iOS to android? Or not?

    If your iPhone still works you should be able to keep running the game off wifi even if you’ve switched your service to a different phone

    I didn’t say that at all. I just said that whatever you do on iOS will not transfer over to Android.

    For example, I have Killer Frost on my iOS account, but I don’t on Android.

    Have you decided to switch your mobile from iPhone to Android? After this decision are you looking for a solution to transfer data from iPhone to Android and have question how to transfer data from iPhone to Android?

    If you are in this situation, you are the right place. Don’t worry. So many people face this problem and here you will get all knowledge about transferring data from iPhone to Android. To solve out this issue you can go through this guide and easily transfer your iPhone data to Android in one click only.

    • Part 1. Best Way to Transfer Files from iPhone to Android
    • Part 2. Transfer Files/Data from iPhone to Android with Dropbox

    Part 1. Best Way to Transfer Files/Data from iPhone to Android

    If you are looking to transfer data from iPhone to Android, MobileTrans – Phone Transfer is the best solution for you available in the online market. This software can easily transfer whole data of your iPhone including photos, videos, music, messages etc from iPhone to Android in one click. This software is available from Wondershare team and compatible with all of your Android and iOS devices to transfer data. So finally, this is a phone transfer tool which can transfer data from any mobile device to other devices in one click.

    MobileTrans – Phone Transfer

    Transfer Data from iPhone to Android within 1-click.

    • • Transfer iPhone data to Android in one click by using both mobiles at the same time on your computer.
    • • Transfer movies, videos, contacts, messages, music from iPhone to Android directly.
    • • Backup your mobile data to computer or Mac easily.
    • • Restore data from computer to iPhone or Android as well.
    • • Fully compatible with iOS 15 and Android 12.

    How to transfer data from iPhone to Android in one click with Wondershare MobileTrans:

    Here is a video tutorial about transferring iPhone to Android:

    Step 1. You have to download and install MobileTrans on Mac or computer. After installing launch it to view available options. Click on “Phone Transfer” option now.

    How to switch from ios to android

    Step 2. Connect both iPhone and Android with computer and check the available files which you need to transfer from iPhone to Android. These files you can see in the middle of interface. After selecting files click on “Start” button.

    Note: Source devices will be at the left side of the interface and destination will be at the right side. You can use “Flip” button to change these devices.

    How to switch from ios to android

    Step 3. Depending on the size of data, transfer process will be finished in some. You can view transferred data on your Android phone now. But please keep in mind that do not disconnect both devices until process is running.

    How to switch from ios to android

    Part 2. Transfer Files/Data from iPhone to Android with Dropbox

    DropBox is a cloud service which allows you to transfer data/files from iPhone to Android by syncing your data to cloud. Dropbox is available for mostly all devices. You can use it on windows or Mac. Dropbox apps can be downloaded from Apple app store and Google play store for free. You have to sync you data from iPhone to cloud first and then you can transfer data from cloud to Android using dropbox. Before transferring data from iPhone to Android using dropbox, please create an account on dropbox and use the same account on the both of your devices to sync and download data. Then you can easily transfer your data/files from iPhone to Android. Dropbox enable users to store up to 2GB of data on cloud for free of cost. If you have data more than 2GB the you can go for Wondershare MobileTrans which can easily transfer data from iPhone to Android without any limitation.

    • Android
    • iPhone
    • Device Missing?

    If you’ve decided to move on from your iPhone and switch to an Android device, it won’t be easy to move on all your data from one platform to the other.

    How to switch from ios to android

    With the help of a cloud drive and apps, it is certainly better now than it was in the past, but there are still some things that you can’t be transferred. Unfortunately, one of those things is your gaming progress.

    Android and iOS are different platforms that use completely different file formats. This means it’s impossible to manually transfer your save files between platforms. However, thanks to the prevalence of cloud storage, most games keep your account progress online. This means there’s less need to keep your progress on your phone storage.

    You can sync gaming progress from different devices by connecting them to the same social network account. This article will explain when this is possible, and how to do it.

    Sync Game Progress via Social Network

    Most of the new games that you play on your smartphone are able to store progress both on the phone’s storage and on the cloud.

    If you link a game that you play with your Facebook account, it will save your progress on Facebook too. This means that the next time you log in from a different device and launch your game, you’ll resume the game where you left off.

    Most popular smartphone games like Subway Surfers can link with your social network account. If you’ve reached a certain level on an iPhone and now you want to resume it on an Android device, you only have to:

    1. Launch the game on your iphone.
      How to switch from ios to android
    2. Check if it has the option to link with your social media account. Subway Surfers, for example has an option called Play with friends that links it to your Facebook.
    3. Follow the on-screen guide to link your gaming profile with a social media account.
      How to switch from ios to android
    4. Launch the sane game on your android device.
      How to switch from ios to android
    5. Tap on the same social network option.
      How to switch from ios to android
    6. Log into your social media and see that all your game progress is there.
      How to switch from ios to android

    Does This Method Work for All Games?

    The method should work on all games that you can link to your social network accounts. Once you link them, the game will save all the progress to the cloud. This way you don’t have to worry about transferring save files.

    If the game doesn’t support this kind of cloud saves, then you won’t be able to move the progress. For example, this won’t work for some single-player games – but those are rare instances.

    Also, if a game is also an iOS-only release, there is no way for you to play it on an Android phone. However, the most popular games are usually available on both platforms.

    One of the downsides of moving platforms is that you’ll need to repurchase the games that you’ve paid for. If you purchased a game from the App store and now you want to get it from the Play Store, you’ll have to buy it again.

    Does Apple’s Game Center save progress?

    No, before factory resetting your device ensure that your game progress is backed up somewhere safe.

    Does Google Play Games save progress?

    Yes and no. It only works for some games and only after you’ve set it to do so.

    Does iCloud or Google Drive save progress?

    No, the app will be saved in the Google Play Store or the App Store meaning you won’t have to purchase it again. Once downloaded no progress will appear until you log into a secondary account such as your Facebook account.

    What happens if I lost all of my progress?

    This can be a difficult situation because the answer varies depending on the game. If there is an in-game login option try that, or sync it with your social media accounts.

    Will I have to purchase the game again?

    Yes, if you’re switching between operating systems you will have to purchase the game again.

    Transferring Other Data from iPhone to Android

    Fortunately, transferring other data from your iPhone to Android is much easier and more reliable. The easiest way to do this is to back up all your iOS files to your Google Cloud.

    The first thing that you need to do is to get Google Drive on your phone. This app also contains Google Calendar and Google Photos, which you’d also use for backup. When you download Google Drive from the App Store, you should:

    1. Open Google Drive.
    2. Sign in to your Google Account.
    3. Tap the ‘Menu’ button on the top-left of the screen.
    4. Select ‘Settings’ from the menu.
    5. Tap ‘Start Backup’.

    After you back up your files, you can see, use, and transfer all the backed-up content across your devices. So you just need to open your new Android device and download all of your data to it.

    It’s All in the Cloud

    There’s no simple way to move your gaming progress from iOS to Android or the other way round. So, the best way to move your gaming progress is to connect the game to the internet. Most popular online games already require you to have an account on their cloud – that’s how you can always keep your progress intact.

    Who knows, maybe one day you might decide to return to iOS. With a couple of clicks and sign-ins, you can just pick up where you left off.

    You’ve decided to make the switch, but how do you transfer all your contacts, calendars, photos, and other content from your iPhone to your new Android device? Here are a few easy steps to help you transfer your important data.

    Vice President of Content / CNET

    Sharon Profis is Vice President of Content CNET.

    You’re tired of the dropped calls, tightly wound interface, and carrier limitations, and you’re ready to ditch the iPhone and say hello to Android. But before you dive into your new smartphone’s highly customizable interface, faster processor, nice camera, and free turn-by-turn navigation, there’s some housekeeping to do.

    Here are a video and six easy steps to follow to transfer your contacts, calendar, notes, photos, videos, music, and SMS messages (kind of) from your iPhone to your Android device:

    Step 1. Google account
    On your Android device, go to Menu > Settings > Accounts & Sync > Add Account > Google. If you don’t have a Google account yet, you can create one here. Follow the onscreen instructions to associate your Gmail account with your new phone.

    Step 2. Contacts
    Connect your iPhone to your computer and launch iTunes. Click on your iPhone’s name, then head to the Info tab at the top. Check “Sync Address Book Contacts,” then check “Sync contacts with Google Contacts.” Click Configure and enter the same account information you just configured on your Android device. Hit Apply and allow the iPhone to sync.

    Step 3. Calendar and Notes
    On your iPhone go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars. If the Gmail account you’re using with your Android isn’t here, add it by going to Add account > Gmail. Go back to Mail settings, tap the Gmail account, and turn syncing on for Calendars and Notes. Within a few minutes, your calendar will transfer to your Android device. Notes will be sent to your Gmail account and filed under a label called Notes.

    Moving from an iPhone to an Android phone was a big change, but switching back a year later was even bigger.

    As a long-time iPhone user, I finally gave up the ghost after getting a serious case of big-screen envy and swapped my iPhone 4S for a Samsung Galaxy S4 and later a Galaxy Note 3. The larger screen was just what I was looking for, but getting used to the Wild West of Android after living in a walled garden required a period of adjustment and retraining.

    With the iPhone 6 and 6 Plus, the big-screen iPhone I told myself I had been waiting for was here. Switching back would be like slipping on a comfortable old shoe, or so I thought. Going from iOS to Android was tough, but going back from Android to iOS was in some ways even more of a culture shock, and these are the top five changes I struggled with immediately.

    The back button

    The one-button design of an iPhone is simplicity itself. But, it turns out that any additional functions in an app, besides returning to the home screen, requires an on-screen button or widget, and these lack consistency from one app to the next. I didn’t appreciate it at the time, but having that right-side Android back button that worked the same way almost everywhere was something I missed immediately. (To a lesser extent, the same thing goes for the left-side menu button.)

    Slide right to unlock, instead of up

    Yes, you should be using your fingerprint to log into an iPhone, but there are times you need to do it manually. I got so used to flipping my thumb up to unlock my Android, that it takes two or three tries to unlock my iPhone 6 Plus. Will I regain the muscle memory to do it right? I’m sure it’ll only take a week or so, but in the meantime, it’s something you have to stop and think about.

    Permissions and preferences in Settings

    In one sense, the way iOS consolidates most of the permissions and options for apps in the central settings menu is easier, and gives me more confidence that app-makers are playing by the rules I set. On the other hand, I found myself constantly jumping out of apps and back into Settings, which gets old quickly.

    I’m back down to one messaging app

    Hey, WhatsApp, Viber, Google Hangouts and the like, it’s been fun, but going back to iOS means going back to iMessage, which is handy for consolidating my chats across mobile and desktop. I’m sure there are more comprehensive ways to cram every form of text-based communication into a single app, but the overall lack of friction in iMessage is a welcome surprise.

    Now I have to think about maps again

    Just as on every Windows 8 PC I test, one of my first steps is to download and install Google’s Chrome browser, your first move on an iOS device should be to download and install Google Maps (pictured here), and then plant it on your home screen in place of the default Apple Maps app. The result is better than using Apple’s still-hobbled app, especially if (like me) you frequently want to map routes via public transportation. But, it’s still not as baked-in to the OS as it was in the pre-Apple Maps days, or on my Android phones.

    The more things change

    Within a week or two, I suspect that most of these surprises will feel natural again, and I’ll have forgotten the learning curve (except for the back button, I’m pretty sold on that concept). But I’m sure there are more hurdles to be found switching back and forth between iOS and Android (to say nothing of Windows Phone or BB10). Post your biggest surprises when switching, or switching back, in the comments section below.

    How to switch from ios to android

    Hi guys today an ex Android user asked me if there is a way to put Android on iOS, I googled it and I found online this awesome way and I decided to share it with you. I’m an ex Android user, and I think I will leave this on my device forever. Ok, Let’s start


    1. Jailbroken Device

    2. Know how to use the Cydia store

    Things you need to know

    1. This package contains multiple tweaks

    2. This is more than just a theme

    3. It will bring a complete UI change to iOS with new elements

    4. It brings Android features such as:

    • Navigation Bar
    • Notification Center
    • Power Menu
    • Mini-Player Widget
    • Google Search Widget
    • Volume Slide
    • … and a lot more

    How to:

    1. Open the cydia store and add the BYA repo from “
    if you don’t know how to add it follow this instructions

    2. Tap on the search section and type “CyDown“, must have an apple logo, then click install and then confirm

    3. Respring your iDevice and open the Settings app, search for Cydown and enable it

    4. Open again Cydia and Search for “Andrios“, Install and Confirm (Install the original version, Cydown let you download paid packages for free, it must be written with blue color from the BigBoss Repo)

    After the installation open your device Settings and enable all the features.

    — Extra information —

    -> Some features look and function great on iOS, but some such as Navigation bar doesn’t go so well with the iOS interface.

    -> Navigation bar adds the signature Android navigation buttons, Back, Home and Multitasking at the bottom of the screen.

    -> The Notification Center features Android Lollipop style Toggles, a brightness slider and a clear all notifications button.

    -> The Android notifications also work on the lockscreen.

    -> The miniplayer widget lets you control your music from anywhere on iOS, the Volume slider replaces the stock iOS slider and the Power Menu adds easy pop-up options such as Power Off, Airplane mode etc.

    -> There’s also a Google Search widget with a built-in browser, a Switches widget and more.


    How to switch from ios to android

    Recommendation: Manage iPhone/iPad/Android On PC Easily (supported jailbroken/rooted device)

    How to switch from ios to android

    • Support to transfer, edit, backup, manage, view iOS & Android mobile data: Music, videos, photos, apps, ebooks, contacts, messages and more.
    • Download videos from 100+ video sharing sites up to 4K HD video quality and transfer to iPad/iPhone/iPod/Android.
    • Massive free resources: videos, wallpapers, ringtones
    • Handy toolkit: Audio converter, video converter, ringtone maker, etc.
    • Free

    How to switch from ios to android

    At some point, we all need to move files from iOS devices to Android. When you shift from one device to another, you will need to transfer your important files to the current device. In some instances, we also want to use both and Android and an iOS device and therefore we may want to transfer what is on our iOS device to the Android device. Sometimes we may want to import the data to the Android device as a backup plan. Therefore, the iOS to Android transfer tool is essential in exporting files from the iOS device to the Android one. Some of the necessary files to us include messages, contacts, photos, videos, apps, music, calendars device settings, WhatsApp messages and attachments, audios, documents and much more.

    Free iOS to Android Transfer tool – Smart Switch

    Samsung Smart Switch is a significant data transfer tool that helps transfer files from one device to another. It helps transfer files from iOS device to Android. It makes it easy to transfer contacts, photos, messages, apps, documents, and device settings, Memos, call History, wallpapers and more from iOS to Android. Besides, the tool is free of charge.

    With Smart Switch, you can copy content easily without installing the app on your iOS device you are exporting files from. The tool is easier to use, and you just need to connect the two devices using a USB connector. Samsung Smart Switch comes with both the desktop and the mobile versions. It supports Android devices such as Samsung Galaxy S7/S7 Edge, Samsung Galaxy S6/S6 Edge/Edge+ , Samsung Galaxy Note 3, Samsung Galaxy Note 2, Note 4, S4, and S5. With Smart Switch, you can transfer data from all models of iPhones, iPads, and iPods.

    How to Transfer Files from iOS to Android Freely

    What do you need to Transfer from iOS to Android Freely:

    • iOS device with 5.0 or above
    • Android device with 4.3 or higher
    • iOS device cable (lightning or 30 pin)
    • Android charger cable
    • a USB OTG cable

    How to switch from ios to android

    Step 1. First, turn off the iMessages from your iOS device so that you do not miss any incoming text.

    Step 2. Download the Samsung Switch App on your Android device. And then launch the Smart Switch App.

    Step 3. Select “iOS Device” and click “Start.”

    Step 4. Click “Import from iOS Device.”

    Step 5. Attach the two devices by plugging in the OTG and the USB device.

    Step 6. A popup will appear on your iOS device. Select “Trust” on your iOS device and then click “Next” on your android device

    Step 7. Hit “Search for New Contents” on your Android device.

    Step 8. Smart Switch will detect what is transferable. Select what you need to transfer and then click “Import.”

    Step 9. Your data will start moving. Time will differ depending on how much data you are transferring.

    Video Tutorial: How to Transfer Files from iOS to Android Freely

    The free iOS to Android transfer needs USB OTG. If you do not have it, then try TunesGo Phone to Phone Transfer to transfer files from iOS to Android. TunesGo helps transfer files from help transfer files from phone to phone or from iOS to Android device. It assists in the transfer of files such as music, playlist, videos, contacts and much more.

    How to switch from ios to android

    TunesGo iOS to Android Transfer – One Stop Solution to Transfer Files from iOS to Android

    • Backup your music, photos, videos, contacts, SMS etc. to computer and restore them easily.
    • Manage, export&import your Contacts and SMS, deduplicate Contacts, reply SMS with computer.
    • One-click Root – Root your Android phones/tablets to take full control of your device.
    • Phone to Phone Transfer – Transfer music, photos, videos, contacts, SMS between two mobiles (both Android and iPhone are supported).
    • App Manager – Install, uninstall, import or backup Apps in batch.
    • Gif Maker – Create Gif from photos, motion photos, videos.
    • iTunes Manager – Sync iTunes Music to Android or transfer music from Android to iTunes.
    • Fully compatible with 3000+ Android devices (Android 2.2 – Android 8.0) from Samsung, LG, HTC, Huawei, Motorola, Sony etc.

    How to transfer files from iOS to Android with TunesGo (Phone to Phone Transfer)

    To move files from iOS to Android, follow these steps.

    Step 1 Launch Wondershare TunesGo and connect the Android and the iOS device to your computer. Select the device from which you want to import the files. In this case, the iOS device is your source. On the main interface, select “Phone to Phone Transfer.”

    How to switch from ios to android

    Step 2 Select the receiving Android device. When the two phones are connected successfully, the program will recognize them and display them in a drop-down list for you to choose your receiving device. Once you select the target phone, click “Next.”

    How to switch from ios to android

    Step 3 All the files that can be exported from your device are selected or ticked by default. They include music, videos, playlists, contacts and photos. After selecting all the data that you need, click “Transfer” and all the selected files will be transferred to your Android device

    How to switch from ios to android

    Do not disconnect the devices until the process is complete. Once the transfer is done, click “OK.”

    Video Tutorial: How to transfer files from iOS to Android with TunesGo (Phone to Phone Transfer)

    You can efficiently transfer data from your old to your current device using Samsung Smart Switch. The App is free of charge, and you can easily download it from Google Play Store. With Samsung Smart App you can transfer files such as contacts, messages, videos, audios, calendars and much more. However, to move the file with Samsung Smart Switch, you will need an OTG cable. Alternatively, you can use TunesGo tool to move files from your iOS device to your Android phone. The steps on how you can use Smart Switch and TunesGo iOS to Android Transfer have discussed in this article.

    Account Information

    Share with Your Friends

    How to migrate SMS messages from an iOS device to Android using iSMS2Droid

    How to migrate SMS messages from an iOS device to Android using iSMS2Droid

    If you’ve switched from iOS to Android and you need your SMS messages transferred, your best bet is iSMS2Droid. Jack Wallen shows you how to port your messages using the app and an iTunes backup.

    So you’ve decided to migrate from the iOS platform to Android. Everything has gone smoothly, but you have a number of SMS messages on your iOS device that you require on your new phone. How do you manage that? You install iSMS2droid and use it in conjunction with an iTunes backup to easily get those message from iOS to Android.

    Let me show you how.

    Backing up from iTunes

    This is the most time-consuming step, because you have to perform a full backup of your iPhone using iTunes. Here’s how:

    1. Open iTunes on your Mac or PC
    2. Connect your iPhone to the computer
    3. From the main iTunes page, check This computer for the backup location and click Back Up Now
    4. Allow the backup to complete

    Once the backup is complete, the files will be located in one of these two locations:

    • Windows: \Users\USERNAME\AppData\Roaming\Apple Computer\MobileSync\Backup\ (where USERNAME is the actual username)
    • Mac:

    Within either of these folders, you’ll see one or more subfolders named with random strings of characters. Locate the folder with the most recent timestamp. Change into that folder, and then look for the following two files:

    • 3d0d7e5fb2ce288813306e4d4636395e047a3d28–your SMS messages
    • 5a4935c78a5255723f707230a451d79c540d2741–your call logs

    Copy those files to the Android device in question, or to a cloud location, such as Google Drive, or Dropbox. If you copy the files to a cloud solution, you’ll need to make sure to download them to your Android device before continuing on.

    Install iSMS2Droid

    Now we need to install iSMS2Droid. To do this, follow these steps:

    1. Open up the Google Play Store on your Android device
    2. Search for iSMS2Droid
    3. Locate and tap the entry by Jan Grewe
    4. Tap Install
    5. Allow the installation to complete

    You should now see a launcher for the app on your homescreen, your App Drawer, or both. Tap to launch the tool. From the main window ( Figure A), tap the Import Message button.

    Figure A

    At this point, you will be prompted to temporarily change the default SMS app to iSMS2Droid ( Figure B).

    Figure B

    Once you’ve done that, allow iSMS2Droid the requested permissions to access photos, media, and files, and then navigate to the location housing the downloaded backup files. Select your file and when prompted, select Import All Messages. Depending on how many messages you have to import, this can take some time. Do note, you can continue using your phone while the messages import. When the import is complete, you will be asked if you want switch back to your original messaging app–make sure to do this.

    With the SMS message imported, you can then go back and import your call list–if applicable–in the same manner.

    All done

    Congratulations, your SMS messages are finally on your Android device. I would suggest once the import is complete and you’ve made sure the import was successful that you delete iSMS2Droid, as well as the files from the iTunes backup from your device. You won’t need them again, and both app and files will just be taking up space.

    How to switch from ios to android

    iOS users who want to switch to the bright side of good are always concerned about finding a tool that allows them to quickly and comfortably transfer data from iPhone to Android smartphone. Google understands this and has come up with a solution that allows you to conveniently and smoothly migrate from iPhone to a device with a green robot.

    The Switch to Android application, which appeared in the App Store catalog earlier this week, is responsible for this process. With its help, the user can select the data that should be transferred from the Apple smartphone to the Android device. In particular, we are talking about contacts, videos and photos, events from the calendar and other information. In this case, the cable is not needed, everything will be done “over the air”.

    The release of Switch to Android did not become something revolutionary, but there are a number of incomprehensible moments associated with its appearance. For some reason, Google chose not to advertise the release of the program. The app has been quietly added to the App Store. At the same time, the application itself is hidden from the search index in the application store, and a direct link is given to install it.

    Switching from iOS to Android just got easier

    “The Switch to Android app from Google helps you quickly and securely move your most important data types; photos, videos, contacts, and calendar events — to a brand new Android device without fussy cables. The app also walks you through other important steps to setting up your device, like turning off iMessage so you don’t miss text messages from friends and family. The app will ask you for a series of permissions; so that your iPhone’s data can be moved to your Android device”.

    In turn, Apple has long offered a convenient Move to iOS app in the Play Store; thanks to which you can easily transfer data from Android to iOS. The first data that Google is developing a special application for potential users of its OS appeared in July 2021.

    The Switch to Android software is still a “secret” application – although it is present in the Apple App Store; it is not possible to find it by conventional means, access is provided only through a direct link. At 9to5google, the link was able to install the software on the iPhone and run it. The portal team has published a video with more detailed information about the application and working with it.

    Moving your stuff from your iPhone to an Android phone doesn’t have to be exceptionally laborious. Here’s how you can make that transition smoothly.

    Contributing Writer, ZDNet

    Jason Cipriani is based out of beautiful Colorado and has been covering mobile technology news and reviewing the latest gadgets for the last six years. His work can also be found on sister site CNET in the How To section, as well as across several more online publications.

    Is iOS starting to feel a bit stale for your taste? It’s something I’m hearing more and more as I talk to iOS users, or former iOS users. With some amazing Android phones hitting the market, it’s tough not to get caught checking out the competition — or even feeling a bit compelled to make the jump to Android.

    But before you make the change, there are some kinks that need to be worked out to make the process go as smoothly as possible. You likely have contacts, a calendar, photos, and music that you’ll want to bring over to your new Android device. Some of these are going to be pretty easy to get transferred, while others are going to take some work. So sit down in front of your computer, preferably with both devices, and let’s get started.

    Jason Cipriani/CNET

    Before you begin setting up your Android device, you’re going to need a Google account, be it a Google Apps or Gmail account. It’s not required on an Android device, but if you’re going to take advantage of all that Android has to offer, you’ll want to sign up for one. You’ll be asked to log in to this account during the initial setup process on your Android device. If you skipped this step and want to go back and add the account later, you can go to Settings > Accounts > Add Account > Google. This same process can be followed to add another type of account (Yahoo, Hotmail, etc.).

    Contacts, Calendar and Mail

    If your contacts are syncing from your iPhone to Gmail, transferring them will be a breeze. Just make sure you sign into your Android device using the same account you use on your iPhone and make sure Contact sync is enabled. For other accounts, such as Yahoo, you’ll need to export your contact list from the Web site for the account. You can typically find this in settings for your account. Or, some carriers offer a free app in the App Store built specifically for transferring your contacts. Verizon and AT&T have apps that do just that.

    Should you be an iCloud user, you can still use your iCloud account to sync calendars and contacts to your Android device, but you’re going to have to purchase a couple of apps. I have talked about one of the apps before, called SmoothSync for Cloud Contacts ; the calendar app is called SmoothSync for Cloud Calendar. These two apps will add your iCloud account to your Android device, allowing you to keep your iPad or Mac in sync with your Android device. This comes in especially useful if you’re sharing an iCloud calendar with a family member and don’t want to force him or her to switch to Google Calendar just because you’ve switched to Android.


    Perhaps one of the quickest steps of moving from an iPhone to Android is getting your music collection on your new device. What you’ll need to do is download the Google Music app to your computer and point it at your music collection. Google will then store your music in the cloud, up to 20,000 songs for free, and let you stream it on your shiny new Android device via the Music app. Anytime you add new music to your catalog, the Music Manager app will automatically upload and sync it to your Android device for you.

    If using Google Music isn’t possible for you, you can drag-and-drop the music on your computer into the Music folder (create one if it’s not present) on your Android device via a USB connection. Mac users will have to use the Android File Transfer app to access their device’s storage.


    With the introduction of iCloud and its Photo Stream service, getting photos off your iOS device is easy. Using iPhoto on a Mac, or installing the iCloud Control Panel on a Windows machine you can conveniently grab photos from your iPhone and then sync them to your Android device via USB or through your Google+ account.

    For videos on your iPhone, you’ll need to use iTunes, iPhoto, or a file explorer to grab the files. Using a program like iExplorer, Image Capture (found in the Utilities folder on a Mac), or the native Windows File Explorer taking the files off your device is simple.

    Going forward, you can sync photos from your Android device to your computer via USB, or by installing the Dropbox app and enabling its Camera Upload feature. Rather not mess with a file explorer? The Dropbox Camera Upload feature is another method to get photos off of your iPhone and on to your computer.


    One of the biggest changes you’ll experience when switching over from an iPhone to an Android device is the ability to customize your device. The options for changing different aspects of your Android device are nearly endless. While it’s hard to cover all of the different ways to customize your device, this post covers 12 of the more popular methods. From assigning ringtones to contacts, editing contact photos, to adding custom ringtones and wallpaper, you’ll find apps and guides to help with the transition from iOS to Android.

    Whenever you switch from one platform to another, there’s always a headache that goes along with the first few weeks of using the device. Hopefully this guide helped ease the headache a bit and sped up the learning process.

    It isn’t easy to get data, passwords from the secured Apple ecosystem, but there is a workaround to import passwords from Apple iCloud account’s Keychain into Google account for Android.

    • Meghna DuttaMeghna Dutta –>
    • Published: December 24, 2021 4:27 PM IST

    So you have decided to retire from the secured Apple ecosystem but enter the risky and colourful Android town. Switching from an iPhone and Android was once a strenuous task, it is stressful to some extent. From transferring contact list, photos, to videos, the process seems like traveling by rail. The most challenging one is to remember passwords to accounts and apps. Also Read – Google plans to track your coughs, snores using your Android phone

    That’s a dull memory game I wouldn’t prefer to play. If you are on the same boat and looking for a solution, here are the steps that you need to follow to transfer your passwords from your old iPhone to the new Android device. Also Read – How to use iPhone’s Background Sound feature to improve your focus

    Tips to export passwords from an Apple device

    As we mentioned earlier, Apple ecosystem is secured and as the company takes safeguarding user privacy seriously, transfering data, password, etc becomes difficult. But there is a workaround to transfer passwords iCloud Keychain to Google account for Android device. For this you will need a Mac or MacBook that must be running macOS Monterey. Also Read – Google Pixel Fold won’t launch until Spring of 2023: Report

    Step 1- First up, open System Preferences on your Mac/MacBook signed into your iCloud account.

    Step 2- Then search for Passwords and click it.

    Step 3- Enter the authentication password that you used to log in to your system.

    Step 4- Scroll at the bottom and click on the three-dot menu.

    Step 5- Two options will pop up on the screen, click Export Passwords, and then tap the Confirm button.

    Step 6- After this choose a name and location for your CSV file.

    The process won’t delete your passwords from the Apple device. Moving to the second part of the process-

    How to import passwords to the Android device via Google account

    -Open Google Chrome on your Mac and type “”

    -Select the account where you want to save the passwords, enter credentials if asked.

    -Once logged in, click on the Settings icon you will see at the top right corner of ‘Password Manager’

    -Search for ‘import passwords’ and click the Import button on the right.

    -Next up tap ‘Select File’ and look for the CSV file that you saved in your system.

    -Once located, tap Import option.

    Once the process gets completed you will have all the passwords transferred to your Google Password Manager.

    9to5Google dig details from Data Transfer Tool, reveals the upcoming app for iOS may be able to import data from iCloud directly to Google Photos.

    • Meghna DuttaMeghna Dutta –>
    • Updated: March 18, 2022 4:33 PM IST

    Google’s Switch to Android iOS app might bring iCloud to Google Photos transfer. As per the 9to5Google report, the upcoming app for iOS may be able to import data from iCloud directly to Google Photos. Also Read – Google plans to track your coughs, snores using your Android phone

    The outlet managed to dig the details in an APK insight post where 9to5Google decompiled the latest version of an app that the tech giant uploaded to the Play Store. While decompiling the latest version of the Data Transfer Tool app which is available on the Play Store for transferring data from Android to Android devices, folks at 9to5Google managed to discover the following string- “To copy photographs and videos from iCloud to Google Photos, follow the instructions in the Switch to Android app, or learn more at” Also Read – How to use iPhone’s Background Sound feature to improve your focus

    Notably, the string contains a link to an existing support article that explains how to request a copy of data from Apple and specify your Google account as the destination. In all likelihood, a user might be able to connect an iPhone to an Android device to quickly transfer data similar to Android to Android data migration. The latest Data Transfer tool also indicates a new accessibility description for an in-app animation that mentions a ‘Lightning cable.’ Also Read – Google Pixel Fold won’t launch until Spring of 2023: Report

    The report suggests that this addition might likely allow to directly copy iOS data to your Galaxy or Pixel phone using a USB-C to Lightning cable between the two phones. 9to5Google also points Apple to be working on a dedicated iOS app since last year to make it easy to switch from an iPhone/iPad to an Android phone or tablet. This app is said to connect an old iOS device to the new Android over WiFi to copy data directly which otherwise involves backing up the data to Google Drive first and restoring it.

    As for the latest report, the claims are based on code decompilation which means that the functionalities may or may not reach end-users. Google hasn’t shared any confirmation on this aspect yet, hence we would suggest taking it with a grain of salt.

    Move to iOS app is one of the easiest ways to transfer data from an Android phone to an iPhone. If the process takes a long time, you can find the answer to “how long does move to iOS app take” in this article.

    How to switch from ios to android

    By Dylan / Last update April 7, 2022


    How long does Move to iOS take?

    I was trying to move data from my old Android phone to my new iPhone 12 Pro. But the “Move to iOS” seems to get stuck. I just want to know the estimated time of the Move to iOS process. Thanks.

    – Question from

    Content of Table:

    How long does move to iOS take Usually?

    “Move to iOS” is one of the most common tools helping users to migrate content on an Android device to an iPhone. However, some users reported some issues like Move to iOS not working or taking forever and wonder how long it will take and why moving data to an iOS device takes so long.

    How to switch from ios to android

    Generally, the time of the Move to iOS take depends on how much data on your android phone needs to be transferred. In addition, Wi-Fi connection is another factor. It can take several or 10s minutes to move dozens of GB of data under a stable Wi-Fi network.

    If the Move to iOS process is slow or seems to last forever, you can follow the content below, we will provide several methods of fixing this issue, and introduce an alternative tool to help you to transfer data to iOS quickly and easily.

    How to fix “Move to iOS” is slow or taking forever

    There are 3 common methods you can try when Move to iOS working not well.

    Method 1. Check the Wi-Fi connection

    This is the first step when you notice the Move to iOS transfer stops. As we mentioned above, Wi-Fi connection is a very important factor in the moving time. Make sure your iPhone is connected with a strong and stable Wi-Fi connection.

    How to switch from ios to android

    Method 2. Restart the process

    If the “Move to iOS” app stuck at a percentage, it may get interrupted by another process. You can hold the power button down to restart the setup process. The follow the guide again to transfer your data from Android to iOS.

    Method 3. Delete files on Android phone

    Because the fact that Move to iOS is unable to selectively move data, you have to migrate all content from the Android phone. So if there are a large amount of data on it, this process can take a long time to get finished. So deleting some unnecessary files can be a solution to Move to iOS taking forever.

    Alternative to Move to iOS to transfer from Android to iOS device

    If the Move to iOS still takes a long time to complete after trying all the methods above, actually, you can turn to an alternative to Move to iOS-AOMEI MBackupper. It is a powerful iOS transfer and backup tool that enables you to transfer data from a PC to your iPhone successfully. It owns several advantages that make it to be the best alternative to Move to iOS.

    в—Џ Fast speed. AOMEI MBackupper transfers data with a USB connection. It gives you a much faster speed to move data to iOS devices.
    в—Џ Selective backup. Unlike the Move to iOS, AOMEI MBackupper allows you to choose to transfer photos from Android phone to iPhone, as well as videos, messages, and other data.
    в—Џ Wi-Fi is not required: AOMEI MBackupper transfer data is backed on a USB cable, which is more stable. Wi-Fi and network are unnecessary.

    Now you can hit the download button to install this tool and follow the steps below to see how it works.

    вњЌ Note: Please complete the iPhone setup process before following the guide below.

    Step 1. Connect your android phone and the iPhone to a Windows computer via USB cable. Tap “Trust this device” on your iPhone.

    Step 2. Open Windows Explorer and find the Android device name. If you don’t find it, you may need to change the setting on the Android phone to transfer media files.

    Step 3. Find photos, videos, or other data that need to be moved. Open AOMEI MBackupper, click “Transfer to iPhone”.

    How to switch from ios to android

    Step 4. Click the “+” icon to select the data you want to transfer.

    How to switch from ios to android

    Step 5. The files will be listed on the interface, and click “Transfer” to start the operation.

    How to switch from ios to android


    So the answer to how long does move to iOS takes depends on your data size and the connection. If your Move to iOS taking forever or a long time, hope this article can help you. Additionally, AOMEI MBackupper is a nice alternative way to move data from Android to iPhone. We highly suggest you backup your iPhone contacts, photos, videos, and other data after the process completed to avoid data loss.

    By Shubham Agarwal published 2 August 21

    If you are switching allegiances from iPhone to Android, this guide will show you how to transfer your data

    How to switch from ios to android

    Switching to Android from an iPhone isn’t as cumbersome as it used to be. While Apple still heavily restricts what goes in and out of your iPhone, recent updates have made it easier than ever to migrate your data, such as contacts and pictures, to an Android phone.

    With the right tools, you can bring along most of the data your iPhone has collected for years, including your media gallery, calendar appointments, local files, and more, to your new Android phone. Here’s how to get started.

    Instantly move all iOS data to Android with built-in tools

    The quickest and the most reliable way to move your iPhone’s data is with your Android phone’s built-in migration app. Most Android phones ship with a one-stop tool that lets you instantly import your iPhone’s contacts, pictures, videos, texts, call history and other documents. If your new Android phone comes equipped with such a service, you likely won’t need to go anywhere else.

    While setting up a Google Pixel, for instance, you’re asked if you’d like to transfer content from your old iPhone. Once you opt in, all you need to do is connect both the devices with the dongle in your Pixel’s box and, within minutes or hours depending on the amount of data you have, you should be all set. In addition to the usual collection of information such as texts and call logs, the Google Pixel also automatically downloads Android counterparts for the apps you have installed on your iPhone.

    Similarly, Samsung Galaxy phones have an app called “Smart Switch,” which can wirelessly export all your iPhone data like apps, contacts, call logs, messages, photos, and videos. Unlike Google’s solution, you can take advantage of Smart Switch even after you’ve set up your Samsung Galaxy phone.

    Move iPhone data to Android with Google Drive

    In case your Android phone doesn’t support an all-in-one transfer app, or if it’s not available beyond the initial setup stage, Google Drive is your next best option. However, this method is far from perfect since the Google Drive app can only sync your iPhone’s contacts, calendar appointments, and photo library. For the rest of the content, like texts and call logs, you’ll have to look for any alternate channels, which, unfortunately, aren’t that many.

    Download the Google Drive app on your iOS device and sign in with the same Google account you plan to use on your Android phone. Tap the three-line button at the top left corner and head into Settings > Backup.

    Select what kind of data you want to include in the backup. From the “Photos & Videos” option, you can also specify whether you’d like to upload your photos and videos in their original quality or a space-saving compressed format.

    Tap “Start Backup,” and your iPhone will begin backing up the files on your Google cloud storage. Once it completes, the data should be available in its respective app on your Android phone. So, contacts will go into the Contacts app, events in Calendar, and media in Google Photos.

    Transfer iPhone data to Android via third-party service

    For the remainder of your iPhone data, you can turn to third-party services like MobileTrans. This desktop software can transfer content between phones with a click of a button. It can sync your contacts, call history, voicemail, reminders, and just about everything else you’d want to keep from your old phone — for a price. MobileTrans is not free, and you will have to shell out at least $45 to access it.

    If you do decide to pay for MobileTrans, there’s little you need to do next. Start by plugging in both your iPhone and Android phone to your Mac or Windows PC. Open the MobileTrans app and grant the necessary permissions from the pop-ups on your devices. Keep your phones unlocked while MobileTrans will take a couple of minutes to siphon up all the data from them.

    On the MobileTrans app, make sure your iPhone is on the left side of the window, and in case it isn’t, click the “Flip” in the top center. Now, pick what data you want to migrate from the list of checkboxes in the middle and hit “Start” to kick off the transfer process. MobileTrans will move the selected data to your Android phone in a few minutes or hours and notify you when it’s done.

    MobileTrans also offers mobile apps if you don’t want to install it on your computer or migrate the data wirelessly, but it failed to work in my testing.

    Shubham Agarwal is a freelance technology journalist from Ahmedabad, India. His work has previously appeared in Business Insider, Fast Company, HuffPost, and more. You can reach out to him on Twitter.

    When you switch from iPhone to a brand new OnePlus phone, you start with a different experience. It’s a wonderful thing. However, to begin using it, you should consider transferring data from the old iPhone to the new OnePlus. This can seem a bit daunting — you’re not just switching to a new device, you’re switching to an entirely new ecosystem — but it’s in fact very easy.

    That’s where this guide comes in handy! Here we’ll show you 4 ways to transfer data from iPhone to OnePlus Android phone, so you can still come by most of the data you have before and lose next to nothing important. If you have data backed in iTunes or iCloud, you can still find options here to restore those data and move to OnePlus without hassle.

    Way 1: Transfer iPhone data to OnePlus with OnePlus Switch app

    To solve some of this consternation, OnePlus official offers assistance in the form of the “OnePlus Switch” app to help users seamlessly move data to new OnePlus device from iPhone. It won’t move everything, but it will take care of the essential data, like contacts, photos, videos, audios, messages and calendar. More detains here.

    Here’s everything you need to do to take OnePlus Switch for data transfer from iPhone to OnePlus.

    • Open OnePlus Switch app in OnePlus, and select “I’m a new phone.”
    • Select your old device as iPhone.
    • Tap “CONTINUE” and you will get a Network name and Password of the hotspot.
    • Open OnePlus Switch in iPhone, and select “I’m an old phone.”
    • Tap “Connect” button.
    • Go to Wi-Fi, enter the password for Network name shown on OnePlus to build connection.
    • Select the data you want to transfer.
    • Tap “Start”.

    Keeping OnePlus Switch open until it finishes transferring to OnePlus from iPhone.

    How to switch from ios to android

    Way 2: Migrate iPhone stuff to OnePlus using Phone Transfer

    Unable to install OnePlus Switch on iPhone? Or you would like to get data transferred from iPhone to OnePlus in one go without messing around with any settings in your device, then Phone Transfer is a great choice for you.

    It’s capable of sending or receiving content from your smartphone you threw in an easy and straightforward way. Contacts, images, messages, tracks, call history, videos, calendar are all supported. It even allows you to back up your device to your computer, and retrieve it to device of your choice in case something goes wrong in future.

    To move iPhone files to OnePlus phone, you first need to download the copy of the software and install on your computer. After you’ve done that, follow these steps to set up transferring.

    Step 1: Connect both iPhone and OnePlus to computer

    First up, launch the program. In the opening main interface select the green “Phone to Phone Transfer” mode to proceed.

    How to switch from ios to android

    On the next window, plug your two devices into the computer via USB cables. On your OnePlus Android phone, you’ll have to enable USB Debugging mode.

    How to switch from ios to android

    Step 2: Select data for transfer

    When the connection is done, you will see two images on both sides representing iPhone and OnePlus phone. In this example, we’re going to make transfer from iPhone to OnePlus, so make sure iPhone is connected as source device on the left side and OnePlus on the other side. Flip option is available for you to switch their position.

    Go ahead and check the boxes next to types of data you want to transfer to OnePlus.

    How to switch from ios to android

    Step 3: Start moving iPhone data to OnePlus

    Now it’s time to start the transfer task. Simply click the Start Copy button at the bottom and let the program transfer data files on iPhone to OnePlus smartphone.

    How to switch from ios to android

    Way 3: Restore iTunes backup to OnePlus

    Usually, your data is stored on the iPhone and you can use the OnePlus data transfer tools mentioned above to move it to the new device. What if you lost the iPhone and want to restore data to OnePlus from iTunes backup you made before? You’re still lucky enough. Phone Transfer integrates options to extracts data from iTunes backup transfer over to OnePlus Android phone.

    • Connect the OnePlus to computer, and enable USB Debugging mode.
    • Launch Phone Transfer.
    • Click “Restore from backups” on the window.
    • Click iTunes. This will list all of iTunes backup files it detects in this computer.
    • Choose the most relevant backup.
    • Select the data files you want to move.
    • Click “Start Transfer” button.

    How to switch from ios to android

    Your data restored from iTunes backup will be transferred to OnePlus.

    Way 4: Restore iPhone data to OnePlus from iCloud backups

    Want to restore iCloud backup files to OnePlus? That’s possible and simple.

    • Download, install Phone Transfer on computer, open it.
    • Attach the OnePlus device to computer, and enable USB Debugging mode.
    • Click “Restore from backups” on the window.
    • Click iCloud, and then sign in with your Apple ID
    • Select the most relevant backup to download.
    • Choose the content you wish to transfer to OnePlus.
    • Click “Start Transfer”.

    When the restore process is done, all your chosen data should appear on the new OnePlus device.

    How to Transfer iPad Songs to HTC Android Phone

    How Do You Migrate Text Messages from Huawei to iPhone 12

    How Do I Transfer My Contacts from iPhone to Samsung

    How Do I Copy All Your Call Logs from iPhone to LG Phone

    OnePlus: OnePlus 8T, OnePlus 8 Pro, OnePlus 7, OnePlus 7 Pro, 6T, 5T, 3T (Nov. 2016), 3 (Jun. 2016), etc.

    Last year, reports began circulating that Google was developing a “Switch to Android” app for iOS users looking to make the jump from iPhone to a smartphone running Google’s Android OS. Now that app has arrived. On Monday, Google quietly launched the Switch to Android app on the App Store in a number of global markets, including the U.S. As expected, the app promises to make the transition between mobile platforms easier to manage by helping users import their contacts, calendar, photos, and videos to their new Android phone.

    The app also instructs users how to turn off Apple’s iMessage in order to get text messages on their new device and has them connect with iCloud to migrate their photo and video library to Android.

    How to switch from ios to android

    Image Credits: Google

    Google’s Switch to Android website has not yet been updated to indicate the new app is available and the company hasn’t officially announced its launch. The app is also not appearing on Google’s developer page on the App Store or in App Store search results. It can only be found when clicking the direct link.

    Currently, the Switch to Android website guides users through the standard process for moving to Android which involves users backing up their contacts, calendar, photos, and videos via the Google Drive iOS app before changing devices.

    The company’s plan to develop a standalone app for iPhone-to-Android switchers was first uncovered last year, when the website 9to5Google dug into the code within Android’s official Data Restore Tool and spotted a reference to a Google-developed Switch to Android app for iOS. The site just last month noted the app appeared to have gained the ability automatically migrate a users’ photos and videos from iCloud to Google Photos, also based on mentions in another Android app’s code.

    There have been other hints that Google has been working to make it easier for users to shift their media content to its own platform and services through backend developments. Recently, Google announced an update to the Google Photos app that offered a way for mobile device owners to copy over photos from rival cloud storage services, including iCloud, Facebook and others. Before, transfers had to originate from Facebook or iCloud, not from Google’s app itself.

    Unfortunately, one thing Google’s new Switch to Android iOS app doesn’t help with is migrating a users’ applications. This is likely due to limitations as to what third-party apps can access on the user’s device. Apps aren’t supposed to scan the user’s iPhone to extract a list of all the other apps a user has installed, that is.

    In its App Store description, the new app promotes its ability to handle moving users’ content between devices without the use of “fussy cables,” meaning the two phones don’t have to be physically linked together to complete the process, as an added perk.

    Google’s app is arriving many years after Apple’s app that helped switch Android users to iPhone. Back in September 2015, Apple launched its Move to iOS app for Android users which, notably, was its first app on Google Play (besides those from its acquisition Beats.). Similarly, its app helped to migrate users’ data including their Camera Roll, Messages, Google Account, Contacts, and Bookmarks.

    The app is publicly available from the URL here:

    Google didn’t provide comment ahead of publication, but later reached out to alert us to the fact that the app is not currently available for download in the iOS app store — as we had already noted in our original story above.

    Updated 4/13/22, 3:50 PM ET with Google’s comment.

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    A strong, rugged dog, the Belgian Malinois exhibits a wide range of temperament and aggressiveness. This breed is not suitable for households with small, erratic children.

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    The Belgian Malinois is a working breed with needs only an experienced owner can meet.

    Weight Range:

    Male: 55-75 lbs.
    Female: 40-60 lbs.

    Height at Withers:


    Upright ears (naturally)


    Exercise Requirements: >40 minutes/day
    Energy Level: Very energetic
    Longevity Range: 10-12 yrs.
    Tendency to Drool: Low Tendency to Snore: Low
    Tendency to Bark: Moderate
    Tendency to Dig: Low Social/Attention Needs: Moderate

    Bred For:

    Length: Short
    Characteristics: Double coat, flat, straight
    Colors: Rich fawn with black tipped hairs, mahogany with black tipped hairs
    Overall Grooming Needs: Moderate

    Club Recognition:

    AKC Classification: Herding
    UKC Classification: Herding Dog
    Prevalence: So-so

    The Belgian Malinois is an elegant, well-proportioned, natural, medium-sized, square dog.

    He gives the impression of elegant robustness. He is a hardy dog, accustomed to living outdoors with a coat built to resist the damp Belgian climate. His elegance and expression denote great strength of character, making him a proud representative of the herding breeds. The Belgian Malinois is an enthusiastic and quick dog with a natural tendency to be in motion. Males are 24 to 26 inches tall and weigh 55 to 75 pounds (25 to 34 kilograms). Females are 22 to 24 inches and weigh 40 to 60 pounds (18 to 27 kilograms).

    The coat should be comparatively short and straight, hard enough to be weather resistant, with a dense undercoat. It should be very short on the head, ears and lower legs. The hair is somewhat longer around the neck where it forms a collarette, and on the tail and backs of the thighs. The coat should conform to the body without standing out or hanging down.

    The basic coloring is a rich fawn to mahogany, with black tips on the hairs giving an overlay appearance. The mask and ears are black. The Belgian Malinois is a double-coated breed and will generally shed twice a year. Bathing when dirty, brushing once or twice a week, and clipping the nails will keep your Malinois in great condition.


    The Belgian Malinois excels not only in herding, but also in protection and law enforcement; drug, bomb, and gas detection; search and rescue; tracking; obedience; sledding; agility; and therapy assistance to disabled, ill or elderly people. This dog is demanding and needs an experienced owner. A wide range is seen in temperament and aggressiveness. They want nothing more than to be with their family, which makes them unsuitable as a kennel dog.

    Living With:

    The Belgian Malinois is a very smart and obedient dog. He has strong protective and territorial instincts. This breed needs extensive socialization from an early age, and firm, but not harsh, training. Belgians are instinctively protective so they should be trained and socialized very well from an early age. Unless you are specifically working in a protection sport, you do not need to give your Belgian any protection training, as it will come naturally to them. Belgians make excellent pets for the right homes, as they thrive on loving companionship. Malinois instinctively display herding behavior such as chasing and circling, moving effortlessly for hours and nipping at people’s heels. The dog is good for working and competitive obedience, but not for toddlers who run and scream. A Belgian Malinois will constantly be trying to keep the toddler in one spot!

    The Belgian Malinois can live in an apartment if it is sufficiently exercised. Moderately active indoors, he will do best with at least an average-sized yard. He prefers cool climates, but readily adapts well to others. A Belgian Malinois should live to be 12 to 15 years.


    The Belgian Malinois is one of the varieties of the Belgian shepherd. All are named for Belgian villages: Groenendael, Laekenois, Mechelar (Malinois) and Tervuren.

    The history of the Belgian Malinois goes back to the 1880s when these dogs (with German shepherds, French shepherds and Dutch shepherds) were called continental shepherd dogs. In 1891, the Belgian Shepherd Dog Club was formed, and a panel of judges determined that there was a congruous type of native shepherd dog that was a square, medium-sized dog with well-set triangular ears. These dogs differed only in the texture, color and length of hair. In 1892, the first Belgian shepherd dog standard was written recognizing three varieties: dogs with long coats, short coats and rough coats.

    The Belgian Malinois, along with the Groenendael, was the first variety to appear in the United States in the early part of the 1900s. The Belgian Sheepdog Club of America (the Malinois, Groenendael, and Tervuren were all the same breed at that time) was formed and the breed began to show in the American Kennel Club in the early 1950s. In 1959 the Belgians separated into the three AKC breeds recognized today, sheepdog, Tervuren and Malinois.

    Once you have contacted a breeder, how do you know if that person is a reputable breeder who cares about the breed and about the people to whom he or she sells? Although the impulse to get a dog right away can be very strong, resist it. You are going to have this puppy for the next 12 years or so. It will be well worth taking your time to find the right breeder and waiting until puppies are available, if necessary.

    Answer the following questions to decide if the breeder that you are thinking of buying a puppy from is reputable or not. You should answer “Yes” to most and hopefully all the questions, otherwise we would recommend that you keep looking. Try not to purchase a puppy just because it is all that is available right now.

    1. Are the sire and dam both over two years old?

    Yes _________No __________

    Both sire and dam should be at least 2 years of age or older and have health clearances. Certification for hips and elbows cannot be done until a dog is at least two years of age. Having these certifications helps limit the chance that your puppy will develop one of these problems. Also some inheritable health problems, such as epilepsy, may not show up until three years of age or older.

    2. Do both the sire and dam have health clearances and has the breeder given you copies?

    Yes __________No ___________

    A reputable breeder should be able to show you proof that both the sire and dam of the litter have had their hips and elbows X-rayed, and evaluated as normal by the Orthopedic Foundation for Animals (OFA) or by one of the following organizations; PennHIP, Genetic Disease Control (GDC), or a foreign registry. They also should have had their eyes examined and certified free of hereditary disease by a veterinary ophthalmologist with the Canine Eye Registration Foundation (CERF) within the last 12 months. The breeder should also be willing to answer your questions about any other possible hereditary problems, including but not limited to seizures.
    Here are the website addresses for the OFA and CERF. You can go online and check on an individual dog and his/her clearance status by typing in his/her registration number, OFA or CERF number, and Name (usually registered AKC name which includes the kennel name).

    3. Have you met the sire and dam, has the breeders sent you pictures and references?

    Yes __________No ___________

    If distance makes it impossible for you to meet the sire and dam then the breeder should be willing to give you references of people who have purchased puppies in the past, names of other breeders, and the veterinarian that cares for the their dogs. Don’t just take the breeder’s word for it that their dogs have great temperaments or look beautiful.

    4. Does the breeder only sell puppies that are at least 8 weeks old? Do they provide a health record of the puppy and instructions on care?

    Yes __________ No ___________

    Most breeders will not take a puppy away from its mother before 8 weeks of age and will permanently identify every puppy, by either tattoo or microchip prior to being placed in its new home. They should also provide a record of vaccinations and de-worming and instructions on care and feeding.

    5. Will the breeder provide you with a 3 generation pedigree, AKC registration papers and a copy of their contract/guarantee?

    Yes __________No ___________

    You should be provided with at least a 3-generation pedigree, AKC registration and a contract and/or guarantee. AKC registration may be done online by the breeder. More information on AKC registration can be found here: register/information/

    A responsible breeder will guarantee their puppies for any genetic diseases that may occur or against show-ring disqualifications in an animal intended for showing or breeding. The contract should be explicit and a signed copy should be provided to each party. A responsible breeder will take back a puppy or dog (no matter the age) if you are unhappy with it. In fact, many breeders will insist that you return a dog to them if you cannot keep it for any reason. Their concern for the puppies they produce does not end when the puppy goes home with you, but lasts for the dog’s lifetime.

    6. Did the breeder screen you as a puppy buyer?

    Yes __________No ___________

    A reputable breeder will ask you questions about what you hope to do with the puppy, where it will live, whether you have a fenced yard, and how you will take care of it. They may also ask you what kinds of dogs you have in the past, and what happened to them. This indicates that the breeder cares for the ongoing welfare of the dogs he or she produces.

    7. Do the sire and dam have titles in conformation, obedience, agility, herding, tracking, Schutzhund or other activities?

    While a title before or after a dog’s name does not prove anything, it does suggest that the dog has both the ability and temperament to excel in a given activity. Titles also suggest that the breeder is active and interested in the world of purebred dogs that they are breeding for a purpose, not simply to make money.

    8. Does the breeder know the breed well?

    Yes __________No ___________

    A responsible breeder will know the Belgian Malinois breed. They will know about the health and temperament problems that exist in the breed. They will be able to talk to you about the energy level of these dogs and help you determine if this is the right breed for you. An experienced breeder will also know how to recognize certain traits in individual puppies that will help him or her match the right puppy to the right home.

    Now that you have asked all of your questions be prepared to answer some from the breeder. Responsible breeders do not just sell puppies; they place them into proper homes. The breeder has put a lot into his litter in terms of time, money and love – love not only of his dogs but also for the breed itself. Do not be offended if you are asked questions about YOUR qualifications to be a Belgian Malinois owner. A dedicated breeder will not pressure you to buy his puppies. He will encourage you to discuss the breed, both its positive and negative attributes, and to talk with other breeders.

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Dog Blog – November 13, 2019

    Belgian Malinois: The Hero You Probably Don’t Want in Your Home

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Hailed as a national hero, Conan the Belgian Malinois was wounded after chasing ISIS leader Abu Bakr al-Baghdadi down a dead-end tunnel just before he detonated his suicide vest. Conan’s actions have sparked a renewed interest in this breed, with people scrambling to bring them home. Here are some reasons why you may, however, want to reconsider choosing this type of dog as your family pet.

    What is a Belgian Malinois?

    The Belgian Malinois is a medium to large dog similar in looks to the German Shephard. They are extremely attractive and have been fastidiously bred for their physical strength, athletic build, and intelligence. These driven and skilled animals have a reputation as being one of the preeminent police dogs in the world and with good reason.

    Not only are Mals able to quickly learn new skills, but they are also extremely keen to do so. In fact, they are often eager to do whatever their owner asks of them. This natural willingness to learn makes them suitable for everything from drug-sniffing, to bomb-detection, to search and rescue.

    Sounds great, right?

    Such training capabilities can make them seem highly desirable as pets. Yet to better understand this breed, you need to know one thing – they are primarily a working dog. Everything about their temperament is geared towards being useful. This serves towards making Mals very intense animals that require a lot of care and attention.

    Originally bred for herding, in the house, a Mal will typically see its role as both guard and protector. For this reason, substantial training and socialization are vital to ensure that they understand appropriate behaviors and don’t become overly wary of and a danger towards people they don’t know. This is a very time demanding process. Additionally, their excessively playful nature, coupled with a strong prey drive, can make them an inadvertent risk to young children or small pets.

    They require a lot of attention from their owner

    Alongside this, as a high-energy breed, they require a substantial amount of exercise to keep them happy. Their needs cannot be met with just a leisurely walk on the leash. Furthermore, their prized intelligence means that they also require significant mental stimulation. Problems can arise when they are underemployed or neglected.

    This is a dog that does not do well with boredom – Mals can become restless and frustrated when they don’t have a job to do. This means that they aren’t well suited to households where the owners work long hours or travel often. Excess energy, coupled with such boredom, could have them tearing your house apart.

    Be sure you understand what you would be getting yourself into

    So, while the decision to take on any kind of dog should always be taken seriously, with a working breed of this nature, this is even more crucial. The simple truth is that Mals, as loyal and lovable as they can be, were never meant to be a family pet. They need a perfect combination of stimulation, physical activity, and socialization, and a failure to keep them busy could result in them becoming challenging to handle. The pounds are full of such poor animals.

    So who should get a Mal?

    Individuals with a great deal of dog experience should only consider taking in a Mal if they have a significant amount of time and energy to dedicate to the task of training and exercising them. Ideally, this breed should only ever be taken on as working dogs. They crave activity. This is not a low-maintenance breed!

    Take it from us!

    In the right home, these smart, active dogs can flourish. Our Mal, Zera, is an amazing pet, but she is very much a working dog. She is trained to detect narcotics, and she is very good at it! But if she didn’t have her job, there is no doubt that she would go crazy and drive us insane right along with her!

    By Nicole Cosgrove

    Updated on Jan 16, 2022

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Most of us enjoy pets because they become loyal companions, but some people want that companionship with the added benefit of protection. The Belgian Malinois is a specific breed known for being protective, territorial, and strong. They are intelligent dogs that look similar to a German Shepherd. Their brave yet loving temperament makes them ideal work dogs, but these pups are also good to have around a family to keep them safe. You might not have heard of this breed before, but once you see all their good qualities, it’s a little too easy to decide that you want one as your next pet.

    Belgian Malinois Dog Cost: One-Time Costs

    The Belgian Malinois dog has a variety of colors like grey, black, red, and fawn. The puppies are small, but they grow to stand 26 inches tall and weigh up to 60 pounds. These are the dogs you want if you’re looking for someone to protect you. They were originally bred to protect livestock, and they now use those traits to dedicate their time and energy to look out for you.

    You can’t put a price on having a sense of security and furry friend all in one. These aren’t the cheapest dog breed, but they are definitely one that is affordable for those who are on a strict budget.

    Free Belgian Malinoises

    It is rare to find a Belgian Malinois for free unless it is being rehomed. If that’s the case, you might want to look into their behavioral or health issues. Ask questions about why the dog is free to get an in-depth understanding of their background and present situation. As we said before, free dogs are rare, and adoption is the next cheapest option if you can’t afford to pay the upfront price to a breeder.

    Belgian Malinois Adoption


    Many dogs put up for adoption are full-grown. This takes away the new charm of a puppy but increases your chances of buying a trained dog at a much more affordable price. Adoptions usually include a variety of first-time costs like shots and spaying or neutering. You won’t always have a detailed medical history, but they will have gotten several health screenings before you bring them home.

    Belgian Malinois Breeders


    Buying your Belgian Malinois from a licensed breeder is the best option for most people. It is a bit more expensive but one of the only ways to have information on your pet’s bloodline and health predispositions.

    This smart breed requires a lot of training and patience throughout the process. There are breeders who put their dogs through training and then sell the trained dogs for a higher price. This is ideal if you’ve never raised a dog before. Remember, these dogs are smart and, as their master, you must be firm with your demands.

    Belgian Malinois Price: Initial Setup and Supplies


    Setting up a home for a new Belgian Malinois dog isn’t much work, but it will require you to spend a few extra bucks. Make sure your dog has a bed that is large enough for them to comfortably lay on. Use clean food and water bowls and buy them a collar with an ID tag on it in case they wander and get lost in their new neighborhood.

    The Mykolayiv Regiment of the National Guard of Ukraine has grown by four paws recently thanks to the addition of a trained special forces dog. But Max’s journey to joining the Ukrainian troops was far from conventional.

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    The three-year-old Belgian Malinois originally arrived in the area with the Russian invasion. A member of the Russian special forces, he served alongside Putin’s forces as they occupied the area. When the Russian forces were driven out, they left behind many dangerous objects including unbroken shells, mines, and ammunition. In addition to the explosives, they abandoned Max.

    “The shepherd belonged to the occupiers who captured one of the villages of the Nikolaev region and when during the liberation of the territory they were crushed by Ukrainian defenders – all the dogs ran into the village. One of the families took in Max,” the National Guard of Ukraine shared in a Facebook post.

    During the time that he was left to fend for himself, the highly trained dog survived on rotten food that he found in the area. His identity was revealed by a camouflage collar around his neck with the inscription “5.45 Zashchitnik” (Defender), signifying his role with the special forces.

    The family that cared for him released Max into the care of the Ukrainian forces where he could put his special training to use for the country that showed him such care and compassion.

    Belgian Malinois dogs have a long history of serving in military and police roles, dating back as far as World War 1. Today they continue to serve with law enforcement personnel and even work with the elite Navy SEALS. Their strong and muscular build makes them a highly athletic and versatile breed. At the same time, they are highly intelligent, confident, and fiercely loyal.

    Max has been partnered up with a Ukrainian National Guard dog handler.

    “Max is in excellent physical shape. He knows all the basic commands. So far, he understands teams only in the language of the occupiers, but Ukrainian language classes have already begun,” explained Dmytro, a National Guard fighter. “So far, he understands teams only in the language of the occupiers, but Ukrainian language classes have already begun.”

    The trophy dog has quickly found his place among the guards. He is now proudly serving as a dog sniffer of unexploded mines.

    It’s an important role as the Ukrainians work to clear their land of the dangerous Russian explosives. Max will join other hardworking dogs in this mission including Patron, a Jack Russell terrier that was recently awarded a medal for his services by Ukraine’s President Volodymyr Zelensky.

    At the young age of two and a half years, Patron is credited with helping to identify and clear more than 200 devices. The small hero has gained a lot of attention and even has his own official Instagram page with over 270,000 followers. When he’s not sniffing out undetonated explosives, Patron can be seen doing other important work such as greeting children from Okhmatdyt children’s hospital in Kyiv.

    Both Max and Patron demonstrate that dogs truly are “man’s best friend.”

    About Belgian Malinois

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    If you don’t stop and look twice, you might confuse the Belgian Malinois with a really tough-looking German Shepherd. That would be a big mistake and an unfair burden to put on the Belgian Malinois. Although they both hail from the same general region of Europe, there are some key differences between the breeds that you’ll want to be aware of. Considered good as a guard or police dog, the Belgian Malinois actually looks like the police of the dog world, strong and square and certainly ready for action. He’s a pupper authority figure. Ready to keep all other dogges in line.

    While the Belgian Malinois can be incredibly loyal and even obedient, they’re definitely not a dog for someone who isn’t able to demonstrate authority over a dog. If you’re a particularly passive owner who prefers a dog who develops its own personality naturally, the Belgian Malinois is probably not for you. They can be territorial and while not always aggressive, they’ll need proper training and socialization from a young age to bring out their innate friendliness and general cooperation. This is not an an ideal pet for a first time dog owner. It takes a certain type of owner to keep up.

    Are you that type of owner? There’s only one way to find out. Keep your eyes glued to this page and scroll away. All will be revealed. By the end of this article, you’ll either be running out to bring home a Belgian Malinois or frantically searching for a different dog. So what are you waiting for? Read on…

    If you don’t stop and look twice, you might confuse the Belgian Malinois with a really tough-looking German Shepherd.

    One of four Belgian sheep dogs – that is, dogs commonly used to herd sheep – the Belgian Malinois is actually far more popular in its home country of Belgium than it is in the U.S., even despite the relative popularity of the German Shepherd. Hard to believe, but true. While there are three other breeds of Belgian sheep dogs, many have considered them all the same breed with minimal differences, such as the color of their coat.

    Even so, the Belgian Malinois gained American Kennel Club recognition as a breed in its own right in 1959. The breed is just that well respected. In the United Kingdom, however, the more European way of acknowledging this dog as part of a larger breed is still adopted. This can make for some confusion between the two continents, but when you see a Belgian Malinois, there can be little mistaking that you’re looking at a very serious dog indeed.

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Closely related to its other four sheep dog breeds, the Belgian Malinois has a similar backstory to that of the German Shepherd. Being used to round up sheep and to accompany farmers in their daily work, the Belgian Malinois obviously carries its pedigree from Belgium, with a very strong Belgian identity. There can be no mistaking a Malinois for a German Shepherd should you actually visit one of the two countries.

    The breed was clearly developed with a number of strong qualities in mind, such as strength, agility, and a number of other physical characteristics. There is little that will actually frighten a Belgian Malinois out on the farm, although they can become territorial and a little bit wary of strangers, perhaps a relic of being on isolated Belgian farms through much of its pedigree’s history.

    Capable of eating plenty of meat, the Belgian Malinois is a good-sized dog that will need a good-sized diet, at least relative to other dogs. Even so, it’s important to keep in mind that the Belgian Malinois is actually relatively small in weight compared to humans and it has a lighter frame that can be a little deceptive, so be sure not to overfeed your dog.

    As always, if you are in any way concerned about establishing or significantly altering your dog’s diet, then it’s worth consulting with a veterinarian first. While dog food manufacturers and pet blogs may provide useful feeding guidelines, they are still just guidelines and will not apply to every dog. All dogs are different after all, each with their own needs. The only person qualified to determine the specific dietary needs of your personal pooch is a vet. So always rely on their expertise before making any changes to what goes into your pup’s bowl.

    The Belgian Malinois is actually far more popular in its home country of Belgium than it is in the U.S.

    Training is important to this breed. Proper training, a consistent set of boundaries and discipline, and a master with a good presence of mind will all be important. This dog is not like the Golden Retriever, where training and socialization can be quite easy. Instead, the Belgian Malinois can be territorial and fearful of strangers if not raised properly, and will become uncooperative if not trained for obedience.

    When trained properly, there are few dogs more loyal and obedient than the Belgian Malinois. As long as you can demonstrate authority over this dog, you should be fine. If this worries you, another breed might be more appropriate. It takes a special type of owner to train this breed. Even experienced dog owners may want to consider bringing in a professional trainer and enrolling their Belgian Malinois in obedience school. While this is a wonderful dog when properly trained, it takes extra special care to get there. So don’t take on this responsibility unless you are prepared for the necessary (and significant) commitment.

    Weighing around 55-65 pounds, this is a larger dog with plenty of power, so be sure to treat it with the respect such a size requires.

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    • Other names:
    • Belgian Shepherd Dog
    • Mechelaar
    • Malinois
    • Mechelse Shepherd
    • Belgian Herder

    The Belgian Malinois is a highly intelligent breed famed for its accomplishments as a police and military dog. In these roles the Malinois is an expert narcotics and explosives detector, a fearless scout, and an unyielding protector. As one might expect, this breed is hard-working, intense, and very loyal. It is a breed that yearns to be challenged physically and mentally. Not for the novice owner, the Belgian Malinois needs a firm yet compassionate leader who is willing to spend time with his or her dog each day. Training and socialization are a must for a well-rounded dog, and taking the dog out for strenuous exercise is very important. Though this breed may be a load of work, owners will tell you that having such an intelligent and loyal dog around is in every way worth it.

    Belgian Malinois Breed Details

    Breed Specs

    Type Lifespan Height Weight
    Purebred 10-12 yrs. 22-28 in. 55-75 lbs
    • Friendliness
    • Overall
    • Family Friendly
    • Kid Friendly
    • Pet Friendly
    • Stranger Friendly
    • Maintenance
    • Easy to Groom
    • Energy Level
    • Exercise Needs
    • General Health
    • Shedding Amount
    • Behavior
    • Barks / Howls
    • Easy to Train
    • Guard Dog
    • Playfulness
    • Watch Dog
    • Ownership
    • Apartment Friendly
    • Can Be Alone
    • Good for Busy Owners
    • Good for Novice Owners
    • Intelligence

    * The more green the stronger the trait.

    Below are details and facts for the Belgian Malinois dog breed.

    Belgian Malinois Breed Description

    The Belgian Malinois is considered a medium sized breed. Adult males average a height of 24 – 28 inches and weigh between 65 and 75 pounds. Adult females will stand 22 – 24 inches tall and weigh between 55 and 65 pounds. Strong and well-built, these robust dogs are highly versatile and excel in a wide variety of roles; as an agility competitor or a guard dog, there are few breeds that can outmatch the Belgian Malinois.

    The Belgian Malinois is loyal and terribly smart. These dogs continue to excel in a number of roles and remain one of the most popular dogs in military service across the globe. Originally bred as working dogs, Malinois’ are very energetic and demand an owner who can keep up with their energy level. Though unaggressive, these dogs are highly sensitive and have an intense disposition. A properly trained and socialized Malinois should be a gentle creature and watchful of children, but children should also be made to understand that these are not dogs to shout at or mess with while eating.

    This breed is medium to high maintenance. Grooming this breed is fairly simple; brushing a few times a week will keep the coat healthy, and they shed an average amount. Exercise needs for the Belgian Malinois are above average. A short walk is not enough to properly exercise this dog. Being a working breed, they will require at least an hour’s worth of strenuous exercise to be at their best both physically and mentally.

    Belgian Malinois Breed History

    In the 1800’s, four varieties of herding dogs were common around the Belgian countryside. Belgian sheepherders bred these dogs to be obedient and hardworking farm workers; as dog shows became fashionable around Belgium these dogs were often brought out to compete in various contests. In 1891, a veterinary professor by the name of Adolphe Reul discovered that some of the Belgian herding dogs were noticeably different than the other dogs (collectively known as Chiens de Berger Belge) in coat type and color. Reul found out that these short-haired and fawn colored dogs were being bred in the city of Malines, and in 1892 he wrote the first standard for the Belgian Shepherd Dog.

    In 1911 the Belgian Shepherd was recognized by the American Kennel Club. During the pandemonium of World War I, breeding efforts were severely hampered, and the breed narrowly escaped extinction. Just as the breed was beginning to flourish, World War II broke out, and Belgian Shepherd dogs were recruited into military service en masse, once again depleting their numbers. These intelligent dogs played an important role, however, as scouts, messengers, and patrol dogs in the Allied armies.

    In 1959 the American Kennel Club decided to split the Belgian Shepherd Dog into separate breeds, and in 1965 the Belgian Malinois was awarded full AKC recognition as a working dog. In 1983 they were moved into the herding group where they remain today. Though the Malinois is not extremely popular among Americans, it has gained fame and recognition recently for its exploits as a military dog—a Malinois was part of the team that captured Osama Bin Laden—and as the breed used by the Secret Service, and many people expect to see more Belgian Malinois amongst American families in the years ahead.

    Belgian Malinois Appearance

    The Belgian Malinois is a robust and sturdy dog of good proportion. It is square framed with a mostly level topline, which stands in contrast to the German Shepherd, which has a rectangular frame with a sloping torso. These dogs stand proud and erect; a Belgian Malinois is a formidable dog with an air of dignity about it. The coat is short, straight, and weather-resistant, meaning it can repel water and frost, allowing the dog to stay warm. The hair around the neck is usually slightly longer than on the rest of the body.

    Belgian Malinois have a skull that is roughly equal in width and length. Their powerful jaw is lined with scissor-like teeth that can bite at approximately 1,400 pounds per square inch. The ears are large, pointed, and almost always stand erect, giving the dog a very alert appearance. Their almond-shaped eyes are dark brown. The tail is thick at the base, tapering slightly. Some dogs have a tail that is held up and curls forward over the rump while others carry their tail down.

    Belgian Malinois Coloring

    According to the American Kennel Club, the standard colors for this breed are fawn, fawn sable, mahogany, red, and red sable. A black mask is permitted as a standard marking. Other non-standard coat colors include black, brindle, cream, cream sable, gray, gray sable, and liver.

    Belgian Malinois Size

    The Belgian Malinois is considered a medium sized breed. Adult males will generally reach a height of 24 – 28 inches and weigh between 64 – 75 pounds. Females will stand 22 – 24 inches tall and weigh between 55 – 66 pounds.

    The Belgian Malinois is a sheepdog that is sometimes mistaken for a German Shepherd. It is, however, more elegant and lighter-boned. Alert, with lots of energy, the Belgian Malinois is popular as both a police and military working dog.

    Physical Characteristics

    The Belgian Malinois is of moderate weight, with a square-proportioned and powerful body. It has an impressively effortless, easy, and smooth gait that enables it to remain tireless throughout the day. The breed also possesses oval-shaped bones and an intelligent expression. Its undercoat, meanwhile, is short, stiff, and straight, which is one of the breed’s most distinct characteristic.

    The basic coloring of a Belgian Malinois is a rich fawn to mahogany, with black tips on the hairs, as well as black ears and mask.

    Personality and Temperament

    The Belgian Malinois breed has a protective instinct that makes it superb for guarding the home. The active, intelligent, and sometimes dominating Belgian Malinois is always alert and aware of its surrounding. It may show signs of aggression towards other animals and dogs at times, and prefers to stay aware from strangers.

    Although it can survive outdoors under various weather conditions, it prefers to remain indoors with access to fields or wide open spaces. Its favorite activities include herding, playing, and jogging, all of which are excellent sources of exercise for the breed. The Belgian Malinois’ coat must be combed occasionally and more during periods of shedding.


    Although the Belgian Malinois, which has an average lifespan of 10 to 12 years, is not prone to any major health issues, it does suffer occasionally from elbow dysplasia, pannus, progressive retinal atrophy (PRA), hemangiosarcoma, and cataract. To identify some of these issues early, a veterinarian may recommend regular tests on the dog’s eyes, hips, and elbows.

    History and Background

    Belgian Malinois dogs are more popular as police dogs than as house or show animals. In fact, demand for the breed as a police dog has surpassed the German Shepherd. Historically, all the Belgian sheepherding breeds, that were known as Chiens de Berger Belge collectively, were used as watchdogs as well as herders. With the popularity of dog shows in the 19th century, it was not very clear whether Belgium had any nationally distinguishable breed or not.

    During a study in 1891, Professor Reul discovered some native dogs that differed in color and coat from the Chiens de Berger Belge and named them as Belgian Shepherds. It was in the area of Malines that the short-haired variety was bred and that they came to be identified as the Belgian Malinois, named after the locale.

    Although the Belgian Malinois were very popular in Belgium, they found it more difficult in the United States. They were able to earn some popularity only between 1911 and World War II. With the end of the Second World War, the number of registrations dropped again. It was only after the separation of this breed in 1959 that their registrations again started to grow. However, the Belgian Malinois has yet to be able to acquire the same popularity as the other Belgian breeds.

    Belgian Malinoiss are playful dogs who love to be out and about, exercising as often as possible. Yet, statistics have shown that 1 in 5 Belgian Malinois owners don’t regularly walk their dog, behaviour that, if sustained, can result in health problems in the long term.

    Exercising your Belgian Malinois doesn’t have to be a chore, however, and there are a variety of ways that you can get (yours and) your Belgian Malinois exercise in, without overly exerting yourself.

    Here’s our guide to the best, most varied ways of keeping your Belgian Malinois fit and healthy:

    Walking, Running And Jogging

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Ok, it’s the obvious one, but the most basic way to exercise your Belgian Malinois is to slip on their harness and take them for a good old dog walk. There’s no doubt that your Belgian Malinois will jump with excitement as soon as they spot their lead, which is an obvious sign that this tried and tested method works.

    We’re not suggesting that you take your Belgian Malinois for a sprint, but a short run or jog can do them the world of good. Why not wear the appropriate clothing and, if opportunity arises, get in a bit of extra exercise for yourself as well as your Belgian Malinois. A couple of laps around a local pond, for example, will not only break up the walk, but also allow your Belgian Malinois to burn off a good deal of energy.

    If you’re getting bored of the same old walks, why not change them up a bit? Take a different route, or walk a different area of the park… Or, even better, take your Belgian Malinois with you when possible! If you’re meeting a friend for lunch, for example, find a dog friendly cafe, or sit outside in a pub garden if the weather’s good?

    Some dogs may not always require great activity so a jog or a run may be too much for the dog, but we’re sure you would be the best judge for this.. As long as they’re by your side, your Belgian Malinois will be happy to accompany you!

    Another way to release some energy fast is a good old game of fetch. Chasing their favourite ball or toy will keep your Belgian Malinois occupied for hours and, with any luck, they’ll kick it around themselves for a while and give you a break. Or, take the toy with you on a walk and give your Belgian Malinois an even longer run!

    However, it’s important that you play in a safe and secure area. Make sure that your Belgian Malinois is well trained enough to come back to you if you’re playing outside. Also, be considerate of others around you – you don’t want to be chasing your Belgian Malinois through a family picnic!

    We love a good game of tug of war almost as much as our dogs, and Belgian Malinoiss especially could play for hours!

    Belgian Malinoiss will play with anything – a favourite toy, a shoe, an old sock – and now you can get special rope toys, designed specifically for the game. These are great because they make it easier for your Belgian Malinois to grip the toy between their teeth without hurting them. They’re also made specially to not fall apart in their mouth.

    Whilst playing the game, it’s important to ensure that your Belgian Malinois doesn’t become too aggressive. If they do, it’s a good idea to change the game to something more calm.

    Perhaps a more relaxed game for you, hiding your treats around the house is a great way to keep them occupied and steal away an hour for yourself.

    The key is to not go overboard – remember, the more treats you give them, the more energy they’ll have. So, why not hide your favourite toys instead? Some Belgian Malinoiss will take to the game very quickly, but for others it’ll take a little longer.

    Stick with it – you’ll be thanking us when your dog is busy in the other room and you’re free to watch half a Netflix series in peace!

    If you’re looking to train yourBelgian Malinois, then why not exercise them at the same time with an agility course?

    There are loads of specialist agility kits on the market that you can buy, and they’re not that expensive. Otherwise, just use household objects – cans of soup instead of cones, old cardboard boxes to walk through, etc.

    Repeating the circuit will do wonders in terms of training your Belgian Malinois, whilst giving them the exercise that they need!

    How Tailster’s Dog Walking Service Can Help

    We know that our lives are busy, and it’s often difficult to find the time to give your Belgian Malinois ample exercise. That’s where we at Tailster can help. Tailster’s dog walking service will ensure that your Belgian Malinois gets as much exercise as you specify, keeping them fit and healthy when you simply don’t have the time.

    20th August 2021


    Affiliate Disclosure

    We believe in being as transparent as possible when it comes to this site. With this in mind, please be aware that we may receive remuneration for some of the products we review on this site.

    Tailster is a participant in the Amazon Services LLC Associates Program, an affiliate advertising program designed to provide a means for sites to earn advertising fees by advertising and linking to (and other Amazon programs).

    We will also list ads from time to time. You should be able to see these as text links or blocks of ads which have a small notation indicating “Ads by Google” or “AdChoices”.

    Our mission is to help our visitors, but this is also very clearly a for-profit site and you should realize as much. We include only those products that we believe could benefit you, some of which we may get a commission if you purchase them. However, we also provide links on the site to information resources for which we receive no compensation.

    If you have any questions whatsoever, please contact us using the “contact” option on the site menu and we will be happy to answer any questions.

    Trademark Dislosure

    Amazon and the Amazon logo are trademarks of, Inc, or its affiliates.

    In addition, any other trademarks and logos we mention on this site are also the property of their respective owners.

    The Belgian Malinois is growing in popularity, but new owners might want to spend a little extra time reading up on this breed before diving right into a new puppy or rescue. While certainly one of the most versatile breeds, the Malinois can be a lot of dog to handle. Whether you’re looking for basic information or some interesting facts, check out this list!

    #1 – They Only Have Short Coats

    The vast majority of Belgian Malinois enthusiasts focus on the FCI (Fédération Cynologique Internationale) breed standard for the Malinois. Their home country of Belgium recognizes four variations of the Belgian Shepherd. The short coated variety is a Belgian Malinois, the long coated a Tervuren, a long coated black dog is a Groenendael and the curly coated is the Laekenois. What this means is that if two short coated Belgian Malinois produce a long-coated puppy, that puppy will be considered the breed Belgian Tervuren. This way of separating the breeds gives far more opportunity to open up the breeding pool and produce healthier, better performing dogs.

    #2 – The Breed That Caught Osama Bin Laden

    The Belgian Malinois has been one of the most widely used working dogs for hundreds of years, but it recently came to spotlight when Seal Team Six used a Malinois to hunt and capture Osama Bin Laden. This spotlight is both beneficial and detrimental. In one sense, it shows the true ability of the breed to be an outstanding and reliable working dog. However, because they are such working dogs, they are not always suitable for pet homes and their popularity might find them there.

    #3 – Excels At Almost All Types of Work

    The Belgian Malinois has been used in and excelled at almost all variations of work, including police and military suspect apprehension, explosives and narcotic detection, search and rescue and service dogs. They also make incredible feats in many dog sports, including Schutzhund/IPO, French Ring, Mondioring, agility, obedience, Rally, dock diving, field and retrieving trials, lure coursing and more.

    #4 – One of the Healthiest Breeds

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Because the breed is primarily a working dog, it has some of the most extensive health testing of any breed. While veterinary tests and diagnostics can rule out genetic disorders, being able to working demanding jobs like police and military work requires that a dog be both physically and mentally sound for many, many years. Because unfit dogs cannot be used for work, they do not get bred, making the Malinois one of the healthiest dog breeds in existence.

    #5 – Different Bloodlines Mean Different Dogs

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    All breeds of dogs have various bloodlines, or they would lose potential mates and create unhealthy animals. But none of the breeds vary quite as differently in their temperament as the Malinois bloodlines do. There are first show and working line dogs, meaning dogs that have generations bred for work or dogs with generations bred for comformation show rings. This creates a significant difference in the looks as well as the temperament of the dogs. Further, Belgian bred dogs are somewhat different than French or Dutch bred dogs. Learning more about the differences in bloodlines will greatly help you chose the right Malinois for you.

    Where color meets quality.

    All of our Belgian Malinois dogs are well socialized from birth by the kids and their friends, not to mention us and the guys.

    They are truly our canine children.

    We breed for quality

    We maintain a fairly small family hobby breeding operation in order to insure that each of our Belgian Malinois dogs get all of the love and attention he or she deserves.

    Our puppies are raised inside our homes from day one until the time they leave to go to their new families.

    We are a small Hobby and Show family breeder who pride themselves on producing 100% pure breed Belgian Malinois dogs.
    We strive to produce the healthiest puppies, and make sure they go to the perfect home for them. With almost 10 years dog breeding experience, we place the health and temperament of our puppies at the highest importance.

    We have observed that color and color pattern is strictly an individual preference. Whatever your particular preference, we will eventually have a puppy to match your desires.

    Peter C.


    We are a Hobby and Show family breeder who pride themselves on producing 100% pure breed Belgian Malinois dogs.
    We put in our best to breed for outstanding temperament and confirmation. All our puppy parents are genetically tested and cleared off on their health before we breed them and breeding is not done too often as we take our time to do proper planning. We produce a VERY limited number of litters which are all planned months or sometimes years in advance. We are not a puppy mill and we are not a pet shop or back yard breeder.
    We are strictly ethical breeders that prioritizes the health of our Belgian malinois puppies and mothers above all. We specialize in well tempered Belgian malinois puppies that are amazingly gorgeous and healthy and all our studs and females have each been tested and cleared from common genetic disorders including PRA.
    With more than 10 years of breeding experience we are the number 1 original producer of regular and exotic colored belgian malinois puppies. If you are searching for a happy, healthy, home raised puppy, you have come to the right place so look no further. Our puppies are raised in our home with our children and visitors. We not just one Breeder but 2 families that raise the puppies in our homes like family.
    We do not sell our babies to puppy mills or non qualified family owners, we also do not sell to pet shops or back yard breeders. Email or text message is the right away if you are interested in adopting one of our precious babies because we plan to keep records of every line of our conversation even though we will give you phone calls as well.
    We also Specialize in the rare colors of the Belgian Malinois dogs.
    We care for our dogs and provide high quality and registered dachshund puppies at a price that average dog lovers can afford. We make belgian malinois puppies available in both genders and in multiple colors and blood lines.

    Our Belgian malinois puppies are loving, well-behaved and they are very compassionate animals that any family would love to have in their home so its not a mistake you are here today and reading this lines. Our puppies are well cared for in our home, until it’s time for them to move into their permanent home even if not yours but we will make sure they go into the best homes.
    We breed our Belgian malinois dogs for working class families, offering them at a lower cost than a typical breeder, our puppies are celebrity level so you don’t need to worry about owning a lesser quality belgian malinois puppy. We’re simply offering our adorable and loving animals at a lesser price because quality does not have a price.
    We hand raise all of our puppies and our home is usually a happy home when we have a new litter, they are always running around and playing but, when playtime is over, they all have their beds to sleep in. Belgian Malinois dogs are very inquisitive and love to investigate everything. So for their protection they need a place where they can be safe because after all you can’t watch them every minute of every single day.

    You have come to the right place! Here at Pro Belgian Malinois Home we have something for everyone, not only are our Belgian Malinois dogs absolutely breath taking beautiful, but they are all raised under-foot and in the house! We have been breeding Belgian Malinois dogs for over 10 years. If you are new to Belgian malinois puppy, you will soon learn that, you don’t own a one, on the contrary they own you! When you have a belgian malinois in your home, they are a sweet, loving, bundle of joy! With some of the biggest personalities you will find! But be warned, Belgian malinois puppies are a lot like potato chips, its hard to have just one!

    Ruidoso Malinois provides superior custom trained Personal Protection dogs.

    Our dogs are custom finish trained for your specific needs, lifestyle and household which are clarified during an in-depth conversation. In this personal conversation with owner Irene Howcroft we will also discuss the individual dog best suited for you, the details of handler school and why our dogs are not sport dogs but specifically selected and tested for the unique requirements of a Personal Protection/Executive Protection Dog. They are trained at Ruidoso Malinois, not pre-trained in Europe as sport dogs, which may have different genetics from those required for Personal Protection.

    All Protection Dogs for sale are social, intelligent, good with children, familiar in homes and all the activities that an active home is filled with. They are crisp on obedience, affectionate, loyal, devoted and quick to respond upon command to any threat in any environment. These dogs are wonderful additions to your family and love to be included on family outings to the great outdoors and because of their agility and stamina are excellent jogging companions providing the security needed when jogging alone. Each family member is taught how to control the dog should the unfortunate need arise. The handler school with 5 days of instruction facilitates becoming a team, a single unit, a “Hunine”.

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    As a breed Belgian Malinois have a very strong presence and having them in the home is often a sufficient deterrent to a possible intruder or threat, however they also have training and capacity to defend.

    Belgian Malinois are becoming the breed of choice for the Military and Enforcement Agencies as they generally have fewer health issues and live longer than German Shepherds. This saves on both medical bills and also gives you a longer return on your investment, both financial and more importantly, emotional, as these wonderful, intelligent dogs spend many years with your family as a valued, participating and protective family member.

    Videos showing the quality of our training can be viewed by a visit to the Videos page.

    Please call for available dogs as these change. Listed below are some of our available Belgian Malinois Personal Protection Dogs.

    The Belgian Malinois is one of four closely related shepherding breeds that were developed in Belgium during the 1800s. These athletic animals became sought after by herdsmen as tireless herding dogs capable of directing any type of livestock, large or small. Since then, adaptable Belgian Malinois dogs have expanded their influence into nearly every canine career path, becoming renowned for their contributions to military and police work, search and rescue, service dog work, and many other jobs for dogs. This is a hardworking, intense breed of dog that is absolutely devoted to its owners and trainers.

    The Complete Guide to the Belgian Malinois will become your go-to guide as you navigate the challenges of raising your spirited Belgian Malinois pup into a confident and dependable canine companion. This guidebook is packed with valuable knowledge covering everything from your first few days home with your dog to caring for your aging Malinois. Learn the answers to crucial questions such as:

    Is a Belgian Malinois the same as a Belgian Shepherd?

    Is this the right breed for me?

    How do I prepare my home for a busy Belgian Malinois?

    Which training methods are most effective for working with the Belgian Malinois?

    These highly intelligent dogs manage to be both exceptionally easy and remarkably challenging to train. While they will pick up commands quickly, they can also be headstrong and will often test their trainers. Living with an active and strong-willed Belgian Malinois requires determination and dedication, but those who choose to embark on this adventure are often rewarded with a staunch companion with exemplary decorum in public. Gain essential information about owning a Belgian Malinois, including:

    The history of the Belgian Malinois

    The Belgian Malinois at home and at work

    How to find and select your new Malinois companion

    Preparing your family for a Belgian Malinois

    Household dangers—indoors and out

    What to expect the first few weeks at home

    Introducing your new Belgian Malinois to existing pets

    House-training the Belgian Malinois

    The importance of socialization and training

    Essential and advanced training techniques

    Mental and physical exercise ideas for your Malinois

    Grooming the Belgian Malinois

    Belgian Malinois-specific health and wellness information for every life stage

    If you are looking for a running companion, an active family dog, or a career canine, a Belgian Malinois may fit the bill. If, however, you are looking for a quiet couch potato to hang out with, this is probably not the breed for you. Becoming a pet parent to an intensely driven dog like the Belgian Malinois is not for the faint of heart, but for those who choose to put in the work, it is well worth the time and effort. This all-inclusive manual to the Belgian Malinois breed will give you the techniques and insights you need to keep your dynamic dog happy, healthy, and well-behaved.

    This comprehensive guidebook is a must-have book for anyone who loves or lives with a Belgian Malinois!

    Belgian Shepherd, Malinois, Mechelese Herder

    The Belgian Malinois is a multi-talented dog. It is employed in all sorts of work including guarding, tracking, narcotics and bomb detection, herding, cart and sled pulling, and search and rescue!

    • Common Name(s)
    • Breed Type
    • Background
    • Description
    • Care and Feeding
    • Housing Your Dog
    • Social Behaviors
    • Handling and Training
    • Activities
    • Breeding/Reproduction
    • Common Health Problems
    • Availability
    • References

    The Belgian Malinois is a herding breed. It is very hardy and energetic, and is wildly popular in its native country of Belgium. The Malinois is one of four types of Belgian Sheepdogs. These were each developed from other working dogs, and all are very skilled at herding.

    Although the Malinois was not bred as a pet, it can make a very good one. It loves being treated like part of the family. It is very loyal and loves children. It is also very protective, making it a great guard dog. Exercise caution when it is around other pets and watch for a dominant behavior towards other dogs. Good socialization when it is young will most likely help it get along with other family pets.

    • Kingdom: Animalia
    • Phylum: Chordata
    • Class: Mammalia
    • Order: Carnivora
    • Family: Canidae
    • Genus: Canis
    • Species: lupus familiaris

    Common Name(s) Belgian Malinois, Malinois, Belgian Shepherd Malinois, Belgian Shepherd Dog, Mechelaar, Mechelese Herder, and sometimes referred to as Belgium Malinois.

    Breed Type The Belgian Malinois is a herding breed. One of the four types of Belgian Sheepdogs, the Malinois is a hard worker that is skilled at herding. This breed is best suited to cooler climates, but is adaptable to warmer ones.

    Background The Malinois is native to Belgium, where it is exceedingly popular. The Malinois is closely related to three other types of Belgian Sheepdogs: The Tervuren, the Laekenois, and the Groenendael. All of these breeds were developed exclusively from other working breeds, creating dogs that are hardy, tough and energetic.
    Belgian Malinois have been employed in all sorts of work, including guarding, tracking, narcotics and bomb detection, herding, cart and sled pulling, and search and rescue. They are also good at obedience, agility, and many other activities.
    A variation of the Malinois is the Berger Belge a poil court autre que Malinois. This breed is nearly identical to the Malinois, but have different markings than the norm.

    Description The Belgian Malinois is a solidly built animal with a deep chest and muscular hindquarters. The head is flat with a fairly long, tapering muzzle. The ears are triangular and erect, and the eyes are small, dark and almond-shaped. The tail is long and should reach or extend past the hock.
    A Malinois has a short coat that is gray, fawn or mahogany. The face and ears are black, and the hairs on the rest of the body should have some amount of black tipping. Male Malinois measure 24 to 26 inches tall, and females measure 22 to 24 inches tall. Both sexes weigh between 55 and 65 pounds.

    Care and Feeding Malinois need diets that are low in fiber and high in protein. The best foods for this breed would include poultry, ocean fish, and wheat.
    The short coat of the Malinois requires minimal care. It should be brushed regularly with a firm brush, especially when shedding. Bathing should be avoided as much as possible, because it will remove the coat’s natural waterproofing.
    The Malinois has dewclaws on both the front and back legs. They should be removed from the back when the dog is a puppy, and may also be removed from the front if desired.
    Annual checkups will help keep your Belgian Malinois healthy. Vaccinations are due as follows:

    • 6-8 weeks: Distemper, Leptospirosis, Hepatitis, Parainfluenza, Parvo, and Corona virus (DHLPPC)
    • 10-12 weeks: Second DHLPPC
    • 14-16 weeks: Third DHLPPC and rabies
    • Annually: DHLPPC and rabies booster

    The Malinois sheds constantly, and does so heavily twice a year. Regular vacuuming of carpet and furniture is crucial. This breed is also prone to skin allergies, so it’s important to remove the source of any breakouts if possible.

    Housing Your Dog The Belgian Malinois can live indoors or out, but usually prefers to sleep indoors. It needs a yard that’s large enough to run in, and fenced if possible.

    Social Behaviors The Belgian Malinois is a loyal companion, and does well with children if well socialized as a puppy. It may display dominance toward other dogs, and caution is advised when introducing a Malinois to other non-canine pets. But good socialization will make it more likely that your dog will get along with other pets.

    Handling and Training Malinois are highly intelligent, but they require firm training. If the trainer is overly harsh, however, the dog may become uncooperative or over-sensitive.

    Activities The Belgian Malinois needs lots of exercise, and preferably some type of work to do. It should be allowed to run off-leash regularly.

    Breeding/Reproduction Belgian Malinois usually have six to ten puppies per litter. When selecting a mate for your Malinois, check bloodlines for hip and elbow dysplasia, eye problems, epilepsy, and thyroid disorders.

    Common Health Problems Malinois are generally healthy dogs. Potential health problems include cataracts, hip and elbow dysplasia, epilepsy, and thyroid disease. Regular checkups are important to minimize the occurrence of these health problems and treat them if they do occur.

    Availability Belgian Malinois are somewhat hard to find in most countries other than Belgium, but breeders can be located online. Prices range from $500 to over $1,000.

    The Belgian Malinois dog. Our clients often call them “fur babies” or “the best friend they have ever had” and that means a lot to us. We don’t just sell dogs. We place them with people who need protection but also want a family member who shares in their life daily. Own a Belgian Malinois once and you’ll never have another breed. Well bred Belgian Malinois are hard to find. Search the web and you’ll find 50 German Shepherds compared to one, quality Malinois for sale. Narrow it further by accepting only a quality dog and it becomes even harder to find the Belgian Malinois.

    The Belgian Malinois is also known as the Belgian Shepherd. There are 4 breeds which fall into the Belgian Shepherd category. Wolfsbane K9 breeds and sells standard colored and rare solid black Belgian Malinois only. Keep in mind that the FCI does not recognize the black coloration as a “true Malinois” but people still come to us in high numbers for them. They are beautiful.

    The Belgian Malinois has been gaining popularity for the last few years. Just a few years ago the breed didn’t show up in the top 100 breeds registered by the AKC. Today the Malinois ranks at number 60 on the list. One must also consider that the majority of Belgian Malinois are not even AKC registered.

    One thing to remember is that the Belgian Malinois comes in several colors or a mix of them such as fawn, sable, red, brown and black. Wolfsbane K9 leans toward a dark sable color with a heavy black mask mostly from KNPV parents. Some have almost black eyes while others have brown or even golden eyes. The ears are pointed and stand on their own as the dog matures

    They’re known by many as the dog that helped take terrorist Osama bin Laden as well as other terrorist down and this caused a spike in the number of people who wanted to own one. In addition White House videos showing the dogs working for the Secret Service have also gained plenty of interest in the breed. And, don’t forget the countless movies they are now in such as John Wick (starring Keanu Reeves and Halle Berry), the Navy Seals (TV show) and DOG (starring Channing Tatum). We see more folks now who recognize the breed if we take them with us to stores, the park etc. At one time they were not even in the top 100 registered breeds with the AKC and now the breed has broken that barrier. It must also be noted that 80% or more of Belgian Malinois in America are not registered. No matter how popular they become this is no reason to own one of these dogs. You need to be fully committed to training and learning.

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Female, Import from Czech Republic
    FCI & AKC Registered
    Championship Bloodlines

    Redbush K9 was founded by Susan Brewer D.V.M. in 2015. Susan received her Doctorate from Purdue University School of Veterinary Medicine in 1996 and she has 25 years of experience practicing canine medicine and surgery. Throughout her career, dog behavioral medicine & special applications in dog training have always been of strong interest to Susan.

    Our mission at Redbush K9 is to produce high quality working Belgian Malinois from the best working dog lines that Europe has to offer. We specialize in the Belgian Shepherd Malinois because it has proven to be one of the most all-around successful breeds for search & rescue, police & military work, scent detection work, schutzhund sport & personal protection. It is our experience that bred & raised responsibly, the Belgian Malinois can indeed be an invaluable, loyal, loving & protective addition to your family.

    Our Malinois puppies are raised in a home-like professional indoor facility on our Eastern Kentucky farm with daily exposure to children & small animals. We have an extensive early development program in place to facilitate the development of stabile, good-tempered, highly-adaptable, confident, competitive, family-friendly dogs, both highly motivated & suitable for work.

    We are an organization of passionate K9 trainers, handlers and breeders that focus on the ethical development of the Belgian Malinois breed in the USA. We are headquartered in California with local communities throughout the country. We stay connected with all the diverse Belgian Malinois circles in the world- collaborating together to bring forward the best in training, breeding and community support for this wonderful breed.

    If you are in anyway involved with the breed and would like to be a part of our community, click below for more information.

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Dog Trainers

    Experienced dog trainers and handlers that specialize in the Belgian Malinois.

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Malinois Breeders

    Reputable Belgian Malinois breeders who care for the long-term health and performance of the breed…

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Search and Rescue

    Volunteers and leaders at local SAR organizations…

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Events and Seminars

    Authors, speakers and coaches for K9 trainers… Attend our local events to learn how to better care for your Belgian Malinois…

    It’s not the first time the silver screen has created an increased demand for a specific breed

    By Kait Hanson | TODAY • Published February 23, 2022 • Updated on February 23, 2022 at 3:15 am

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Channing Tatum’s newest movie, “Dog,” may induce swooning over the human-animal bond, but some experts worry it could lead to more abandoned Belgian Malinois, the dog breed featured in the movie.

    In the film, Tatum plays U.S. Army Ranger Jackson Briggs, who is taking Lulu, a dog who served in Afghanistan, to the funeral of her handler.

    Stay informed about local news and weather. Get the NBC 7 San Diego app for iOS or Android and pick your alerts.

    Lulu, played by three different Belgian Malinois canines, is portrayed as incredibly smart, albeit a mischief-maker.

    The “Hollywood Reporter” review of the movie stated, “If the film is a hit, kennels won’t be able to breed Belgian Malinoises fast enough.”

    And that is exactly what makes experts nervous.

    Entertainment News

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Andy ‘Fletch’ Fletcher, Depeche Mode Keyboardist, Dead at 60

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Robert Irwin Wrangles Snake From ‘Bad’ Spot in the Middle of the Road, Moves it to Safer Habitat

    “The major mistake people make when they are selecting dog breeds (is) they think that every dog breed is created equal like people,” Vladae Roytapel, the self-proclaimed “Russian dog wizard,” told TODAY. “They are anticipating behavior that dogs are not designed for and that is the root cause of the problems.”

    Dog trainer and owner of “Say It Once Dog Training” Vinnie Somma agreed.

    “The average owner should not get a Belgian Malinois,” Somma told TODAY, adding that the portrayal of Lulu acting like “a hellion” was accurate.

    Roytapel said the breed is known for extreme agility and drive.

    “High drive, high anxiety, high work ability, requires a lot of physical and mental stimulations,” he said.

    The American Kennel Club describes the Belgian Malinois breed as smart and confident.

    “Problems set in, though, when this people-oriented dog is underemployed and neglected,” the AKC states on their website. “Exercise, and plenty of it, preferably side by side with their adored owner, is key to Mal happiness.”

    Somma added that failure to both mentally and physically stimulate a Malinois becomes dangerous.

    “If you don’t genetically fulfill a Belgian Malinois, they’re going to be a liability,” he said, adding that he feels sport work should be a requirement for ownership. “This breed has a huge financial responsibility. The amount of training and cost for that training is something people need to think about. They are not bred to be standard house pets.”

    Somma said that even people who are familiar with dogs need to be prepared “for a whole new ballgame” when getting a Malinois, and cautioned against those lured by the well-trained behavior portrayed in the movie.

    “After $50,000 to $100,000 dollars of training and thousands of hours of training, (the dog) can become that. That is why the breed is so amazing,” Somma said. “(But) the dog doesn’t come to your house knowing how to protect. Because they’re untrained, that protection (instinct) becomes a liability.”

    Abigail Lightning-Bingham, director of Cecil County Animal Services in Maryland, told TODAY she hopes anyone interested in the Malinois breed as a result of the movie “Dog” does “as much research as possible.”

    “As a director of a busy, open-admission animal shelter and experienced Malinois owner, I can’t help but worry about the future implications surrounding new and inexperienced Malinois owners as a result of movies such as this,” Lightning-Bingham said. “Our shelters could very well see an increase in this misunderstood breed resulting in a burden on local shelters to find adequate placement.”

    It’s not the first time the silver screen has created an increased demand for a specific breed.

    After the 1996 release of Disney’s “101 Dalmatians,” shelters reported seeing the number of Dalmatians nearly double the following year. As a preventative measure, The Humane Society of the United States ran campaign ads to prevent abandoned Dalmatians.

    “This is exactly what we had feared,” Leslie Isom, a spokeswoman with the Humane Society of the United States, told “The New York Times” in September 1997. “What we’re trying to get across is that Dalmatians require a tremendous amount of time and energy and these are things that a family with small children may not have.”

    After the debut of “Legally Blonde” in 2001, starring Reese Witherspoon and her Chihuahua, Bruiser, shelters began seeing an influx of the breed. One shelter in California hosted a weeklong “Adopt-a-Chihuahua” campaign after 100 of the small dogs were abandoned in a single day.

    “While the new movie ‘Dog’ is well-intended and celebrates the unbreakable bond between a handler and his working dog, Malinois ownership is not for the average pet owner,” Lightning-Bingham said. “Malinois are truly brilliant animals, and with the appropriate training, make a stellar addition to a household that can provide a Malinois a job and a true sense of purpose.”

    Breed characteristics

  • Size Medium

    Exercise More than 2 hours per day

    Size of home Large house

    Grooming More than once a week

    Coat length Medium

    Lifespan Over 10 years

    Vulnerable native breed No

    Town or country Either

    Size of garden Large garden

    About this breed

    Sheepdogs of this type date back in Belgium to the Middle Ages. Four varieties of the breed exist sharing the same physical attributes and alluded only by coat and colour – Groenendael: black and long coat; Tervueren: long coated and seen in red, fawn or grey, often with a black mask and overlay; Malinois: with a dense, short coat and with the same colourings as the Tervueren; Laekenois: a harsh wiry coat, red/fawn with some black shadings.

    It was not until 1891, the first breed club was formed and Professor Adolphe Reul of the Belgian veterinary school examined 117 examples of the breed and classified the varieties which were named according to the area of Belgium where they originated. The Laekenois gained its name from the Château of Laeken – a royal residence of Queen Marie Henriette who favoured the variety.

    Their physical attributes equip them to be excellent herding dogs: they are agile, fast and lightly built yet robust, but the breed has shown its versatility as a service dog, widely used by the police and armed forces. They have an appetite for work, being watchful, wary and highly intelligent.

    Images for this breed

    The Pastoral breed group

    The Pastoral Group consists of herding dogs that are associated with working cattle, sheep, reindeer and other cloven footed animals.

    Usually this type of dog has a weatherproof double coat to protect it from the elements when working in severe conditions. Breeds such as the Collie family, Old English Sheepdogs and Samoyeds who have been herding reindeer for centuries are but a few included in this group.

    Breed standard colours

    Breed standard colour means that the colour is accepted within the breed standard and is a traditional and well-known colour in this breed.

    Breed standard colours in this breed include:

    • Fawn
    • Fawn Black Mask
    • Fawn Black Mask & Overlay
    • Fawn Black Overlay
    • Grey
    • Grey Black Mask
    • Grey Black Overlay
    • Red
    • Red Black Mask
    • Red Black Overlay
    • Red Black Overlay Black Mask
    • Red Fawn
    • Red Grey Sable

    Other colour/s

    ‘Other’ means you consider your puppy to be a colour not currently known within the breed and one that does not appear on either the breed standard or non-breed standard list. In this instance you would be directed through our registrations process to contact a breed club and/or council to support you on identifying and correctly listing the new colour.

    Non-breed-standard colours

    Non-breed-standard colour means that the colour is not accepted within the breed standard and whilst some dogs within the breed may be this colour it is advised to only select a dog that fits within the breed standards for all points.

    Colour is only one consideration when picking a breed or individual dog, health and temperament should always be a priority over colour.


    Whether you’re thinking of buying a puppy, or breeding from your dog, it’s essential that you know what health issues may be found in your breed. To tackle these issues we advise that breeders use DNA tests, screening schemes and inbreeding coefficient calculators to help breed the healthiest dogs possible.

    Priority health schemes and tests

    The Kennel Club’s Assured Breeders must use the following (or equivalent) schemes, tests and advice. All other breeders are strongly advised to also use these.

    Important health schemes and tests

    We strongly recommend that all breeders, both assured breeders (ABs) and non ABs, use the following (or equivalent) schemes, tests and advice.

    Find out about a particular dog’s results

    Please visit our Health Test Results Finder to discover the DNA or screening scheme test results for any dog on The Kennel Club’s Breed Register.

    You can also view the inbreeding coefficient calculation for a puppy’s parents, or for a dog you’re thinking of breeding from.

    Have any questions about health in your breed?

    If you have any concerns about a particular health condition in your breed then you may wish to speak to your vet or you could contact your breed health co-ordinator.

    Breed health co-ordinators are individuals working on behalf of breed clubs and councils who are advocates for the health and welfare of their chosen breed. They acts as a spokesperson on matters of health and will collaborate with The Kennel Club on any health concerns the breed may have.

    To contact your breed health co-ordinator please email

    Breed watch

    Category 1

    Currently no points of concern specific to this breed have been identified for special attention by judges, other than those covered routinely by The Kennel Club’s breed standard.

    Breeding restrictions

    There are a number of The Kennel Club’s rules and regulations that may prevent a litter from being registered, find out about our general and breed specific breeding restrictions below.

    Belgian Shepherd (Malinois) parents may produce one or more Belgian Shepherd (Tervueren) puppies in a litter. The option to register online is not available and must be submitted by post on a litter application form. A note should be made next to the relevant puppy or in the form of an accompanying letter.

    Looking for a puppy?

    Looking for a Belgian Shepherd (Malinois)? Explore our list of puppies and rescue dogs for sale near you.

    More information

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Visit us at Discover Dogs

    Unsure of which pedigree dog to choose? Visit Discover Dogs where you can meet hundreds of pedigree dogs and speak with experienced owners/breeders.

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Use our Find a Puppy service

    The Kennel Club’s Find a Puppy service provides contact details for breeders who have puppies available. Let’s help you find your new best friend.

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Get the best lifetime pet insurance

    At Kennel Club Pet Insurance, we want you to focus on getting the best possible treatment for your dog without worrying about the cost.

    Breed, raise and train!

    The Belgian Malinois is one of the most captivating dog breeds in the world, and Ruidoso Malinois breeds the cream of the crop. Known for their police K-9 work, intelligence, fierce loyalty, and fearlessness under pressure, the dogs from Ruidoso Malinois are exceptional in every way.

    These dogs are bred and schooled to become working dogs from the very beginning. The focus of Ruidoso Malinois is not on AKC standards, but rather on the dog’s suitability for a specific job. However, these dogs do exhibit excellent conformation and can be registered if the owner desires.

    The program starts with the Dams and the Sires. All of these dogs are imported from Europe, ensuring that they produce only the highest quality offspring. Once the puppies are born, every aspect of their life is carefully monitored and sculpted. Specialized feedings, vaccinations, and socialization sessions are all part of the maturation process. Each dog is encouraged to expand and flourish, making them confident and well-suited to handle a multitude of tasks.

    Ruidoso Malinois works with each dog individually, getting to know their character and inclinations. Based upon these findings, the dogs are then trained with specific goals in mind.

    Trainers school the dogs in bite work, detection, obedience and some agility. Based upon performance, certain dogs are then selected to work in K-9 units. Ruidoso Malinois is adept at recognizing which animals will be best-suited for certain positions. Not every Belgian Malinois can grow up to be Cairo (the dog who participated in the Seal Team Six mission to find Osama bin Laden). This is why certain dogs from the program end up becoming superior family companion dogs.

    At Ruidoso Malinois, thoroughness and attention to detail ensure that each dog achieves its highest potential.

    It’s not the first time the silver screen has created an increased demand for a specific breed

    By Kait Hanson | TODAY • Published February 23, 2022 • Updated on February 23, 2022 at 6:15 am

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Channing Tatum’s newest movie, “Dog,” may induce swooning over the human-animal bond, but some experts worry it could lead to more abandoned Belgian Malinois, the dog breed featured in the movie.

    In the film, Tatum plays U.S. Army Ranger Jackson Briggs, who is taking Lulu, a dog who served in Afghanistan, to the funeral of her handler.

    Stay informed about New England news and weather. Get the NECN app for iOS or Android and pick your alerts.

    Lulu, played by three different Belgian Malinois canines, is portrayed as incredibly smart, albeit a mischief-maker.

    The “Hollywood Reporter” review of the movie stated, “If the film is a hit, kennels won’t be able to breed Belgian Malinoises fast enough.”

    And that is exactly what makes experts nervous.

    Entertainment News

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Andy ‘Fletch’ Fletcher, Depeche Mode Keyboardist, Dead at 60

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Robert Irwin Wrangles Snake From ‘Bad’ Spot in the Middle of the Road, Moves it to Safer Habitat

    “The major mistake people make when they are selecting dog breeds (is) they think that every dog breed is created equal like people,” Vladae Roytapel, the self-proclaimed “Russian dog wizard,” told TODAY. “They are anticipating behavior that dogs are not designed for and that is the root cause of the problems.”

    Dog trainer and owner of “Say It Once Dog Training” Vinnie Somma agreed.

    “The average owner should not get a Belgian Malinois,” Somma told TODAY, adding that the portrayal of Lulu acting like “a hellion” was accurate.

    Roytapel said the breed is known for extreme agility and drive.

    “High drive, high anxiety, high work ability, requires a lot of physical and mental stimulations,” he said.

    The American Kennel Club describes the Belgian Malinois breed as smart and confident.

    “Problems set in, though, when this people-oriented dog is underemployed and neglected,” the AKC states on their website. “Exercise, and plenty of it, preferably side by side with their adored owner, is key to Mal happiness.”

    Somma added that failure to both mentally and physically stimulate a Malinois becomes dangerous.

    “If you don’t genetically fulfill a Belgian Malinois, they’re going to be a liability,” he said, adding that he feels sport work should be a requirement for ownership. “This breed has a huge financial responsibility. The amount of training and cost for that training is something people need to think about. They are not bred to be standard house pets.”

    Somma said that even people who are familiar with dogs need to be prepared “for a whole new ballgame” when getting a Malinois, and cautioned against those lured by the well-trained behavior portrayed in the movie.

    “After $50,000 to $100,000 dollars of training and thousands of hours of training, (the dog) can become that. That is why the breed is so amazing,” Somma said. “(But) the dog doesn’t come to your house knowing how to protect. Because they’re untrained, that protection (instinct) becomes a liability.”

    Abigail Lightning-Bingham, director of Cecil County Animal Services in Maryland, told TODAY she hopes anyone interested in the Malinois breed as a result of the movie “Dog” does “as much research as possible.”

    “As a director of a busy, open-admission animal shelter and experienced Malinois owner, I can’t help but worry about the future implications surrounding new and inexperienced Malinois owners as a result of movies such as this,” Lightning-Bingham said. “Our shelters could very well see an increase in this misunderstood breed resulting in a burden on local shelters to find adequate placement.”

    It’s not the first time the silver screen has created an increased demand for a specific breed.

    After the 1996 release of Disney’s “101 Dalmatians,” shelters reported seeing the number of Dalmatians nearly double the following year. As a preventative measure, The Humane Society of the United States ran campaign ads to prevent abandoned Dalmatians.

    “This is exactly what we had feared,” Leslie Isom, a spokeswoman with the Humane Society of the United States, told “The New York Times” in September 1997. “What we’re trying to get across is that Dalmatians require a tremendous amount of time and energy and these are things that a family with small children may not have.”

    After the debut of “Legally Blonde” in 2001, starring Reese Witherspoon and her Chihuahua, Bruiser, shelters began seeing an influx of the breed. One shelter in California hosted a weeklong “Adopt-a-Chihuahua” campaign after 100 of the small dogs were abandoned in a single day.

    “While the new movie ‘Dog’ is well-intended and celebrates the unbreakable bond between a handler and his working dog, Malinois ownership is not for the average pet owner,” Lightning-Bingham said. “Malinois are truly brilliant animals, and with the appropriate training, make a stellar addition to a household that can provide a Malinois a job and a true sense of purpose.”

    No, I am not a German shepherd.

    If you have an Ot Vitosha puppy, then I strongly recommend you to explore my training videos at Training Without Conflict. In the puppy development section, you will find exactly what I do and how I start training my own puppies! You will learn to play different games with your new friend that will build confidence, and take your relationship to a different level. It doesn’t matter if you are going for top competition training or just want to learn how to properly interact, these videos are a must-watch!

    In addition to the collection of puppy videos, be sure to check out our Blog, Inside Ivan’s World for the most recent information about training your Ot Vitosha puppy! There will also be bi-monthly articles on nutrition, health, vaccinations, and many other important and interesting topics.

    Malinois puppy training video lessons

    Training Your New Puppy

    Congratulations. You’ve got yourself a puppy and wonder, where to begin, who to listen to, what videos to follow on YouTube and which groups to join on FaceBook. Be aware – Raising a puppy (successfully) with the “support” of social media is not in your best interest. For the inexperienced trainer there may be some amazing puppy videos or instructions for puppy training waiting on the internet … the problem is that these puppies never grow up to be the top dogs they were being prepared to be. Why? Because the people who make such videos have never been top trainers themselves, they have no idea what is important and helpful vs damaging later on. It is the new phenomenon – someone without any knowledge or accomplishments can convince others with YouTube videos and blogs how to ruin a puppy. Here, I offer you something very different. In these Malinois training videos, I share with you the way I train my own puppies, but why would you listen and follow my guidance? Here is why: Unparalleled accomplishments – 15 National Champion titles, 2 World Champion titles, and amazing relationship with my dogs. You will not learn this in any other videos, because what I am teaching you is how I become a World Champion, enjoy! Check out the Dog Training Video Vault.

    What can you learn? Check out these testimonials

    Jay Jack talks about Ivan Balabanov’s training philosophy

    Matt Welch talks about Ivan Balabanov’s dog training philosophy

    One of the most frequently asked questions we receive is, “are Belgian Malinois good family dogs?” Well, it depends. This breed is not your typical household pet. Not only are they specifically trained to protect their owners, but this breed is intelligent, loving, and extremely hard working.

    All of these qualities make Belgian Malinois good family dogs . However, the question really is, will their temperament fit into your family’s lifestyle?

    Let’s learn more about this breed and if a Belgian Malinois family protection dog is right for you !

    The Best Type of Owner for this Breed

    Rather than only asking are Malinois good family dogs, it’s important to ask what type of family is good for the dog. Every family has a different lifestyle, and the purpose of getting a protection dog will vary.

    This might be the hard part, but it’s vital to be completely honest with yourself about the amount of time you can spend with your dog, the space you can provide for it, and how practical it is to keep up the training your protection dog received.

    Protection dogs are loving, but they are not typical “lap dogs.” They despise boredom and thrive on work and play. They need owners who have lots of energy to devote to running with them, playing with them, continuing to train them, and help them stay active.


    Your family is the type where everyone leaves at 7 am sharp and only return in the evening, you probably won’t be a good fit for a protection dog.

    The Belgian Malinois is a working breed dog. They are happiest and most satisfied when they are given regular jobs and stimulation throughout the day.

    Say you have a job that allows your protection dog to travel with you or you work from home, they will be the happiest. Remember, these dogs are trained to be furry bodyguards. Trained Belgian Malinois want to protect their owners, but they can’t if you’re gone all day.

    Belgian Malinois protection dogs are ideal for people who need protection on the road in addition to families with spouses and children who stay at home.

    Your protection dog will fiercely protect the family they are around, so if you want to provide an extra layer for your stay-at-home spouse and toddler, a Belgian Malinois is a great option for you.

    What Makes the Belgian Malinois a Good Family Dog?

    The Belgian Malinois comes from a working dog breed and they live to be helpful. They will view themselves as part of your “pack” and protect you and your family at all costs. These are energetic dogs that love to exercise.

    If your family enjoys walks, hikes, bike rides, and trips outdoors, you will have no happier companion than your protection dog. Belgian Malinois are child friendly and will happily come along on any family adventure while it protects the whole family.

    Should you receive your protection dog as a puppy, it’s important to note that Belgian Malinois puppies tend to nip. However, this is a stage and easily trained out of their behavior. These dogs are extremely intelligent and train well, enabling them to become the perfect family dog.

    If you’re looking for a living, breathing alarm system that can go beyond simply alerting you to an intruder’s presence, a Belgian Malinois protection dog is what you’re looking for.

    These dogs are family friendly dogs that protect your family at all costs. They will keep you, your spouse, and your children safe, even if it means putting their own lives in the way.

    When with your family, they are always alert and on guard, vigilant against threats. If a person appears suspicious or threatening, your Belgian Malinois protection dog will alert you and the intruder. They will first appear threatening to tell the suspicious person to back away.


    The potential attacker does not back down, your protection dog will wait only for a signal from you before they attack. Personal protection dogs are trained to obey instantly, ensuring timely response to threats and attacks against anyone in your family.

    Should a burglar try to enter your home at night, your Belgian Malinois protection dog will not only alert you but will serve as a first responder to deal with the threat on the scene. No alarm system can be this effective and there is no better protection system in the world.

    Are Belgian Malinois Good with Other Dogs?

    Belgian Malinois are incredibly intelligent and can be trained to do nearly anything. If adequately socialized and trained from an early age, Belgian Malinois protection dogs will happily play and socialize with other well-trained dogs.

    They form strong bonds with dogs that work or live with them, so if you’re planning on getting a second dog or have one already, they’ll likely become best friends.

    Your personal Belgian Malinois protection dog has been trained to be the best of the best in the dog world. It’s wise to know who they are socializing with. Ensure the other dogs your Belgian Malinois has for playmates are well-trained, non-aggressive, and intelligent dogs.

    Because they are so intelligent, Belgian Malinois can tend to display dominant behavior if in a pack situation. They don’t look kindly on bad dog behavior and won’t think twice about putting a misbehaving dog in its place.

    They are not aggressive, but they’ll be the top dog in a pack and will let their rank be known if need be. This is something to keep in mind when socializing your Belgian Malinois with other dogs.

    Is Your Family Right for a Belgian Malinois?

    The best Belgian Malinois for a family is a trained one. This breed is ideal for guarding families and working with law enforcement. There are a lot of misconceptions about this breed and protection dogs in general as aggressors and unsuitable for families.

    However, that couldn’t be further from the truth. A well-trained protection dog could be one of the most loyal and loving pets you have, and they will lay their life on the line to protect you.

    Would you consider getting a Belgian Malinois?

    The American Kennel Club defines the Belgian Malinois with three simple words – confident, smart, and hardworking. Though there is so much more to this astounding breed, no three words better embody the spirit and determination of these working machines.

    From their agility and strength, to their unrivaled devotion and boldness, it is no surprise this breed has become a top choice for police and military efforts throughout the world.

    The history of the Belgian Malinois

    To understand why the Belgian Malinois has such an amazing reputation as an unparalleled working dog, it is important to take a look at the breed’s history.

    Developed as a herding breed in Malines, Belgium, this diligent breed also proved to be useful in the protection of farm and family. By breeding with an emphasis on performance as opposed to looks, the success of the Malinois quickly skyrocketed into one of the most sought after breeds for working purposes. Due to its versatility, new career paths quickly opened to the Malinois. World War II introduced this breed to military use – mainly hired as border patrol, cart haulers and message runners.

    This was just the beginning. Throughout the following decades, the Belgian Malinois gained further popularity in working fields. It was introduced to the United States around 1911, with five ‘Belgian herding dogs’ being employed as Police K9s by the New York City Police Department. The Belgian Malinois was officially recognized by the AKC in 1959.

    In the 1960s, the use of the Malinois spread across the country like wildfire. Mals became the preferred breed for police and military matters, though the public often misjudged the breed as a German Shepherd. In recent years, however, the name and presence of the Belgian Malinois has started to shine even brighter.

    When U.S. President Barack Obama went to Fort Campbell, Kentucky earlier for a highly publicized, but very private meeting with the commando team that killed Osama bin Laden, only one of the 81 members of the super-secret SEAL DevGru unit was identified by name: Cairo, the war dog. Cairo, like most canine members of the elite U.S. Navy SEALs, is a Belgian Malinois. The Malinois breed is similar to German shepherds but smaller and more compact, with an adult male weighing in the 30-kilo range.

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Belgian Malinois Navy SEAL Dog

    German shepherds are still used as war dogs by the American military but the lighter, stubbier Malinois is considered better for the tandem parachute jumping and rappelling operations often undertaken by SEAL teams. Labrador retrievers are also favoured by various military organizations around the world.

    Like their human counterparts, the dog SEALs are highly trained, highly skilled, highly motivated special ops experts, able to perform extraordinary military missions by Sea, Air and Land (thus the acronym). The dogs carry out a wide range of specialized duties for the military teams to which they are attached: With a sense of smell 40 times greater than a human’s, the dogs are trained to detect and identify both explosive material and hostile or hiding humans. The dogs are twice as fast as a fit human, so anyone trying to escape is not likely to outrun Cairo or his buddies.

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    The dogs, equipped with video cameras, also enter certain danger zones first, allowing their handlers to see what’s ahead before humans follow. As I mentioned before, SEAL dogs are even trained parachutists, jumping either in tandem with their handlers or solo, if the jump is into water. Last year canine parachute instructor Mike Forsythe and his dog Cara set the world record for highest man-dog parachute deployment, jumping from more than 30,100 feet up – the altitude transoceanic passenger jets fly at. Both Forsythe and Cara were wearing oxygen masks and skin protectors for the jump. Here’s a photo from that jump, taken by Andy Anderson for K9 Storm Inc. (more about those folks shortly).

    As well, the dogs are faithful, fearless and ferocious – incredibly frightening and efficient attackers. When the SEAL DevGru team (usually known by its old designation, Team 6) hit bin Laden’s Pakistan compound on May 2, Cairo ‘s feet would have been four of the first on the ground. And like the human SEALs, Cairo was wearing super-strong, flexible body Armour and outfitted with high-tech equipment that included “doggles” – specially designed and fitted dog goggles with night-vision and infrared capability that would even allow Cairo to see human heat forms through concrete walls.

    Now where on earth would anyone get that kind of incredibly niche hi-tech doggie gear? From Winnipeg, of all places. Jim and Glori Slater’s Manitoba hi-tech mom-and-pop business, K9 Storm Inc., has a deserved worldwide reputation for designing and manufacturing probably the best body Armour available for police and military dogs. Working dogs in 15 countries around the world are currently protected by their K9 Storm body Armour.

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Highest Man-Dog Parachute Deployment

    Jim Slater was a canine handler on the Winnipeg Police Force when he crafted a Kevlar protective jacket for his own dog, Olaf, in the mid-1990s. Soon Slater was making body Armour for other cop dogs, then the Canadian military and soon the world. The standard K9 Storm vest also has a load-bearing harness system that makes it ideal for tandem rappelling and parachuting.

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Airborne Dog Enjoying a Tandem Jump

    And then there are the special hi-tech add-ons that made the K9 Storm especially appealing to the U.S. Navy SEALs, who bought four of K9 Storm Inc.’s top-end Intruder “canine tactical assault suits” last year for $86,000. You can be sure Cairo was wearing one of those four suits when he jumped into bin Laden’s lair.

    Here’s an explanation of all the K9 Storm Intruder special features:

    A blog dedicated to the spirited French Malinois.

    Run by Morgan Sanchez.

    U.S. Army military working dog, “Staff Sgt. Nikyta,” 93rd Military Working Dog Detachment, 197th Military Police Detachment, 385th Military Police Battalion, 16th Military Police Brigade, patrols Zabodaq village, Wardak province, Afghanistan, March 6, 2014. Nikyta is a Patrol Explosive detector dog used to find weapons caches and materials used for improvised explosive devices. (U.S. Army photo by Cpl. George Huley/ Released)

    He smells something…

    Jany takes the plunge while strapped to an officer of the Air Special Command. Once she puts her paws on the ground, this daredevil dog is trained to detect explosives and help officers with her skill set. While you might expect the drop would scare Jany, the pooch approaches each jump calmly.

    what a GORGEOUS dog!

    Hannah (Belgian Malinois)

    Hannah is a 2 1/2 year old Belgian Malinois. I got her from the mountains of Mississippi when she was eight weeks old. Hannah has no “off” button. She’s shown here playing with her favorite Christmas gift last year, a bubble machine. She chases them until the batteries wear out!

    We’ve owned a few dogs over the years, but Hannah is the smartest. We can place one of her toys in a specific spot and she’ll always find it. Example: “Where’s red ball? In the kitchen?” and “Where’s green ball? In your toy box?” She’s as affectionate as she is bright and I can’t imagine life without her.

    By Candy Killion from Hollywood, FL

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    4 More Photos

    Share on ThriftyFun Check out these photos. Click at right to share your own photo in this page.

    Trinity (Malinois) and Niobe (Rott – Sharpei Mix)

    Trinity and Niobe are both about 5 years old, and coincidentally born within a week of each other. Trinity is a black and tan Belgian Shepherd (Malinois), and Niobe is a red and black Rottweiler/Sharpei mix.

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Bruteus (Belgian Malinois)

    I got him from an animal shelter in Illinois on July 7, 2013.

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Chelsea (Belgian Malinois)

    I got her about 1 month ago. She likes running around and playing with chew toys.

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Is My Dog a Purebred Belgian Malinois?

    The Belgian Malinois originated in the Flemish city of Mechelen. They resemble the Belgian Shepherd. There are physical characteristics that might help make a rough guess, but determining if your pet is a purebred Malinois is best done via a DNA test.

    Google Created with Sketch.

    Forgot your password or email isn’t working? Click here.
    Rehome member? Log in here.

    Search and see photos of adoptable pets in the NATION WIDE, TX area.

    Find a Pet to Adopt

    A NATION WIDE, TX 77056 rescue helping to find loving homes for dogs .

    Pets at American Belgian Malinios Rescue

  • Dogs
  • Baby
  • Puppy
  • Kitten
  • Young
  • Adult
  • Senior
  • Male
  • Female
  • How to identify a belgian malinois

    Ashford – TX

    Male, Young
    Belgian Malinois

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Hercules – TX

    Male, Young
    Belgian Malinois

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Dodger – VT

    Male, Adult
    Belgian Malinois

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Cujo – MD

    Male, Senior
    Belgian Malinois

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Maximus – FL

    Male, Adult
    Belgian Malinois

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Circe – IN

    Female, Puppy
    Belgian Malinois

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Umbra – TX

    Female, Adult
    Belgian Malinois

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Millie2 – TX

    Female, Adult
    Belgian Malinois

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Cora – IN

    Female, Puppy
    Belgian Malinois

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Archer – TX

    Male, Young , Special Needs
    Belgian Malinois

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Jacques – ME

    Male, Young
    Belgian Malinois

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Roxie – CT

    Female, Adult
    Belgian Malinois

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Male, Young
    Belgian Malinois

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Mary Jane – TX

    Female, Young
    Belgian Malinois

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Foster Who – NJ

    Male, Young
    Belgian Malinois

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Sarge – TX

    Male, Adult
    Belgian Malinois

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Avalon – MA

    Female, Young
    Belgian Malinois

    How to identify a belgian malinois


    Female, Young
    Belgian Malinois

    How to identify a belgian malinois

    Ruger – MI

    Female, Young
    Belgian Malinois

    How to identify a belgian malinois


    Male, Young
    Belgian Malinois

    1 – 20 of 53 Adoptable Pets at This Shelter

    Areas American Belgian Malinios Rescue Serves

    Most states within the United States with the exception of California and Alaska

    American Belgian Malinios Rescue’s Adoption Process

    1. Submit Application

    The Reference Check – ensure that the information you provide is accurate – the inability to contact your References may effect the approval

    2. Home Check

    Arrangements will be made for someone to visit you and your family in your home environment. ALL family members must be present.

    3. Approve Application

    Dogs are not adopted out first come, first served. They are placed with the best match for the dog and adopter.

    4. Pay Fee

    Adoption fees vary based upon the age of the dog, $325 – $475.A spay/neuter deposit of $500 is required for puppies.

    5. Sign Adoption Contract

    6. Take the Pet Home

    About American Belgian Malinios Rescue

    We are a breed specific rescue, American Belgian Malinois Rescue. We rescue dogs from across U.S.

    Come Meet American Belgian Malinios Rescue’s Pets

    We do not hold adoption events. Meet and greets are arranged on a case by case basis upon application approval.

    Make a donation to American Belgian Malinios Rescue to help homeless pets find homes is the easiest way for you to search for a new pet in NATION WIDE, TX.

    Support Adoption and Rescue. Why go to a dog breeder, cat breeder or pet store to buy a dog or buy a cat when you can adopt?

    Why Should You Adopt?

    Dog adoption and cat adoption saves lives. Adopt a dog or adopt a cat and you’ll have a friend for life.

    What is the difference between adopting a dog, adopting a cat, adopting a kitten or adopting a puppy versus getting dogs for sale, cats for sale, puppies for sale or kittens for sale from a dog breeder or a cat breeder?

    When someone is breeding puppies or breeding kittens, they are creating new dogs and cats who need homes. Some people are interested in a very specific breed of dog, cat, puppy or kitten and they think the only way to find that specific breed is to buy a dog for sale or buy a cat for sale from a puppy breeder or a kitten breeder. Yet animal shelters are filled with dogs and cats who must find homes.

    So rather than buying a dog or puppy for sale from a dog breeder or buying a cat or kitten for sale from a cat breeder, we encourage people to adopt a dog, adopt a cat, adopt a puppy or adopt a kitten at their local animal shelter, SPCA, humane society or pet rescue group.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Open an eBay Account

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Open a Dispute on eBay

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Find Reliable Sellers on eBay

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Ship Items Sold on eBay

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Remove an Item from eBay

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Find a Seller on eBay

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    End an eBay Listing Early

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    How to Contact a Seller on eBay (Before and After Your Purchase)

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Send an Invoice on eBay

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Find an eBay Item Number

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Block Someone on eBay

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Ask eBay to Step in

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Combine Orders for Shipping on eBay

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Report Fraud on eBay

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Delete an eBay Account

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Save Searches on eBay

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Close a Case on eBay

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Edit Feedback on eBay

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    How to Save Money with Combined Shipping on the eBay App

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Return an Item on eBay

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Dispute Negative Feedback on eBay

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Report Someone on eBay

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Delete Your eBay Purchase History

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Remove a Credit Card from eBay on PC or Mac

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Search Completed Auctions on eBay

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Best Ways to Reply to eBay Feedback and Buyers

    The Feedback Hub app lets you tell Microsoft about any problems you run into while using Windows 10. You can also send suggestions to help us improve your Windows experience.

    Sending a suggestion or reporting a problem can be as easy as finding feedback similar to yours and upvoting it or adding your experience. However, if you can’t find feedback like yours, then go ahead and create a new piece of feedback for us. You can even attach some screenshots or recreate a problem to help us see what you’re experiencing.

    When you open the Feedback Hub app, you’ll see the Home page. Here’s what you’ll find there:

    The Feedback tab containing the All feedback view showing feedback from other customers and the My feedback view to see feedback you’ve created or participated in.

    A search box, with the default text Give us feedback to make Windows better.

    The Report a problem and Suggest a feature buttons, which take you to the Feedback page where you can see if someone has already submitted the same report and upvote it, or submit a new report.

    If you are not logged into your Microsoft account, you’ll only be able to add new feedback; you won’t be able to search existing feedback or see the status of feedback you might have submitted previously.

    If you need to report a problem that requires a more immediate or direct response, use the Get Help app or go to

    Find existing feedback

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Select the Start button, and then open Feedback Hub .

    If you haven’t already, sign into your Microsoft account to take advantage of the full functionality of the Feedback Hub app. If you prefer not to sign in, you can still give feedback; see Adding Feedback to learn how.

    In the search box at the top of the home page, type your problem or suggestion and then select the search icon at the far right of the search box.

    In the search results, look for feedback similar to yours. The more specific your search query, the better chance you’ll have of displaying feedback like yours.

    If you find a similar Suggestion to yours, select Upvote.

    If you find a similar Problem to yours, select Add similar feedback and follow the directions below to add your own experience, starting with step 4.

    If you don’t find any feedback or a good match to yours then select Add new feedback and add your own!

    Adding feedback

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Here are some guidelines for good feedback

    Make your title concise and descriptive. This will help others find and upvote your feedback.

    Send one thought per feedback.

    Information about your device, operating system, and applications are automatically included in each reported feedback.

    In the Summarize your feedback box, provide a concise but clear title for your problem or suggestion.

    In the Explain in more detail (optional) box, you can give us more specific information, like how you encountered the problem.

    Select whether this is a Problem or a Suggestion.

    Based on the information you provided in Summarize your feedback, we will attempt to fill in the category and subcategory for you, but if you feel they should be changed to something that more accurately describes the area for your feedback, you may change the autoselected values. For example, if your printer stopped working, you’d select Devices and Drivers, then Print as the subcategory. When you are satisfied, select Next.

    If similar feedback to yours is displayed where we can add your experience, select that, or select New feedback if nothing matches, then select Next.

    If this is a Suggestion, move along to the next step. If this is a Problem, check Prioritize this as high severity if you feel the issue merits more urgent attention, then select the item that best describes the problem you are facing. Depending on what category and subcategory you selected earlier, there may be further questions.

    (Optional) Step through the problem while capturing the steps so we can see what happened.

    Select Recreate the problem (recommended).

    Select what types of data to include and whether to include screenshots, and then select Start recording.

    Perform the steps that led to the problem.

    When you’ve completed the steps, select Stop recording.

    You can close Feedback Hub if you need to and the capture will continue.

    Even though capturing is optional, it’s a good way to help Microsoft determine the cause of the problem and address it for you and others having that problem.

    (Optional) Send a screenshot to help show the problem.

    Go to where the problem happened, press the Windows logo key + Print screen to take a picture of your screen.

    Select Attach a screenshot, go to the Pictures/Screenshots folder, select the screenshot you want to send, and then press Enter.

    (Optional) Select Save a local copy of diagnostics and attachments created when giving feedback if you would like such a copy for your own reference.

    Based on your telemetry settings, you may see a checkbox that says I agree to send attached files and diagnostics to Microsoft along with my feedback. If so, be sure to check that, and then select Submit.

    Do more as a Windows Insider

    The Feedback Hub becomes even more powerful when you are a member of the Windows Insider program, where you can test out upcoming Windows features, get tips from the global Insider community, and much more!

    As a Windows Insider, use the Feedback Hub to:

    Read Announcements about Windows Insider builds and progress on future versions of Windows

    Participate in Quests designed to help test new Windows features

    Unlock Achievements based on providing feedback and completing Quests

    For more on the Windows Insider program and how you can join, see the Windows Insider site.

    We’d love to hear from you. Let us know what’s working well, if there are problems with our products, or if you have ideas about new functionality that would improve your experience.

    Your feedback goes directly to our products teams and helps us shape the future of Office for users around the world.

    Note: We’re updating our send feedback experience so that everything you say goes directly to our product teams. To send feedback using the best and most up-to-date experience, make sure to update to the latest version of your Office products.

    The quickest route to get your comments to our developers’ ears is right from within any Office app. They read customer feedback daily.

    From your Office app, go to Help > Feedback.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    From your Office app, go to File > Feedback.

    Click the Help menu and choose Give Feedback.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    In the dialog box that opens, select the feedback you want to give.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac


    Note: The option to make a suggestion in Give Feedback is currently available only for the new Outlook for MacOS.

    For Outlook in MacOS, when you select Give Feedback, the dialog box that opens allows you offer a suggestion directly to our product team.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    From your Office app, select . in the top right corner. Then, select Help & Feedback from the list.

    You can give feedback directly within the app by going to the backstage view (the view you see when you first open the app that lets you open a file or create a new one), tapping your username at the top right, and selecting Settings. Once you’re in the settings window, scroll down towards the bottom and select Send Feedback.

    The quickest route to our developers’ ears is right from within Office for the web. And if you want, you can even tell us your email address in case they need to contact you for clarification. They read all feedback.

    In Outlook on the web, select the question mark icon at the top right and then select Feedback.

    In any other Office web app, select Help > Feedback.

    • Forums
    • Macs
    • macOS
    • macOS


    macrumors newbie
    • Oct 18, 2020
  • #1
  • I just got a used Mac Mini (2018) on eBay, and the previous owner is still signed in to Find My Mac. I found this article, describing how to reset the NVRAM:

    I tried this, both using the keyboard shortcut and the terminal command, but I don’t know how to confirm it worked. When I go to System Preferences / Internet Accounts / iCloud, the row for Find My Mac is unchecked, but it also says “Find My Mac already in use”. I have no idea how to read this. Is it enabled or not? When I try checking it, it asks me for the password for an account that isn’t mine “to turn off Find My Mac.” This suggests to me that it is currently “on”, no?


    macrumors 65816
    • Oct 18, 2020
  • #2
  • I just got a used Mac Mini (2018) on eBay, and the previous owner is still signed in to Find My Mac. I found this article, describing how to reset the NVRAM:

    I tried this, both using the keyboard shortcut and the terminal command, but I don’t know how to confirm it worked.

    Well, we can see if those particular settings in NVRAM have been deleted, or not (see below). I don’t know how to tell wether that totally turned off Find My Mac or not. (I notice the article is from 2016 and probably for a different version of macOS than you have.)

    The article said to issue nvram -d fmm-computer-name nvram -d fmm-mobileme-token-FMM which should delete those two NVRAM variables. You can verify that they no longer exist by using nvram -p | grep fmm which will “print out” (nvram -p) all of the variables and pipe that output (the vertical bar, |) to a search (grep) for any line containing “fmm” and then display those as output. So if the command outputs nothing, there are no NVRAM variables containing the string “fmm”.

    Yeah, I’d agree that makes it seem like it’s turned on. I don’t suppose the seller will give you the password!

    Maybe someone else will come up with a solution, but the only thing I can think of is to wipe the drive and re-install macOS. What version of macOS is currently installed?


    macrumors newbie
    • Nov 10, 2020
  • #3
  • It should always be standard practice with a used computer to wipe the drive and reload the OS from scratch. You have no idea what the previous user did to the OS or if they left any surprises, viruses, key loggers, etc., behind. Just nuke it from orbit and then you have the peace of mind of knowing the OS is minty fresh and clean.


    macrumors newbie
    • Feb 4, 2021
  • #4
  • Find My Mac is what enables Activation Lock which is specifically designed to disallow the erasure of the Mac as a means of making it usable. This is the change made a few years ago that renders Apple products unusable after theft and this deters theft greatly. What you need to do is send an email to the person’s AppleID who is presently signed in, and request that they go to and remove that device from their list of devices. Without that, you’re sunk. If this Mac was managed with MDM in its prior life, and you know the bypass code (that is assigned to the device by the MDM) then that bypass code will also let you disable Activation Lock. Your best bet is the first option: have the person you bought it from remove that device from their AppleID devices using the web site I mentioned.

    Since you purchased on Ebay, you can also threaten to leave unkind feedback about the transaction unless they remove the device from their AppleID. Something along the lines of “this person sold an activation-locked device and refused to unlock the device, rendering it useless” should ensure this person doesn’t sell any more activation locked devices whether he knows the AppleID password (he’s legitimate) or not (he’s selling stolen hardware).

    It’s possible that the person who sold it on Ebay is not the person whose AppleID enabled Find My Mac. If that’s the case it’s almost assuredly stolen, so the person who owns the AppleID may offer a reward to you for it. If it was stolen, law enforcement might appreciate a heads-up about the person you purchased it from. You could return it to the person it was stolen from while also helping bust the perp, and end up a real hero for somebody.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Working with a team

    Working in Word with multiple authors is an opportunity to combine the efforts of several contributors who might be widely separated from each other by location or time zones—even on opposite sides of the world.

    You can share a document across multiple platforms such as Windows, MacOS, iOS, and the web. All contributions to the document are saved in real time to a single file in OneDrive. There is only one version, so the changes multiple authors make are always in sync.

    Preparing a document for sharing

    When you share a document with multiple authors, you give them permission to make changes and insert comments. To learn how to share a document, see Share OneDrive files and folders.

    When you share a document, be sure to select Allow editing to let the people you’re sharing with make changes to it. Otherwise, they can only read the document.

    If you allow editing, you can also ensure that the changes other authors make will be tracked. To do this, when you share the document, turn on Open in review mode only.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Important: Open in review mode is currently supported only in Word for Web. When you share a document, people will receive a link that opens the document in Word for Web. If they open the document in Word for the desktop, they’ll see a yellow banner across the top of the document telling them that they can only edit the document in Word for web.

    Giving feedback

    Feedback is essential to any team effort. In Word, you can give feedback to fellow authors in two ways: By inserting comments that are tied to a specific place in the document or by directly making tracked changes to the text.

    Using Reviewing in Word for web

    When you put yourself in Reviewing in Word for web, changes are tracked and other users can see your additions to the document.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Use Track Changes in Word for desktop or iOS

    If you’re working in Word for desktop or iOS, make sure you have Track Changes on.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    For more information about working with Track Changes, see Track changes in Word.

    Insert comments

    Use comments to ask questions and make suggestions or corrections without changing the text. Comments refer to a specific place in the document that you choose by selecting a section of text or simply by clicking or tapping in the document. To learn how to insert comments in Word for Windows or web, see Insert or delete a comment. For Word for MacOS, see Insert, delete, or change a comment.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    When you insert or reply to a comment, you can use an @mention in Microsoft 365 to address a specific author. To learn how to use an @mention, see Use @mention in comments to tag someone for feedback.

    When you reply to a comment, you begin a thread that all authors can see and respond to in real time, like a chat session. Using an @mention in the thread doesn’t exclude anyone, it just calls out the comment to the attention of that person and notifies them by email that there’s a comment or reply for them.

    Responding to feedback

    The feedback you receive will be comments and tracked changes.

    Resolve comments

    When someone inserts a comment in a document, you can reply to it, resolve it, or delete it. For more information about replying to a comment, see Reply to a comment.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    After you resolve a thread, it remains in the document until you delete it, but is inactive unless someone reopens it.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Delete comments

    After you’ve resolved or replied to any comments, you can clean up the document by deleting them. When you delete a comment, it’s gone for good, so it’s best to keep comments around until you’re finalizing the document. Resolved comments only appear in the Comments pane.

    For more information about deleting comments, see Track changes in Word or Delete a comment.

    Resolve tracked changes

    You resolve tracked changes by either accepting or rejecting them. For more information about working with Track Changes, see Track changes in Word.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    AppleInsider is supported by its audience and may earn commission as an Amazon Associate and affiliate partner on qualifying purchases. These affiliate partnerships do not influence our editorial content.

    If you’re having trouble reading what’s on your Mac’s screen, here’s how to get Siri to audibly read out what’s on screen to you.

    While monitors are the primary way for people to get information from their Mac, not everyone has that luxury. For those who are visually impaired, they cannot rely on what is shown on the screen as a source of information, and so require alternative methods.

    Apple has a solution to this, buried in its Accessibility settings, titled Spoken Content. The feature effectively allows you to set macOS to use Siri to read out text that appears onscreen.

    While intended as an accessibility feature, it can also be useful for those with complete sight, as a way to enhance their computing experience.

    For example, Siri could read text aloud while looking away from the screen, or to check a typed-out speech sounds fine when actually read aloud. You can also set Siri up to speak announcements.

    Getting started with Spoken Content

    The majority of Spoken Content’s controls reside within the Accessibility menu.

    How to enable Spoken Content in macOS

    • Click the Apple icon in the menu.
    • Click System Preferences.
    • Click Accessibility.
    • In the left-hand panel, select Spoken Content.
    • Click the tickboxes next to the options you want enabled.

    Spoken Content is divided into four general sections, with each having its own personalization options. They cover spoken announcements, selected text, items being pointed at with the mouse, and for typing feedback.

    Depending on what you need enabled, simply click the option next to the specific feature.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    At the top of the screen are the main voice settings, where you can select the voice Siri will use, test out the voice, and affect the rate of speech. In the System Voice dropdown, you can also select to Customize the voice, allowing you to select and download new voices, including those for other languages.

    Next to the System Voice dropdown, the Play button can be used to hear a sample of the speech that will be used, allowing you to change the voice or the speaking rate before you leave the menu.

    Speak announcements

    If you select to enable Speak announcements, macOS will read out any notifications or alerts that pop up.

    The Options button for the feature allows you to set a specific voice to be used for announcements, as well as to set a delay for when the announcement will be said after it appears on screen.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    You can even set the phrase that can be said before the announcement itself. You can set it to be the application name, or an interruption from an editable phrase list, such as “Excuse me” and “Alert!”

    Again, you are offered a play button to test out your settings.

    Speak selection

    Probably the most useful option on the list, Speak selection will read aloud any text that has been selected, after pressing a keyboard shortcut.

    The Options button starts off by allowing you to set a specific keyboard shortcut for the feature. By default, it’s Option and Escape pressed together, which works quite well.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Highlight content refers to macOS highlighting the part of a selected stretch of text being read at that moment. This can be set to words, sentences, words and sentences, or off.

    Word color relates to the Highlight content feature, to determine what color the currently-said word will be highlighted by. Sentence color is the same thing, but for the current sentence, and can be set to a different color than the word version.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Sentence style lets you choose between the highlighting consisting of an underline or a change in background color.

    Show Controller will determine whether the user will be able to see an extra controller window when text is being read aloud. The controller can be used to stop, play, and pause speech, skip forward and back in the text, and to speed up or slow down the speaking rate using the turtle and rabbit icons.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Speak items under the pointer

    As the name suggests, it’s a feature that will say what is currently under the pointer within macOS. This is intended to help visually impaired users identify what they are pointed at when using the mouse.

    The feature can be set to run at all times, or when the macOS Zoom accessibility function is engaged, so that it isn’t always active.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    You can set the Speech verbosity to low, medium, or high, and for there to be a short or long delay before macOS says what is under the cursor.

    Speech typing feedback

    Ideally for those who need to be able to know what they are typing Speech typing feedback will tell users what they are typing. This can be set to run in a couple of ways.

    Under Options, Echo characters will say each character on the keyboard the user has typed, including punctuation. Echo words does the same, but after the user has completed a word.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Echo selection changes will make macOS speak each time you select something on screen. This can include the contents of a webpage you’ve just clicked on, or text in a document.

    The Echo selection changes also reads out highlighted text, in case you don’t want to hear an entire page.

    Echo modifier keys will speak out the name of each modifier key, which can help both people who cannot see the keyboard fully, and those who are not quite familiar with the keyboard’s layout. When selected, it will say “Shift,” “Control,” “Command,” and “Option” whenever they are pressed.

    Graphic: Diego Aguirre In today’s economy every dollar counts–so why not sell that not-so-old PC you don’t use anymore on Craigslist or Ebay? Odds are, a penny-pinching buyer is out there eager to save big by buying your second-hand hardware. After all, anything is better than having your recently retired PC gather dust bunnies in your closet.

    To help you sell your old PC, we’ve put together a list of the four steps you need to take to make sure that your PC is ready for a second life of service. We also answer some of the common questions about selling a used PC, such as how to estimate what it’s worth, and what legal issues are involved when selling a PC loaded with expensive software (can you charge extra?).

    The Four Key Steps

    Run a scan: It’s critical to scan your old computer for malware, including viruses, spyware, and worms. You don’t want to pass along security threats to the next owner. Viruses and spyware can also significantly slow the system down. Getting rid of them is not only playing it safe, it also gives the PC some pep. If you’re not already running an antivirus/antispyware app, don’t rush out and buy one. PC World has selected eight great security tools that’ll do the job for free.

    Artwork: Chip Taylor Move your data to your new computer: Naturally, you’ll want to transfer all of your files, programs, browser favorites, passwords, and other essentials. For a direct PC-to-PC transfer, an inexpensive Windows utility like Laplink’s PCmover is a good option. The $70 shrinkwrap version includes a USB 2.0 cable, or you could save $10 by downloading the app sans cable. If you back up your files to an external hard drive or online service, you could restore them to a new system. And remember that when it comes to backups, personal data–including photos, videos, and music–should be your top backup priority. You can always reinstall applications, but not your kids’ pics.

    Wipe the drive clean: Don’t leave personal and financial data, including credit card, bank account, and social security numbers, on your hard drive. Sensitive files that you’ve “deleted” still exist on the disk and are very easy to recover. It’s critical that you render this data unreadable. A drive-erasing tool like DBAN is a must. Another option is to wipe the drive completely and reinstall Windows. (Nobody wants to buy a PC without an operating system.) This wipe/reinstall process should take eight easy steps, but be sure to transfer or back up your data before you begin.

    Pep up your old system: What if a potential buyer wants to figuratively kick the tires of your PC before plunking down cash for it? Slow system performance can easily scuttle the deal. You might want to install one or more free utilities that will speed up and tweak your PC. For instance, if Windows starts up too slowly, you might try StartUpLite to streamline startup and eliminate unnecessary overhead. And Vista Services Optimizer zaps unnecessary background services that slow Windows Vista.

    Common Questions

    How much is my used computer worth? A good way to determine a fair asking price for your computer is to go to eBay’s home page, enter the manufacturer’s name and model number (for example, Gateway MX8734) in the Search field, and click the Search button. On the search results page, go to Refine Search, scroll down to Condition, and click Used . The results will show what eBay buyers are asking for PCs like yours.

    Another way to estimate how much your system is worth is by checking with eBay again and searching for completed auctions. First sign in to your eBay account and go to Advanced Search. Next, type in the model number of your old desktop or notebook into eBay Search and select “Completed Listings.” The search results will deliver what people actually paid for auction items. Here are Ebay’s instructions.

    We found that an old Dell Dimension 8300 recently sold for $160–not bad.

    Graphic: Diego Aguirre Do I have to uninstall software that I put on the PC?

    What’s the best way to market my PC? In most cases, a used PC isn’t a big-ticket item, so you’ll want to keep marketing costs to a minimum. A free Craigslist ad is an economical option, particularly if you want to sell your computer locally, which is always easiest. To cast a wider net, eBay is a good choice, although you’ll have to pay seller fees and probably pack up and ship the computer. For tips on buying and selling on Craigslist, see “10 Craigslist Tips for Power Users”.

    Chris Hoffman is Editor-in-Chief of How-To Geek. He’s written about technology for over a decade and was a PCWorld columnist for two years. Chris has written for The New York Times and Reader’s Digest, been interviewed as a technology expert on TV stations like Miami’s NBC 6, and had his work covered by news outlets like the BBC. Since 2011, Chris has written over 2,000 articles that have been read nearly one billion times—and that’s just here at How-To Geek. Read more.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Microsoft wants your feedback about Windows 10 — really, they need it. This is the most important feature in the Windows 10 Technical Preview — not a Start menu, virtual desktops, or windowed “universal apps.”

    Your feedback will be particularly crucial as Microsoft begins using A/B testing, rolling out different versions of features to different users and seeing who’s the happiest. The feedback from Windows 8 testers was spot-on, so Microsoft is now listening.

    Send Inline Feedback

    As you’re using the Windows 10 Technical Preview, you’ll see notification balloons pop-up near your system tray. They’ll ask you for your feedback about something you just did. Whether you found the action frustrating or whether it worked smoothly, you should click (or tap) this pop-up message to give feedback when you see it.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    The Windows Feedback app will appear, and you’ll be able to give feedback instantly about something you just did. It will just take a second or two. With enough people rating their interactions with the system, Microsoft can see what works and what needs to be fixed.

    One thing’s for sure — if we had this feature during Windows 8’s development, those weird hot-corner actions for accessing the charms bar with the mouse would never have survived.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Provide Feedback on Anything

    Microsoft allows you to send feedback on anything in the system. Even if someone else has already provided this feedback, you can cast your vote so Microsoft knows how many users agree with the feedback.

    First, open the Windows Feedback app — you’ll find it in the Start menu. It’s also one of the default tiles, so you can’t miss it.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    The first time you open this app, you’ll need to register for the “Windows Insider Preview Program.” Just click the link in the window.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Click the “Join now” button on the web page that appears and accept the user agreement. The Microsoft account you logged into your Windows system with will now be part of the Windows Insider Preview Program. Once it is, you can go back to the Windows Feedback app and click Reload.

    We’re not really sure why you have to agree to the Windows Insider Preview Program agreement to do this. Technically speaking, you’re already part of the Windows Insider Preview Program after downloading and installing the Windows 10 Technical Preview. We’re not sure anything will behave differently after you do this — you just gain access to the Windows Feedback app.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    You’ll see a list of many different Windows system features and components. Choose the one you want to leave feedback on. The app will automatically suggest Windows features you used recently, but you can also just browse and look for something you want to provide feedback about.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    When you choose to send feedback, be sure to check the existing feedback to see if your issue has already been addressed. It may be one of the top issues in the list, or you could use the search box to search existing feedback. To provide a new piece of feedback, use the New feedback button.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Choose existing feedback and you can cast your vote for it, saying you have the same problem with the “Me too!” button. If enough people vote for something, Microsoft will (hopefully) take notice. Maybe we’ll one day be able to remove that search button from the taskbar if enough people vote!

    You can also add additional details, or provide a screenshot with the Screenshot button. This is useful if you’re experiencing some sort of bug Microsoft needs to see.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    This is the real reason to use the Windows 10 Technical Preview. Microsoft needs this feedback to make Windows 10 a product people like and want to use — with Windows 8, they demonstrated they couldn’t make a compelling product while ignoring feedback. Windows 10 is looking so great because it’s a product of listening to the criticisms of Windows 8. We just have to make sure they don’t mess up again!

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Managing our inboxes can be a stressful task. Especially when you’re attempting to track feedback from multiple people on a document you created. Responding to and consolidating comments can quickly become overwhelming.

    Acrobat’s Send for Review process streamlines the entire process. Send a link or attach a document to see updates almost immediately. Track when people open or comment on documents, consolidating multiple feedback sources in one convenient place. Acrobat uses the Document Cloud to bridge the communication gap and keep your content organized.

    Ask others to review

    You have the option to send an anonymous or public link in an email or a personalized invitations to one or many people at a time. You can also send files for commenting directly from Acrobat or other applications that use PDFMaker, such as Microsoft Word. Choose Acrobat > Create And Send For Review (Windows), or Send for Comments (macOS). The reviewers receive an email invitation with a link to the review document. When they click the link or the Review button in the invitation, the PDF opens in a web browser. They can remain in the browser or open the PDF in Acrobat Reader or Acrobat Pro to add comments.

    Add multiple PDF files for viewing by link

    Send a link and track when people view and download the file. They will still be able to add comments manually within Acrobat. Track comments and mentions by using Review file.

    In Windows, click Add Files to prepare documents. Once you have added all your content, expand the Get Link panel and click Create Link to upload your documents to the cloud and generate the link. On macOS, click the Share a link to this file button in the top right to generate a sharing link.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Send multiple PDF files for viewing as attachments

    You can send your PDF documents as an attachment in an email. In Windows, choose Send as Attachment > Webmail or Default Email Application > Continue to launch the appropriate program. On macOS, click the Send file by email button in the top right and choose to send via your Default email application or Webmail.

    If you choose Webmail, simply add your account via the dropdown menu and click Continue. A pop-up window will launch and allow you to finish the process through your preferred account.

    Invite people to review the file and track when they add comments, mention others, or finish reviewing. If you would like to set a deadline for review, check the Set Deadline box before clicking the Send button.

    1. Add an email subject
    2. Add a message
    3. Set a deadline
    4. Send via the Document Cloud or generate an anonymous web link by selecting Get Link
    5. Send as attachment

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    The review process

    Once the document has been sent for review, your PDF will switch to the Review Version of your file. You can use the commenting tools or the @mention to direct comments to other reviewers. You will be able to see all participants, their review status, as well add new reviewers. There are also extended review features that allow you to:

    • Copy Review Link: send manually to other reviewers
    • Unshare Review: This revokes review privileges from invitees
    • Delete Review: This permanently removes the file and all associated comments from the Document Cloud for all participants and cannot be undone.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Acrobat’s Send for Review options enable productive communication and keep your inbox free from clutter. Familiar review tools provide consistent comment formatting, and convenient sending options collect reviews in one location. Harness the power of these tools to speed up the way you communicate with clients and collaborators alike.

    merlin software

    Merlin Software has developed powerful software packages for use with eBay. They can save time and money with bidding tools and search tools designed to find under priced auctions. You’ll never have to leave feedback by hand again. You can even spruce up your desktop with your favorite comic strips. We do custom projects as well, specializing in software that interfaces with eBay.

    eBook to Images 1.0.0

    Converts text based eBooks into images. For people without MP3 players with text or eBook support, but can view photos, this will convert a book into a series of images. Native support for Sansa e200, or specify sizes for any player.

    Updated January 25, 2011

    mp3Split 0.9.1

    Splits MP3 files into smaller segments. This comes in handy for long audio book tracks or podcasts, especially if you have a player that doesn’t support bookmarking or resuming. Drag and drop files and folders into the simple interface.

    Updated August 24, 2006

    MP3Duration 0.9.0

    Calculates the playing time of your music collection. Add your music/podcast/audiobook folders and the total playtime is displayed. Brag that you can play music for monthes without repeating a track. Supports MP3s and WMAs.

    Updated October 29, 2007

    VMware MAC Changer 1.0.1

    Autmatically create unique MAC addresses. Using VMware 4 or 5 virtual machines, if you need an image on multiple PCs with software on them requiring a unique MAC address this will modify your settings file to create one at random.

    Updated October 29, 2007

    Learn how to block pop-up windows and handle persistent ads on your iPhone, iPad, iPod touch, or Mac.

    Pop-ups can be ads, notices, offers, or alerts that open in your current browser window, in a new window, or in another tab. Some pop-ups are third-party ads that use phishing tactics—like warnings or prizes—to trick you into believing they’re from Apple or another trusted company, so you’ll share personal or financial information. Or they might claim to offer free downloads, software updates, or plugins, to try to trick you into installing unwanted software.

    Unless you’re confident of an ad’s legitimacy, you should avoid interacting with pop-ups or webpages that seem to take over your screen. Here are additional tips that can help you manage pop-ups and other unwanted interruptions.

    Check and update your software

    Always make sure you install the latest software updates for all your Apple products. Many software releases have important security updates and may include improvements that help control pop-ups.

    The safest place to download apps for your Mac is the App Store. If you need third-party software for your Mac, and it isn’t available in the App Store, get it directly from the developer or another reliable source, rather than through an ad or link.

    Check Safari settings and security preferences

    Make sure Safari security settings are turned on, particularly Block Pop-ups—for pop-up windows—and the Fraudulent Website Warning.

    On your iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch, go to Settings > Safari and turn on Block Pop-ups and Fraudulent Website Warning.

    On your Mac, you can find these options in Safari > Preferences. The Websites tab includes options to block some or all pop-up windows, and you can turn on fraudulent site warnings in the Security tab.

    Pop-ups and ads in Safari

    If you see an annoying pop-up ad in Safari, you can go to the Search field and enter a new URL or search term to browse to a new site. If you don’t see the Search field on your iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch, tap the top of the screen to make it appear.

    Some pop-ups and ads have fake buttons that resemble the close button, so use caution if you try to close a pop-up or ad. If you’re unsure, avoid interacting with the pop-up or ad and close the Safari window or tab.

    On your Mac, you can also update your settings to prevent windows from opening again after you close Safari, or just press and hold the Shift key when you open Safari.

    If you might have installed adware or other unwanted software on your Mac

    If you see pop-ups on your Mac that just won’t go away, you might have inadvertently downloaded and installed adware (advertising-supported software) or other unwanted software. Certain third-party download sites might include programs that you don’t want with the software that you install.

    If you think that you might have malware or adware on your Mac, update to the latest version of macOS. If your Mac is already running the latest version, restart it. macOS includes a built-in tool that removes known malware when you restart your Mac.

    Check your Applications folder to see if you have any apps that you didn’t expect and uninstall them. You can also check the Extensions tab in Safari preferences to check if you installed any unnecessary extensions that you’d prefer to turn off. If you continue to see advertising or other unwanted programs on your Mac, contact Apple.

    Learn more

    • How to safely open software on your Mac
    • How to recognize and avoid phishing and other scams

    Information about products not manufactured by Apple, or independent websites not controlled or tested by Apple, is provided without recommendation or endorsement. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the selection, performance, or use of third-party websites or products. Apple makes no representations regarding third-party website accuracy or reliability. Contact the vendor for additional information.

    By Stella | Follow | Last Updated October 27, 2021

    Summary :

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Are you tired of the Windows Insider Program? Do you want to leave the Windows Insider Program? In this MiniTool post, we will show you how to leave the Windows Insider Program to stop receiving Insider builds on your Windows 10 or Windows 11 computer.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    This post shows you how to recover deleted files in Windows 11 using different methods under various data loss situations.

    Before the final release of a Windows version, Microsoft will release some Insider preview builds to Insiders in the Windows Insider Program for testing. Windows Insider can use the new Windows version before others. When they find bugs and issues, they can also send feedback to Microsoft to help improve the new Windows version.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    In this post, we will show you how to join the Windows Insider Program to be a Windows Insider and get Windows 11 earlier than others.

    After participating in Windows Insider Program, you will frequently receive Windows updates because the Microsoft engineers are continuously fixing the reported and found issues. You may be tired of these things. Or perhaps, you want to stop receiving Insider builds because the official Windows build has been launched to the public.

    Now we will show you how to revert from Windows Insider on Windows 10/11.

    How to Leave the Windows Insider Program on Windows 10?

    If you are running Windows 10, you can use these steps to leave the Windows Insider Program:

    1. Click Start.
    2. Go to Settings > Update & security > Windows Insider Program.
    3. Select Stop getting preview builds.
    4. Follow the on-screen instructions to opt out of the Windows Insider Program on your computer.

    How to Leave the Windows Insider Program on Windows 11?

    If you have upgraded your computer to Windows 11 via the Windows Insider Program, you can follow this guide to leave the program:

    1. Click Start.

    2. Go to Settings > Windows Update > Windows Insider Program > Stop getting preview builds.

    3. Click the Leave the Insider Program link.

    4. You will be directed to Microsoft’s Leave the Windows Insider Program page. Check the email on the top right side and see if it is the email you have used to join the Windows Insider Program. If yes, click the blue Leave the program now button to revert from the program.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    A Quick Way to Leave the Windows Insider Program on Windows 10/11

    From the above part, you can see the Leave the Windows Insider Program page from Microsoft. Here comes the key: no matter you are using Windows 10 or Windows 11, you can just go to that page and click the Leave the program now button to leave the Windows Insider Program. Just make sure that you sign into with the right Microsoft account on that page.

    What if I Can’t Leave the Windows Insider Program

    If you can’t leave the Windows Insider Program, it usually means that you are in the Dev Channel and the Windows builds in this Channel are higher than the builds in the Beta Channel. Microsoft doesn’t allow you to switch to the Beta Channel or leave the Insider Program. If you don’t want to stay in the Windows Insider Program, you need to clean install Windows 10 or Windows 11. Here are three related articles:

    Bottom Line

    Now, you should know how to leave the Windows Insider Program on your Windows 10/11 computer. Select your preferred way to do the job. If you have other related issues that are needed to be fixed, you can let us know in the comments.

    • Facebook
    • Twitter
    • Linkedin
    • Reddit


    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Position: Columnist

    Stella has been working in MiniTool Software as an English Editor for more than 4 years. Her articles mainly cover the fields of data recovery including storage media data recovery and phone data recovery, YouTube videos download, partition management, and video conversions.

    Here are five fixes for what might be ailing your MacBook.

    Matt Elliott, a technology writer for more than a decade, is a PC tester and Mac user based in New Hampshire.

    Is your Mac is starting to show signs of age and is acting strangely or feeling sluggish? Before you junk it, there might be some easy fixes to what ails it. Here are five fixes to five common Mac problems.

    1. Startup issues

    If your Mac fails to boot properly and you find yourself staring at a blank screen or gray startup screen instead of your desktop, then it’s time to try booting in Safe Mode. In Safe Mode, MacOS will boot with the bare minimum of software and drivers required and will run a check of your startup disk and repair any directory issues that might be the cause of your startup ills.

    To start up in safe mode, start your Mac and then press and hold the Shift key. The Apple logo will appear and then the login screen. You can release the Shift key when the Apple logo disappears and the login screen appears. It may take a few minutes before you get to the login screen as MacOS runs its diagnostics on your hard disk. To leave Safe Mode and start up your Mac per usual, just restart your Mac without holding any keys.

    2. Incompatible login items

    If you find yourself staring at a blue screen when you start up your Mac, it might mean that one of your startup items — apps that start automatically when you start up your Mac — is incompatible with MacOS. With a bit of trial and error, you can identify which app is the problem child.

    You can remove login items one at a time and start up your Mac after each removal to see if the problem is gone. To do so, go to System Preferences > Users & Groups and click your name on the left under Current User. Next, click the Login Items tab above the window to the right. Highlight an app and then click the “-“ sign below. It’ll get removed from the Login Items list and you can restart your Mac to see if your startup issue has been fixed. If not, you can head back to the list and remove another app and keep going until you find the culprit. You can add items back to the Startup Items list by hitting the “+” button and selecting items from your Applications folder.

    3. Unresponsive app

    You might find that an app will occasionally trip up your Mac and hang. And when an app hangs, it freezes you out and won’t let you do anything, including quit out of it. Enter: Force Quit. You can call up the Force Quit menu from the Apple icon in the upper-left corner or by hitting Command-Option-Escape. Just highlight the app that’s not responding and hit the Force Quit button. (You can also select multiple apps to force quit by using holding down the Command or Shift keys when making your selections.)

    Screenshot by Matt Elliott/CNET

    4. Spinning beach ball

    If you are seeing the spinning beach ball with increasingly regularity, then it’s time to take a look at what might be causing the slowdown. Open the Activity Monitor (by searching for it or finding it in the Utilities folder, which is inside your Applications folder) to see how much of an impact the apps you are currently running have on your system resources. In the Activity Monitor window, you can see real-time stats on the amount of CPU and memory resources each app is using. You can also use the Activity Monitor to quit any app that’s using more than its fair share of resources. Just highlight an app from the list, click the X button in the upper-left corner, and then choose Quit or Force Quit.

    5. No internet connection

    Sometimes my MacBook ($386 at Amazon) freaks out and can’t connect to my Wi-Fi network when my Windows laptop and iPhone ($264 at GameStop) are having no networking issues at all. The quickest fix I’ve found when my MacBook’s Wi-Fi status shows No Internet Connection is to tell it to forget the network and then reconnect as if it were brand-new.

    On the Network page in System Preferences, click the Advanced button in the lower left and you’ll see a list Preferred Networks. These are the Wi-Fi connections you’ve connected to in the past and your MacBook remembers for future uses. Highlight your Wi-Fi network and click the “-“ button and then choose Remove to forget it. With your network removed and forgotten, you can click the Wi-Fi icon in the menu bar and reconnect to your network by entering your password and starting anew.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Whenever I find the mobile version of a site too cramped to handle, I switch to its desktop version for a bit of breathing room. On certain pages, though, I’ll have to switch back to mobile view for the best experience.

    Sure, on iOS 15, this is easy enough to do. It’s a different story for iOS 12 or earlier, on the other hand. No matter which version you use, this guide will help you view the mobile or desktop version of websites on iPhone.

    How to Request Mobile Website in iOS 15 Safari on iPhone and iPad

    To switch back to the mobile site after switching to desktop site on iPhone running iOS 15, just tap AA → Tap Request Mobile Website.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    How to switch to Mobile Version in iOS 12 Safari on iPhone or iPad

    1. First off, launch Settings on your iOS device.
    2. Now, tap Safari.
    3. Next, scroll down to the bottom and hit Advanced.
    4. Tap Website Data.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

  • Tap Edit at the top right corner.
  • Next up, find the website that you want to switch to the mobile version of. Then, tap the red button to the left of it and hit Delete.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

  • Finally, make sure to tap Done at the top right to confirm.
  • Now, open Safari and head over to the website. Its mobile version will be waiting for you to browse.

    Note: For those unfamiliar, there are a couple of ways that you can access the desktop version of any site in iOS 12. Just head over to a site using Safari and then touch and hold the refresh button → choose Request Desktop Site. Alternately, tap the Share icon and select Request Desktop Site in the share sheet.

    As mentioned above, switching back to the mobile version is much easier in Chrome and Firebox. Here’s how.

    Switch between Desktop and Mobile Site in Chrome

    Gone to the Desktop Version in Google Chrome and need to get back?

    To go back to the mobile site in Chrome, all you need to do is tap the More icon (three dots) at the bottom right corner and then scroll down to Request Mobile Site. Now, Chrome will refresh and display the mobile version of the site.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    If you ever want to go back to Google’s Desktop Version, head to the same settings menu but tap Request Desktop Site instead. That’s called seamless switching.

    How to change between Desktop and Mobile Site in Firefox

    To return to the Mobile Site in Firefox, tap the More icon (three dots at the top right) and then select Request Mobile Site. The web browser will refresh and display the mobile version of the site.

    If you want to use the Desktop Site, go back to the same More menu and select Request Desktop Site.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Wrapping up…

    What do you think—pretty easy procedure, right? Well, unless you’re on iOS 12. Then you have to do a bit of fiddling with your Settings to switch between Mobile and Desktop sites. Nonetheless, where there’s a will there’s a way.

    Still, stuck on Desktop or Mobile view? Let us know more about your issue in the comments and we’ll do our best to help you out.

    For a company that created Internet Explorer, Microsoft’s Edge browser feels surprisingly good at just about everything I throw at it. Compared to Chrome, however, what Microsoft’s revamped browser lacks is simplicity straight out of the box.

    Yes, I’m talking about about those huge favicons and distracting news headlines that flash across the screen whenever I open Microsoft Edge or launch a new tab.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    And thanks to that, I often find myself flicking through cat pics on Instagram or reading what Donald Trump was up to instead of getting some work done. Not good when it comes to productivity.

    However, hope isn’t lost just yet. I found out that removing my list of Top Sites and suggested news feed permanently is more than possible. If you hate these distractions, let’s see how you can do that as well!

    Removing Top Sites and News Feed

    New tabs feature both Top Sites and suggested news articles, both of which are highly distracting. The former provides a list of sites that come pre-installed by default, with frequently visited sites shown subsequently after using the browser for a while.

    The latter is just a major nuisance, bombarding you incessantly with news feed from MSN — suggested articles also show up on the startup page, requiring a slightly different procedure to get rid of it.

    New Tabs

    While Microsoft Edge propagates its new tabs with a double-barrage of distractions, the browser is considerate enough to provide us with not one, but two ways to disable these annoyances.

    The first method involves opening the Edge menu — click those ‘three dots’ on the top-left corner — and then clicking Settings.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Now, simply open the pull-down menu under Open New Tabs With.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Select A Blank Page to disable both Top Sites and the suggested news feed.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or macNote:

    The second method involves clicking the gear-shaped Customize icon that shows up above the Top Sites area after opening a new tab.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    On the Customize screen that shows up subsequently, use the radio button next to A Blank Page to get rid of all unwanted elements within new tabs.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or macNote:

    Startup Page

    The startup page that Microsoft Edge shows at launch doesn’t display Top Sites, only suggested content. While that sounds better, it’s actually not — the distracting news feed is straight up at your face right from the get-go, which somehow feels even worse.

    Since the new tab settings don’t work for the startup page, you need to hide the news feed using a separate set of settings.

    To do that, click the gear-shaped Customize icon to the top left-corner of the news feed on your startup page.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    On the Customize screen, check the box next to Hide My News Feed, and then click Save.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or macNote:

    Enabling Top Sites and News Feeds

    If you miss your Top Sites and suggested news feed, turning them on is way easier than disabling them. Just click the Show Top Sites or Shows News Feed options to the bottom of any startup on new tab page and Microsoft Edge is more than willing to oblige.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    And yes, the changes are permanent and show up even after restarting your browser. Talk about being persistent!

    On Mobile

    On the iOS and Android versions of Microsoft Edge, you don’t have the luxury of disabling Top Sites permanently. Instead, the best you can do is to individually delete the tiles and repeat once they fill in automatically. Fortunately, Edge doesn’t spam new tabs with frequently visited sites immediately, so you should be good for a few browsing sessions before any new thumbnails show up.

    To delete an item, simply perform a long-tap and select Remove on the context menu — on iOS, just tap the ‘x’-shaped sub-icon.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Fortunately, you can still hide your suggested news feed permanently, which is great — really, I would’ve just stopped using Edge altogether otherwise!

    To do that, simply tap the Ellipsis icon, select Settings, and then tap New Tab Page on the subsequent screen.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Next, turn off the switch next to Hide News Feed (displayed as Show News Feed on iOS) and you are done.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Simply turn the switch back on if you want to enable the news feed later on. Don’t see any reason why you’d want to do that!

    Good Riddance

    Having a clean slate to begin working with is a must for anyone looking to stay focused. Unfortunately, both Top Sites and the suggested news feed goes absolutely against that.

    While having ready access to frequently-visited sites do feel as if we can get to them faster, a minor lapse in concentration is just what it takes to make you click the wrong thumbnail and waste time unnecessarily.

    And really, those suggested news articles aren’t even worth talking about, right?

    Last updated on 03 February, 2022

    The above article may contain affiliate links which help support Guiding Tech. However, it does not affect our editorial integrity. The content remains unbiased and authentic.

    How much is a USB-C iPhone worth?

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    What just happened? A modified iPhone that replaces the handset’s Lightning connector with a USB-C port has reached nearly $100,000 on eBay. The one-off unit was developed by engineering student Ken Pillonel, who spent several months reverse engineering Apple’s C94 and developing a flexible PCB that could fit inside the phone’s chassis.

    Pillonel listed the phone on eBay on November 1, and as of this writing, it has already attracted more than 170 bids. Unfortunately, the bid list is private, so we can’t see for sure how many were from legitimate-looking accounts compared to those from obvious spam accounts (those with zero feedback, for example).

    What we do know is that there is still more than six days remaining, and the current bid is $99,900.

    The seller notes that the winner should not restore, update or erase the iPhone. Furthermore, they are advised against using it as their daily driver and should not open it.

    Of course, that last warning is likely to be disregarded as anyone that is willing to spend this kind of money on an iPhone with a USB-C port likely just wants to understand exactly what makes it tick and try to figure out a way to monetize it.

    The winning bidder will receive the phone itself – a black iPhone X with 64GB of memory -and the box it came in. Pillonel is also offering a 30-minute call should the buyer want to ask any questions. The creator guarantees the phone will work when it is received, but that’s about it.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Although the blue screen on Mac is a rare phenomenon, many users get into a panic when they see it at startup. The primary reason for blue screen is cited to a damaged or incompatible startup items of software. So there is nothing to worry about as you can quickly fix this issue. Before jumping on the solutions, let’s understand the issue;

    What Does the Blue Screen on Mac mean?

    The question might pop up in your mind. The answer is a Blue Screen of Death (BSOD) with a spinning beach ball or colored pinwheel. Although it is a common scenario in the Windows realm, for Mac users, it happens once in a blue moon.

    Different users register the issue in myriad ways. Some see a half blue screen, while others have noticed screen with lines. The good news is your data is safe. Anyway, following are the possible solutions to solve this issue.

    How to Get Rid of Blue Screen on Mac

    • Shutdown the Mac and Disconnect Peripherals
    • Restart Mac in Safe Mode
    • Check Login items on your Mac
    • Repair Your Disk Using Recovery Mode
    • Reinstall macOS

    Shutdown the Mac and Disconnect Peripherals

    Apple launched a 12-inch MacBook with a single port. Owners of this laptop had to rely on peripherals like USB-C hub or docking stations. When your Mac’s screen turns blue, disconnect all such peripherals attached to your Mac. But wait! You are not supposed to pull them out in a hurry. First, shut down your Mac and then unplug the peripherals. Next, restart your Mac and see if the Blue screen is still there.

    Restart Mac in Safe Mode

    You can start or restart your Mac in safe mode. For this purpose, press and hold the Shift key immediately after you start or restart your Mac. When the Apple logo appears on display, release the Shift key.

    In case the startup disk is encrypted with FileVault, you may need to log in twice – to unlock the startup disk and to log in to the Finder.

    Restart your Mac without pressing any keys to leave safe mode.

    Check Login items on your Mac

    There are some apps that automatically open/appear when you start your Mac. These items could be reasons why you face Blue screen on your Mac.

    1. Click on the Apple menu and then open System Preferences.How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac
    2. Next, click on Users & Groups.How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac
    3. On this window, click on the account name under the Current User
    4. Now click on Login Items button.How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac
    5. Select all the Login items and then click on the Remove (-) button.How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac
    6. Finally, click on the Apple menu and Restart your Mac.How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Repair Your Disk Using Recovery Mode

    Disk Utility can fix many problems like unexpected apps closure, corrupt files, malfunction of external devices, or computer does not startup. If your Mac screen turns blue for long, you can repair your disk using Recovery Mode.

    Reinstall macOS

    Reinstalling macOS keeps your files and user settings unharmed if you do it with Internet or install it from the recovery partition (hard drive or flash storage on Mac). When you reinstall the macOS, connect your Mac to the Internet.

    1. Click on the Apple menu from the top left corner on Mac
    2. From the drop-down menu, click on Restart
    3. AS your Mac restarts, you can perform one of the following options:
      • Install the latest version of macOS from the Internet
        Press and hold Option-Command-R until you see a spinning ball; next, release the keys.
        This will install the latest version of macOS, compatible with your Mac
      • Reinstall your computer’s original version of macOS from the Internet
        Press and hold Shift-Option-Command-R until a spinning ball appears, and then release the keys.
        This will reinstall the most recent version of macOS that came with your computer, including any available updates to the version
      • Reinstall macOS from the built-in recovery disk on your computer
        Press and hold Command-R until the Utilities window appears on the Mac screen.
        This will reinstall the version of macOS stored on your computer’s built-in recovery disk, including any updates that you installed
    4. Select Reinstall macOS and click Continue
    5. Follow the instructions you will see on your Mac screen

    That’s all, friends!

    Summing up…

    Blue screen is not frequently found in Mac laptops and computers. Hence, users should not be worried about this issue. You can quickly troubleshoot the problem by following the solutions mentioned above on your Mac.

    You may also like to read…

    Have you ever encountered this issue on your Mac? Share your feedback with us in the comment section.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Browse Post Topics


    If you are looking to send a friend a private message (PM) on Facebook, you are in the right place.

    This guide demos how to PM on Facebook from the Facebook App. It also has a section on how to PM on Facebook from a PC.

    How to PM on Facebook from the Facebook App

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Here are the steps to send a private message to a friend on Facebook using the App:

    • Open Facebook App on your smartphone. Then login with your Facebook account.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    • At the top of the App, click your profile icon – highlighted in the image below.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    • When your Facebook profile opens, scroll down to your Friends list and click the friend you want to PM on Facebook.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    • At the Friends profile, click Message icon. This will open the private message/chat box.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    • To send a private Facebook message to the friend, click the highlighted box.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    • Then type the message you want to send and click the send icon (see the image below). Once you hit the send icon, the person will receive the private message.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    How to PM on Facebook from a PC (

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Here are the steps to PM on Facebook from a PC..

    • Open on your PC and login to your account. Then on the right side pane of the page, beneath your CONTACTS list, click the Friend you want to send a private a message.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    • When you click a contact, a pop up will be displayed (highlighted in this image). To PM the contact, within the pop up type your message.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    • To send the private message to the person, click the send icon (highlighted).

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    • Another way to PM on Facebook is to click the message icon on the top of the page. Then click New Message. You could also click on any of your existing messages to continue the chat.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    • On the New Message pop up, type the name of a Friend and select a friend’s name from the results.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    • Finally, type your message in the Type a message box and click the send icon (see the second image below).

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or macHow to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac


    Sending a private message (PM) on Facebook allows you do what it says – send a private message! I hope you found this guide useful.

    Have a question, comment or feedback? Use the “Leave a Reply” form found at the end of this page.

    For more guides like this one visit our Social Media how to page.


    I’ve been using my Gateway M680 / NX850 for about 8 months now. Over the course of my use, these blaring “hand spots” have appeared on each side of the track pad; obviously, where my palms rest when I use the laptop.
    I was wondering if there was any practical way to get rid of them. I’ve tried rubbing alochol, even those “disinfectant wipes”, though I notice no difference.

    To me, it looks like dirt / grime has collected in these areas, not necessarily that any paint has been worn off. I do frequently wash my hands, so it’s not like I’m a car mechanic with a pasty layer of engine oil coating my hands all the time. I’m looking to prepare my laptop to be sold, and if I can minimize the exterior blemishes, I know it’ll pay off when the time comes to sell.

    If the laptop had a carpeted surface, I’d try OxyClean.

    As an Amazon Associate and affiliate of other programs, I earn from qualifying purchases.

    Screen reader software allows any blind or visually impaired person to use the computer easily. These tools convert the content present on the screen into audio so that the user can hear and understand it easily.

    Some of the apps also provide Braille display output which blind people can read to get the information on the screen.

    Here we have mentioned some of the most popular screen readers that will help those who are unable to use the computer due to vision problems. You will get software for both the Windows PC and Mac in this list. Also, there is a bonus tip to use a screen reader on Android and iOS at the end of the article.

    Best Screen Readers For Blind And Visually Impaired

    1. NVDA

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    NVDA or Non-Visual Desktop Access is an open source screen reader application for Windows PC. Once you download the software and install, it will narrate each area of the desktop and icons where the mouse will be navigated. It will also narrate all the keyboard keys that you will type or use.

    It is easy to use NVDA, just install and it will do the rest. This is a great screen reader for blind people and it provides voice feedback for everything on the desktop of the PC, whether browsing on Chrome, typing anything or just navigating to any folder or file. You can also use some keys and shortcuts from the keyboard to control or manage NVDA application.

    2. Jaws Screen Reader

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    This is another screen reader software that will let visually impaired people use the computer. It will also narrate the components on the desktop where the cursor of the mouse is pointed to. In addition to all this, Jaws can also convert the screen information into Braille language and transfer it to refreshable Braille displays. In this way, blind people can touch the Braille display to know what is on the desktop display.

    3. WebAnywhere

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    WebAnywhere is an online free screen reader tool for any web browser and can be used without installing any software or application. Using this tool blind people can access web browsers on any system or desktop easily and listen to the text on the screen using this screen text reader for browsers. It will work on any kind of browser but not elsewhere like any other folders etc.

    4. ChromeVox

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    This screen reader is made especially for Chrome browser which you can download from the Chrome Web Store. This extension will give voice feedback and narrate all the activities going on in the web browser while highlighting the area with the box that is being narrated. It will also narrate all the words, text and number that is typed on the keyboard so the blind people can enter the right thing. It will also work with the Chrome browsers on macOS.

    5. BRLTTY

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    This is one of the best screen reader apps and the most popular among LINUX users. This software turns the info and details on the screen into Braille form and transmits it to the Braille display for the blind users to see and navigate. In addition to this, it also has some voice features and speeches that will work as an additional guide to the visually impaired people using the system.

    6. Apple VoiceOver

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    If a user is operating Mac then they can also use the screen reader application inbuilt in macOS. You can enable it inside System Preferences > Accessibility > under Vision you will find VoiceOver Utility.

    This will enable the screen reader application or tool on your Mac and it will narrate each and everything on the display to guide the blind or visually disabled. It will also read aloud the web pages and their content that is on the screen.

    7. Windows Narrator

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    This tool is also inbuilt in almost the entire version of Windows, whether 7, 8, 10, or others like Linux.

    You can activate the narrator option under the Ease Of Access menu. This will let the Windows narrate and provide audio feedback for the area where the mouse cursor is taken. It’s simple and no need of downloading any additional software on your Windows PC.


    All these screen readers will let the blind and visually impaired people work on the computer. Most of these software programs are perfect for using but I will recommend going for Windows narrator and NVDA as they both are easy to use.

    You can also use the screen reader feature on Android devices. For this, you can turn on TalkBack option or Voice Assistant. For iOS users, VoiceOver will work in the same way. You can easily use VoiceOver on iPhone.

    If you plan to install one of these apps on your child’s phone or computer, don’t forget that you should be aware of what your child does on their device. Check this list of free parental control apps that do just that.

    Do you know any other tools? Do let us know. And if you have friends who need these kinds of software then do let them know by sharing this article.

    I have a smart buld (LB100) connected and managed through my mobile phone using wifi or mobile data.

    I would like to know if there is any windows or mac app for managing the smart bulb and/or other “smart” programs of tp-link that are compatible with kasa mobile app.

    Thanks for your time

    sorry to tell you that the smart bulb can be controlled by kasa app only, besides, it can work with Alexa and Google.

    While for Kasa app, it is available for mobile device only.

    sorry to tell you that the smart bulb can be controlled by kasa app only, besides, it can work with Alexa and Google.

    While for Kasa app, it is available for mobile device only.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    A bit complicated, might be easier just to buy a low end or repurpose an old android device as a home automation as a control panel. Would use a lot less power, can be left on and handy. Setting up communication through bluestacks can be a little tricky, it needs to be routed properly through to the emulator. If one goes the dedicated tablet route AutomationManager can be used for more complex automation and integration with other apps.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    @GreenCloudIE That BlueStacks works perfect with kasa, and it is not complicated unless you’re like my wife and just refuses ot learn anything new. Great idea, thanks. . Bob

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    Another vote for a PC based App.

    I work from home and, in summer, I like to run the air conditioning but need to leave a door open for our dog. He’s not much of a guard dog, he’d prbably sleep through someone coming in and going out.

    There are starting to be an alarming number of “snatch and grab robberies in my neighbourhood , so we went out and bought a Kasa camera to with our switches.

    I would like to have a window open on my second monitor for my PC to view the camera feed, to keep an eye out. And we’ll probably expand ourt network of cameras, then to keep an eye on other parts of the house, too.

    posted on March 2, 2022

    If you are a guitarist and about to go up on stage for the first time in front of a big audience, Guitar Hero is the perfect app for you to practice and get ready for the big day. Guitar Hero 3 pc, the latest version in the Guitar Hero Series, is a video game that creates a concert like simulation for musicians, especially guitarists.

    The more you can entertain the audience, the more in-game points you will be rewarded. A very exciting application, Guitar Hero is currently not available as a PC version. You can only download it on a smartphone using an Android or iOS emulator. However, with the help of a mobile emulator, you can download Guitar Hero for PC. The steps for the same are mentioned below in this guide.

    How to leave feedback on ebay on pc or mac

    How to Install Guitar Hero for Windows PC?

    1. As this application is available in the Google Play Store, it can be downloaded using an Android emulator. The main function of an emulator here is to replicate the user interface of a smartphone on your PC. By doing so, you will be enabling smartphone apps to be downloaded on your PC. In this case, the interface of an Android smartphone is replicated.

    2. The recommended Android emulator is BlueStacks. BlueStacks is currently the most widely used mobile emulator in the industry. It is known for its speed and efficiency. The emulator is virus-free and can be easily downloaded from the company website online. As an alternative, Nox Player works well. Any other functional emulator should also give you the same result.

    3. Once you have downloaded and installed an emulator of your choice, launch it. You should find the user interface to match that of an Android smartphone. Go to the home page of the emulator and open up the Google Play Store.

    4. As you are accessing the store for the first time from your PC, you will need to log in to the store. You can either credentials of an existing account or create a new one with an easy email verification procedure.

    5. Once you have successfully logged in to the store, you will get unrestricted access to download and browse the apps there. Go to the search tab at the top of the window and search for Guitar Hero 3 for pc.

    6. The app will immediately appear as a search result. Click on the Install button next to the app. Guitar Hero 3 will be downloaded on your emulator.

    Download Guitar Hero for PC Mac

    1. Guitar Hero is available in the Apple Store as well as a smartphone app. Therefore, an iOS emulator can also be used to download this app on your PC. In this case, the emulator replicates the user interface of an iOS-powered smartphone.

    2. The recommended iOS emulators are MobiOne Studios and iPadian. Both emulators are virus-free and reliable. The download links to the emulators can be found on their official websites respectively. If you want to download any other emulator that you know of, you can go ahead with it. Make sure the emulator is not corrupt in any way.

    3. After you have downloaded an emulator of your choice, launch it. the user interface of the emulator should match that of an iPhone. If not, uninstall the current emulator and repeat the steps with a new one.

    4. From the home page of the emulator, open up the Apple Store. As soon as the store opens up, you will be directed to a login screen. As you are using the store from your PC for the first time, logging in is mandatory.

    5. If you have an existing Apple account, you can use that. Or else, you can simply create a new one. After you have logged in to the store, you will be able to download apps from there.

    6. Go to the search tab at the top of the window and search for Guitar Hero. Once the app appears on your screen, click on the Install button.

    7. Guitar Hero will be downloaded and installed on the emulator. Launch it and enjoy streaming!

    Key Features of Guitar Hero

    · Guitar Hero lets you perform on live gigs in front of life-life simulation of crowds.

    · Crowd anticipation has been meticulously taken care of in this application. While you are performing in a gig in Guitar Hero, the audience will react to your music. If your music is captivating, you will get encouraging reactions from the audience.

    · If you feel you are losing the attention of the crowd, you can immediately call upon a bandmate of yours to join you on stage.

    · Guitar Hero provides you with wonderful venues to play in. Ranging from small clubs and pubs to jam-packed stadiums, Guitar Hero gives users a comprehensive musician’s experience while on tour.

    · Music festivals organized by Guitar Hero gives you the opportunity to collaborate with other bands or play as their lead guitarist. These bands are mostly fictional and only present in-game. The names of some of the bands are Sound Dial and Rock the Block.

    · Depending on your performance in the game, you might as well be recognized by big labels. The band ‘Broken Tide’ has emerged similarly to make a world-wide name for themselves.

    Go On, Tell Us What You Think!

    Did we miss something? Come on! Tell us what you think about our guide to download Guitar Hero for PC in the comments section.

    How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

    This article was co-authored by Deanne Pawlisch, CVT, MA. Deanne Pawlisch is a Certified Veterinary Technician, who does corporate training for veterinary practices and has taught at the NAVTA-approved Veterinary Assistant Program at the Harper College in Illinois and in 2011 was elected to the board of the Veterinary Emergency and Critical Care Foundation. Deanne has been a Board Member of the Veterinary Emergency and Critical Care Foundation in San Antonio, Texas since 2011. She holds a BS in Anthropology from Loyola University and an MA in Anthropology from Northern Illinois University.

    There are 8 references cited in this article, which can be found at the bottom of the page.

    wikiHow marks an article as reader-approved once it receives enough positive feedback. In this case, 90% of readers who voted found the article helpful, earning it our reader-approved status.

    This article has been viewed 74,728 times.

    Lovebirds are friendly and fun pets who can live happy lives full of affection for their owners and their mates. Lovebirds are hearty, so keeping them healthy isn’t typically a chore, but it is still important to monitor them for signs of illness. If you notice any major changes to your lovebird’s appearance, behavior, or habits, contact your vet immediately. Since lovebirds are prey animals, they will hide their symptoms until they are very ill. Remember, it’s always better to be overcautious when your pet’s health is in question.

    How to spot signs of illness in lovebirdsLovebirds, like all birds, are very adapt at concealing their illness. This is a self-preservation mechanism, as the sick and the weak are the ones predators will focus on. By the time your lovebird looks ill, you can assume that your pet is seriously sick and is likely to deterioriate quickly unless appropriate treatment is provided.

    By observing your lovebird daily you will learn its normal behavior and you will be able to notice anything out of the ordinary. Below is a list of things to look out for as possible indicators of disease / illness; and a vet may need to be consulted.

    Signs of illness to watch out for:

    Critical / Serious – bird needs to be taken to vet:

    • respiratory problems / abnormal breathing
    • tail constantly moving up and down
    • discharge from the beak, eyes or nostrils
    • face and head feathers coated with mucus and semi-digested seed
    • abnormal droppings
    • abnormal feathers, feather growth, bleeding feathers, or abnormal molt
      • French Molt
      • PBFD
      • Polyoma


    • drooping head, tail or wings
    • dull or swollen eyes
    • falling off the perch
    • hunched over posture
    • lumps or swellings on the body
    • sitting on the bottom of the cage
    • vomiting
    • weight loss

    Could be serious – consult with vet:

    • loss of appetite
    • fluffed up and/or untidy appearance
    • abnormal droppings
    • excessive feather picking or plucking
    • abnormal sleep pattern (continuous, both feet on the perch when normally one foot is tucked up, head tucked under the wing, head turned towards the wing with eyes only partly closed)
    • any change in normal activities ( talking or whistling, playing with toys, preening, interaction with other birds or humans, energy levels, different perching area)
    • disorientation
    • drinking a lot more water than usual
    • soiled vent
    • drooping head, tail or wings

    Diseases / Health Problems Lovebirds Commonly Come Down With

    • Malnutrition:
      • Vitamin A and calcium deficiency are the most common deficiencies seen in seed junkies. Since seeds are higher in fat than many other foods, many seed eaters are often obese as well.
        • Vitamin A promotes appetite, digestion, and also increases resistance to infection and to some parasites.

        Please refer to “Bird Nutrition” for food items rich in Vitamin A.

        What you can do:

        Introducing healthy foods – such as green leafy vegetables; red or orange fruits and veggies (which contain beta-carotene) – is a natural way to provide this nutrient safely. Calcium blocks should be provided also, to prevent calcium deficiency.

        For seed addicted birds offer sprouted seeds instead. Sprouted or germinated seeds are usually more easily accepted by “seed addicts” than fresh fruits and vegetables.

        • Sprouted seeds are healthier as the sprouting changes and enhances the nutritional quality and value of seeds and grains. Sprouted seeds are lower in fat, as the process of sprouting utilizes the fat in the seed to start the growing process – thus reducing the fat stored in the seeds.
        • Sprouted seedswill help balance your bird’s diet by adding a nutritious supply of high in vegetable proteins, vitamins, minerals, enzymes, and chlorophyll.
        • Soaked and germinated “oil” seeds, like niger and rape seeds, are rich in protein and carbohydrates; while “starch” seeds, such as canary and millets, are rich in carbohydrates, but lower in protein.
        • It is an invaluable food at all times; however, it is especially important for breeding or molting birds. Sprouted seeds also serve as a great rearing and weaning food as the softened shell is easier to break by chicks and gets them used to the texture of seeds.
        • Respiratory Signs, Chronic Depression, Weightloss: Aspergillosis (fungal disease), bacterial infections / pneumonia, nutritional deficiencies (Hypovitaminosis A), Parrot Fever / Psittacosis / Chlamydia; inhaled toxins
        • Behavioral Plucking(sexual mature birds mainly). NOTE: Plucking can also be a sign of a Giardia infection.
        • Bad Feather / Beak Condition; Missing and Misshapen Feathers:Beak and Feather Disease (PBFD). A deadly, highly contagious (air-borne disease). Only supportive treatment available. No cure. (Click on link for more info.) .
          • NOTE: beak deformities / problems and poor feather condition may also be an indicator of Fatty Liver Disease.
        • Lovebirds are Highly susceptible to:Polyoma . Psittacine Beak and Feather Disease, PBFD, Beak and Feather . Chronic Egg-laying . Feather Plucking / Mutilation . Sarcocystosis

        Information contained on this website is provided as general reference only. For application to specific circumstances, professional advice should be sought.

        How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

        As with most birds, lovebirds are true experts in hiding their diseases, and it is that after all, this is their survival mechanism, since the sick and the weak are the first to be noticed by the predators of nature. By the time your lovebird has obvious symptoms of illness, you should see a vet immediately, as your pet will be seriously ill and likely to deteriorate rapidly unless proper treatment is given as soon as possible.

        By observing your lovebird daily, you will learn its normal behavior and you will be able to notice anything out of the ordinary. Below we will show you a list of things to consider as possible indicators of disease, as well as some of the most common diseases in them. Keep reading!

        The most common health problems in lovebirds

        These are the most common diseases that occur in lovebirds:

        • Malnutrition: Vitamin A and calcium deficiencies are the most common health difficulties seen in these cute little birds. Since seeds are higher in fat than many other foods, many of these seed addicts are also often overweight. Vitamin A promotes appetite, digestion, and also increases resistance to infections from some parasites.
        • Overweight birds are more susceptible to: arthritis and fatty liver disease.
        • Other very common diseases are: conjunctivitis, pneumonia, diarrhea, constipation

        Many others can develop from these health problems, so it is worth paying attention to the symptoms of disease that we present in the next section.

        Some signs of disease in lovebirds

        Severe symptoms

        • Breathing problems or abnormal breathing.
        • Tail constantly moving up and down.
        • Discharge from the beak, eyes or nostrils
        • Feathers on face and head covered with mucus and semi-digested seeds.
        • Abnormal droppings
        • Abnormal molts, PBFD, polyomavirus.
        • Bleeding
        • Head, tail or wings drooping.
        • Puffy or dull eyes.
        • Falls.
        • Certain hunched posture.
        • Lumps or swellings in the body.
        • Get away, stay at the bottom of the cage.
        • Vomiting.
        • Considerable weight loss.

        Mild symptoms

        • Loss of appetite.
        • Plucked appearance, ruffled feathers.
        • Abnormal droppings.
        • Pecking or excessively plucking their own body feathers.
        • Abnormal sleep pattern (usually lovebirds sleep with one foot bent up, the head tucked under the wing, or the head turned toward the wing and with the eyes only partially closed).
        • Any change in normal activities (talking or whistling, playing with toys, grooming, cessation of interaction with other birds or humans, very different energy levels, discomfort when standing in one place).
        • Disorientation.
        • Drink much more water than usual.
        • Cage too dirty despite having been recently cleaned.
        • Head, tail, or wings drooping

        If you notice any of the symptoms mentioned above, it is best that you do not hesitate and take your pet to be examined by a veterinary professional as soon as possible.

        How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

        Many new bird owners may not know the symptoms of bird sickness, and birds are often good at hiding them. There are a few tell-tale signs you should watch for to have the best chance of saving your pet from a life-threatening ailment. If your bird exhibits any of these symptoms, contact your veterinarian as soon as possible.

        Signs of Sickness

        Birds are sensitive and intelligent creatures. They are also usually creatures of habit. While they may try to hide their symptoms, paying close attention to their daily activities, behavior, and general attitude.   Trust your gut. If you suspect something is off with your bird, it’s better to speak to your vet before things get worse. As a bird owner, there are some common symptoms should all be on your radar.

        Bird Droppings

        It’s not the most pleasant task to monitor your bird’s droppings, but they can clearly show that something may be wrong.   While the color of your bird’s droppings may vary slightly depending on what you feed it, you should watch for droppings that are yellow, rusty brown, or tarry black.

        These can be indicators of internal bleeding or other serious problems. Pay attention to any major changes in the consistency of your bird’s droppings. Whether they’re too runny or too firm, they can cause complications for your pet.

        Ruffled Feathers and Weight Loss

        Birds that sit with their feathers fluffed out for prolonged periods of time are often affected by respiratory problems or other disorders.   Ruffled feathers may also conceal weight loss, which can be life-threatening for a bird. If you observe this behavior in your pet for more than a day or so, you should contact your vet as soon as possible.

        Weight loss can be devastating to a bird’s health, not only in terms of reduced strength but inhibition of organ functions as well. Weigh your bird regularly so you’ll know if your pet is having trouble maintaining its weight.

        Red, Inflamed, or Runny Cere or Eyes

        Your bird’s cere is what you might perceive as its nose; it’s the little patch above the beak that holds the nostrils. Pay close attention to your bird’s cere. If you observe any redness, inflammation, or discharge, there’s a good chance that your pet could be seriously ill. Make sure to keep your bird wrapped up and warm on the way to the vet. Likewise, If your bird’s eyes look cloudy or there’s a discharge coming from them, the bird could be affected by a respiratory, nervous, or muscular disorder.

        Reduced Appetite

        Birds have an extremely high metabolism, so it’s vital that they receive adequate nutrition every day. If your bird stops eating and begins to lose weight, it may be a sign of an intestinal blockage or impaction, in which case it could die very quickly without medical attention.   Make sure to clean out the bottom of your bird’s cage every day before you feed it. This provides an easy way to monitor food consumption, as well as changes in droppings.

        Open-Mouthed Breathing

        Respiratory problems are among the most common bird sicknesses and, unfortunately, the most serious. If you see your bird breathing with its mouth open while it’s at rest, there’s a good chance that it’s not only sick but has been for quite a while.   This requires immediate veterinary attention and may lead to hospitalization.

        Dirty Feathers

        Birds are, by nature, hygienic animals that bathe frequently and preen their feathers daily to keep them clean. If you notice feathers around your bird’s face or rump that appear messy or stuck together, it’s an indication that your pet could be sick.   Monitor the bird’s food consumption and droppings closely for a day or so, note any changes, and relay this information to your vet.

        Tail Bobbing

        As with many common signs of illness in birds, prolonged, repetitive bobbing of the tail can indicate a respiratory infection.   Unlike people, birds lack a diaphragm that separates the chest cavity from the stomach. The muscles located at the base of the tail help birds breathe by playing a part in expanding their lungs for air intake.

        If a bird is having trouble breathing, the tail muscles work harder, causing the tail to bob up and down. Tail bobbing is often not noticeable until later, more serious stages of illness, so if you see your bird behaving in this manner, call the vet immediately.

        Changes in Vocalization

        Much like humans, birds that don’t feel well often become less talkative than usual. Pay close attention to your bird so that you can learn its normal vocalization patterns. Stay in tune with the way your bird behaves, so you can pick up clues as to the way it feels. If you notice any changes in the frequency or general tone of your bird’s vocalizations, monitor it for additional symptoms over the next few days.  

        Treatment and Prevention

        When it comes to your pet bird’s health, an ounce of prevention is worth a pound of cure. Birds have very delicate systems, and even a minor illness can turn into a serious threat in the blink of an eye. Early diagnosis can be vital to saving a sick bird’s life.

        • Examine your bird daily for any signs of infection, and make sure to maintain a close relationship with your vet.
        • Provide your bird with toys and a regular exercise routine, which will positively affect its mental health, and talk to your bird (even if it doesn’t talk back) so it gets the social interaction it needs.
        • It’s also important to feed your bird a varied diet to make sure it’s getting enough vitamins and minerals. Consult your vet if you’re not sure of what foods are appropriate for your particular breed.
        • Keep your bird’s enclosure clean. While most birds take care of their own personal grooming, it’s up to the owner to make sure that any waste is cleaned up promptly and that the bird’s food and water are fresh and readily available.

        Your bird depends on you to maintain its good health. Make sure to keep tabs on its behavior so that you can keep your little friend around for a long time.

        Learn the Signs of a Sick or Dying Bird

        How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

        • Pin
        • Share
        • Email

        How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

        A wild bird can’t tell you when it feels sick. Birders who know how to recognize sick birds, however, can take steps to prevent spreading illnesses at their bird feeders as well as aid sick birds to help speed their recoveries. But how can you tell exactly when a bird is sick?

        Birds can succumb to many different illnesses and injuries, and many times a sick bird will not come near backyard bird feeders. When an unwell bird does appear, however, there are two ways to recognize it: by appearance and by behavior.

        ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

        Illustration: © The Spruce, 2018

        Recognizing Sick Birds by Appearance

        Not every sick bird will show symptoms of an illness, but those that do can be easily recognized. A healthy bird looks clean and whole, often looking just like it would in a field guide or nature photograph. Its feathers will be in place, its posture alert, and its eyes clear and intelligent. Sick birds, however, may show several symptoms such as:

        • Dull, unfocused eyes
        • Fluffed or rumpled feathers when it is not cold
        • Swollen eyes or membranes, such as the cere
        • Wet or crusty eye, mouth, or nose discharge
        • Dirty, matted feathers
        • Missing feathers
        • Visible injuries, lesions, or wounds

        While physical appearance can be a clear indication of illness, it can be difficult to see symptoms in small birds, and some birds may not exhibit physical symptoms at all. In these cases, the bird’s behavior is a better way to gauge its health.

        Recognizing Sick Birds by Behavior

        A healthy bird is perky and alert, always active feeding, preening, or otherwise doing what birds do. Even if a bird may not be very mobile, it will be looking around and generally clued into its surroundings if it is healthy, and it will react if it feels threatened. A sick bird, on the other hand, may show unusual behavior, such as:

        • Trouble breathing or puffing or panting breaths
        • Reluctance or inability to fly properly
        • Excessive drinking
        • Sitting too still, even when approached
        • Drooping wings or slouched, unsteady posture
        • Roosting in open areas, even on porches or patios
        • Limping
        • Head listing to one side
        • Squinting or seeming to fall asleep
        • Getting snapped at by other, obviously healthy birds

        Not all birds that exhibit these types of symptoms are necessarily ill, but the behavior is unusual enough to warrant caution in case the birds are sick.

        Birds That Aren’t Sick

        There are times when birds may show some signs of illness, either through their appearance or their behavior, but they aren’t actually sick at all. In these cases, it is important to leave the birds alone, as they do not require assistance and any intervention, no matter how well-intended, could be more distressing than helpful.

        • Baby Birds
          Baby birds may look sick with their fluffy feathers, patches of bald skin, and oversized eyes or bills. They may even act sick as they flutter about, are too weak to fly far, or cry for attention. This is all natural for young chicks, however, and unless a baby bird is obviously in grave distress, it should be left alone for its parents to care for appropriately.
        • Deformed Birds
          Some birds have natural deformities such as overgrown bills, crooked talons, or miscolored feathers. Other birds may be missing feet or legs due to old injuries. While these unexpected features may be startling, if the bird is active, feeding, and otherwise alert without a fresh wound or bleeding injury, it is not sick and needs no assistance.
        • Molting Birds
          Birds can look like a mess when they’re molting, with bare patches of skin and scruffy feathers. Depending on the species, birds may even be unable to fly during part of their molting process, but this is normal. Molting may take several weeks, but it is part of birds renewing their plumage, and they need no special help during this time.
        • Bald Birds
          Some birds, such as vultures and condors, are naturally bald, while others, such as many jays, cardinals, and grackles, can be temporarily bald. It can be a drastic look, but it does not indicate severe illness. Similarly, there are many birds that have normal bald patches, often on the face and neck, and these are also normal and not signs of illness.

        How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

        Because there are so many times when perfectly normal birds may show some indications of illness, it is important to observe birds closely when determining if they are sick or not. Only if a bird shows very severe appearance or behavioral clues to illness, or shows several distinct signs at once, is it likely sick.

        How to Help Birds Heal

        It can be hard for birders to witness sick birds at their feeders, but illness is a natural part of a bird’s life cycle. The strongest birds will recover, while weaker birds will succumb. To help birds have the strength to recover, birders can:

        • Keep feeders clean to minimize contagion to other birds
        • Supply fresh seed with a high oil content for extra energy
        • Offer a variety of other healthy foods, such as nuts and fruits
        • Keep the feeding area safe from predators that may capture unwary birds
        • Supply clean water in ground dishes and bird baths for birds to drink
        • Dispose of dead birds properly to prevent spreading illnesses

        By recognizing sick birds and reacting accordingly, birders can minimize illnesses among their backyard flocks and help unhealthy birds recover as best they can.

        While it’s true that some birds are able to “talk,” they aren’t able to tell their owners if they are sick or in pain. Birds are notoriously good at hiding signs of illness or injury because any signs of weakness can mean trouble in the wild if predators take note. Look for subtle hints to help clue you in if your bird is experiencing physical discomfort. These common signs mean that your bird is in pain or sick; contact your avian veterinarian as soon as possible if you note any of these behaviors.

        Favoring Certain Body Parts

        ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

        DjelicS / Getty Images

        If you notice that your bird is spending the majority of its time on one leg or that the bird seems to avoid using a certain wing or moving in a certain way, then you should suspect that something is causing the bird pain in these areas.   While it is normal for birds to try to hide any signs of illness, birds who are experiencing pain are often unable to completely mask their discomfort.


        ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

        Haruki Miki / Getty Images

        While we do our best to keep our feathered friends’ safety in mind, accidents and injuries can occur at any place and time. Pet birds can even hurt themselves within the safety of their own cages. If you notice that your bird seems to be squinting, it is smart to take it as a sign that your bird is in discomfort, and it may not necessarily be related to an eye injury.  


        ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

        Daisuke Kobayashi / Getty Images

        Birds are normally highly active, so any sign of lethargy, depression, or fatigue should be taken as potentially serious.   Birds that are found lying on the bottom of the cage or who refuse to leave their nests or perches are often very sick and in need of immediate veterinary care.


        ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

        Manuela Schewe-Behnisch / Getty Images

        Tame, hand-fed pet birds can still be moody at times, and this is completely normal. However, excessive irritability or lashing out that seems out of character for your particular bird can be a sign that something is wrong.   While it’s true that aggression and irritability go along with normal symptoms of hormonal behavior in parrots, it’s better to be safe than sorry if you aren’t 100 percent sure that hormones are the cause of the way your bird is acting.

        Loss of Appetite

        ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

        Muhammad Yoris Ramdhansyah / Getty Images

        Parrots and other birds have extremely high metabolisms, making it necessary for them to have adequate food intake at all times. It’s normal for some parrots and parakeets to be pickier than others, and certainly normal for any bird to have specific preferences when it comes to meals, but a bird that outright refuses to eat anything at all is usually a bird that is in dire need of veterinary attention.   If you suspect that your bird isn’t eating as much food as it normally consumes, try offering a favorite treat such as millet or another type of fresh, bird-safe snack. You should be able to tell pretty quickly if your bird is interested in eating it or not.

        How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

        Lovebirds are a small parrot species that get their name from their monogamous bonding and the long time it spends sitting with that other bird in nature. If you have these animals as a pet, you’ve probably noticed that they tend to exhibit different body language throughout the day. If you would like to know what this body language means, keep reading while we list the different behaviors you might see and what they mean to understand your pet better. After all, most lovebirds live 20 or 30 years, so you will be spending a lot of time together.

        Lovebird Body Language

        1. Happy Lovebirds

        How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

        Image Credit: Rich Lindie, Shutterstock

        The first sign that your Lovebird is happy is that it will get a bit more chatty than usual and can sing for several hours. You will also notice that it slightly fluffs up the feathers on the head, making it look a little bigger, and they will do a lot of cheerful jumping around or singing on its favorite perch.

        2. Relaxed

        How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

        Image Credit: Jearu, Shutterstock

        You can tell if your Lovebird is relaxed because it will be eating. Lovebirds only eat when they feel safe. It will also only preen its feet when it is comfortable, and if it does so while sitting on you, you are its friend. The feathers will be against the body but will be loose, and the bird will seem calm. It will usually sit with fluffy plumage and the cheek feathers pushed forward, giving the appearance of a shorter beak.

        3. Mating

        How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

        Image Credit: Denis Velicanov, Pixabay

        If you have a pair of lovebirds, you will know when your birds start to mate because the male will chirp and sing to the female, and the plumage on the head will fluff out a little more than it does when the bird is happy. When there is no female present, the male bird will find something else to sing to and perform mating dances.

        If the female is present, the male will bob his head up and down and feed the female to help encourage her to start breeding. The male may also start feeding other males and will even try to feed your finger. This action is the same it will use to feed its chicks. However, the males can sometimes start to quarrel when the male is feeding, so you will need to split them up. If you notice your bird trying to mate with you, it is likely a male.

        4. Angry

        How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

        Image Credit: Bogdanova, Shutterstock

        You can easily tell when your Lovebird is angry or feels threatened because it will fluff out all its feathers, lower its head and open its beak in a threatening stance. If whatever is threatening the bird continues, there is a good chance it will bite. If you see your bird doing this with a child near the cage, it’s best to separate them for a few minutes to try and determine the cause and let your pet calm down.

        Children often have cartoon characters on their clothing and other accessories that your Lovebird can perceive as a threat. You may also notice this behavior between two birds, and it’s best to separate them, but you run the risk of getting bit if you do so. Lovebird bites don’t hurt bad but getting bit by your bird can be shocking if you are a new owner.

        5. Irritable

        How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

        Image Credit: Choco’Love, Shutterstock

        Your Lovebird will get excited if you let it out of the cage to play with you. Unfortunately, too much excitement can cause it to be irritable. An irritable bird will take a similar stance to an angry bird, but it won’t ruffle the feathers as much. However, it will be much quicker to peck at your hand. If your pet gets irritable, it’s best to stop playing for a minute or two to let it calm down. Taking a break will also help teach that you won’t tolerate aggressive behavior.

        Lovebirds are quite hardy but they do require some basic bird care. The following are some basic guidelines
        we practice to ensure our birds remain happy and healthy.

        Food and Water

        Always ensure your lovebird has fresh clean water to drink. They also like to have a bath every now and
        then, so it is also a good idea to provide enough water for them bathe. Always ensure your lovebird has plenty
        of seed, a small parrot mix is fine; we use AVI grain peachface mix. As bird seed alone is not a nutritionally complete diet for lovebirds, we suggest you supplement their diet with fresh apple (avoid apple seeds), broccoli, endive, carrot, corn, and celery at least twice a week or ideally every day. Be sure to wash fruit
        and vegetables prior to feeding and remove any that have fouled. Lovebirds also require a good source of
        calcium. This can be supplemented by placing cuttlefish bone in your bird’s cage.


        The key to a healthy lovebird is prevention. Stress is likely a large contributing factor in the onset of many bird
        illnesses, so it is always best to try to keep your lovebird happy and stress free. This can be achieved by
        ensuring your bird:

        (a) receives fresh food and water
        (b) is wormed ideally every three months (particularly if kept outdoors or if in contact with wild or other birds)
        (c) is happy living with any other birds in his/her cage
        (d) is not overcrowded in their cage
        (e) is not exposed to toxic fumes
        (f) receives some natural sunlight for vitamin D production
        (g) has some shelter from direct sunlight and rain
        (h) has a section in their cage where they feel safe (this can be achieved by placing their cage in a corner,
        purchasing a bird hut, or nest box)
        (i) has room to fly

        Signs of illness include prolonged fluffed feathers, nasal discharge, watery eyes, weight loss, trembling, and
        lethargic behaviour. If your lovebird is experiencing any of these symptoms, it is best to take your
        lovebird to an avian vet as soon as possible and keep it warm in the meantime.

        Birds can often hide signs of illness and therefore it may be difficult to tell if your lovebird is unwell. They
        can also often be carriers of disease, meaning that they may carry a disease yet not show any detectable signs
        of illness. It is therefore recommended to quarantine all newly acquired lovebirds for at least 40 days prior to
        introducing them into cages/aviaries with other birds.

        How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

        Taking care of baby lovebirds can be very difficult. When young, they are not especially hardy. Feeding them incorrectly or keeping them at the wrong temperature can easily lead to the death of a baby lovebird.

        Lovebirds can either be left with their mother or hand-raised. Hand-reared birds are typically better socialized and get along better with people. However, hand-rearing takes a lot of time. Birds need to be fed around the clock when they are little, which most people are not able to do. Therefore, many breeders may also choose to leave the bird with the parents.

        There are circumstances where lovebird parents may be unable to take care of the babies. Some inexperienced parents simply don’t know what to do and may even end up not caring for their babies properly.

        If you’ve ended up with a baby lovebird for whatever reason, we’ll take a look at how to properly care for lovebird babies.

        1. Wait for the Eggs to Hatch

        If you’re planning on hand-raising your baby lovebirds, you’ll likely be keeping a close eye on the eggs. You will need to be there when they hatch, so it is essential that you notice the signs of impending hatching.

        Lovebirds tend to lay many eggs after mating, but most don’t hatch. In fact, only about 10% to 20% of a clutch will hatch. Sometimes, none of them hatch at all. Occasionally, the mother may lay dozens of eggs before one hatches.

        There are many signs that lovebird eggs may be about to hatch. The eggs will start out as white and then slowly change to grey. This will begin slowly, changing from a light grey to darker grey over time. This is a sign that there is a baby growing inside the egg. Only eggs that are actually fertile will turn to a very dark grey color.

        The mother will incubate the eggs for about 23 days. You should count from the day that the mother began sitting on the eggs. The mother will usually sit on them continuously. She won’t move and may appear fluffier than normal as she tries to keep the eggs warm and toasty. She will likely become aggressive as well. Sometimes, the bird will even be aggressive towards the male when he comes to feed her.

        Right before the eggs hatch, you will hear small crying sounds from inside the egg every now and then. This assumes the mother is letting you get close to the eggs, as they are often very territorial at this point. You shouldn’t have to do anything with the actual hatching process. Allow the babies to hatch as they are able.

        2. Caring for Newborn Lovebirds

        Newborn lovebirds need a lot of care. They are very small and delicate at this age, so they aren’t able to adjust to mistakes. For this reason, we highly recommend not attempting to care for newborns by hand-rearing them unless you are already experienced or have a vet you can call for help if necessary. Their survival rate is much better if left with their parents.

        The newborn should be placed in a nesting box. Two unhatched eggs should be used for support, as the baby shouldn’t be allowed to roll around much at this stage. They need support, and the eggs provide that support.


        You should allow the female to feed the baby as she sees fit. You should notice her bringing the baby food in her beak. She will bring the baby whatever you provide her, so be sure you’re giving high-quality food items. Things like corn, apple, seeds, banana, and spinach are all good options at this stage.

        If you’re hand-rearing the babies, you will need to provide a formula. You should make it thin, but not so thin that the babies aspirate on it. You’ll need to check the baby’s crop to ensure that it is full. This is how you ensure that the baby is getting enough to eat.

        Feed the baby with a syringe, ensuring that it is warm but not hot. It should be just below body temperature to prevent burns.


        Warmth is also necessary for the lovebird’s health. The baby should be kept at around 88 to 92 degrees F. Generally, the mother will take care of this. However, we do recommend covering the cage with a pillowcase in the summer or a baby blanket in the winter. This will help ensure that the baby is kept warm enough and prevent drafts.

        You should use a brooder to keep the lovebird warm if the mother is not caring for the babies.

        Dirt & Noise

        Cleanliness is essential to prevent disease, as baby birds are susceptible to infection. You should spot-clean the cage daily and provide fresh food regularly. Newspaper is a great option for the bottom of the cage. The female will shred some of this for the nest, but it is also very easy to spot clean.

        Otherwise, keep the area around the cage peaceful and quiet. You don’t want to stress out the parents or the babies at this stage. Stressed parents may not care for the babies properly. It may also interrupt the baby’s sleep, which can affect their health.

        3. Supporting the Parents

        In many cases, the babies should be kept with the parents. While hand-raised babies may be friendlier at first, you can tame any bird once it gets older. Leaving the baby with parents that are taking care of it properly will likely result in better outcomes than hand-rearing. Lovebirds evolved to take care of their children.

        The parents should remain well-fed. Don’t switch their diet around much from what it is before, as this can cause unnecessary stress. Freshwater should be provided at all times, as should high-quality food. Be sure to clean the water daily to prevent illnesses for both the parents and the baby. Clean the bowls thoroughly each time you change them.

        Cover the cage’s base with paper. The female will enjoy tearing it up to line the nest, which is also important for the baby’s wellbeing. It is also much easier to spot-clean, which you should be doing at least daily. Preferably, you should be checking the cage multiple times a day and cleaning it as necessary.

        Provide the parents with attention and ensure that you socialize with them as normal. If they become bored or frustrated, they may develop stress-related behaviors. They may be particularly prone to these while caring for a baby, so it is important that you aim to support them as much as possible during this difficult time.

        When the baby gets older, you should let the parents out for playing, assuming this was their routine previously. The parents may get a bit distracted while out, so don’t keep them out of the cage for very long. Otherwise, the babies may suffer. Of course, by the time the babies are two weeks old, they only need to feed every 4-6 hours. Therefore, the adults should be perfectly fine being out of the cage for a bit.

        Your lovebirds should be getting at least 12 hours of rest time at night. Be sure to darken the room during this time so that they can sleep. Otherwise, they may become stressed due to sleep deprivation. They will awaken and feed the baby as necessary at night on their own.

        How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

        • Pin
        • Share
        • Email

        How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

        The Spruce / J.R. Bee

        Lovebirds are one of the most popular pet parrot species, and for those who are familiar with them, it’s no surprise. Beautiful and intelligent, these little birds have been one of the most beloved types of African parrot for more than 100 years. However, there are a lot of myths out there about lovebirds, their behavior, and what it’s like to keep them as pets. If you’re interested in learning more about what lovebirds are like, then you should read on to discover basic facts about these feisty little birds.

        Lovebirds Normally Don’t Talk

        ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

        Arco Petra / Getty Images

        Although they are a type of parrot, and they do have the ability to mimic human speech, lovebirds are not among those species that most would consider talking birds. This is because they very rarely decide to speak, and if they do choose to mimic a sound, more often than not they repeat simple noises such as whistles or household sounds such as doorbells and microwaves. It is not known why some lovebirds are more prone to mimicking speech than others, but it is widely believed that those who do learn to talk are taught from a very young age.

        There Are Several Types of Lovebirds

        There are many different types of lovebirds. There are nine separate sub-species of these little parrots, each carrying their distinct traits and characteristics. These include the masked lovebird, the black-cheeked lovebird, the Fischer’s lovebird, the Nyasa lovebird, the Swindern’s lovebird, the red-faced Lovebird, the Abyssinian lovebird, the Madagascar lovebird, and the beloved peach-faced lovebird. The peach-faced lovebird, which is the most popular, can be identified by the rainbow of yellow, green, and blue on their bodies as well as their bright peachy-pink faces. While the different types of lovebirds have differences in looks and temperament, on average, all of the lovebirds will live for up to 20 years in captivity.

        Lovebirds Are One of the Smallest Parrot Species

        While they are true parrots, lovebirds are one of the smallest members of the parrot family. On average, most lovebirds fall between 5 and 7 inches in length at maturity, when measured from the beak to the end of the tailfeathers. Their small size has worked to push their popularity among those who live in apartments and other small spaces. Many of these bird lovers have found it easier to house and care for these little birds instead of attempting to keep a larger parrot species such as a macaw or a cockatoo.

        Lovebirds Are Not Always Best Kept in Pairs

        It is a widely purported myth that you should never own a solitary lovebird and that if they are not kept in pairs, they will die of depression. While it is true that they are extremely social birds who thrive on interaction and must be socially stimulated, in many cases, bird owners should keep single lovebirds. This is because these birds breed readily in captivity, and most bird owners are not capable of caring for an entire family of parrots. It is also worth noting that birds kept in pairs tend to bond with each other and shun human interaction. Those who would like their bird to be affectionate and open to being handled by human hands have found that it’s best to keep birds by themselves and devote as much time as possible to playing and socializing with them so that their needs are met.

        How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

        • Pin
        • Share
        • Email

        How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

        The Spruce / Michela Buttignol

        Most bird owners have heard that it’s important to monitor their feathered friend’s droppings for signs of illness. However, it can be difficult to determine exactly what is “normal” when it comes to bird poop. It might seem gross, but analyzing your bird’s droppings for color, texture, and other factors can go a long way in keeping your pet healthy.


        Healthy bird droppings can display an array of colors and still be considered “normal.” Your bird likely consumes many various types of fresh fruits and vegetables, a multitude of different seeds, and a variety of multi-colored pellets if you supplement your bird’s meals with a commercially available diet. The food dyes in these pellets, combined with the natural colors of the fresh foods your bird eats, will naturally produce a rainbow of colors in their droppings.

        However, if you notice that your bird’s poop suddenly changes color, it can be a sign of severe health problems that need prompt veterinary attention.  


        The texture of the droppings will also vary based on your bird’s diet. However, there are certain things to keep in mind when analyzing your bird’s poop to make sure that it’s healthy.

        For one thing, the dropping should be neither too wet nor too dry. A good rule of thumb is that the poop should be close to mimicking the consistency of toothpaste, for lack of a less disgusting analogy. Be on the lookout for droppings that are very dark or seem “tarry,” as this can be a sign of internal bleeding, which requires immediate veterinary care.  


        In general, your bird’s droppings should produce little to no odor. Poop that seems overly smelly can be indicative of infection, intestinal problems, or other types of illness. This is not to say that you should get down and sniff your bird’s droppings; that can be harmful to your health. Rather, pay attention when you bird uses the bathroom, and see if there seems to be any noticeable scent wafting around the cage. If your nose detects something that’s just not “right” about the odor, it’s probably a good idea to contact your bird’s vet for an evaluation.

        Presence of Liquids

        Unlike mammals and other types of animals, a bird’s droppings are not normally solid. Rather, there should be a fair amount of liquid present in a healthy bird’s waste, as a bird’s anatomy does not have a separate mechanism for eliminating liquid waste from their bodies.

        Instead, urine and feces are expelled at the same time. The urine in bird droppings normally presents itself as a white-colored, pasty liquid and usually comprises around 30 to 50 percent of the volume of the droppings. While this can vary slightly without being cause for alarm, you should definitely report to your avian veterinarian if you fear that there is too much or too little liquid in your bird’s waste.

        Size and Amount

        As one might expect, the volume of a bird’s droppings will be relative to the size of the bird producing them. In other words, small birds will produce smaller droppings, and larger birds will produce larger ones. Depending on the diet, slight variations in what is a normal amount of droppings for any given bird are to be expected, but any drastic change in the size or frequency of your bird’s poop should be noted and reported to your veterinarian. If you are worried about how often your bird poops, you can add a blueberry to their diet. This addition will turn your bird’s poop blue, and you can measure how long from feeding time it takes for a blue poop to result.

        Again, paying attention to your bird’s droppings when cleaning out its cage will give you the best idea of what fits inside the normal range for your particular bird.


        New member
        • Mar 8, 2012
      • #1

      I just got a peach-faced lovebird a few days ago, and she (we are waiting DNA test but think it’s a she) is absolutely wonderful. She is very young, just done being weaned and was hand-fed by the breeder. We’ve got a great bond going, but I’m very worried. I just finished getting rid of all the things that might be hazardous to her, like air wicks and switching to PTFE pots and pans and all. We’re living in a downstairs of a house and the air down here smells like old house smell, it’s dusty and dry which I’m trying to improve.

      Here’s what I’m concerned most about, and since it’s been quite some time since I’ve owned a bird, I’m not sure what’s “normal” (first time with a lovebird too). basically i’ve noticed a few times a day she kind of sneezes, or snorts (no discharge, just notice little sneezes). She preens quite a bit, and sometimes itches her head really fast with one of her feet while preening. During the day, she’ll be content just sitting on my shoulder, occasionally gets bursts of energy and wants to explore. but then at night, after dark but still at around 7 or 8, she starts getting really restless. Just can’t find a comfortable place to be, tries to borrow in tight areas in our clothing, and it’s almost impossible to handle her cause she just keeps moving and squirming. Eventually we just decided to put her in her cage for the night, with the cover on. and when doing that she settles down and goes to sleep very nicely. As far as I know, sleeps the whole night. Except for one night i noticed she woke up, chirped, sneezed and went back to sleep.

      Does this sound like typical behavior for a lovebird in an area of kind of dry air and dust? When I google ‘restless lovebird at night’ i get a bunch of results suggesting mites being an issue.

      I know birds mask their illness really well, but i’m not noticing any other signs of problems, feathers look good, eyes look good (I think, again, it’s hard to tell what the norm is after only a few days of being with her!). I’d appreciate your opinions based on your experience!

      **I should add, I just bought a thermometer with a humidity gauge and it looks like we’re just on the dry side of normal in this room, so it’s not TERRIBLY dry but we have a wall heater in here to try and keep the temperature warmer and that makes it dryer.

      **Also just noticed I said PTFE pots and pans, i meant PTFE *free* pots and pans. haha. yikes.

      How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

      The Fischer’s Lovebird is a little rarer than the popular Peach-Faced Lovebird, but it’s still quite friendly and makes a great companion, so it’s a great choice if you want something a little different. It’s about the same size and just as colorful. If you are thinking about getting a Fischer’s Lovebird for your home but want to learn more about it first, keep reading while we discuss temperament, diet, habitat requirements, and more to help you make an informed decision.

      Species Overview

      Common Names: Fischer’s Lovebird
      Scientific Name: Agapornis fischeri
      Adult Size: 6 inches
      Life Expectancy: 20 years

      Origin and History

      Fischer’s Lovebird comes from Central Africa, and breeders have been captive breeding them as pets in the United States since 1926. It gets its name from Gustav Fischer, the German explorer that first discovered it. You can find it easily in locations like Tanzania, Lake Victoria, and the Rift Valley in Nzega


      Many owners describe their Fischer’s Lovebird as a curious bird that’s always on the go. It’s extremely active and fun to watch in its natural habitat as well as in captivity. It’s also quite curious, and it can be fun to play games that make use of their curiosity. Like other Lovebirds, Fischer’s Lovebird usually takes a single mate for life, and if you have a male and a female, you will see them frequently cuddle and pal around with each other and may even be too busy to notice you are there or pay much attention to it. If you only have one bird, it will need plenty of attention and toys, especially the female, to prevent it from becoming destructive and territorial.

      Speech & Vocalizations

      Your Fischers Lovebirds will enjoy singing and whistling and will do so all day long, becoming especially noisy at dawn and at dusk. Unlike conures and parrots, lovebirds don’t learn human words or mimic sounds. Instead, they engage in a pleasant low volume chatter that won’t bother the neighbors. However, since these birds enjoy communicating with each other, the more birds you have, the louder they will get.

      Fischer’s Lovebirds Colors and Markings

      How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

      Image Credit: Josef_Svoboda, Shutterstock

      Fischer’s Lovebirds are one of the smallest kinds of parrot that you can buy. It usually only grows to about 6-inches tall and has an orange head with green plumage. It has white rings around the eyes and an orange beak. There can also be a bit of yellow coloring where the orange meets the green, and there may be green highlights around the face. The legs are usually grey, and they are monomorphic, which means that both sexes look identical

      Caring for the Fischer’s Lovebirds

      Caring for your Fischer’s Lovebirds is not hard, and they are not very demanding in terms of habitat. You will need a cage that is at least 18 inches wide by 18 inches deep and 18 inches tall for a single bird, but since they prefer to live in pairs, your minimum cage size is 24 inches wide by 18 inches deep and 24 inches tall. However, this is the minimum cage size, and we recommend getting the larges cage your budget will allow. Your cage will also need soft wooden toys to play with, and plenty of perches to sit on that are large enough for two birds if you have them. Most owners recommend allowing them plenty of time outside the cage each day so they can explore and stay active.

      Common Health Problems

      Since Fischer’s Lovebirds like to live in pairs or flocks, they can have high anxiety as a single bird, especially if it isn’t getting enough attention, leading to feather plucking and even infection. If you notice your pet pulling out its feathers, we recommend spending more time with it, allowing it more time out of the cage, and considering a second bird to keep it company while you are busy.

      Diet and Nutrition

      Your Fischer’s Lovebird will primarily eat small seeds for the bulk of its die, but it might also eat small amounts of fruits and vegetables as well for variety. There are many commercial products available that you can purchase to make feeding your pet exceedingly easy, and we recommend feeding a healthy fruit like apple slices once a week as a treat.

      How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

      It can be difficult to tell female and male love birds (or lovebirds) apart just by looking at them if your lovebirds are members of one of the species whose males and females have no color differentiation. If you own a pair, you stand a good chance of being able to determine your lovebirds’ gender identity by observing their physical characteristics and behaviors. If you have a lovebird, male female differences may be hard to tell unless you have one of the dimorphic species.

      Video of the Day

      Lovebirds color differences

      Among the nine species of lovebirds, three species are dimorphic. This means that the males of these species have visible color differences from the females. The three species of lovebirds that fall into this category are the Madagascar lovebird, the red-faced lovebird and the Abyssinian lovebird.

      The Madagascar lovebird is also known as the gray-headed lovebird. The head, breast and back of the neck on male birds will be gray against an otherwise green body, which gets darker on the back and wings. Females of this species are completely green. Male red-faced lovebirds are bright green with yellow coloration on their breasts and undersides. Males have orange-red faces and crowns with green and black wings. Females have faces that are more orange than red; their wings are entirely green.

      The Abyssinian lovebird may also be called the black-winged lovebird. Males of this species are green with bright red coloration on their foreheads and surrounding their eyes. The areas under the wings are black on males. Females do not have any red on their heads, and the areas under their wings tend to be more greenish, though they may contain some black.

      The rosy-faced lovebird is also known as the red-faced lovebird. or even the rosey cheeked lovebird. If you have a rosy faced lovebird, male and female differences can be hard to spot. Males have rosy pink foreheads, chins, throats, upper breasts and cheeks. The females have very similar but slightly more dull coloring.

      Lovebird Male-Female Differences

      Six lovebird species are monomorphic — there is no color difference between the males and the females. While coloring will not help you tell the males from the females in these breeds, there are some physical characteristics you can look for that may help you tell males and females apart.

      Female lovebirds tend to have broader heads, broader shoulders and a wider pelvic span than males do. You can estimate the width of the head and shoulders with your eyes and compare the bird with others to hazard a guess whether your bird might be female. Males may have longer beaks than females.

      Bird Pelvic Bones

      A common way of checking a bird’s gender is to measure the space between the bird’s pelvic bones. Checking the pelvic width can pose a risk to your bird if you do not perform it properly. If you are unsure of your ability to handle your bird comfortably and safely, let an experienced veterinarian check your bird’s pelvic width for you or teach you how to do it.

      Typically, you’ll gently but firmly hold a lovebird so that the back is against your palm and the head is sticking out between your second and third fingers. Rub your finger between the bird’s legs, feeling for the two bones located right above the tail. If the bones are close together, the bird is likely male. If the bones are slightly further apart — large enough that an egg could fit through the pelvis — your bird is likely female.

      Vent sexing is another way to identify a bird’s gender. Vent sexing requires manipulating the bird’s vent by hand to observe the genitalia. Only a veterinarian or bird-handling professional should undertake vent sexing.

      Gender differences in lovebirds

      You may be able to determine your lovebirds’ gender identity by observing their behavior. Females are more likely to display nesting behavior, such as tearing up or shredding items that are put in the cage. Females are considered more likely to behave in a territorial or aggressive manner. If a lovebird lays eggs, you can guarantee that she is female.

      If that doesn’t work, ask your veterinarian. A sample of your bird’s DNA can be used to determine whether the bird is male or female. DNA testing is by far the most reliable method for determining gender of young lovebirds. An experienced avian veterinarian can take the lead in DNA-testing your birds, or you can test from home using a kit you’ll send to the manufacturer for testing.

      Lutino lovebirds

      The lutino lovebird is a color variation of the peach-faced lovebird. It is considered a sex-linked mutation. The lutino mutation occurs when dark melanin pigment is absent from the bird. While the gene that causes lutino coloration is linked to the sex chromosomes, it is not exclusive to males or females and will not help you determine gender. Male and female lutino lovebirds are monomorphic.

      Sometimes the mood of a pet bird is difficult to read. Happy or sad, moody or mad — you can decipher bird behaviors by observing the bird’s body language. These signs can be obvious or subtle, and they can always give you insight into your bird’s wants and needs.

      Video of the Day

      Bird body language

      All birds communicate through different types of bird body language, but some behaviors can be seen in most pet birds just by observing your bird’s vocalizations, wings, tail, beak, and eyes — and can be very telling. Some of these behaviors are displayed a lot more in some types of birds and stand out best in others.

      The eyes are the key

      In a bird’s case, eyes are the key. Unlike humans, a bird can control its irises. By enlarging and shrinking their irises, the bird can display its interest in something, when they’re angry, afraid, or in the fighting mood. This eye action is labeled “flashing” or “pinning.”

      Vocal communications

      Most birds are vocal and in the wild vocalizations are used for warnings, attracting mates, territorial protection, and continuing social contact with other birds. But don’t overlook the signs when your bird may be attempting to contact you!

      The happy signs

      Did you ever hear your bird sing, talk, or whistle? These are signs of a happy, healthy, and content bird. Of course, you’ll have those birds that love an audience and sing like mad when there are people around as opposed to the quiet bird who’ll only sing for you. Regardless of which bird you have, if you hear a song, a whistle, or some words, you’ll know your bird is happy.

      What is bird chatter?

      Whether soft or loud, a bird’s chatter can be a sign your bird is content. However, the chatter may just be your bird learning to talk. Sometimes a bird will chatter loudly to get your attention. Wild birds chatter in the evening, before sleeping, to connect with other members of their flock.

      Purring, growling, and clicking

      A parrot purring is more like a soft growl and not like a cat’s purr. This vocalization can either be a sign of contentment or annoyance. To read what the bird is saying, it’s best to factor in the environment and body language of the bird. The real growl which isn’t heard in all pet birds is a sign of aggression. If your bird growls, examine its environment and remove anything she doesn’t like. A note of caution here — growling birds shouldn’t be handled!

      On the other end of the spectrum, we have tongue clicking. When a bird clicks its tongue against her beak, she may be asking for you to pick her up and pet her.

      Wing flipping, flapping, and drooping

      Not always meant for flight, the wings of a bird are also used for communication. Flying in place or wing flapping is used as exercise, to get your attention, or just to display happiness. Sometimes a bird will lift its wings to cool itself or stretch. Wing flipping can mean a variety of things from anger to pain, but it may also be your bird fluffing its feathers to get them to lay just right for them. When flipping is accompanied by a head bob (an attention getter) your bird often wants food! Note that flipping is also associated with mating behavior.

      Often when a bird learns to fly, they must also learn to fold and tuck their wings. Drooping their wings allows them to learn how to fold and tuck. When an older bird does this, it could indicate illness. Also, drooping is done in conjunction with drying their wing feathers after bathing.

      And speaking of feathers

      How a bird holds its feathers is an important aspect of body language. During the preening process, birds will ruffle or flare their feathers. This will aid in removing all dirt and dust to allow their feathers to return to their normal position. A bird ruffling feathers is also a way it can remove tension after preening, but if feathers remain ruffled, take caution — this may be a sign of illness. Tail feather flaring is when a bird spreads out its tail like a fan. Usually displayed by parrots, and often with eye pinning, tail flaring means your bird is in a highly excited state.

      Crest feathers

      Birds like cockatiels and hawk-headed parrots have crest feathers they can lower or raise. This is an action to display an emotional state. Observe what will prompt your bird to raise or lower its crest. See if it fears something or someone’s relationship, or if it’s happy or sad.

      The quiet bird

      There is no such thing as a quiet bird! Some birds are quieter than others but usually, the bigger the bird, the noisier it is. Noise-making is instinctual for a bird so do not expect complete quietness always. Noise is how birds communicate, defend themselves, and form bonds.

      Observe your bird

      Watch and study your bird, learn its patterns, and what he is trying to tell you. Sometimes you may sense a sign of illness, often you won’t know your bird is sick. not. But if you do uncover some unusual behavior not normally displayed by your bird, you will want to take flight to your local veterinarian.

      How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

      Last update: 16 December, 2019

      Pet birds are intelligent, sociable animals, and they’re also vulnerable to common diseases. So, knowing how to recognize the first signs of trouble is important for maintaining their well-being.

      The most common diseases in pet birds

      The term “bird” encompasses a huge and extremely diverse group of vertebrate animals adapted to aerial life. Each bird species has a specific type of body and evolved in a certain way according to the environment where they grew up.

      Each bird species has a greater or lesser sensitivity to various types of microorganisms, toxins, or food substances. Not to mention their genetic tendency to certain diseases according to their breed and/or lineage.

      Accidental blows

      Even though these aren’t exactly diseases, accidental blows are one of the main causes of death among domestic birds. Generally, these happen in wild birds and in environments that aren’t properly conditioned for their needs.

      There are no specific symptoms. However, birds who get hit hard often have difficulties flying together with fractures and even wing damage.

      Pecking is one of the most common diseases in pet birds

      This is a psychological disease in which a bird plucks the feathers from its chest, back, and belly. It’s usually due to stress, skin infections, and parasites.

      Scabies or mite allergy

      Mites can cause skin allergies and scabies in domestic birds. These are highly contagious conditions and require immediate treatment. So, you must consult a vet immediately if you think you recognize any of the symptoms.

      The formation of white scabs or warts on the eyes, nostrils, and legs are the main symptoms of this condition.

      The best form of prevention is to maintain proper hygiene of the animal’s cage. Treatment usually consists of topical medications such as ointments and creams based on sulfur. It’s mainly about reducing inflammation and promoting the regeneration of the bird’s epithelial cells.

      Red lice infestation

      Red lice can easily infest domestic birds and cause serious damage to their skin and plumage.

      The presence of these parasites usually leads to severe itching so the bird might compulsively scratch itself. Another symptom that happens as the parasites progress is the loss of vitality that leads to lethargy.

      There are specific products for the prevention of red lice and mites in parrots and other pet birds. You must spray these products periodically on the body of your bird in order to prevent red lice from jumping on board. In addition, you must properly disinfect their cage together with all of their accessories and even your entire home if possible.

      Intestinal parasites

      Direct contact and ingestion of waste, be it their own or other birds’ is the perfect setting for the entry and proliferation of intestinal parasites, mainly worms, and Ascaris.

      The main form of prevention is to properly sanitize the cage and keep it from resting directly on the floor or the ground. This is so the animal won’t be in direct contact with their feces.

      Candidiasis is one of the most common diseases in pet birds

      Like humans, birds can also develop Candidiasis, and the most common symptoms are diarrhea and vomiting. As the disease progresses the animal will lose its appetite and radically lose weight and become malnourished.

      You must consult your veterinarian before opting for any palliative treatment.

      Psittacine beak and feather disease (PBFD)

      PBFD is an infectious and viral disease that’s also known as French molt.

      The main symptom is an abnormality in the skin and feathers of the affected bird. For example, their plumage begins to grow abnormally with ruffled feathers or they just don’t regenerate. In more severe cases, the animal may lose all of its plumage, in addition to deformations in its beak.

      You must consult your vet immediately if you notice any of these symptoms. This is because viral infections that afflict birds are difficult to treat in advanced cases. So, early diagnosis is crucial when it comes to saving your bird’s life.


      This is another biggie when it comes to pet bird diseases.

      It mainly happens when the animal accidentally ingests food or objects left within its reach. These are some of the toxic substances:

      • Lead: This is usually present in jewelry, paintings, lamps, and toys.
      • Zinc: This one is commonly found in cables, screws and even in certain tools.
      • Poisonous foods: Substances like chocolates and sweets, industrialized foods, sausages, fried foods, salt, sugar, coffee and other caffeinated products, high-fat milk, and dairy.

      As you can see, pet bird diseases often happen asymptomatically.

      Signs of Illness in Pet Birds

      Birds are masters when it comes to hiding signs of diseases or illness.

      They will do whatever it takes to fool you! As with all parrot behaviors, this one is instinctual. In the wild, sick birds are an easy meal.

      Predators target the sick and ill birds first. If your little guy isn’t feeling well, he’ll pretend he is just fine and dandy to avoid becoming someone’s next meal.

      By the time most people notice their bird is sick, sometimes it can be too late. At this point, the bird is so sick he just can’t keep up his little charade any longer.

      My very first bird, a pudgy Lutino Cockatiel named Charlie, seemed fine until one day when I took her out of her cage and she was lethargic and refused to eat.

      I rushed her to the vet, who did test after test, then sent me home with her, instructing me to keep her warm. Unfortunately, it was too late and she died that evening. I was devasted.

      When the test results came back, it turned out she had kidney failure. I had no idea because she had acted normally up until that morning. And, shame on me, I had not been getting her regular veterinary care.

      Sorry, this isn’t meant to bum anyone out. The point is that you need to pay strict attention to your bird to see if she might be sick, or else she could easily fool you.

      10 signs of illness in birds to watch for:

      Weight loss.

      One of the first signs of illness is frequent or gradual weight loss.

      You should have a gram scale in your home that you can use to weigh your bird.

      These can be found at bird specialty shops.

      Weigh your bird at the same time, before feeding her, at least once a week.

      A 10% weight loss is considered significant.

      Unusual Droppings.

      A bird’s droppings tell a story about her health and her diet. Check droppings every day.

      Use plain white paper or wax paper to line the cage so you can see droppings better.

      Watch out for changes in color, consistency, volume of droppings. Emphasize More on droppings texture and frequency later.

      Loss of appetite.

      If you notice your bird has stopped eating, it’s a serious sign of illness.

      Abnormal Breathing.

      • Labored breathing,
      • continuous clicking,
      • gasping,
      • Respiratory distress symptoms are serious and require vet intervention at the earliest.

      Fluffed feathers.

      If your bird is still perching with its feathers fluffed, you should immediately put it to a source of heat and call the avian vet.

      Nasal discharge/wet sneezing.

      Your bird should not have any discharge from her nares (the nostrils above the beak).

      All birds sneeze, but continued wet sneezes are cause for concern.


      All birds take naps during the day, but if your bird seems to be sleeping more than usual, you should be concerned.

      Tail bobbing.

      Birds who are having trouble breathing often have tail bobbing. This is when the tail bobs up and down as the bird breathes.

      Abnormal Plumage.

      Abnormal feather growth, loss of feathers that is not due to normal molting, or sticky/matted feathers are all cause for concern.

      This could indicate a vitamin or mineral deficiency caused by diet, lack of natural sunlight, or a more serious problem affecting the vital organs, or from Beak and Feather Syndrome.

      Change in voice.

      If your normally noisy bird suddenly stops singing or screaming, you should be worried.

      Or if a normally quiet bird starts to make a bit of noise, pay attention. She’s trying to tell you something.

      There are other things that you will be able to notice right away if there is a problem with your bird.

      These would be considered emergencies and warrant a call and a visit to an avian veterinarian as soon as possible:

      • Discharge from eyes, mouth, vent, or nares
      • Broken limbs
      • Bleeding
      • Vomiting (which is different from regurgitation. Vomiting results in a sticky residue on the face and head)
      • Very labored breathing
      • Not able to perch or usually sitting on the cage bottom.
      • Seizures or other neurological problems

      Obviously, the above is not meant to be an inclusive list and needs updation as per needs.

      You know your bird best and need to determine when veterinary care is warranted. Now on to droppings.


      Monitoring your bird’s droppings is one of the best things to do, but first, you need to know what you’re looking for.

      Abnormal Bird Droppings:

      • Increased size.
      • Changes in color are not related to diet (blueberries would make the droppings blue, for instance).
      • Are often wet.
      • Carry a smell.

      Healthy Bird Droppings:

      • Small with a white cap.
      • Usually have a down feather linked to it.
      • Have no sign of wetness surrounding it.
      • Have no nasty smell.

      The best way to keep your bird healthy is to follow a healthy parrot diet and to get regular veterinary care.

      If you are ever unsure whether or not your bird is ill, it’s always best to seek immediate veterinary care.

      • How to Avoid Birds Boredom? 5 Easy Ways

      We’re an affiliate! We may earn a small commission when you make a purchase from product links at no additional cost to you!

      , DVM, DABVP (Avian), Avian and Exotics Department, Florida Veterinary Specialists

      • 3D Models (0)
      • Audios (0)
      • Calculators (0)
      • Images (0)
      • Tables (1)
      • Videos (0)

      Pet birds have an innate desire to try to hide any illness or injury. In the wild, showing signs of illness increases the chance they will be attacked by other animals. Thus, any behavior that is out of the ordinary is a sign that your bird may be ill. In particular, if you notice limping, the inability to move the wings properly, any unusual discharge, any changes in droppings, or a general lack of physical activity, you should seek veterinary advice or care promptly. If your bird is huddled, lethargic, unresponsive, or lying on the bottom of the cage, you have an emergency. Alert your veterinarian and transport the bird immediately.

      When a bird has a “bleeding” emergency, it is important to distinguish between obvious active bleeding (such as from the wing, beak, or foot) and blood on the cage or on the bird with no active bleeding. Continued bleeding requires immediate veterinary intervention, whereas bleeding that has stopped is best left undisturbed. However, even if bleeding has ceased, it is wise to take your bird in for an examination.

      If your bird is in respiratory distress, your veterinarian will place the bird in an incubator with oxygen. Shock and infection are of concern in birds that have penetrating or extensive wounds.

      Injuries should be treated with the goal of the bird’s survival first and treatment of the traumatized area second. For example, a bird that has been struggling for hours with its leg band caught—and that may possibly have a fractured bone—is in more danger of dying from stress related to the prolonged struggling than from the fracture.

      When your bird is in need of special care (before and after an emergency veterinary visit), set up an area in your house where there is less activity and where you can easily increase the temperature, such as a spare bathroom. The carrying case used to take the bird to the veterinarian may be a good place for the ill bird before returning to its regular cage. Cover the case with a towel or blanket on all but one side to eliminate drafts. Remote probe digital thermometers (sold in electronics stores) and photographic thermometers measure from 60°F to 120°F (16°C to 49°C) and can be safely used to monitor the room temperature. An ill bird should be kept at a room temperature of 80°F to 90°F (27°C to 32°C) until it is taken to your avian veterinarian.

      If a room cannot be maintained at a warm temperature, use of a heating pad (set only on low, producing a temperature safe for skin contact) insulated with 2 towels above and 1 towel between the pad and cage can be used to keep the temperature of most small cages between 75°F and 85°F (24°C and 29°C). Alternatively, a shaded incandescent light bulb (60 to 100 watts) can be placed outside the cage (far enough away that the bird cannot reach the shade or bulb). Cover both the cage and the shaded light bulb with a towel or sheet, being sure the towel or sheet does not come in direct contact with the hot bulb. The heat from the lighted bulb will gently warm the cage area.

      Having a well-stocked first aid kit for your bird is important. Know where it is kept, and replace items that have expired annually. Ask your veterinarian for recommendations about what to include in your kit.

      Transport your bird to the veterinarian in a carrier that is secure and allows some air to get in. Keep the bird warm by transporting the carrier on a heating pad, hot water bottle, or other container filled with hot water. Cover the carrier with a towel on at least 3 sides to minimize visual stimuli. To safely transport your bird, remember three key things: warmth, darkness, carrier.

      Whether you’re incubating eggs on your own or curious about eggs in the wild, you might wonder how to tell if an egg is dead or alive.

      To tell if a bird egg is alive, check the egg to see if it is warm, unbroken, and has visible veins when under bright light. You can also watch for signs of movement if you’re incubating an egg. If an egg is in a nest, watch for a parent returning to the nest; this means it’s alive.

      Table of Contents

      How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

      Signs of Life (or Death) in Bird Eggs

      To check to see whether a bird egg is dead or alive, look for these cues:

      • Is the egg warm? If so, it’s likely still alive.
      • If the egg is in a nest in the wild, are birds returning to the nest? This is a sign that the egg is likely alive and being cared for.
      • Is the egg fractured or broken? If it is damaged, the bird is likely dead.
      • If you can, shine a light on the egg in a dark room. If you see veins, the egg is alive.
      • If you’re incubating an egg, watch for signs of movement. Wobbling means that the egg is alive.

      Reasons Why Bird Eggs Die

      Bird eggs usually die from infection or poor egg handling, or lack of nutrition.

      When bird eggs die, it usually happens within the first three days of incubation or the last three days before hatching.

      Bacterial or Viral Infection

      One of the most common causes of in-shell deaths for birds is a bacterial or viral infection.

      Infectious pathogens can be introduced to the eggs by human handling, a dirty incubator, or rotten eggs.

      If you’re using an incubator, make sure you clean it regularly to avoid infections.

      You should also wash your hands before handling the eggs and remove infertile or dead eggs before they can spoil.

      Shaking of a Bird’s Egg at Early Stages

      Shaking a bird’s egg will kill the embryo at early stages in the bird’s development and cripple the chick later on.

      You should always take care not to shake, drop, or otherwise physically agitate a bird’s egg.

      By handling eggs gingerly and carefully, you can increase the likelihood that the chick will hatch healthily.

      Lack of Nutrition

      Improper nutrition can kill an egg, whether it be inadequate nutrient levels or elevated nutrient levels.

      One common nutritional issue is hypercalcemia, which occurs when the egg has too much calcium.

      This causes the shell to harden to the point where the chick can’t peck its way out to hatch, ultimately leading to death in most cases.

      Reasons Why Bird Eggs Don’t Hatch

      When bird eggs don’t hatch, it could be because the egg was never properly fertilized. Other times, it’s because the embryo died.

      Factors like temperature and humidity, genetic defects, or a hen’s age and health may also impact the development of the eggs.

      Temperature and Humidity

      An unsuitable temperature or humidity can cause either infertility or embryo death.

      Ideally, you should keep the eggs in an incubator in a room that’s about 70 degrees Fahrenheit (21.11°C).

      You should also keep the eggs slightly moist, especially if they’re duck or goose eggs.

      Lightly spraying the eggs with warm water now and then can prevent them from becoming dehydrated and increase the likelihood that they will hatch.

      Genetic Defects

      Some eggs are simply born with bad genetics, whether due to inbreeding or a random physical defect.

      Additionally, some birds are intentionally bred to be infertile.

      So the trait of not being able to create fertile eggs is more common than it otherwise would be, especially in budgies.

      Hen Age

      The hen’s age also plays a role in determining whether the eggs will be fertile or not.

      Generally, you can expect that birds that are very young or very old will lay infertile eggs.

      This is partly due to the limited supply of fertile eggs that a hen has and partly due to the experience and technique of fertilizing eggs.

      Overall Hen Health

      Hens need to be healthy to lay fertile eggs. Reasons why they might not lay fertile eggs may be nutritional deficiencies or a disease like psittacosis.

      The most common nutritional deficiencies to impact egg-laying are in calcium, sodium, and energy levels.

      On the other side of the coin, too much zinc can cause a hen to become infertile.

      Psittacosis is a highly contagious disease spread between birds and humans through infected saliva, mucus, or droppings.

      Blood-sucking insects are also a culprit in spreading this disease.

      Why You Shouldn’t Touch Wild Bird Eggs

      Even if you find an egg that appears abandoned, in most cases, you shouldn’t touch it.

      There is a good chance that the eggs belong to a protected species, in which case it’s illegal to collect or tamper with the eggs or nest.

      Touching eggs can also cause diseases to spread between birds and humans.

      There is a myth that touching bird eggs will cause the parents to abandon the eggs, but this is only a myth.

      In reality, birds will continue nurturing their eggs even after a human disturbance.

      Tips for Incubating Healthy Eggs

      If you’re incubating eggs at home, you should consider these tips:

      • Purchase or build a high-quality incubator.The Harris Farms Nurture Right Incubator (on Amazon), for example, will allow you to carefully control both temperature and humidity without disturbing the eggs.
      • Pay close attention to the temperature of the incubator. Eggs need to stay within a sometimes narrow temperature range to survive; for example, chicken eggs need to stay within one degree of 99.5 degrees Fahrenheit (37.5°C), or else they will die.
      • Test the incubator for a day before inserting eggs. This will allow you to determine if it’s able to maintain a constant temperature and humidity level.
      • Ensure that the incubator has good airflow so that the eggs can breathe in oxygen and breathe out carbon dioxide.
      • Turn the eggs at least three times a day until day 18 of incubation, and then leave them alone. To keep track of your turning, consider marking the sides of the egg with a pencil. If you turn your eggs more than three times, at least make sure that you land on an odd number. This will ensure that the eggs don’t rest on the same side two nights in a row.
      • Avoid helping the birds hatch when the time comes. They will often take six to twelve hours to break out of their shells after making their first hole, and it’s easy to injure the bird if you try to interfere.


      • Alaska Department of Fish and Game: Ask a Wildlife Biologist: Will a Mother Abandon Her Young if Handled
      • Veterinary Partner: Psittacosis in Birds
      • Modern Farmer: How to Incubate Chicken Eggs

      About Us

      Hi, I’m Charles Lee. I’ve loved animals since I was a young boy. Read more report this ad

      Legal Information

      Earned commissions are generated when referring to online stores such as Amazon Services and other affiliate programs.

      How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

      Avian Aspergillosis

      Airway and respiratory tract diseases are very common in pet birds. One such disease commonly is Aspergillosis, which is a fungal infection of the bird’s respiratory tract.

      Symptoms and Types

      The symptoms of the disease are dependent on the form of the infection. For birds, the fungal spores lodge in the air sacs of the lungs. But, it can also involve the bronchi, trachea, and syrinx (voice box) of the bird. If not treated quickly, Aspergillus can even spread to other organs. There are two forms of Apergillosis disease found in birds.

      1. Acute Aspergillosis occurs in young and newly imported birds. It is severe and of short duration. Birds will have a lack of appetite, breathing difficulties, and if not treated in time, the infected bird may die. When the air sacs get inflamed, the problem is called airsacculitis. A veterinary examination will find a bird’s lungs and air sacs congested with white mucus; the lungs may also have nodules.
      2. Chronic Aspergillosis occurs in older, captive birds. Infection occurs over a long time and birds will shows signs of listlessness, depression, weakness, and will have trouble breathing. The symptoms will only become apparent after the infection has been present in the lungs for some time. The changes and problems for these birds are severe, and may be permanent. There may be bone changes and a misshaping of the upper respiratory tract — nose, trachea, and syrinx. The lungs will be severely damaged, due to the long-term infection, and it can easily be spread to other organs and systems. If the central nervous system becomes infected, the bird may show tremors, loss of coordination and paralysis.


      Aspergillosis disease is caused by the fungus Aspergillus, and its spores are what cause respiratory problems in birds. The fungal spores can be present in contaminated food, water, nest boxes, incubators, other nesting material, and unventilated areas. However, birds can also catch the infection from the environment.

      Fungal infection is common in birds with vitamin A deficiency, malnutrition, stress and in various other weakened states. The fungal spores enter the bird’s lungs and are especially infectious when the bird’s immunity is low.


      After proper diagnosis (and if treated early), the veterinarian can cure Aspergillosis disease with anti-fungal drugs. And because the symptoms of this disease are similar to other respiratory infections, you must be vigilant and take your bird to the veterinarian if any of these symptoms become apparent.


      Aspergillosis disease in birds can be prevented with a few simple precautions: you should maintain good hygiene, nutrition and ventilation for your bird.

      How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

      Adopting an older / second-hand parrot
      Health challenges that senior birds may face .

      The following changes can be seen in older birds:

      • As birds age, a decrease in physical activities is usually observed as energy levels go down.
        • Also conditions like arthritis may make certain movements uncomfortable / painful. Look out for limping.

      • Senior birds may become more sedate and easy-going. Although some owners describe their pets to be as feisty in old age as they were when they were younger.
      • Toys: Older birds that have not been exposed to any variety in their lives may originally be frightened by the introduction of toys. The best way to get around this is to do a very gradual introduction. The most important thing is to not give up. These older birds will benefit from environmental enrichment just as much as the babies.
      • Older birds may be less tolerant of people inexperienced with parrots. Although the level of affection towards the family members remained the same. They are just less likely to want to be with people they don’t know.
      • Older birds have been observed to adjust surprisingly easy to new home: Rehoming organizations found that older birds placed into new homes adjust surprisingly easily and rather quickly to their new homes and new family. Some even state that the change in home environment was even perceived as invigorating by many senior parrots.
        • Adopting a senior parrot . Things you should know.

      How to spot signs of illness in lovebirdsAge-related Conditions:

      As birds get older, they may develop health problems. Certain species are more prone to certain conditions, such as African Greys being susceptible to atherosclerotic lesions inside of blood vessels than other species

      Birds may develop painful arthritis in their joints.

      • Please visit this webpage for signs to look out for and how you can help an arthritic bird

    • Diabetes:

      Older, overweight birds are more likely to develop problems with blood glucose regulation.Diabetes needs to be carefully managed by the bird owners and if this is done correctly, a bird can live a long, good life .

      • Please visit this webpage for signs to look out for and how you can help an arthritic bird

    • Cataracts:

      Older birds may develop a progressive opacity of the lens (behind the iris). It may involve one or both eyes
      Renal failure:

      This is one of the more common problems in older birds. Increased water consumption and more urine in droppings can be an indication that the kidneys aren’t functioning at optimal capacity.
      Diminished Immune Function:

      Older birds may be more susceptible to certain bacterial, fungal, protozoal and viral infections.
      Chronic Egg Laying:

      Older hens are more likely to develop chronic egg laying and egg binding.

      Tumors can be benign or malignant (cancerous) and can involve any organ or system. Some species of birds tend to develop benign fatty tumors called “Lipomas.”

      • Lipomas are commonly seen in overweight Amazon Parrot, Rose-breasted Cockatoos and Budgies. It seems that older budgies are more prone to tumors of the ovary, testicle or kidney, which may eventually put pressure on the sciatic nerve on the affected side, resulting in lameness of the foot or leg.Fibromas are tumors found on the wing and they may need to be surgically removed. In some instances, amputation of the wing may be necessary.

    • Heart failure:

      Birds who are getting plenty of exercise (flying) are less prone to develop heart problems. However, birds who are mainly cage-bound and/or clipped can develop heart problems as they age.

    Though Parkinson’s disease can’t be definitively diagnosed until certain motor symptoms are present, some early warning signs are now well-understood to be connected to Parkinson’s disease. These signs may crop up years before the classic motor issues, like a tremor.

    We asked neurologists at the Johns Hopkins Parkinson’s Disease and Movement Disorders Center to explain what these early warning signs are and their likelihood of leading to a diagnosis of Parkinson’s disease.

    How early can Parkinson’s disease be diagnosed?

    A: A true determination of Parkinson’s disease is a clinical diagnosis, which means certain motor symptoms have to be present, but we now know more about some early signs of Parkinson’s disease that, while they don’t always lead to the condition, are connected.

    In terms of how early we can detect, we can detect a mutation that is associated with an increased risk of Parkinson’s as early as birth. In the minority of patients who may have a known Parkinson’s-related genetic mutation (about 10 percent), that gene could be tested for at any time in life. At the same time, that’s not diagnosing Parkinson’s; it’s just identifying the risk.

    Early warning signs are what we call prodromal, or preclinical, symptoms. Prodromal symptoms are an early warning sign that someone might get Parkinson’s disease. Though some of these symptoms have a very high probability of signaling future Parkinson’s, having one or more of them is still not a 100 percent probability. Some prodromal symptoms are loss of sense of smell, REM behavior disorder, anxiety or depression, and constipation.

    Do people actually lose their sense of smell with Parkinson’s?

    A: Yes. It’s a condition called anosmia, and if you have it with no other disease (no other cause of a loss of sense of smell), you have at least a 50 percent chance of developing Parkinson’s disease in the next five to 10 years. What happens is that alpha-synuclein, the protein that clumps in the part of the brain that regulates dopamine and leads to Parkinson’s disease, also aggregates in the olfactory bulb, the part of the brain responsible for your sense of smell. This happens well before the protein accumulations cause motor symptoms.

    What is REM behavior disorder, and how is it connected to Parkinson’s?

    A: REM behavior disorder is different than other sleep problems, like insomnia. People who have it may jerk or kick — it’s as though they are acting out their dreams. In a similar pattern to anosmia, people with idiopathic (meaning there’s no known cause for it) REM sleep behavior disorder have at least a 50 percent chance of eventually developing Parkinson’s disease.

    How is constipation an early warning sign of Parkinson’s? It’s such a common problem.

    A: It’s not as specific as other prodromal symptoms, like anosmia. The rate at which people with chronic and unexplained problems with constipation develop Parkinson’s disease is not as easy to pin down. But if someone has unexplained, persistent constipation, it should at least be noted, as it could be considered prodromal.

    Depression and anxiety are also early warning signs of Parkinson’s. How so?

    A: Like the other symptoms discussed here, late-onset depression and anxiety (without a history of these symptoms earlier in life) are nonmotor prodromal manifestations of the condition. It’s not that everyone who is depressed will get Parkinson’s, and the numbers are lower than they are for symptoms like anosmia and REM behavior disorder. But the link is important to explore, and we are doing more research on it all the time.

    If your bird is sick or injured please take it to an AVIAN VET; don’t email me!!

    If you get a new bird, always take it to your vet ASAP for a thorough exam and medical advice!!

    And remember, birds often pretend to be fine when someone is watching nearby (survival instinct), so observe very carefully.

    • Puffed-up feathers. Birds fluff up their feathers to keep warm, and also when they relax for sleep . and also when sick. A bird who sits puffed up much of the day is likely in trouble.
    • Tail-bobbing when breathing. Birds who sit there puffed up, bobbing their tails, may be sick.
    • Not eating their favorite food. Maybe the bird’s full — but they need to eat often, so if after a day the favorite food is untouched, something’s likely wrong.
    • Half-closed or closed eye(s) for much of the time. Alert and healthy birds usually have both eyes wide open while awake. If the eyes start closing, and it’s not because you’re scratching a birdie head and inducing pure birdie joy, the bird might be sick. Oh, and be careful: birds often close one eye but not the other. You may not notice a bird is keeping its farther eye closed sometimes.
    • Sleeping excessively. Like people, birds who sleep a lot more than usual may be in trouble.
    • Bad posture when at rest. Healthy small parrots usually sit somewhat vertically, not fully horizontally, though it depends on the type. Bad posture from sickness is usually combined with puffed up feathers.
    • Discharge/wetness around the nose. It may be hard to see the nose, but it’s usually at the top of the widest part of the bill, right near or under the feather line. Watch for moisture/discharge there. An occasional sneeze is OK, but if it stays moist.
    • Throwing up/getting undigested or half-digested food stuck to the cage in weird places. Can be mistaken for harmless courtship-related regurgitation. New owners should play it safe and check with a vet. You can eventually learn to tell if it’s nausea vs. lovey-dovey behavior, but watch very carefully.
    • Poop sticking to the vent feathers. This is apparently a common sign of possible sickness, especially if it keeps happening.
    • Discolored, undigested, or runny poop. Watch for changes in the shape/color of the poop. Runny poop can happen if you’ve just given your bird a bath or if it just drank lots of water, but those effects only last for about an hour with small birds. Color changes can mean a change in diet (seed diets usually produce greenish poop, pellets usually produce brown), but off-colors or unusual colors are a warning sign (black is usually a bad sign). The poop should also look well-digested — no lumps in it that can be identified as what they used to be. If your bird eats seeds, there should NOT be whole, undigested seeds in the poop — that’s a sign of dreaded PDD.
    • Ragged, poorly preened feathers. A sign the bird isn’t feeling up to caring for its feathers, which is a bad sign, since feathers are vital to a bird’s survival in the wild.
    • Sneezing. Especially if it’s frequent.
    • Lack of energy. If a normally playful bird doesn’t play very much any more, it may well be sick.
    • Sudden temperament change. A normally mellow bird may get grouchy and nippy, or a rambunctious bird might just get very quiet and mellow. It might be just hormones or a bad feather day . or it could be something else.
    • Weight loss. Dangerous especially to small birds, who don’t have much in the way of bodily reserves. Most casual bird owners don’t weigh their birds very often, so it’s important to work with a vet to check a bird’s weight. Sometimes you can tell by feeling the keel bone, the bone that runs down the center of the bird’s chest — if it sticks out like a razor, the bird is starving! In a healthy bird, there’s so much flesh on the chest you can hardly feel the bone.
    • Crooked beak/crooked toenails. Either can be a sign of long-term illness, and should be checked out by your vet as soon as possible.
    • In budgies, crusted-over nose (cere) and/or feet. A possible sign of mites. Talk to your vet about the options.
    • Dull feathers/feathers with unnatural banding. Many possible sicknesses here! With cockatoos and cockatiels, also watch for a lack of “powder” (though young birds don’t seem to have as much of it). If the bird’s appearance is gradually getting worse, see a vet!
    • Plucked feathers. I’ve heard this is often due to parasites or other problems, not just boredom. Get a full battery of tests. This site has more information.
    • Any sign of blood! Bad sign. If your birdie is bleeding, you need to stop it immediately. Call your vet if you’re not sure how. If it’s a broken pin feather that’s bleeding, apparently it needs to be pulled out with pliers! For other cases, you need Quik-stop or other styptic (bleeding-stopping) powder (cornstarch can work too) — GET SOME just in case. Example of using cornstarch: One time one budgie of ours had a toenail clipped too short at a vet exam, and it started bleeding heavily at home. It’s alarming to see big drops of blood falling from a tiny bird!! (Note: wounds are not always conveniently visible.) Styptic stick didn’t work. We grabbed the budgie (carefully, in a small towel) and inserted the bleeding toenail into a small glass container of cornstarch, packed the cornstarch against the wound, and held it there for 20 minutes (of course making sure the bird could breathe freely while we held it). That finally got the toe to stop bleeding, but we watched carefully for some time to be sure.

    If you see one or more of these, or anything else odd or weird, don’t waste time getting opinions from amateurs like me. Call up your trusted avian vet ASAP!

    Finally, sometimes the worst happens, despite the best care and the best vets. Birds can and do die. Sometimes it’s from careless breeding, sometimes it’s pure bad luck, or an accident, or maybe it’s just time for the bird to pass on. The best you can do is to get as informed and educated as possible (from more than one source), get to know your bird’s individual quirks . and to remember that keeping your pet happy, well-loved, and mentally occupied is one of the best preventative medicines ever!

    Parrots, just like us humans, can suffer from stress caused by elements in their surrounding environment. In minor cases, the problem will correct itself and your parrot will go back to his or her “normal” behavior.

    However, more severe cases of stress can lead an otherwise healthy parrot spiraling downwards, affecting their health, mood and physical activity. The bottom line is that owners need to monitor their parrots for signs of stress on a regular basis to prevent this from happening.

    #1) Stress Bars

    One telltale sign of a stressed parrot is the formation of long vertical lines running horizontal across the shaft of the parrot’s feathers. They are usually thin, making them difficult to spot from afar. Upon close inspection of a stressed parrot, though, you’ll likely notice several stress bars running across their feathers.

    #2) Reduced Vocal Activity

    It’s no secret that parrots love to sing and dance. From the moment you first walk into the door, you’ll likely hear them singing a storm in hopes of getting your attention. Singing, talking and dancing are all signs of happiness. And when a parrot ceases to perform these activities, it could be a sign of stress.

    Encourage your parrot to sing by talking to them and rewarding them homemade snacks and treats for their good behavior. When a parrot grows lonely, however, this desire begins to fade, at which point they will simply stand in their cage and stare off into space.

    How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

    #3) Lack of Appetite

    Of course, another sign of a stressed and lonely parrot is lack of appetite. Has your parrot stopped eating their food? Parrots suffering from high stress levels may no longer feel the desire to eat, leaving them vulnerable to malnutrition and a weakened immune system. Sure, they may peck away at their food just to stay alive, but the general drive and eagerness to eat is gone.

    Keep an eye on your parrot’s feeding times and make a note of how much they are eating. A parrot’s health will go downhill fast if they aren’t eating, so don’t underestimate the severity of this problem.

    Unless they start eating within a couple of days, you should take them to an avian veterinarian for a more thorough checkup. They’ll be able to perform a routine examination of your parrot to ensure there’s no parasite, disease or illness that’s suppressing their appetite.

    #4) Trying To Hide

    Parrots that constantly try to hide from their owners may be suffering from stress. Parrots thrive on the social interaction between their owners, but a stressed bird may attempt to cower or hide in the corner when a family member approaches.

    Tips To Help Your Parrot Overcome Their Loneliness

    • Place a mirror (or two) inside their cage. Seeing their face in the mirror will give them the sense of being around other parrots.
    • Take your parrot out of their cage on a daily basis.
    • Talk to your parrot each time you walk by.
    • Keep the television or radio on when you leave the house.
    • Consider purchasing a companion parrot to give them company.

    Note: rescued parrots who were previous abused in their homes are most likely to exhibit this behavior.

    #5) Being Destructive

    Last but not least, destructive behavior can be an indicator of stress. If your parrot constantly knocks over the food bowl, tears up their toys, or makes a mess in their cage for no particular reason, they could be suffering from stress.

    Parrots are social creatures that crave the attention of others. In the wild, most species fly together in small-to-medium-sized flocks where they can communicate, bond and forage food together.

    Unfortunately, many owners seem to overlook the social needs of their parrot, resulting in depression along with other health problems. Read on a recent post where we discussed on how to tell if your parrot is sick. Whether you own a large Macaw or a small parakeet, you need to make sure they given daily attention to prevent this from happening.

    Agapornis sp

    Lovebirds are small sociable parrots originating from Africa. They are not the most talkative of birds, but can be taught to make different sounds, and can be very interactive with humans. Ideally, all birds should be paired up with a same species, opposite sex bird for lifetime companionship. Most Lovebirds are sexually monomorphic, meaning that they can only be definitively sexed by DNA testing from a blood sample or feather pluck. Only the Abyssinian lovebird, the Madagascar lovebird, and the black-collared lovebird are sexually dimorphic, meaning that they can be sexed visually. They can live 10-15 years in captivity.

    In the wild, these birds eat a wide variety of fruits, vegetables, grasses and seeds. It is however, difficult to replicate this diet in captivity as many birds can be notoriously fussy when fed a traditional bird seed mix, picking out the parts they like best (which are usually not the most nutritious!). Feeding a good quality complete pellet diet is the best way to ensure your lovebird has the best balance of nutrients. Leafy greens can also be provided as part of the diet. Treats can be given to provide interest and for training, including small pieces of oranges, apples, corn on the cob, or grated carrot, but these should form no more than 10% of the total diet. Grit will provide additional minerals and aid with digestion of food. Supplementation with a vitamin and mineral balancer is advised if a seed diet is fed.


    Water should always be available both for drinking, and in a shallow saucer for bathing. This should be changed daily.

    Accommodation requirements

    Ideally lovebirds will be happiest in a spacious aviary set up. In addition to the flying area, a sleeping area should be provided. Perches can be placed at varying heights around the enclosure with branches of different diameters providing the most natural set up.

    If an aviary is not an option, lovebirds may be housed in a cage set up, although ideally the cage should only be used for housing the bird at night or when unsupervised. They can be tamed as individuals but generally are best as a small group. Lovebirds can be aggressive to each other and introductions should be performed carefully. A cage set up should also be as spacious as possible, and placed out of direct sunlight and draughts. It should be situated away from any item that may give off toxic fumes, such as non-stick cooking utensils, which can release lethal fumes when heated. It is similarly important to ensure that the cage is made out of zinc-free materials as zinc is also very toxic to birds.

    A variety of branches can be placed as perches as in an aviary set up, and different toys should be added and changed regularly to entertain birds. It is however, important to bear in mind that many pet shop toys can be easily demolished, so only sturdy toys should be used. If planning to be out of the house for a long time, it is also a good idea to leave a radio program on at a low volume to give the birds some stimulation.

    Free flight is an essential requirement and birds should be given the opportunity for exercise daily. It is however, important to ensure that the room they are allowed to fly around is totally secure with all windows, doors and chimneys blocked off, heaters and fans turned off and any potentially poisonous house plants removed. If started young, birds can be easily trained to perch on a finger and returned to the cage.

    The cage or aviary should be cleaned out at least once a week to help prevent disease and a suitable disinfectant used.

    Ultraviolet lighting is important for birds, being required both for natural behaviour and calcium metabolism. Specific bird lamps are available and have recognised health benefits.

    If planning to be out of the house for a long time, it is also a good idea to leave a radio program on at a low volume to give the birds some stimulation.

    Signs of ill health

    A healthy lovebird will be bright and alert with clear eyes and nostrils, shiny feathers and a clean vent. It is important to become familiar with your lovebird’s normal behaviour and droppings, in order that signs of illness can be noticed at an early stage. Beak and nails should also be checked regularly in case trimming is required

    Birds will often not show obvious signs of illness until they are very sick, so any changes in breathing, discharges from the eyes or nostrils, changes in droppings or general “fluffed up” appearance should be taken seriously, and a vet consulted as soon as possible.

    Feather plucking – this can be a skin problem, behavioural issue or underlying disease and an in-depth investigation is generally necessary to determine the cause.

    Respiratory disease – there are various respiratory problems which can affect lovebirds, which can progress quickly and in some cases also be transmitted to people so it is important to investigate any changes in breathing as soon as possible.


    Lovebirds can try to breed in captivity and even mixed species can breed together.

    Lovebirds can carry material over their backs between the wings when trying to build a nest.


    Unfortunately there is no NHS for birds and many conditions can be ongoing and require a number of diagnostic tests, leading to a financial strain which would be removed by insurance.

    The Exotic Animal and Wildlife service offers

    All our vets are very experienced in avian medicine and surgery and can offer your pet a high quality standard of veterinary care

    All birds are hospitalised in appropriate temperature controlled, individually ventilated enclosures.

    First opinion consultations

    For the more unusual and complex cases you can be referred to us

    For emergencies, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year, please ring our veterinary hospital on 0131-6507650

    When you buy a female lovebird, you need to be aware of the bird’s reproductive system, its functions, its needs, and so on. Even without a male partner nearby. Because you’ll soon find out that a female lovebird lays eggs in any case. This is well in here nature. But how often do they do it? What should you do as an owner to help the little pet? We’ve already covered the topic of conure eggs, but are lovebirds any different?

    In general, lovebirds lay eggs around 5-6 times a year in the wild. Each batch consists of around 5-6 eggs as well. It takes around two days for each egg. However, breeders and owners strive for round 2 or 3 clutches a year for the birds in captivity. Besides, they aren’t limited to the natural spring and summer breeding time that lovebirds in the wild prefer.

    If you have a bonded couple, you need to be extra attentive to their mating and female health. Too frequent clutches may suck the life out of the female and deplete her of nutrients.

    Thus, let’s check how you can control the process as an owner.

    When Do Lovebirds Lay Eggs?

    How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

    If we are talking about a bonded pair, they usually are most predictable than single females. After mating, it takes around 10 days fro the female to start laying eggs. After that, it’ll take her around 10 days more to lay all the eggs, considering the two-day period between each in a clitch and an average batch being around five eggs.

    As the lovebird lays all the eggs, the incubation period starts. It takes around 25 days. Note: this is an average period. Be ready for a couple of days’ deviations.

    All is easy when you have a couple and know when they bond. But, on the other sides, if you have females only, it’ll be harder to tell when the bird will lay eggs. And she will do it; they’ll just be unfertilized.

    Follow this quick overview to be ready at the appropriate time:

    Lovebirds reach sexual maturity at around six months or a year of their life. The first signs will appear somewhere t this stage: your bird will gather sticks, feathers, paper, and so on to form a nest. This process is hard to miss, even if you regularly clean the cage. I’d recommend leaving some clean materials for her to build that nest. Otherwise, it’s in danger of plucking its feathers for building materials.

    What Are the Common Issues of Laying Eggs and How to Help Your Lovebird?

    How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

    I hate to bring bad news, but you should be aware of the hard time lovebirds have with laying eggs. Often, the female has issues with expelling an egg. It’s commonly known as egg binding.

    It’s an emergency that requires veterinary help. Vets can help a lovebird with a stuck egg easily, but you have actually to notice the issue on time to alleviate the discomfort.

    Check your bird for the following signs:

    • overall discomfort and weird body language
    • depression
    • loss of appetite
    • insomnia

    There are some recommendations online on how to help it release the gg, but I always recommend visiting a vet, especially with such sensitive issues. Better safe than sorry.

    There are, of course, some steps that you can undertake to make your bird generally healthy for the process and keep it in a comfortable surrounding.

    Considering that lovebirds lay eggs rather often compared with other parrot types, it’s essential to keep track of your bird’s health and learn to take care of it.

    1. Keep a healthy diet. Laying eggs may swiftly deplete a lovebird of essential nutrients. Thus, your task is to keep a healthy and balanced diet for your pet. Make sure to limit the number of fatty products, and increase green and veggies. Among the nutrients, a female with eggs needs most of all calcium-rich products like dark green, citruses, and possibly eggs.
    2. Give them more extended rest periods between clutches by moving to a somewhat darker space. Considering that lovebirds mostly lay eggs during spring and summer, sunny periods, placing them into a darker corner to mimic winter is a viable strategy. But do not leave the bird altogether without the sun!
    3. Separate the birds after the female starts laying eggs, so she has a calmer environment and plenty of time to sit on the eggs. Even if they are not fertilized. And, overall, provide as much calm as possible.

    When Do Lovebirds Couples Have Eggs?

    How to spot signs of illness in lovebirds

    If you have a couple of lovebirds and would like to greet tiny chicks into the world, they’ll have to mate. As I’ve mentioned before, lovebirds reach sexual maturity at around six months. However, it may take up to a year, so I suggest waiting till this time.

    As it gets mature, you can notice the birds bonding and mating. Lovebirds are very, well, loving creatures. So they’ll get all lovey-dovey soon.

    As you notice the birds getting closer, provide the necessary conditions – a spacey cage with a place for the nest (and a nesting box itself), a peaceful environment, plenty of sunlight, and mentally stimulating toys.

    Also, an important tip – give your birds a separate food and water bowl each. Otherwise, they may get competitive over food.

    During this period, leave clean nest-building materials for the like papers, old feathers, wood chips, dried grass, etc.

    When the female lays eggs, you can actually check whether eggs are fertilized. The detailed instructs can be found in the corresponding conure article. I’ve mentioned it in the beginning. Find the link there.

    Overall, the nesting period is one of the cutest times for parrots. I like observing how lovebirds show their natural instinct and get ready for the chick.

    Please, take care of your birds at this critical time. Especially concerning the female’s health.

    How to use turtle wax

    Turtle Wax Polishing Compound is a specific product that a lot of consumers have trouble with. Turtle Wax Polishing Compound is for cleaning oxidized paint on painted metal, chrome and porcelain surfaces. It is easy to use but the directions must be followed closely. The compound is strictly for the repair of metal, chrome or porcelain surfaces.

    Using Turtle Wax Polishing Compound

    Step 1

    How to use turtle wax

    Dip the polishing rag into the compound. You only need a dime-size amount.

    Step 2

    Rub the polishing compound into the oxidized surface with a circular motion.

    Step 3

    Wash the area immediately with water and soap. Do not let the compound dry on your car.

    Apply a color restorer after using Turtle Wax Polishing Compound, which will dull the paint color, then wax the car to bring back the shine.

    Things You’ll Need

    • Turtle Wax Polishing Compound
    • Rags
    • Water
    • Soap
    • Polishing compound does not actually polish your car. It is an abrasive cleaner, only slightly less abrasive than rubbing compound. Never apply polishing compound to fiberglass or plastic surfaces, as it will scratch the surface.

    Native of Colorado and single mom, I’ve been designing websites for over 16 years. I am fluent in HTML, CSS and web standards. I work with WordPress, Drupal, and other content management systems. I have extensive social media experience and have been integrating analytics, web sites and social media for years. I have designed for non-profits, corporations and artists. Give me a text editor and code to write and I’m content.

    How to use Turtle Wax Hybrid Solutions products! And in what order! In this video, I explain how to use each product in the Turtle Wax Hybrid Solutions line of car detailing products. I will show each product, talk about how to use it, and in which order we use the products. The Turtle Wax Hybrid Solutions line is a professional-grade suite of products, but also one of the most approachable on the market from an ease-of-use and price perspective. Tremendous value for the person who enjoys detailing their car, and give it that high-gloss shine and durable protection!

    ►►SUBSCRIBE and LIKE today’s video & Turn On Notifications for New Videos –

    ►►Here are the links to the products used in this video:

    ►For people in USA:
    On the official Turtle Wax website:
    All the Turtle Wax Hybrid Solutions products:
    Ceramic Spray Coating:
    Ceramic Polish & Wax:
    Ceramic Wet Wax:
    Ceramic 3-in-1 Detailer:
    Ceramic Wash & Wax:
    Ceramic Acrylic Black Polish:
    Ceramic Acrylic Black Wax:

    On Amazon USA:
    All the Turtle Wax Hybrid Solutions products:
    Ceramic Wash & Wax:
    Ceramic Wet Wax:
    Ceramic Spray Coating:
    Ceramic Polish & Wax:
    Ceramic 3-in-1 Detailer:
    Ceramic Acrylic Black Polish:
    Ceramic Acrylic Black Wax:

    ►For people in Canada:
    All the Turtle Wax Hybrid Solutions products:
    Ceramic Wash & Wax:
    Ceramic Wet Wax:
    Ceramic Spray Coating:
    Ceramic Polish & Wax:
    Ceramic 3-in-1 Detailer:
    Ceramic Acrylic Black Spray Wax:
    Ceramic Acrylic Black Polish & Wax:
    ICE Seal N Shine:

    ►For people in the UK:
    All the Turtle Wax Hybrid Solutions products:
    Ceramic Wash & Wax:
    Ceramic Wet Wax:
    Ceramic Spray Coating:
    Ceramic Polish & Wax:
    Ceramic 3-in-1 Detailer:
    Ceramic Acrylic Black Polish:
    Ceramic Acrylic Black Spray Wax:
    ICE Seal N Shine:

    ►For people in France:
    All the Turtle Wax Hybrid Solutions products:
    Ceramic Wash & Wax:
    Ceramic Wet Wax:
    Ceramic Spray Coating:
    Ceramic Polish & Wax:
    Ceramic 3-in-1 Detailer:
    Ceramic Acrylic Black Polish:
    Ceramic Acrylic Black Spray Wax:
    ICE Seal N Shine:

    ►Full disclosure: This is a not sponsored video. The opinions expressed in my video are my own and the company had no influence on my content.

    Welcome to Pan TheOrganizer, one of the biggest car detailing channels on YouTube, here to help you with fun and entertaining tutorials, tips, tricks, products and equipment reviews!

    Click the like button if you enjoyed the video and share it with your friends and family. Don’t forget to SUBSCRIBE to my channel and activate the notifications (the bell icon) if you want to be notified every time I upload a new video. Welcome to the Pan TheOrganizer family!!

    ►►My merchandise store (T-Shirts, hoodies, sweatshirts, and more!):

    ►List of equipment I use to produce my Youtube videos:

    #turtlewax #hybridsolutions #detailing #carcleaning #cardetailing #cleaning #pantheorganizer #detailingtutorials #autodetailing

    I hope you love the products I recommend! Just so you know, I may collect a share of sales or other compensation from the links on this page. There is no cost to you. Thank you if you use my links, I really appreciate it!

    The latest Turtle Wax products are really powerful and offer very long-lasting protection. Once you learn to apply them properly that is. Hybrid Solutions Pro Graphene Infused Flex Wax is one of their best products they have to offer. These tips will help you achieve stunning results.

    What does Graphene Flex Wax do?

    • It adds long-lasting slickness and gloss to your paint.
    • It’s also much easier to apply than professional-grade graphene or ceramic coating although it’s not designed to last as long.
    • It comes in an easy to use spray bottle.

    Why does it have Graphene in it?

    Graphene helps the product to last much longer than normal spray waxes.

    What type of vehicle can I use it on?

    If your paint is in good condition already then you will love the effect this product has on your paint. It will deliver fantastic shine and water beading.

    But if you have an older vehicle that has lots of scratches and rock chips and faded paint then this won’t help you much (but you can still try it). Ideally, you should do paint correction first. ie clay/compound/polish. Then use this to protect it and boost the shine.

    Preparation tips

    You should wash and rinse your car before you apply this product. Use a safe washing method like the two-bucket method. There is no point applying it to a dirty car as the buffing will cause scratches and the product won’t bond properly.

    If your paint is faded and oxidized you should clay and polish your car first. It’s easier to do this than most people think. Read more here.

    What does it say on the bottle?

    Hybrid Solutions Pro Graphene Infused Flex Wax
    Tighter Web of Protection
    Apply on dry or wet paint, then buff, dry or rinse off for long-lasting gloss, slickness, UV protection, chemical resistance, water repellency & stain prevention

    Will it cover scratches?

    No, Hybrid Solutions Pro Graphene Infused Flex Wax won’t hide or cover scratches. Use a glaze like Chemical Guys Black Light or Autoglym Super Resin Polish to hide and buff out scratches.

    To fully remove scratches and improve dull paint you will need to polish your car. READ MORE HERE

    Will it hide or remove oxidization?

    No, Hybrid Solutions Pro Graphene Infused Flex Wax won’t remove oxidization.

    Polishing your car will remove oxidization. You can polish with a DA polishing machine or by hand. Oxidization can easily be removed by hand using compound such as Turtle Wax Hybrid Solutions Pro 1 and Done Compound Correct and Finish or Meguiars Ultimate Compound.

    Should I use a clay bar first?

    The instructions say you should clay and polish if needed. What does this mean and how do I know if its needed?

    Does your paint feel rough to the touch? The is usually made up tar and rubber and other road grime. This contamination can brake off when you are cleaning your car and cause scratches. It will also effect how well the the wax bonds to your paint and the level of shine you achieve.

    A clay bar is the solution. You gently rub the soft clay over your paint using a lubricant spray.

    Your paint will feel super smooth and look better.

    Application Methods

    There are three application methods mentioned on the back of the bottle. The first option is done on dry paint the other two methods are done when your car is still wet after you have washed it.

    The first time you use it you should use the dry application method as this gives you a strong base layer.

    The wet paint methods are a great way to quickly top up the shine and protection. But you will get the best results out of the dry application methods in my experience.

    Method 1: Dry Paint Application

    1. Wash and dry your car immediately before application.
    2. Shake the bottle well.
    3. Apply two sprays per panel on dry paint.
    4. Spread and wipe with a clean dry microfibre cloth.
    5. Use a damp microfibre cloth if its not spreading evenly for you.

    Method 2: On Wet Paint as a Drying Aid

    1. Wash and rinse your car, don’t dry yet.
    2. Shake the bottle well.
    3. Apply two sprays per panel on wet paint.
    4. Spread and wipe with a clean microfibre cloth.
    5. Buff dry with another cloth

    Method 3: Spray and Rinse

    1. Wash and rinse your car, dont dry yet.
    2. Shake the bottle well.
    3. Apply two sprays per panel on wet paint.
    4. Spread out and rinse off product with hose or pressure washer.
    5. Buff dry with Car Drying Towel

    Cure Time

    Can be buffed off immediately.
    Dont wash your car for 24 hours after application. During this 24 hour period the water resistance of the product will improve. It will feel much smoother and slickness/slipperryyness will improve.
    After another wash and application it will further improve.

    What surfaces can it be used on?

    • Paint
    • Wheels
    • Exterior Glass
    • Rubber Trim
    • Plastic Trim
    • NOT to be used on Fabric Convertible Tops
    • NOT to be used where a slick slippery surface is not wanted.

    Can it be used as a drying aid?

    Yes, it can be used as a drying aid on a washed car.

    Can it be used as a detailer spray?

    No, it’s not designed to be used as a detail spray.

    Can it be used as a waterless wash?

    No, it’s not designed to be used as a waterless wash.

    Does it harden on microfibre cloths?

    No, there is no need to throw away your clothes as you would with a ceramic or graphene coating. You can just wash them as normal.

    How do you fix streaking problems?

    Streaks can be visible mainly on dark colored vehicles. It can happen if it’s too cold/ too hot/ too humid for the carrier to properly evaporate.

    Don’t panic though, your paint is not permanently damaged. If you see streaking of the product the bottle says to use a damp microfibre cloth to fix/remove the problem. Other users have used detail spray such as Adams Detail Spray to fix the issue.

    Applying too much product can also cause streaking issues. Failing to shake the bottle first can cause streaking issues.

    Where do I get my information?

    1. By using the product
    2. By reading the instructions
    3. By reading the Turtle wax website
    4. By asking the manufacturer for clarification
    5. By reading discussion boards and asking questions.
    6. By reading reviews
    7. By witching youtube videos

    Where can I buy it?


    Turtle Wax Hybrid Solutions Graphene Spray Wax is an awesome product once you understand how to use it and when to use it.

    It offers long-lasting shine and protection that’s quick and easy to apply by anyone.

    Are you a proud car owner that has hopes and dreams of finding a product to showcase your vehicle’s outer beauty? A wax that preserves the beautiful sleek and shiny coat that it came off the lot with.
    Are you looking for a ceramic wax spray that is affordable, easy to use, and actually does the job it claims to do? If you answered yes to any of these questions, then we may have the product for you.

    Turtle Wax’s Hybrid Solutions Ceramic Spray Coating is one of the top-selling products in its category. This wax is composed of Synthetic wax polymers, Super-hydrophobic, SIO2 formula, and other ingredients to provide a rugged and tough product for every project.
    Interested in this hybrid solution? Check out our review below, where we take a deep dive into this product and what others are saying.

    What Does It Do?

    Have you ever spent valuable time and energy in your driveway sudsing up your vehicle only to have it covered in dirt, bird mess, and debris just hours later? That is exactly what this turtle wax hybrid has been designed to protect you from.

    It is all proven to provide water beading, UV ray, and chemical protection, keeping your vehicle safe from all the elements mother nature has to offer.

    If applied right after a good wash, this turtle wax will lock in the sleek, clean look of your car for a longer period of time.

    How to Use Turtle Wax Spray Coating

    This product is one of the easiest ways to get a detail finished without having to spend loads of money at the car wash. Following these quick and simple steps will get you a shine that is guaranteed to get attention

    Wash your vehicle, do not leave any type of dirt, smudge, or soap residue
    Washing your vehicle ensures the ceramic coating has a clean surface to bond with.

    Dry your car off completely
    Moisture on your vehicle can prevent the Turtle Wax from curing properly. Ensure your surface is dry.

    Shake the bottle well and spray the formula with an equal coating in a 2×2 area
    Shaking the bottle is important as this will ensure all of the contents inside the bottle are well mixed. Applying in a 2×2 area helps you complete the following steps before it drys.

    With a clean dry microfiber cloth, wipe the wax into the finish of your vehicle.
    There will be excess wax after application. Lightly wiping with a clean microfiber will easily remove it.

    Using the opposite side of the cloth, buff the same area until you see a glistening shine.
    Almost there! Buff that bad boy and admire the shine.

    Repeat the above steps, using the same 2×2 process until you have waxed the entire vehicle.

    Allow this coating to cure for 24-hours and then apply a second coat for an even sleeker shine.

    How to use turtle wax

    How Long Does it Last?

    The reports vary depending on who you ask and what they used the product for; however, we feel it is safe to suggest it lasts between 6-12 months. This will vary depending on the weather, road conditions you typically drive on, and application.

    Does it Have a UV Protectant?

    Ceramic wax is designed to protect your vehicle’s paint from the sun’s UV rays. While most car waxes offer some sort of protection against these harmful lights, this product protects your vehicle’s paint for much longer and provides a thicker barrier.

    For a complete list of ingredients, please see the Turtle Wax website and take a look at the product ingredient disclosure.


    In this review, I give my thoughts on Wax & Dry Spray Wax, a “spray on while you dry” wax from Turtle Wax of USA.

    Turtle Wax Wax & Dry Spray Wax is an inexpensive spray on wax which comes with the added benefit of, as the name would suggest, being able to be applied while the surface of your vehicle is wet and buffed off as part of the drying process. Cool, huh? When W&D went on sale a while ago I decided to pick up a bottle and see whether Turtle Wax’s spray wax product really is too good to be true.

    I tried out W&D on the relatively neglected paintwork of my 1996 Ford Taurus. The gloss white paintwork hasn’t seen a proper waxing in years, so it was always going to be a good test of W&D’s properties. A layer of W&D went on like a breeze and came off easily too. The only thing hampering the process of removing Wax & Dry from my car’s paintwork was the amount of surface water which had collected and was refusing to evaporate because of the cool weather at the time (even in spite of Wax & Dry’s usefulness as a drying aid – see below for more on that point) and because of the ovoid-shaped bodywork which traps water in various nooks and crannies and is generally a detailer’s worst nigthmare.

    Notwithstanding the issues with clearing the collected surface water, I was very happy with how quickly I was able to handle the waxing process. I have a real love-hate relationship with waxing (my car that is!), the love component being the results and the hate component being the process, so I was thoroughly impressed with the speed at which I could get a layer of Carnauba enriched goodness onto the Taurus’ paintwork. So what tradeoffs was I going to have to make if I wanted to embrace a rapid waxing lifestyle?

    For those of you who haven’t read my review of another Turtle Wax spray on wax product, Jet Black Black Spray Wax, you may or may not already be aware that the main disadvantage of using a spray wax is its lack of durability. Although I haven’t yet been able to observe whether that is true of Wax & Dry, from the reviews I have read it would seem that W&D lasts for about the same amount of time as other spray waxes; approximately 4 weeks. Given how fast Wax & Dry goes on and the speed at which it comes off, I’m not holding out much hope that it will last longer than a couple of weeks. But we shall see… Consequently, and notwithstanding that I took it upon myself to spray a layer of W&D onto the otherwise unwaxed surface of my old Ford, I doubt W&D will ever take the place of a traditional paste or liquid wax and should probably only be used to supplement your quarterly traditional wax (subject to what I have to say below about mixing your waxes).

    While it isn’t advertised as such, W&D is also very useful as a drying aid. I misted the roof of my Toyota with the solution, intending to wax the surface. However, to my delight, the solution also caused a good amount of water run off and made drying with my cheap SCA brand waffle weaves a breeze. At full price ($24.99 at Supercheap Auto) W&D isn’t likely to prove that economical as a drying aid. TW isn’t exactly what you’d call a high-end brand and it’s still slightly more expensive than Chemical Guys’ After Wash drying aid, which retails at Detail Depot for $24.95 (the tradeoff of course is that you get the added benefit of a layer of spray wax if you go with the Turtle Wax option). However, if you manage to pick a bottle up on special like I did (I got mine for just a touch over $12) then you might be onto a winner.

    Having been satisfied with the results achieved on the Taurus, I also applied TW Wax & Dry to the paintwork of my Toyota Vitz as part of its bi-weekly maintenance wash. Although it worked excellently as a drying aid, the finished results looked a little dull. I suspect this may be due to Wax & Dry reacting with the existing layer of wax on the mica paintwork of the Vitz (a good coat of Meguiar’s Deep Crystal Wet Look Cleaner Wax). It’s a useful reminder that, although you can’t overwax your car, it pays to be a little bit careful when mixing your waxes (much like mixing your drinks – a fatal mistake), particularly waxes produced by different brands.

    Overall, I would recommend Turtle Wax Wax & Dry Spray Wax if you’re looking to bolster an existing layer of traditional paste or liquid wax in between laying down a layer of the proper stuff (which should be done on a quarterly basis) and want to get the job done quickly. At full price it’s a bit expensive for what it is (Mothers California Gold Spray Wax, which can also go on while the car is wet, isn’t a great deal more expensive), so wait until TW W&D goes on sale first.

    • Turtle Wax Wax & Dry Spray Wax
    • Sizes available: 26 fl. oz (769 mL)
    • Value for money: A bit overpriced – wait for it to go on sale
    • Hydrophobic quality: Good
    • Durability: Good…for a spray wax (based on what I’ve read, rather than on observation)
    • Packaging / aesthetics: Cheerful Turtle Wax green bottle, easy-to-use trigger sprayer

    How often do I to apply this product? Answer: This product is durable enough to last up to 6 months!! If you notice that water is no longer beading on your car, reapply.

    Subsequently, How long does Turtle Wax ceramic spray last?

    KEEPS YOUR VEHICLE CLEANER LONGER: Super hydrophobic and SiO2 polymers deliver insane water repelling, water sheeting, and chemical resistant protection that can last up to 12 months!

    Keeping this in consideration, Is Turtle Wax ICE a ceramic coating?

    Turtle Ice Wax: Hybrid Ceramic Spray Coating

    within the cosmetic car care industry.

    Beside above How long does it take for seal and shine to cure? a 24 hour cure time with Ceramic Spray Coating. That being said, while SNS gives you some INSANE durability as a paint sealant, when you properly apply 2 coats of Ceramic Spray Coating onto a prepped car, you can get almost a YEAR of protection – which is longer than what you can expect from SNS.

    How long does seal and shine take to cure?

    So let it cure for 24 hours and check out the weather forecast and if you want to have a longer longevity from it as in 4-5 months you need to be preping the paint thoroughly. I have given it another shot in better weather conditions and was way more easy to apply and wipe it off.

    18 Related Questions and Answers

    Is Turtle Wax any good?

    Super-Hard Shell Wax by Turtle Wax is the market-leading car wax. It does go on as smooth as a dream, and it does do a perfectly good (if unremarkable) job of deepening the lustre and shine of paintwork. … It’s a real hassle to actually take the wax off once it’s been applied unless you’re using a mechanical buffer.

    Can you layer Turtle Wax ceramic spray coating?

    Absolutely. It’s an except topper that works well with other brands of polish, wax or ceramic coatings. Very easy to use and provides an excellent gloss. You can layer it too.

    How long does Turtle Wax last?

    Get Legendary Super Hard Shell protection and shine with Turtle Wax Super Hard Shell Car Wax. The easy on, easy off formula fights harmful UV rays and lasts up to 12 months.

    How long does ceramic spray coating last?

    Spray ceramic coatings don’t last nearly as long, but they’re easy to apply and can last up to 6 months before needing to install another coat. This cost effectiveness and moderate durability make them a good option for DIY’ers and weekend warriors on a budget.

    Can I use sealant on ceramic coating?

    Yes you CAN. SHOULD you apply wax on that 9H hard, super hydrophobic surface, not for all the tea in China. … In the info below, we’ll outline a few of the reasons why putting car wax or a paint sealant on top of a DIY or professional grade ceramic coating is simply put – a bad idea.

    Does Turtle Wax ceramic spray have UV protection?

    This product does have UV protection.

    Can you layer ceramic coating?

    Yes, You Can Put Too Much Ceramic Coating on Your Car

    Most professionals recommend that you put multiple layers of the protective coating on your car.

    How long does Ceramic Spray Coating last?

    Spray ceramic coatings don’t last nearly as long, but they’re easy to apply and can last up to 6 months before needing to install another coat. This cost effectiveness and moderate durability make them a good option for DIY’ers and weekend warriors on a budget.

    Can I use old Turtle Wax?

    As long as you can seal the can properly, storing the wax in this fashion should help you to keep the wax in good shape. Just make sure that everything is sealed up tightly and then tuck it away someplace safe. If you don’t want to refrigerate it, then you don’t have to.

    Does Turtle Wax ruin paint?

    Waxing does not damage the paint of the car unless you do it wrong. … There are many types of wax, and for new cars the one you want is a non-abrasive one that does not ‘eat’ away the surface layer of your paint.

    How often should you wax your car with Turtle Wax?

    We recommend that the vehicle is waxed at least every 90 days to protect the vehicle’s Clear Coat finish and to maintain the shine.

    Why ceramic coating is bad?

    Ceramic coatings can’t damage your paint, regardless of what you do. However, improper application can leave streaks, high spots, hazing, and horrible reflections. … The only way you can remove a ceramic coating after it has cured is to bust out the sandpaper and sand, then polish, then finish the whole car.

    What is the longest lasting ceramic coating?

    Car coating typically lasts one to two years. Nano Bond PRO ceramic coating adds another year of coverage, giving your car up to three years of protection. It provides superior strength and durability to protect your car from scratches, chips, dust, acid rain, paint transfer, rust, fading – the list goes on.

    Can you go through a car wash with ceramic coating?

    The golden rule you should always stick to after a ceramic coating is Do not wash your car within 7 days of application! … You need to give the Coating time to fully cure on your vehicle. If you wash or otherwise agitate the surface of the paintwork, it can drastically inhibit the curing process of the product.

    Is ceramic coating better than sealant?

    Depending on the environment where the car is parked, paint sealant may last for four to six months. Ceramic coating has better durability when compared to paint sealant. It can last 3-4 years depending on how you maintain the vehicle.

    Does clay bar remove ceramic coating?

    Since clay is so sticky, it can even absorb particles that are bonded with the car’s clear coat. … Many professional automotive detailers prefer to use surface clay bars over polishes, since clay bars do not remove any clear coating from your car’s surface – as long as it is used with clay lubricant.

    Should I still wax my car after ceramic coating?

    The main purpose of a ceramic coating is to protect the clear coat on your car. Most do that pretty well. The purpose of a wax is the same, protecting the clear / paint coat of your car. So, in general, using wax on top of a ceramic coating is simply useless, and therefore a waste of money and time.

    • Facebook
    • Twitter
    • WhatsApp
    • SMS
    • Email
    • Facebook
    • Twitter
    • WhatsApp
    • SMS
    • Email
    • Print
    • Save
    • Facebook
    • Twitter
    • WhatsApp
    • SMS
    • Email
    • Print
    • Save

    Keep your shower walls clean

    Life hack: Use a car wax, like Turtle Wax, to keep shower walls clean from soap scum.

    How it works: I’m particular about my showers. Soap scum is, to me, unacceptable. So when I read on a bottle of Turtle Wax that it’s good for shower walls, I had to try it. It said it was as simple as wiping it on with a cloth.

    How it actually worked: I cleaned the shower really well first and then wiped it dry with microfiber cloths. I dabbed some liquid wax onto a dry cloth and applied it to the shower walls (not the floor — I was afraid it would be too slippery.) I let the wax dry for a few minutes and then buffed it with another cloth. It did take a little while and by the end, my arm was a little sore.

    Life changing: Yes! I rate this a “10 out of 10.” I waxed the shower walls in mid-September. Usually, the walls are soap-scummy and gross within a couple weeks. So far, the shower looks as good as the day I waxed it.

    Using Turtle Wax on your guitar

    Dec 04, 2013 #1 2013-12-04T21:12

    Not sure how I feel about using automotive wax on the guitar or boiled linseed oil on the fret board? . -R-Strings

    Wondering what some of you on here might think about this?

    Dec 04, 2013 #2 2013-12-04T22:06

    “If you want peace, you won’t get it with violence.”

    Dec 04, 2013 #3 2013-12-04T22:16

    If you want to use a wax ( not really needed ) use a pure wax read the lable for listed silicone ( any ingredient that ends in cone ) is a no no

    Besides why would you want to wax?
    Wiping the guitar down with good clean water and a soft rag is fine.

    Dec 05, 2013 #4 2013-12-05T00:29

    I avoid most waxes, and especially any wax with silicone. Turtle Wax has premium grade compounds that are silicone free which i have used to remove light scratches.
    I regularly use Zymol Wax/Cleaner usually mixed with a bit of Martin’s Spray Polish.

    I avoid linseed oil, which is a drying oil that seals the wood. great for gunstocks, but not what I want on my natural fretboards.

    Dec 05, 2013 #5 2013-12-05T01:07

    The Turtle Wax Express Shine recommended by Taylor contains silicone and should not be used anywhere near a guitar.

    I would not put linseed oil on a fretboard either, for a variety of reasons.

    Dec 05, 2013 #6 2013-12-05T01:09

    Dec 05, 2013 #7 2013-12-05T01:54

    Dec 05, 2013 #8 2013-12-05T06:50

    HD-28V (2010)
    D-18 (2012)
    Brook ‘Lamorna’ OM (2019) – European Spruce/EIR
    Lowden F-23 (2017) – Red Cedar/Claro Walnut

    Dec 05, 2013 #9 2013-12-05T11:46

    Dec 05, 2013 #10 2013-12-05T13:26

    Dec 05, 2013 #11 2013-12-05T13:47

    Meguiar’s is a polishing compound that is used for buffing and polishing the finish. It’s not a wax.

    Dec 05, 2013 #12 2013-12-05T14:33

    MudslideTim wrote: Not sure how I feel about using automotive wax on the guitar or boiled linseed oil on the fret board? . -R-Strings

    Wondering what some of you on here might think about this?

    I used Fret Doctor (a “bore oil”) to cosmetically darken my rosewood bridges and boards. On their site HERE they state the following side effects and caveats about Linseed Oil, the veracity of which I can not testify to since I’ve never used it on guitars, or furniture:

    Linseed oil is more like a varnish than an oil. Because it forms a continuous film, it seals the surface of the wood like a varnish, but oils of plant origin may later slowly penetrate down to the wood. It can take years. It comes in many forms. The stuff from a hardware or art store is a paint variety, boiled or raw. Both of them stink. If you insist on Linseed oil, get the food grade from a health food store. This grade doesn’t smell so bad. After multiple applications, nothing can penetrate it. Bear in mind that, if a board is treated with Linseed oil, it will eventually turn black. Linseed oil oxidizes over time, turning black in the process. That is why so many Rosewood boards of the 50s and 60s no longer look like Rosewood. If you use Linseed oil, take any rags or brushes that are used and dispose of them outdoors. When left in a pile this stuff can spontaneously burst into flame. You then lose both your ax and your home. Squeeze the bottle and screw the cap on tight, minimizing any air space in the container.

    How to use and apply Turtlewax scratch and swirl remover?

    I noticed that are people and some other detailing product carrier stated that they can’t really work on scratch and swirl remover, and then they did with those rubbing compound or scratch remover. At the end it those product they used are actually more abrasive than the scratch and swirl remover.
    What I need to enhance here is that the scratch and swirl remover by turtlewax is actually used for light scratches. let me put some information here.
    No worry that I will follow up with the works i had done so everyone can know how far this item can go.

    this is the bigger bottle.

    let’s see what been stated in turtlewax US website:

    • Safe for all finishes
    • Removes minor scratches quickly and easily
    • Removes swirl marks quickly and easily
    • Leave a high gloss, showroom shine
    • Easy to use

    How to use?
    Wash and dry car. Ensure vehicle surface is cool to the touch. Do not use in direct sunlight. Shake product well. Pour Turtle Wax® Scratch and Swirl Remover onto a damp cloth or foam applicator and apply to problem area. Rub problem area with firm pressure until blemish disappears. Buff lightly with a microfiber or clean cotton cloth. Reapply if necessary.

    What about the Amazon customer review?

    How about the other review?
    let’s see what it tells?
    from the review:

    Turtle Wax – Scratch & Swirl Remover

    With all the products listed above its now time to answer our initial question on, “Do car scratch removers really work?”

    What it boils down to is they all can remove very light scratches and imperfections, such as swirl marks, hazing, or oxidation. You must be careful not to make the condition worse. Which brand to use will depend on a few things: your preference, and the size of the surface area which needs treatment. Most of the scratch removing products on the market today can only remove small scratches. As for deep scratches, Quixx Repair System – High Performance Scratch Remover is the only one that can remove deep scratches. But I would like again to stress that it will still depend on the depth of the scratch. If it is too deep to run your nails into it, a professional detailing services will always be the wiser choice.

    is this real enough? I curious this what so called the expert said. See my works then.
    Real action tell more than what words can say.

    Very difficult to see ah.

    start to do the work. for me I make afew pass. left to right then right to left again. repeated same action on the area.

    here you go! removed!

    ok in order for me to take more picture, i repeat the step again and watch here.

    spread the content

    buff and remove with towel. here its removed la!
    the scratches!

    here is the helper !

    Proved! light scratches removed!light and minor. So that’s why I curious about some review with unable to remove light scratches. probably some user might dealing with heavy scratch?
    if to remove scratches that is not scratch & swirl remover can do will probably need a more abrasive, then go for rubbing compound, see some captured from youtube from other consumer HERE.
    if go for minor scratch that i shown above, this scratch and swirl remover is more than enough to do the job.
    But don;t forget!

    you need a tool for help to accomplish the task.
    let’s say with a polisher, read Here.
    but if you need to know how i convert my driller to polisher , read HERE.
    And if to make this task to be completed even easier! Get the powerful pad i used! Read HERE!

    So, who say the scratch remover won’t work? Read my post then. I hope you enjoy!

      21st May 2019 Turtle Wax4 CommentsUncategorised

    Cleaning a car with a Turtle Wax Pressure Washer is a great way to keep a car clean.

    Turtle Wax have a range of pressure washers that use the right pressure and cleaning compounds to get the dirt off.

    Some people love taking care of the appearance of their cars and are willing to spend time washing and waxing the exterior, as well as detailing the inside. On the other hand, washing a car might seem like a tedious task in an already too-busy schedule, so our range of pressure washers have been designed to help you get the task done as efficiently as possible.

    So whether you’re a car enthusiast who washes your car weekly or someone who just wants the job done quickly, using a pressure washer is an effective method for cleaning the exterior of your car. We’ve outlined everything you need to know for how to use a Turtle Wax pressure washer — and it’s easier than you might think.

    Follow our top tips on the best ways to clean your car :-

    1. Choose the appropriate Pressure Washer for your requirements and budget. If you are unsure about which pressure washer is right for you, read our article on the range of Turtle Wax Pressure Washers.
    2. Select your detergent – all Turtle Wax Pressure Washers come with a detergent bottle, but for the best results we also have a snow foam application accessory bottle and hybrid snow foam shampoo.
    3. It’s important to park your car in an open space, away from other cars or objects you don’t want to get wet or damaged by water. A large driveway or street is recommended. When using your electric pressure washer, be sure you have access to an outlet so that you can power your washer easily.
    4. Before applying your Turtle Wax Car Shampoo to your car, be sure to rinse the car and spray off any mud or other debris stuck to the surface. It’s a good idea to begin at 4-5 feet away from your car and move closer after testing out the pressure washer. Make sure all of your windows are rolled up and the car doors and boot are closed so you don’t get water in the interior of the car.
    5. Once the car has been rinsed add your diluted car shampoo of choice to the detergent bottle on your Pressure Washer. Starting from the roof of your car and working your way down, allowing the detergent to remain on the car for approximately 5 minutes. For additional cleaning of the paintwork and wheels you can swap your lance for the Fixed Brush Attachment or the Rotary Brush Attachment which will assist you in removal of the dirt.
    6. When you have removed the dirt rinse the car, again starting from the top and working your way down until all of the detergent has gone from the car.
    • How to use turtle waxFIXED BRUSH ATTACHMENT
    • How to use turtle waxROTARY BRUSH ATTACHMENT

    Other good to knows :

    1. Drying your car after washing increases the shine and removes the chances of water marks.
    2. Turtle Wax do a whole range of additional Turtle Wax Vehicle Cleaners including polish, wax, tyre and plastic black as well as products to detail the inside of your car and leave it feeling and smelling clean.

    Turtle Wax Quick & Easy Dash & Glass will provide superior cleaning with U.V. protection to prevent automotive glass fading. To clean the windshield and passenger windows spray Dash & Glass directly on the glass and wipe dry with a microfiber towel.

    Is it OK to put car wax on windshield?

    Unlike a ceramic coating, waxing doesn’t last very long and has to be regularly maintained, but you can use the same wax on your windshield and mirrors that you use on the rest of your car.

    Can you use Turtle Wax Ice on glass?

    Turtle Wax Ice contains a UV blocker and produces superior water beading. This spray-on wax goes on easily, leaves a nice smooth finish and shine, and lasts about four to six weeks. It can be applied to paint, exterior plastic, rubber trim, and glass to repel water.

    How do I get Turtle Wax off my windshield?

    Use a cloth dipped in an acidic liquid (such as cola or vinegar) to wipe down a waxy windshield. The acidity will strip the wax from the glass, leaving the windows cloud-free. To clean the windshield wipers, apply rubbing alcohol to cotton balls, and then gently wipe them down.

    What dissolves wax on glass?

    Dissolve the wax.

    Use a solvent like window cleaner, rubbing alcohol, drain cleaner, bleach or vinegar to dissolve the wax and separate it from the glass surface, making it easy to remove. Spray or pour the solvent on the waxy area until it begins to dissolve.

    What is the best windshield water repellent?

    Best Windshield Water Repellent – Top picks:

    Aquapel 88625 1 Single Use Applicator
    Drexler Ceramic 2.8 oz / 20 ml
    Griot’s Garage 8 oz / 236 ml
    Rain-X Original 3.5 oz / 103 ml

    Can you use Turtle Wax Bug and tar remover on glass?

    Using Turtle Wax MAX Power Wash, wash away all the debris you’ve lifted off the paintwork and gently scrub the surface with a microfiber towel. Finish the treatment with Turtle Wax Wax & Dry Spray Wax which is perfect for glass surface protection.

    Should I remove old wax before waxing car?

    Wax Removal Tips

    Periodically, it is important to remove old car wax before reapplying a new coat. The previous wax could streak or the paint job may begin to look dull, both of which are signs that it is time to reapply.

    Can I use polishing compound on my windshield?

    It is a good option to repair scratches that are relatively deep but not deep enough for the windshield to fall apart. Step 1: Apply the rubbing compound from the kit to the scratch. The rubbing compound contains cerium oxide which chemically reacts with the glass to seal the scratch and stop it from deepening.

    Can toothpaste remove scratches from windshield?

    To fix windshield scratches using toothpaste, apply some purely white non-gel toothpaste on a lint-free damp cloth, preferably microfiber. In circular motion, rub the paste on the damaged area for a minute or two.

    Does windshield polishing work?

    First, it works best with buffing tools like a power drill to effectively remove windshield scratches. Relatively, hand polishing will do for minor scratches. … Used for the final polishing blemishes, scuffs, light scratches, limescale and adhesive residue.

    From the author

    Hello! The blog contains only useful information about the device, repair, improvement and maintenance of the car, and also contains materials related to the operation of the vehicle. The main goal of the blog is to tell in an accessible language how the car works and share personal experience of servicing the car.

    Waxing a Fiberglass Shower Makes it Easier to Clean

    Believe it or not, it is a very good idea to wax a fiberglass tub or shower (even a sink) at least once or twice a year. It should be part of the regular maintenance of the shower . It’s the same principle as waxing a car – it protects the finish and mainly keeps dirt from sticking to it. We all want to spend less time cleaning, right?

    How to use turtle wax

    I actually have flashbacks to the days when I was a teen and my dad liked to quote Mr. Miyagi when I was waxing my car – wax on, wax off.

    The Dos and Don’ts of Polishing a Fiberglass Shower or Tub

    I know I don’t necessarily have to mention this but I will anyway… DO NOT wax the floor of the tub or shower, for obvious reasons! You wouldn’t use Armor-All on the steering wheel of your car, right? Wax on the floor of a tub or shower is dangerous!! It becomes a slip hazard leading to serious injury or death. So just don’t…

    In my opinion, the best car wax for shower walls is Meguiar’s Quik Wax . Meguiar’s is easy to use, and polishes nicely! It can also be found in a spray bottle and this particular type will not have to be buffed off… Just spray and go (but rinse the floor of the shower first)!

    How to use turtle wax

    Any other liquid wax can also be used such as Turtle Wax or any automotive wax. Of course, the best wax for a fiberglass shower is going to depend on personal preference.

    The How-To

    Start by giving the tub or shower a thorough cleaning. I normally use a handled sponge filled with Dawn dishwashing liquid and vinegar. It does a fabulous job! Scrub the entire surface to remove the soap scum or mildew, then thoroughly dry the surface using a cotton towel or chamois.

    How to use turtle wax

    Once the surfaces have been cleaned and dried, apply the wax by hand with a soft cloth, buffing when dry, according to the application directions (unless you’re using the spray wax). A small tool like this Dremel Versa cleaning kit (

    How to use turtle wax

    How to use turtle wax

    As an extra “bonus”, I like to apply the wax to the shower door which is where most of the soap scum accumulates. The wax makes it easier to remove the grime!

    Waxing this shower stall was definitely needed because it had been stored outside before being installed and the finish oxidized. Applying a coat of wax made the finish look like new!

    How to use turtle wax

    Applying wax to a fiberglass tub or shower is a great way to keep it looking like new, as well as cutting down the time spent scrubbing. That leaves more time for building DIY projects!

    Maintaining your car’s paintwork is difficult, so we tested out Turtle Wax Super Hard Shell Finish as having the right product makes all the difference!

    The basic principle of looking after a car’s finish is to wash, polish and then wax it. We tested the product on a Range Rover Evoque. The paintwork is well maintained already, but a fresh coat of wax won’t hurt.

    How to use turtle wax

    Before applying – Wash and Dry

    Before applying the wax, you must wash and dry your vehicle. Wax is often best applied when your car is not in the sun and the body feels cool. I would also recommend polishing it beforehand as applying the wax will seal the paintwork.

    How to use turtle wax

    Apply Turtle Wax Hard Shell Finish Using The Applicator Pad

    This car wax is very easy to apply as it comes with an applicator pad. Dip the pad loosely into the wax and then rub it into the paintwork in a circular motion, working one panel at a time.

    How to use turtle wax

    Buff Off

    Either once you have completed one panel or after you have waxed the entire car, you can now buff off the excess wax using a clean microfibre cloth. You will need to rub the cloth all over the car, making sure that you don’t miss any excess wax.

    How to use turtle wax

    Inspect Your New Hard Shell Finish

    Once you have buffed off all the excess wax, you will notice how glossy your vehicle looks. Each panel sparkles and the car looks brand new again.

    How to use turtle wax How to use turtle wax How to use turtle wax

    Turtle Wax Super Hard Shell Finish Review

    Applying the wax is really easy and even on a large car like this it doesn’t take too much time.

    The results are really good. Take a look at the car below: You can see your reflection in the panels now and it almost looks like glass in places. For the cost of this product and the time it takes to apply it, I have been very impressed. And I am sure the wax will last for a good while yet. Find out more here.

    Regularly washing your vehicle is the best way to keep it looking its finest. While many people prefer to use an automatic car wash or have someone else wash it for them, washing your own car by hand can be very satisfying. Follow this very simple step-by-step guide on how to wash your car with our Snow Foam and Wax It Wet .


    Before we begin, what exactly is snow foam? Is it a shampoo? The appearance of a wintry blanket on your car is what gave it its name, but unlike with real snow, your car is left much more pristine. Snow foam is best described as a pre-wash, enhancing the results and long-lasting brightness of your finish after a car wash.

    The thickness of snow foam’s formula is what adds to its advantage over a simple water rinse, as it clings to every surface, including all vertical and undersides of your vehicle.

    Without a pre-wash, any pollen left on the surface of your car can be harmful if rubbed in with a wash mitt. Snow foam’s detergents are formulated to lift away any dirt, grime, and pollen from the surface of your car, and as they’re run off, hydrophobic polymers are left behind to shield against streaks. Our Snow Foam is also pH-balanced, ensuring already placed protective barriers on your car are left as they are, including wax, paint, clear coat, chrome aluminum, plastic, or rubber parts.

    Avoiding any physical touch is key to applying snow foam. If you have access to a pressure washer, attach a snow foam cannon or foam gun to keep any scuffs or swirls from showing up on your car’s surface, that tend to be left behind by a regular wash mitt. However, if you’re unable to use a pressure washer, a microfibre wash mitt and gentle touch is a safe bet.

    How to use turtle wax


    Grab our Snow Foam and Wax It Wet, park your vehicle in the shade, and gather the rest of your supplies while you wait for the surface to cool. You’ll want to use a pressure washer with an attached snow foam cannon, two wash buckets, a microfibre wash mitt, and a couple extra clean cotton or microfibre cloths. When your car feels cool to the touch, you’re ready to begin.

    • Step 1: In the snow foam gun supply bottle, mix 90 ml to 180 ml of our Snow Foam, and shake the bottle to mix thoroughly.
    • Step 2: Ensure the surface of your vehicle is dry. Attach the foam gun to the pressure washer, keeping the tip about one yard away from the surface. Begin at the roof, and work top to bottom. Blanket the vehicle completely with the snow foam, coating all glass, doors, body, the bonnet, and grille. Some of the dirtier spots may need a second layer, like the tyres, bumpers, and rocker panels.

    How to use turtle wax


    • Step 3: Let the snow foam drip off your car, but never let it dry. If you need to, you can apply additional snow foam to dry spots.
    • Step 4: Wait about 5 to 10 minutes, then start at the top and rinse your car with lots of water.
    • Step 5: If your vehicle has only a little bit of dirt or pollen, you can skip to the last step. For cars that are extra dirty, try a shampoo like Zip Wax Car Wash & Wax.
    • Step 6: Take your wash bucket, and mix in 10 ml to 25 ml of Snow Foam per litre of water, adding a strong stream of water to help mix the product. Take the second bucket, and fill it with plenty of clean water.

    How to use turtle wax


    • Step 7: With your microfibre wash mitt, dip it into the wash bucket and start at the roof and work from top to bottom. Rinse frequently with your rinse bucket before lathering up with more shampoo from the wash bucket.
    • Step 8: Again, working from top to bottom, use clean water to rinse your car completely after it has been washed.
    • Step 9: Generously spray our Wax It Wet formula to one panel at a time, while working each section along with a cotton or microfibre cloth to dry and buff.

    Snow Foam works wonderfully to lift up and away any minor grime, such as pollen and dust. Our formula functions well as a pre-wash as well as a mild shampoo, while other snow foams still need a thorough shampoo after rinsing it away. However, heavy dirt and filth will require a car shampoo to cut through the grime.

    How to use turtle wax


    The consistency of the snow foam may need to be checked and readjusted to get it just right, finding the right thickness to get it to stick to your car’s surface, while not so much that it doesn’t run off any of the dirt and grime. Without finding that right balance with the foam gun, amount of water, and product concentration, it won’t clean very well.

    It’s suggested that you start with a product mixture ratio of 1:16, or 1 part snow foam to 16 parts water. If your car has a heavier amount of dirt, you can try a 2:16 or 3:16 ratio. First time foam gun users may find it a bit of a challenge to find the right balance, and most snow foam issues stem from the foam cannon or water supply.

    Just bought my first real nice car a 96 Talon. So I’ve decided to keep it looking shiny as long as I can. For my first time ever I washed the car with Dawn, dried it down, and gave it a good waxing with Turtle Wax.

    My questions are how often should I wax my car, and if I wax it once a week, will it harm my car, and will it build up a big enough barrier to keep most accidental scrapes out(Tree branches, friends screwings around, hitting with packages)?

    i wax around every 2 months; except in winter months.
    but everythime i wax i always put 2 coats. it seems to provide enough protection.

    anyways, you don’t need to wax the car every week, but you should wash it once a week. also, when your washing(but not waxing that particular day) don’t use any dish washing liquids, use special liquids designed specifically for cars.
    dish washing liquids should only be used if you plan on waxing.

    Use carwash soap, not dish soap for starters. Wax will not prevent scratches. Insteading waxing every week, do it right the first time with waxing every 1-2 months. I stay away from wax since it only lasts a short time, paint sealant is 10X better. Wax/sealer protects the shine, polish & glaze create the shine. If you really want your car to look good for a DIY invest into car wash shampoo, clay bar, polish, glaze, & wax(used in that order) There are many sites with detailing routines you can find by SEARCHING

    Just bought my first real nice car a 96 Talon. So I’ve decided to keep it looking shiny as long as I can. For my first time ever I washed the car with Dawn, dried it down, and gave it a good waxing with Turtle Wax.

    My questions are how often should I wax my car, and if I wax it once a week, will it harm my car, and will it build up a big enough barrier to keep most accidental scrapes out(Tree branches, friends screwings around, hitting with packages)?

    what? I realize that youre new, but dont post useless garbage.

    I like a good carnauba wax because they provide the deepest, richest shine by far. And while it’s true they don’t last as long as the polymer waxes and sealers, good ones can last up to 3 or 4 months (depending on your conditions). And a 3-4 month waxing routine isn’t too hard to maintain. Plus you’re rewarded with that gorgeous shine! And Carnauba don’t build up like the synthetics do which, over time, can change the look of your paint.

    But while both waxes and sealant “protect” your paint from such things as road grime, none of them will protect it from scratches due to tree branches and careless friends.

    Another thing to keep in mind is when washing, waxing or sealing ALWAYS make sure to use CLEAN soft towels. Dirt in your towels (no matter how fine) is the number 1 cause of swirl marks and micro marring. And you should only wash, wax or seal when you need to. less rubbing on your paint, less chance of those dang swirl marks.

    Modern cars use complicated headlights. While generally performing better than the headlights on older cars, over time the clear plastic that modern headlights are made of can dull and turn yellow. Not only does this look terrible, but it can potentially reduce the effectiveness of the headlights when they are in use, which can become a safety problem. Buying new headlights can be an expensive proposition. Turtle Wax, however, makes a product that can rejuvenate a car’s headlights.

    Step 1

    Wash the headlights with glass cleaner and a clean, dry cotton towel to remove dirt and oils from the surface.

    Step 2

    Tape off any nearby painted bodywork with masking tape if the headlight lens is directly adjoining the car’s bodywork. This will prevent the bodywork from becoming damaged during the headlight restoration process.

    Step 3

    Place a small amount of the Lens Clarifying Compound that comes with the kit onto a clean, dry cotton towel. Apply the compound to the headlight with firm pressure. Cover the entire surface of the headlight. Buff the compound with a different, clean cotton cloth. Repeat for the other headlight.

    Step 4

    Use the Spray Lube included in the kit if Lens Clarifying Compound does not work. Apply the Spray Lube to the green pad (Level 1) included in the kit. Firmly rub in a back and forth motion to the areas of the headlight that are still yellow and oxidized. Rewet the pad with the lube as needed.

    Step 5

    Apply the Spray Lube to the brown (Level 2) pad in the kit. Rub with the same technique as the green pad, but rub in the opposite direction of the first pad. Rub the pad onto the oxidized area of the headlight for about a minute or until the oxidation is removed. Keep the pad wet at all times.

    Step 6

    Apply the Spray Lube to the purple pad and rub for about a minute. Apply the Spray Lube to the blue pad and rub for another minute. Be sure the pads are re-wetted regularly during this process.

    Step 7

    Thoroughly dry the headlight lens with a clean, dry cotton towel. Apply the Lens Clarifying compound with a clean cotton towel. Allow it to dry to a haze, and then buff it off with a clean cotton cloth.

    Step 8

    Apply a small amount of vehicle paint wax to a clean towel. Buff the wax onto the headlight and then polish it with a clean cotton towel to protect the headlight.

    Apply a high-quality vehicle wax, such as Turtle Wax Super Hard Shell paste or liquid wax, to seal and protect the lens.

    Things You’ll Need

    • Glass cleaner
    • Turtle Wax Headlight Lens Restorer Kit
    • Cotton towels
    • Automotive wax

    William Zane has been a freelance writer and photographer for over six years and specializes primarily in automotive-related subject matter among many other topics. He has attended the Academy of Art College in San Francisco, where he studied automotive design, and the University of New Mexico, where he studied journalism.

    For sparkling bathroom fixtures, a shiny stovetop, or fog-free mirrors, look no further than your garage shelf!

    How to use turtle wax

    Car wax is designed to fill scratches, add shine to nonporous surfaces like glass and metal, and provide protection from smudges and stains. It’s a shame that something so versatile is typically only used on cars, when it can actually be used to do so much more! That humble container of car wax hiding away in your garage has plenty of uses that can make cleaning your house a much easier task!

    More Ideas You’ll Love

    How to use turtle wax

    So go find that container (or pick one up the next time you’re out shopping) and start using it throughout the house. Here are 11 creative household uses for car wax that might surprise you!

    11 Surprisingly Practical Uses For Car Wax

    How to use turtle wax

    1. Fog-Free Mirrors

    Prevent your bathroom mirror from fogging up after a hot shower with car wax! Apply a small amount of car wax to the mirror, let it dry, then buff with a soft dry cloth.

    2. Fight Mildew

    First clean your tiles, shower wall, or shower door with your regular cleaner. Then apply a layer of car wax to the inside and outside of your shower door and buff with a clean, dry cloth to prevent mildew growth. You’ll only need to reapply about once a year!

    How to use turtle wax

    3. Fight Fingerprints

    If you own stainless steel kitchen appliances, consider using car wax to clean them instead of a surface cleaner. Simply apply a light coat of car wax to the appliance, and buff clean to repel fingerprints and smudges.

    4. Patio Furniture Protection

    Apply a coat of car wax to metal, plastic or molded furniture to protect and add shine. They’ll last a lot longer with the added protection of the wax, which could save you a lot of money over time!

    How to use turtle wax

    5. Shiny, Spot-Free Fixtures

    Rubbing car wax onto your bathroom and kitchen metal fixtures will help keep them shiny and help prevent water spots. After applying the wax, buff it to a shine with a microfiber cloth.

    6. Keep Snow From Sticking

    When it’s time to clear the driveway and sidewalks after a snowstorm, apply two coats of car wax to your shovel before you begin. This will stop snow from sticking to it, making shoveling the walk so much easier. (If you use a snow blower, wax the inside of the chute for the same benefit!)

    More Ideas You’ll Love

    In the midst of wrapping Christmas gifts, I have ended up with at least half a dozen rolls of wrapping paper that each have only a foot or two left on . Continue Reading

    How to use turtle wax

    7. Easy-To-Clean Backsplash

    If you wax the backsplash tiles behind your stove and sink, grease will wipe right off with almost no effort. Plus it will make your kitchen sparkle!

    8. Prevent Metal Corrosion

    Mailboxes, door knockers, and outdoor light fixtures are all subjected to the elements, which can lead to corrosion over time. You can fend off the elements by treating your outdoor fixtures with car wax!

    How to use turtle wax

    9. Cure For Sticky Doors & Windows

    Rub a small dab of car wax onto the tracks of sliding closet doors, drawers and windows to help them open and close more smoothly.

    10. Shine Leather Shoes

    Car wax works great for shining leather shoes. It keeps them looking great, and makes them much easier to wipe clean.

    How to use turtle wax

    11. Shine Your Stove

    Clean your stove top and apply a layer of car wax once a month to create a clear barrier that makes cleaning up a breeze! Burnt on food and grease wipe off easily, and it will stay shiny for weeks.

    Do you use car wax on anything other than your car?

    Wood may seem like an immune-system-defying material, but it can be treated with Turtle Wax to make it look new again. The wax effectively protects the wood from moisture and other environmental damage, while also restoring its natural color.

    It is also a good way to keep your furniture looking newer for longer by preventing staining and fading. However, you should be careful when using Turtle Wax on wood as it may cause some scratches or blemishes. Overall, if you are looking for a quick and easy solution to make your wooden surfaces look brand new again, then Turtle Wax is a great option for you.

    How to use turtle wax

    Can Turtle Wax Be Used On Wood

    If you want to protect your wood surfaces from fading, water damage, and other damages, then you can use Turtle Wax. First of all, you will need to apply a thin layer of Turtle Wax to the wood surface.

    After that, allow the wax to dry completely. Once it has dried, you can now wax the wood however you like. Make sure to buff off any excess wax after application.

    Yes, Turtle Wax Can Be Used On Wood

    Turtle Wax is a great choice for applying wax to wood because it is nontoxic and non-abrasive. Apply Turtle Wax with a cloth or a sponge, taking care not to buff the wax too hard.

    Follow the instructions on the can of Turtle Wax to achieve the desired finish on your wood. Keep in mind that if your wood is unfinished or has any scratches, Turtle Wax may not be the best choice for you.

    If you have finished wood, Turtle Wax will protect it from rain, snow, and other elements that may damage it over time. Use caution when working with Turtle Wax around windows and glass doors as it may cause them to fog up.

    In addition, do not use Turtle Wax on furniture as it can damage the finish. For best results, apply Turtle Wax at least two weeks before you plan to use it so that the wax has time to dry completely. Always read the directions carefully before using any product and follow them precisely to avoid any accidents or problems down the road

    Apply A Thin Layer

    Turtle wax can be used on wood to protect it from dirt, dust, and other elements that can damage the surface. Apply a thin layer of turtle wax to your wood surface before applying any protection desired.

    Use turtle wax as a sealant for scratches and chips in the finish of your wood. Protect your furniture with a thin layer of turtle wax when cleaning or storing it away; this will help extend the life of your furniture.

    Keep your furniture clean by using a cloth rather than harsh chemicals; these will damage the protective coating on the wood. If you are refinishing wood, always consult an expert prior to beginning work; improper preparations could lead to damage or loss of your investment.

    Be sure to read the directions that come with every bottle of turtle wax before using it on your wooden surfaces; incorrect application could result in unwanted results. Always allow time for the turtle wax to dry completely before moving or handling the furniture; this will help prevent damage during transit or storage.

    Allow To Dry

    Turtle wax can be used on wood to add a glossy finish, but it is important to wait until the wax has dried before handling the surface. After applying the turtle wax, use a cloth or sponge to buff it in.

    If you accidentally touch the wax while it is still wet, it will cause a smudge and harshness. Do not use furniture polish or any other cleaners on the wax; these will remove the finish. Avoid direct sunlight when drying the surface; this will cause the wax to fade quickly.

    When finished, allow the wood to air dry for at least hours before using furniture that was treated with turtle wax. Be careful when cleaning areas that were treated with turtle wax; use a mild soap and water instead of abrasive cleaners or polishes. If your wood begins to discolor after treating with turtle Wax, apply a sealant such as clear lacquer or varnish to help restore its original shine.

    Wax Will Not Penetrate The Wood

    Many homeowners choose to use turtle wax on wood because it is a good sealant and protector. It is important to know that turtle wax will not penetrate the wood so you have a long-lasting barrier.

    If you are looking for a sealant, then turtle wax is a good option because it doesn’t contain harmful chemicals. Turtle wax can be used on decks, patios, staircases, and other wooden surfaces. Apply a thin coat of wax to the wood and allow it to dry completely before applying any other sealants or protectants.

    Once applied, do not polish or sand the surface since this could remove the protective layer of wax. Keep in mind that if you live in an area with harsh weather conditions, then you may need to reapply the turtle wax sealant seasonally or multiple times per year. Be sure to read the label before using turtle wax as some products contain additional ingredients which may cause damage to your wood surface.

    Always test a small piece of wood first before applying it to an entire surface – just in case there are any adverse effects from the product . As with all home repairs, be sure to consult with a professional before starting any project – they will be able to give you more specific instructions on how best to use turtle Wax

    How To Use Turtle Wax On Wood

    Turtle Wax is a great product to use on wood because it protects and seals the wood from the elements. To use Turtle Wax, you will need some basic supplies: a bowl, cloth, and Turtle Wax.

    First, mix two tablespoons of Turtle Wax with one cup of water in the bowl. Then, pour the mixture onto a clean cloth and apply it to the wood as needed. After applying the wax, let it dry for at least two hours before using the wood again.

    Always be careful when using Turtle Wax on wood because it is an intense product that can cause skin irritation in some individuals. Keep in mind that if you damage the wood while applying Turtle Wax, you will need to remove and repair the damage before continuing with your project.

    If you have any other questions about how to use Turtle Wax on wood, please do not hesitate to ask!

    What Are The Benefits Of Using Turtle Wax On Wood

    Turtle wax is a natural wax that is used to protect wood from the elements, insects, and other damage. It can also be used as a sealant to make sure your wood stays in good condition.

    Some of the benefits of using turtle wax on wood include: -It slows down the deterioration process -It protects the wood from moisture -It leaves a protective layer

    Can I Use Turtle Wax On Pressure Treated Wood?

    If you are looking for a product to protect your pressure treated wood from weathering and UV rays, then Turtle Wax may be a good option for you. The wax is designed to work as a sealant on treated lumber, providing long-lasting protection against the elements.

    Depending on the severity of the treatment, you may need to apply Turtle Wax every few weeks or months to keep it protected. Make sure that you read the label before using Turtle Wax on pressure treated lumber because some treatments will not be compatible with the wax.

    Be careful when cleaning Pressure Treated Wood because harsh chemicals can damage the sealant. When removing Turtle Wax, use a clean cloth and warm water; do not use solvents or abrasives. For best results, follow the instructions that came with your Turtle Wax purchase.


    Turtle wax can be used on wood to protect it from weathering, insects, and other damage.

    • In Stock

    Turtle Wax Car Snow Foam is for the serious car enthusiast who has invested in a pressure washer and foam cannon for home car washing. It provides maximum foaming action to remove all sorts of road film, dirt and mud.

    This extreme foaming capability, combined with high-performance surfactants, breaks up and surrounds stubborn, abrasive soils, so you can wash them away easily without scratching your beautiful finish.

    The result is a car that truly sparkles, without streaks, ready for a car wax for a knockout look. This is the perfect car wash If you live in an area with sandy soils. The incredible foaming action lifts and washes away those abrasive soils without damaging or scratching your car’s finish.

    Step 1

    Rinse your car with a strong stream of water from your pressure washer, removing all loose soils and grime.

    Step 2

    Pour 6 to 12 ounces of Snow Foam into your foam gun canister.

    Step 3

    Again, using your pressure washer, spray foam onto your car, sweeping from the top of the car to the bottom. If necessary, adjust the nozzle to create maximum foam.

    Step 4

    Using a clean, soft wash mitt, gently wash the entire exterior including glass, plastic, wheels and tires.

    Step 5

    Step 6


    Causes serious eye irritation.

    Keep out of reach of children. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. Wear eye protection. IF IN EYES: Rinse cautiously with water for several minutes.

    Remove contact lenses, if present and easy to do. Continue rinsing. If eye irritation persists: Get medical advice/attention.

    Contains BENZISOTHIAZOLINONE. May produce an allergic reaction.

    If you want to keep your car looking great and shining, then it’s a very good idea to buy the right car wax solution. The Turtle Wax GRAPHENE Flex Wax is one of the latest, best products from Turtle Wax because not only is it designed to be very reliable, but it also delivers great protection and a tremendous value for money. With that in mind, this is also a product designed only with efficiency and reliability in mind.

    What is the Turtle Wax GRAPHENE Flex Wax suitable for?

    The thing to note about this type of car wax is that it’s very flexible and it’s really easy to use. It works on just about every car, and it delivers a powerful punch. Not only that, but it’s graphene infused, so that helps bring in a lot of protection. It’s very efficient and durable, something that helps push the experience to the next level in a powerful and exciting manner.

    Applying the wax is easy. There’s no need for messy application methods or anything like that. Instead, the focus is on bringing in a great efficiency and quality, while being able to push the boundaries in a powerful and rewarding manner. Based on our experience, the coating lasts for months, so it looks great and it’s also not needed to apply this wax every week. That alone saves time and effort, which is exactly the thing to take into consideration.

    Suitable for both wet and dry surfaces

    One of the unique things about this Turtle Wax GRAPHENE Flex Wax is that it can be used on both dry and wet surfaces. You get things like slickness, water repellency, heat dissipation and glossiness. All these things add up to deliver a very good experience and the quality itself is among some of the best that you can find on the market. The heat dissipation feature is great because you get to have a boosted UV protection. That helps your vehicle’s paint last for a lot more time, without having to worry about any possible issues that can sometimes appear.
    Moreover, it can easily be added to your vehicle’s care routine without a problem. It’s a great product that brings in a unique, showroom-like shine and that alone can be well worth the effort. You can also combine it with other car care products from this brand too. That will help take the overall maintenance to the next level, which is important to keep in mind.


    There’s no denying that the Turtle Wax GRAPHENE Flex Wax is a very good car care product with great features. It’s adaptable to your needs, dependable and very professional too. On top of that, the attention to detail is second to none, and you will find this to work flawlessly in a variety of situations. You definitely need to give it a try for yourself, and in the end you will be impressed with the great value for money. It’s super easy to use, you just pull the spray trigger and apply it evenly. That, combined with the great durability makes it a recommended car care product!

    • In Stock

    For over 60 years, Turtle Wax Zip Wash & Wax has been a mainstay in driveways in the UK –and for good reason! It works consistently to dissolve tough stains and soils and rinses spot-free, even on glass.

    This wash and wax car shampoo envelops dirt and grime with its high-foaming formula and lifts them effortlessly from your clear coat for easy, scratch-free cleaning.

    Plus, as you wash, the dual-action formula coats your car in a layer of rich carnauba car wax for boosted protection and shine.

    Just wash, rinse and dry your vehicle for amazing results, made incredibly quick and easy.

    Trust the wash and wax that has kept the UK’s cars sparkling clean for more than half a century. Trust Turtle Wax Zip Wash & Wax!

    Step 1

    Rinse any loose dirt and soils off the surface of your car with a stream of water, starting with the roof and working your way down.

    Step 2

    Add 30 to 60 ml of Zip Wax to a bucket and fill with a powerful stream of water to produce a thick, fluffy foam.

    Step 3

    Dip a microfiber wash mitt into the foam and start washing your vehicle from top to bottom, first removing dirt and soils from the roof, hood and trunk, followed by the sides and ending with the lower panels.

    Step 4

    Rinse your car thoroughly.

    Step 5

    Towel dry to reveal a clean, glossy finish.

    • In Stock

    Occasionally, deep scratches and heavy oxidation call for a heady-duty compound. More frequently, your car needs only a light-duty car polish liquid.

    Our Renew Liquid Polish is ideal for those times–to remove light oxidation, scratches and swirls, restoring your finish to like-new condition without damaging your car wax.

    Safe and quick to use on all painted surfaces and chrome, this car polish goes on easy, requires only some light buffing and wipes away cleanly.

    Light damage and imperfections in your clear coat vanish in seconds right before your eyes!

    Step 1

    Wash and drive your car.

    Step 2

    Make certain the finish is cool to the touch and that you are not working in direct sunlight.

    Step 3

    Wet a foam applicator pad or microfiber cloth with water and wring it out.

    Step 4

    Apply a small (dime- to quarter-sized) dollop of polish to the applicator or cloth.

    Step 5

    Rub the polish back and forth over a 2’ x 2’ section of your car.

    Step 6

    Once the product is rubbed in but before it dries, remove any residual product and lightly buff with a clean, dry microfiber cloth.

    Step 7

    Check your work. If any light scratches or imperfections remain, repeat steps 3 – 6 until the finish has been restored to like-new condition.

    Step 8

    Apply a wax over any restored areas for optimal shine and a layer of protection.

    How to use turtle wax

    Help your community
    and rate it.

    (Tap a star to rate)

    How to use turtle wax

    How to use turtle wax

    Help your community
    and rate it.

    (Hover and click on a star)

    IDEAL FOR CLEAR COAT CARS – Many cars since 1980 have utilized a new paint process called clear coat. This clear coat top layer of your car’s finish does not contain any color. It’s this clear coat that adds durability and brilliance to the shine of a car. Clear coats require a special formula in order to provide the perfect shine. Turtle Wax® Super Hard Shell® car wax is the ideal car wax for your clear coat car .


    Long lasting protection. Have used for past several years and never disappoints. Price.

    Used for the first time with Porter Cable 7424xp and the result is amazing. You can spend more for wax, but don’t know why someone would.

    Similar Products Used:

    Used Mother’s Pure Polish before I waxed my car.

    Long lasting protection. Have used for past several years and never disappoints. Price.

    Used for the first time with Porter Cable 7424xp and the result is amazing. You can spend more for wax, but don’t know why someone would.

    Similar Products Used:

    Used Mother’s Pure Polish before I waxed my car.

    Easy to put on.
    Looks after light scratches.
    Removes stains, etc.

    Hard to rub off – like I was sweating by the end (good exercise)

    Surprised after using these ‘glam’ products, that good olde TW still delivers.

    Easy to put on.
    Looks after light scratches.
    Removes stains, etc.

    Hard to rub off – like I was sweating by the end (good exercise)

    Surprised after using these ‘glam’ products, that good olde TW still delivers.

    Hard to rub off.

    Hopefully it lasts for a long time.

    Similar Products Used:

    Hard to rub off.

    Hopefully it lasts for a long time.

    Similar Products Used:

    Hard shell protection, just like they say.
    Stays clear and lasts long.
    Easy to apply
    Great beading

    Two coats for a higher shine, though the shine with one coat is OK too. will leave white marks on flat black, but they almost all do.

    My dad told me to use Castrol oil or Valvoline and to always use Turtle Wax. I have done both. I have used Turtle Wax for more than 35 years and never had a problem. Put one coat on, wait 1 to 2 weeks add a 2nd coat and your good to go for about 6 months, sometimes more. I use the liquid, it is easier. My dad used it on our Packards, Hudson, Buicks, everything. I have tried the expensive stuff and much of it is not nearly as good. Some of it is, but why pay more than Turtle Wax costs. It lasts, works well on clear coats and holds up in our 100+ degree Summers and through monsoon rains.

    You can spend more but you won’t get a better wax to protect your car. you might get some glossier shines, but the hard shell protection is what I care about and with 2 coats you get a great shine.

    Turtle Wax has served me well for every car I have had. Again i have tried others, but never been happy like my old Turtle Wax.

    Similar Products Used:

    Just about all of them.

    Hard shell protection, just like they say.
    Stays clear and lasts long.
    Easy to apply
    Great beading

    Two coats for a higher shine, though the shine with one coat is OK too. will leave white marks on flat black, but they almost all do.

    My dad told me to use Castrol oil or Valvoline and to always use Turtle Wax. I have done both. I have used Turtle Wax for more than 35 years and never had a problem. Put one coat on, wait 1 to 2 weeks add a 2nd coat and your good to go for about 6 months, sometimes more. I use the liquid, it is easier. My dad used it on our Packards, Hudson, Buicks, everything. I have tried the expensive stuff and much of it is not nearly as good. Some of it is, but why pay more than Turtle Wax costs. It lasts, works well on clear coats and holds up in our 100+ degree Summers and through monsoon rains.

    You can spend more but you won’t get a better wax to protect your car. you might get some glossier shines, but the hard shell protection is what I care about and with 2 coats you get a great shine.

    Turtle Wax has served me well for every car I have had. Again i have tried others, but never been happy like my old Turtle Wax.

    Similar Products Used:

    Just about all of them.

    Quality finish, great shine, and exceptional durability!!

    Idiotic reviewers that probably applied it with sand paper!!

    I’ve been using the original turtle Wax super hard shell wax since 1992. My grandfather has since the 1950’s. Time and time again this high quality product has really proved to be among the best. Years ago a television show had ran a Plymouth Reliant through 52 car washes. Prism spray wax on one corner of the hood (no longer sold) it faded away, Meguiar’s on another corner (beaded slightly) Blue Coral (slight beading) and Turtle Wax (full beading). The Turtle had outlasted them all! I’m not surprised! I have a red Cavalier, notorious for clear coat fade as well as paint peeling (G.M. quality) But not mine!! After 9 years outside, my red Chevrolet paint job is still really shiny. Don’t be put off by those stupid negative reviews. People probably are sold on the propaganda for a $20 to $50 can or bottle of wax with some funky expensive sounding name. The Turtle is usually under $4 It has worked well for me and all of my 5 cars!!

    Similar Products Used:

    Nu Finish (so so, mediocre shine) Mothers California Gold (another favorite) Meguiars (not bad) Simoniz silicone formula(ok) Blue Coral(great shine!) Zymol(expensive)

    Coming across a scratch on your vehicle’s paint can be frustrating. Luckily, any minor blemish or scratch can easily be fixed without scheduling an expensive appointment at an car repair shop. For an easy-to-follow guide on how to get rid of scratches on your car, check out our article below and learn how effortless the process is with the use of only a few Turtle Wax scratch remover products .


    Formulation, mostly. Generally, Scratch and Swirl Remover products are very similar in performance to rubbing and polishing compounds. However, the formulation and instructions for Scratch and Swirl Removers are best suited for repairing light finish blemishes throughout your car’s finish or specific spots where localized repair is needed.

    Which scratch repair product is best for my car? Rubbing and Polishing Compounds are best if your target is a lackluster finish or oxidation. If repairing scratches or removing blemishes is your main concern, then ideally you should use Scratch Repair or Scratch and Swirl removing products.

    How to use turtle wax


    Formulated with a combination of mild or speciality polishing agents, Scratch and Swirl Removal products are designed to eliminate minor scuffs and streaks in your car’s finish, such as light surface blemishes or scratches, and contain waxes or clear polymers that help to fill in deep abrasions.

    Easy, one-step applications are typical with Scratch and Swirl Removal products, allowing for a quick, simple boost to the look of your car’s paintwork. These products can be used on a single scratch or for all-over finish restoration application like a conventional car wax. While the product performance is limited due to the mild cleansing and polishing elements of these formulas, it’s important to keep in mind that these products may not be strong enough to remove tougher oxidation. We recommend using a polish or rubbing compound instead.

    How to use turtle wax


    From light marks from fingernails around door handles to light blemishes or a lackluster finish, scratch and swirl removers are designed to restore these defects that are easily noticeable on your car’s surface paint. These scratch remover products are not only safe cleaners to use, but are also great at removing swirl marks from drive-through car washes and accumulated road deposits.


    • Step 1: Begin by washing and drying your car.
    • Step 2: Apply the Turtle Wax Scratch Repair & Renew to a soft cotton or microfibre cloth, folded into a 15cm x 15cm square. Spread the product to a 60cm x 60cm surface area.
    • Step 3: With firm hand pressure, rub the cloth back and forth for about 60 seconds.
    • Step 4: Let dry to a light haze and remove any excess product with a soft cotton or microfibre cloth.
    • Step 5: Continue to polish one section at a time, using a clean cotton or microfibre cloth as needed.

    For smaller scratches, wrap the cloth around your first two fingers. While using sturdy pressure with your fingers, rub the scratch back and forth about 10 to 20 times in the same direction of the scratch. Repeat as needed, until the scratch is less noticeable.

    How to use turtle wax

    TIP: Polishing surfaces of your car that are hot to the touch or in direct sunlight is not recommended.


    Step 1: Begin by washing and drying the car.

    Step 2: If possible, place a piece of masking tape 2.5cm above and 2.5cm below the scratch, to help guide the process.

    Step 3: Apply the Turtle Wax Scratch Repair & Renew with a clean microfibre cloth, and with firm finger pressure, rub in a back and forth motion for about 30 seconds.

    Step 4: With a clean microfibre cloth, wipe the area dry and inspect for defect removal. Determine whether or not further steps are needed.

    Step 5: If needed, reapply Scratch Repair & Renew until your desired results are met, or the scratch becomes clear or invisible.

    Step 6: Repeat the process up to 5 times.

    Step 7: To finish, apply compound to a larger surrounding area to blend in the repair.

    We recommend using an orbital DA polisher instead of hand application, if you have a deeper scratch or a larger car surface area affected by imperfections. This applies higher pressure and achieves more professional results.

    For a complete step-by-step guide on how to use an orbital polisher in conjunction with the Scratch Repair & Renew, visit our How to Wax a Car article.

    How to use turtle wax


    • If the scratch is still there after following all steps, advance to using a heavier grit and more vigorous rubbing compound.
    • Repeat the previous steps using Turtle Wax Rubbing Compound or Turtle Wax Polishing Compound.

    Note: If your vehicle is a newer model with darker paint surfaces, we recommend the use of our Renew Polish. For older vehicles with oxidized finishes, a paste compound is recommended as it is more effective on these kinds of blemishes than liquid compounds.

    Turtle Wax® has been the leader in car care products for over 50 years. America has always had a love affair with their cars and Turtle Wax® has been there nearly every mile of the way.

    Ben Hirsch, the founder of Turtle Wax® Inc. was a very diverse and creative entrepreneur. He used his experience in the grocery business to invent products such as tasty chocolate covered bananas, dessert toppings and Angel Rinse™ cold wash detergent. While working in the grocery business, Ben met his future wife/partner Marie and together they set out to formulate the world’s first liquid car polish, which came to be known as Plastone.

    Using his chemical background, $500.00, and a small storefront on Chicago Avenue, Ben and Marie mixed the Plastone car polish in their bathtub. Marie would then bottle the car polish and Ben would sell it by traveling on the city’s electric street car. Sometimes Ben would hand polish the fender of a parked car and then wait for the owner to return to make a sale! While Ben continued inventing other items, such as Penny® Shoe Shine Polish and even one of the original Shop- At-Home catalogs, Plastone grew into America’s most popular liquid car polish.

    While on a 1950’s business trip to Beloit, Wisconsin, Ben came across Turtle Creek. He made the connection between a Turtle’s protective hard shell and his Plastone Polish. From that day on Plastone was renamed Super Hard Shell®, and the company became Turtle Wax® Inc. Since then, Turtle Wax® has continued to grow, with products now distributed worldwide, offering the largest array of car care products offered by a single company.

    Ben’s family played an important part in this success. In 1966, Ben’s daughter Sondra began working at Turtle Wax® and by 1972 she was appointed Chairman of the Board. Sondra’s husband, Denis J. Healy, joined the company in 1971 after a successful Research and Development career with Colgate- Palmolive and Mennen, and now serves as President of the company.

    Turtle Wax® has grown from a bathtub brew to the world leader in auto appearance technology largely on the strength of its product research and development. Considered the finest in the industry, Turtle Wax® R & D has continually led the way with breakthrough products and concepts.

    Today, the success of Turtle Wax® can be seen in its top-selling car care products which include:

    Turtle Wax® Super Hard Shell®, the best-selling car polish in America, in addition to being the most widely sold brand in the world.
    FORMULA 2001® Super Protectant with Sun-Stop™ Formula, the most advanced protection available for vinyl, plastic, rubber and leather.
    Finish 2001™ by Turtle Wax®, the first polish enriched with urethanes to last a full year, is the best selling high-tech car polish in America.
    In 1983, Turtle Wax® extended its “shine” technology into non-automotive markets such as shoe care and household cleaners. Innovations in the Turtle Wax® Industrial Division include a line of bulk car care chemicals and the unique Flex Pak® Hyper Concentrate® line of products, both of which have since revolutionized the car wash industry. Additionally, Turtle Wax® now owns and operates 19 full-service, state-of-the-art car washes complete with detailing centers in the Chicagoland and Kansas City areas.

    Turtle Wax® Inc.’s headquarters and operations remain in Chicago. The company’s facility in Skelmersdale, England forms its international manufacturing and distribution base. The Turtle Wax® name is synonymous with automotive care leadership, with distribution in over 60 countries. Even in areas as far away as Scandinavia, Turtle Wax® holds a 95% brand awareness. And the lively green turtle, which has been the company’s logo for nearly 50 years, needs no translation.

    Almost all motorcycles made will have some kind of chrome on them, so polishing them with a chrome polish makes sense.

    It comes in a little plastic white “jar” with a red cap. The contents are a thick white liquid that has an abrasive feel to it.

    We found that in most cases applying the product to a soft, clean cotton cloth then using it on the part works best, and here was no exception.

    After allowing the product to dry, we buffed it off… To our horror, very tiny light scratches in the chrome were visible upclose, so we tried it again, and we got a little more very tiny light scratches.. Not good. They did come out (with Autosol), but this isn’t the results we were looking for in a polish.

    It does work well in removing the rust though from the parts and giving the parts a “luster”, just not a mirror one.

    You have to be very careful using a wax on your bike, you really don’t want to get it on vinyl or leather since it can turn it white where you touched it. It is also very hard to remove on vinyl or leather once it is dry…

    The big benefit of the Turtle Wax Chrome Polish And Rust Remover is the price, it is very inexpensive. There are many products competing with it on the market but none of them are at this price point.

    Insider Picks writes about products and services to help you navigate when shopping online. Insider Inc. receives a commission from our affiliate partners when you buy through our links, but our reporting and recommendations are always independent and objective.

    While most people have some level of appreciation for their cars, very few go beyond a car wash and maybe some new air fresheners to show that they care. One of the most effective ways to preserve your car’s factory finish is to regularly apply a coat of wax. It’ll protect the paint from UV damage, swirl marks, and paint chips.

    Even with those undeniable benefits, the average person rarely (if ever) does it — and the very few who do wax, are probably doing it wrong. We’ve all seen the famous scene from “The Karate Kid” when Mr. Miyagi made Daniel wax a car to learn the value of hard work, but you’ll need to know a little bit more than the “wax on, wax off” mantra in order to do it successfully.

    As a car enthusiast, I’ve used all different kinds of waxes including pastes, liquids, and sprays. So, to help you make your car shine like new, I’ve explained the pros and cons of each wax type, my personal recommendations, and a step-by-step guide on how to properly wax your car.

    Here’s everything you need to wax a car:

    • Paste wax: Turtle Wax Super Hard Shell Paste Wax (includes applicator pad)
    • Liquid wax: Zymol Liquid Cleaner Wax
    • Spray wax: Mothers California Gold Spray Wax
    • Wax applicator pads for paste or liquid wax: Viking Car Care Microfiber Applicator Pads
    • Microfiber cloths for buffing: House Again 5 Microfiber cloth set

    Keep scrolling to learn how to wax a car.

    The differences between paste, liquid, and spray waxes

    First, let me start by saying that waxing a car can be a very tedious job, but the results are usually worth it. When choosing a wax, you’ll want to take into account your level of patience, how much time you have to spend on waxing, and your expectations for the results.

    While there are plenty of different kinds of waxes, they’re generally broken down into three categories: paste, liquid, and spray waxes. Paste wax is usually the most effective and lasts the longest on your car and in the can. Since it’s a paste, you’ll waste far less of it. A single container of wax should be enough to last a pretty long time. The only downside to paste wax is that it takes much longer to apply since it must be applied to an applicator pad before it can be put on the car.

    Liquid wax, on the other hand, goes on a lot easier. You can squeeze it directly on to the surface of your car or onto an applicator pad and start waxing. Naturally, it’s not as concentrated as solid paste wax, so it may not last as long. However, you can find convenience and longevity in liquid wax by choosing a highly-rated brand. The downside to liquid wax is that it can be too easy to apply. If you’re too liberal with the wax, you’ll end up with a lot of caked on residue and not that shiny finish you were going for.

    Lastly, spray waxes are the easiest to apply because, well, they just spray on. While they’ll save you hours of tedious labor, you shouldn’t expect the results to last for weeks or months on end. Spray waxes are mostly water so they won’t last nearly as long as a solid paste wax or a highly-rated liquid wax.

    With all of that said, I personally prefer liquid wax because you can find a good middle ground between convenience and effectiveness.

    How to use a paste or liquid wax

    What you’ll need: Turtle Wax Super Hard Shell Paste Wax ($6.79) or Zymöl Liquid Cleaner Wax ($25.55) and Viking Car Care Microfiber Applicator Pads ($4.99)

    The only difference in the process of using a paste wax or a liquid wax is getting it on the pad. If you’re using paste wax, you’ll need to work the wax on to the applicator pad in a circular motion and then onto to the car. If you’re using liquid wax, you can apply it directly to the car or onto the applicator pad.

    For those who want to use paste wax, I recommend Turtle Wax Super Hard Shell Paste Wax because it’s cheap, it comes with an applicator pad, it’s highly rated on Amazon, and it’s given me pretty good results in the past.

    If you’d rather use liquid wax, I strongly recommend Zymöl Cleaner Wax. For as long as I can remember, my dad (who is single-handedly responsible for my current car obsession) has used it on his cars, and I’ve used it on my own cars since getting my license at 17 — always with great results. And with a 4.7-out-of-5-star rating on Amazon, others seem to stand behind it, too. It’s definitely more expensive than most other waxes but, with it’s worth the money.

    1. Wash your car. The very first step to waxing your car is washing your car since it doesn’t make sense to shine up a ride that’s covered in dirt, pollen, and bird poop. Make sure it’s dry before you begin waxing.

    2. Find some shade. It’s always recommended to wax your car out of the direct sunlight because the sun will quickly dry out the wax as you’re applying it. Plus, you’ll be a lot more comfortable in the shade if it’s hot outside.

    3. Create a thin layer of wax on the surface of the car by working in a circular motion. Avoid applying wax to your headlights, windows, and plastic trim pieces. You might feel inclined to add a lot more wax to make the application process quicker, but don’t. If you add too much wax, it won’t dry properly, you’ll end up with a lot of residue, and you may have to re-wash your car to get rid of it.

    4. Let the wax dry, then buff it off in a circular motion with a microfiber towel. By the time you finish waxing, the first section you waxed should be dry and ready to buff off. You’ll know it’s ready to be buffed off when the wax has a matte, chalky appearance. Once you’ve fully buffed it off, your paint will have a nice finish with lots of shine and luster. It should look something like this before buffing off.

    The process is tedious, but breaking the job down into sections can make it easier to accomplish. Do the hood, fenders, doors, quarters, trunk, and other panels in some sort of order to ensure you don’t miss a spot. And if you need a little motivation to continue along the way, buff off a small portion of wax to reveal the final results. For me, that’s usually enough to drive me to get the entire car to look just as good.

    Thread Tools
    • Show Printable Version
    • Email this Page…
  • Display
    • Linear Mode
    • Switch to Hybrid Mode
    • Switch to Threaded Mode
  • Turtle hard shell wax

    Hello, so I’ve applied turtle hard shell wax on top of my black e39. And after a day I’ve noticed holograms. What could cause this? And how do I fix it now?How to use turtle wax

    Sent from my iPhone using Tapatalk

    Re: Turtle hard shell wax

    Too much pressure, a dirty applicator/removal cloth are my first guesses.

    TW Hard Shell wax has abrasives (cleaner wax), your tight spiral application may have something to do with it. Try using a slightly damp applicator with gentle, straight line motions to apply it and make sure you have clean non-abrasive cloths to remove it.

    Instead of the Hard Shell wax, I would HIGHLY RECOMMEND the Hybrid Solutions Polish & Wax – either the “standard” or the “Black” versions.

    Granted, I have a Porter Cable DA to apply the Polish and Wax to the main body of the car, but I have to do the front and back ends by hand and I get results that are almost as good.

    How to use turtle wax

    Re: Turtle hard shell wax

    Hmm, should I strip it now? Will that remove the holograms? Also what’s the best way to remove it? Plain dish soap with water? Thanks!

    Sent from my iPhone using Tapatalk

    Re: Turtle hard shell wax

    No, the swirl marks are in the clear coat of the paint, removing the wax won’t help and besides, the dish-soap-strips-wax theory is a myth.

    If I remember correctly, the TW Hard Shell wax dries fairly quickly, which is why I mentioned using a damp applicator. That will slow down the quick drying a bit. Second, reapply it, using front-to-back straight line motions like I mentioned . GENTLY and take your time, this is not a race. Don’t focus on getting the whole car done, focus on ONE PANEL AT A TIME. Work on the one panel, get it right and move on to the next. If it takes two days to complete the car that way, so be it. It is worth the time.

    Even with the dual action polisher, it takes me the better part of an afternoon just to polish out my Camaro and prep it for a sealant and I cut each panel into sections: The hood is 4 sections, each fender and door is 2 sections etc. Even the back bumper is done as 2 sections.

    Moral of the story is to take your time and LEARN both the process AND the product you’re using. With patience comes perfection.

    ***EDIT*** Oh, and try to use as little product as possible, less is best. Too much product leads to difficult removal. Difficult removal leads directly to swirl marks & scratching.

    Turtle hard shell wax

    No, the swirl marks are in the clear coat of the paint, removing the wax won’t help and besides, the dish-soap-strips-wax theory is a myth.

    If I remember correctly, the TW Hard Shell wax dries fairly quickly, which is why I mentioned using a damp applicator. That will slow down the quick drying a bit. Second, reapply it, using front-to-back straight line motions like I mentioned . GENTLY and take your time, this is not a race. Don’t focus on getting the whole car done, focus on ONE PANEL AT A TIME. Work on the one panel, get it right and move on to the next. If it takes two days to complete the car that way, so be it. It is worth the time.

    Even with the dual action polisher, it takes me the better part of an afternoon just to polish out my Camaro and prep it for a sealant and I cut each panel into sections: The hood is 4 sections, each fender and door is 2 sections etc. Even the back bumper is done as 2 sections.

    Moral of the story is to take your time and LEARN both the process AND the product you’re using. With patience comes perfection.

    ***EDIT*** Oh, and try to use as little product as possible, less is best. Too much product leads to difficult removal. Difficult removal leads directly to swirl marks & scratching.

    Yeah I didnt rush it, used damp MF towel. did not let it sit for 5 minutes like in the instructions, cause it is quite a hard wax. Removing after a minute is already hard. I might try not using swirls, but firstly I need to strip it, and I am not sure how to do it correctly, i can’t put new wax on the old one

    +1 for less product more results

    P.S. If the holograms are actually in the clear coat I must remove the wax and polish it, I was thinking they are the marks from wax not bonding/not polishing the wax out correctly.

    Sent from my iPhone using Tapatalk

    How do you clean and polish a motorcycle?

    How to wash a motorcycle

    1. Prepare the motorcycle and work area.
    2. Soak the motorcycle with plain water.
    3. Lather and clean the motorcycle with an appropriate chemical.
    4. Rinse.
    5. Dry.
    6. Lubricate the drive chain.
    7. Seal the paint with wax or polish.

    Can you use tire shine on motorcycles?

    Many dealerships and professional motorcycle detail shops do not recommend the application of any type of tire dressing or tire black. Tire dressing gloss and similar products make the rubber very slippery, and even small dribbles or runs can cause an immediate loss of traction and result in an accident.

    Can I wash my bike with shampoo?

    The best way to wash a motorcycle or any vehicle is to use a mild shampoo. You can use hair shampoo, bath gel too – but they’re meant for humans, not metal/plastic – use car wash shampoo to wash. More important, use a microfiber cloth to wash and dry the car/ bike – and even for dry wiping.

    What is the best polish for motorcycles?

    8 Top-Rated Motorcycle Wax and Polishes Reviewed

    SHINE ARMOUR Wax Type: Waterless Car Wash & Wax Size: 8oz
    MEGUIAR’S Wax Type: Liquid Wax Size: 7-piece Kit
    MAXIMA Wax Type: PARAFILM formula Size: 43.5oz, pack of 3
    TURTLE WAX Wax Type: Smart Shield Technology Size: 8-Piece Kit

    What’s the best motorcycle cleaner?

    Fuchs Wash Off is a very easy-to-use cleaner spray for any type of motorcycle. Whether applied to plastics or metals, you just spray it on, wait a few minutes and then wash it off with a fresh water hosing.

    Can I use Turtle Wax on my motorcycle?

    Turtle Wax ® ICE® Spray Wax is simple to use and doesn’t take much time to apply. Lightly mist the formula on one section at a time and massage into the finish with a clean microfiber towel. Turn the towel over and lightly wipe for a high-gloss shine. Repeat for the entire motorcycle.

    Can you polish motorcycle plastics?

    Meguiar’s Motorcycle Plastic Cleaner and Polish restores the clarity and shine on the clear plastic parts of the bike. Cutting-edge advancements in micro-abrasive technology gently remove fine scratches, surface stains, contaminants, and light oxidation.

    Can I use Windex on my motorcycle windshield?

    Apply warm water and a mild dishwashing liquid with a soft cloth to soak your shield before wiping, and avoid glass-cleansing agents such as Windex, or petroleum-based chemicals such as Rain-X and Armor All — the solvent action of the alcohol in these products can be harmful to some shields.

    Should you Armor All motorcycle tires?

    Armor All Is Crap And Will Discolor Your Tires It will dissolve cotton stiching on seats and car tops.

    How to clip your horse

    Tips On Clipping Your Horse

    How to clip your horse

    When the autumn comes and the first leaf falls, it is time to decide if you need to clip your horse or not. How to decide and how to clip your horse correctly? We will answer these questions in our article!

    Why You Should/Shouldn’t Clip

    A healthy horse changes its coat and grows longer body hair in autumn to keep itself warm throughout the winter. The horse owners who are planning to ride in winter should consider how hard the horse will work and what conditions the horse will live in.

    If the horse will be worked hard and kept warm with under a blanket during the winter, it is beneficial for its health to clip the long hair off because clipping your horse’s coat allows the body heat to escape and helps the horse to cool down easily after the workout. If not clipped, a heavy winter coat can take a few hours to dry and the sweaty hair can cause your horse to be more prone to colic and cold.

    If the horse will stay in the pasture for long times and won’t be worked too hard, or if the horse is too old to adjust the cold, it is better to keep the winter coat. You should also consider blanketing conditions. How often and which areas you blanket can change the way you need to clip the horse. For example, a full-body clipping is for the horses that will work hard throughout the winter. A hunter clipping (full body clipped except the legs and saddle area) is suitable for the horses that will work hard or medium during the winter. A strip clipping (a thin stripe from throatlatch to belly) is suitable for horses that will work very lightly.

    *If the horse has a health problem, don’t forget to ask your veterinarian before clipping.

    How To Clip

      First of all, you should start with grooming. The horse must be groomed or washed to get rid of the dust and dirt. If you prefer to wash before clipping, make sure the coat is properly dried. Choose a safe place to do the clipping so that if the horse gets spooked there won’t be any dangers for him or the person doing the clipping. Also, having a second person around you can be helpful as one person can calm down the horse and have the horse’s controls while the second person does the clipping. Dress properly considering the hair sticks everywhere. Before starting, you can oil the blades of the clipper to have a smoother clipping experience.

    Decide the clipping style considering the elements we mentioned above. Then, if you won’t clip everywhere, you may want to mark the lines you want the clip so you can get sharp and nice-looking lines. For that, you can use chalk or felt pen.

    While getting started, it is good to turn on the clipper first and then approach the horse watching his reactions. If the horse spooks, you can turn off the clipper and let the horse smell and touch it. After that, you can try turning on and off for a while to make sure the horse gets used to the sound. A good clipping process can take several hours so be patient with the horse. Stand well to the side of the horse so that he can see you and what you do.

    When the horse is finally ok with the clippers, you can start clipping. It is wise to start with the shoulders as it is the safest place to check the horse’s reactions. Try to make long strides moving the clippers against the direction of the hair growth. If you are working on a sensitive or a wrinkled area, you can use your empty hand to stretch the skin. This way, your hand can also absorb some of the vibrations so that the horse won’t get too annoyed.

    If you fail in the first try clipping a wrong area, it’s ok to stop the clipping and let the horse grow the hair again. After a few days, it won’t even be visible.

    Stop in every 10-15 minutes. Let the horse chill while you check the blades. Some machines can get too hot too quickly. So it’s good to check the heat of the blades every once in 15 minutes. If you have other blades, you can change them and continue clipping. If not, you can leave the clipper aside for a few minutes and it cools down. Also, cleaning and oiling the blades every 15 minutes is essential to continue clipping without any issues.

    After clipping, you can clean the loose hair with a very soft brush or towel. If there are oil stains on the horse, you can wash the body to avoid rush or skin problems. When the horse is finally clipped and cleaned, make sure to blanket the clipped areas before you leave him.

  • Never leave the clippers and the blades dirty after you are done with them. Make sure to clean any hair rinse the blades in blade wash so that they can last longer.
  • If you want to know the best way to clip a horse, take a look at this archive video of Mary King and her former groom Jodie Summers clipping out the late Kings Temptress , for some expert advice on what to wear, where to do it and how to get it right. Before you start though, make sure you’ve got the best clippers for the job and decide which type of clip you’re going to do and draw on the lines with chalk if that’s helpful.

    NOTE: this is archive material filmed in 2008

    How to clip a horse: the basics

    1. Wear appropriate clothing

    • Wear sturdy footwear, ideally with steel toecaps
    • Don’t wear fleecy clothes. Overalls are a good idea
    • Use a cap to keep your hair back or a riding hat for extra safety

    2. Find the right location

    • Outside gives good natural light
    • Indoors is best in wet weather
    • Choose a place where the horse is relaxed

    3. Make sure the horse has a clean, dry coat to avoid blunting the blades. The best way to do this is by using a hot cloth or by bathing your horse.

    4. When using mains clippers use a circuit breaker and be careful the horse does not stand on the wires

    5. Before starting to clip:

    • Check the clippers are working
    • Check the blades are in good order and have been recently sharpened
    • Make sure the tension is correct. This is different for each clipper brand. For Lister Clippers, which were used in the video, screw the tension nut down until tight. Turn the tension nut back one and a half turns.
    • Apply clipper oil along the teeth of the blades, and also on the sides at the heel.

    6. Introducing the clippers to the horse

    • Show the horse the clippers while they are turned off
    • Rub the clippers against the horse’s shoulder
    • Take the clippers away and turn them on. Let the horse listen to the noise
    • Take the clippers gently to the horse and place against the horse to feel the vibration
    • If the horse appears relaxed you can start clipping

    7. While clipping:

    • Use long smooth stokes against the lie of the hair
    • Stop every 10 mins to clean the hair from the blades and apply oil along the teeth of the blades and also on the sides at the heel
    • If the blades start to get hot, stop and set them aside to cool down, or swap to new blades. Apply a blade coolant spray if necessary. Do not put the blades in water or parafin to cool them.
    • Take your time!

    8. When the clip is complete wipe the horse down with a warm, damp sponge to remove any loose hair, then rug up appropriately.

    9. Caring for your clippers:

    • Brush off all the loose hairs
    • Remove the tension set and the blades
    • Clean the blades with a brush and/or rag and put them away. Do not put them back on the handset while in storage
    • Clean the handset and pack away carefully
    • Store your clippers in a cool, dry place
    • Send your clippers and blades away at the end of the clipping season to be serviced and sharpened ready for the following year

    You might also be interested in:

    Body clipping can be a useful tool for horse owners. Read on to discover why.

    How to clip your horseOne type of trace clip. All photos by Taylor Fabus, MSU Extension.

    Many horse enthusiasts may not know that body clipping can serve purposes other than simply aesthetics. In this Michigan State University Extension article, we’ll explore a variety of uses for clipping horses and learn many tricks to improve your overall clipping performance and final product.

    Horses can be clipped for several different reasons, but most commonly it is related to health and comfort reasons. One such health condition where horses are clipped is Cushing’s, a disease that can cause a horse to not shed its winter coat properly. Clipping a horse suffering from Cushing’s disease, even with a partial clip, allows a horse to regulate their body temperature more effectively in the summer and winter months.

    Additionally, during winter months, you may perform a trace clip on a horse to better diffuse heat while working. A trace clip is where only a portion of the horse’s body is clipped. This reduces the sweat produced during work, as well as the time it takes a horse to cool down and dry off after work. There are many different types of trace clips to choose from, each serving a slightly different purpose.

    During the summer months, you may perform an entire body clip on horses. This gives a clean, tidy appearance and can aid in show preparation by reducing the time it takes to wash. Before beginning to clip, remember that a horse will not be show ready overnight from a clip. Allow at least two weeks for hair to settle and grow out after a clip for optimum result.

    A basic list of supplies to clip a horse will include body clippers, blade wash and coolant, a set of rechargeable clippers, towels, twitch, coat conditioner, sidewalk chalk and a variety of brushes. Body clippers are heavier duty clippers compared to the ones used to clean up whiskers and ears. You should also have a set of quiet, rechargeable clippers to get in tiny spaces and do clean ups.

    A standard body clip is done with a #10 blade, and you should have at least three blades on hand. Blade cleaning supplies include blade wash and blade coolant. Things that aren’t exactly necessary, but can be very useful to have on hand, include a twitch, coat conditioner such as Showsheen, towels and one unexpected tool: sidewalk chalk.

    How to clip your horse

    Body clipping supplies.

    The very first step for the best clip starts with bathing the horse. Ensure all dirt, mud and excess loose hair is off the horse. Clipper blades dull quicker with dirt and grime and they will not leave a smooth finish if there is dirt in the undercoat. After bathing and drying, curry the horse thoroughly to bring out all loose hair. Finish with a spray of coat conditioner and work it in with a stiff dandy brush. Keep that brush on hand to groom as you clip.

    If doing a trace clip, it helps to give yourself guidelines to follow. This is where the sidewalk chalk comes in; it works great for this purpose. Choose a chalk color that will show up on your horse and then wet the chalk to make lines where the edge of your clip will be. If you mess up, simply wipe away and restart.

    How to clip your horse

    Marking lines on the horse using chalk can help give you a guide to follow as you attempt a trace clip.

    After prepping the horse, start at the shoulder where the horse can see you. Turn on the clippers and make sure the horse is comfortable with the noise and feel of the clippers. Patience is key—you have a long way to go. Clip against the grain of the hair using light pressure, and let the blade cut the hair. Do not force the blade through the hair or you will end up with lines.

    As you clip, you may notice very faint, tiny lines from your clippers. These fine lines are normal. Lines that are 1/8 inch apart with hair significantly longer than the rest are not normal. If this is happening, clean your blade by pouring a pool of blade wash into a small container and running the blade in the wash. If this does not solve your problem, there is a good chance you need to swap out your blade for a new one. It is completely normal to use two to three blades on a horse, especially if they have been re-sharpened.

    How to clip your horse

    When you force the blade through the hair, you can end up with rough lines.

    Once you have clipped your preferred trace or the full body, you can move on to the legs. Legs have hair that is significantly coarser than the body hair. If you have a horse with excessive leg hair, trim it back with scissors prior to clipping. This will save time and wear on your expensive clipper blades. Make sure you clip the legs from every angle possible. If needed, have a friend lift a leg so you can get every spot of the opposing leg.

    The last piece to clip, and most important part, is the head. Every time you do a horse’s head, have a fresh blade and take your time. Start wherever your horse is most comfortable and save the hardest spots, typically the ears, for last. If your horse is incredibly unhappy about their ears, muzzle or eyes, feel free to apply a twitch for a limited amount of time and work quickly. It is important to make this a good experience for the horse so that future clippings will not be difficult.

    There are a few important things to keep in mind as you clip. First, make sure to brush and towel off your horse. You want to clip every inch, so brushing away the excess hair will give you a clearer view of what hair still needs to be clipped. Touch ups, at a later date, are always an option, but it’s best to avoid them. Also, keep an eye on the temperature of your blades. If they feel warm to the touch, spray with coolant or swap out the blade. Sometimes horses will start to dance or move away from the clipper—they could be telling that the blade is too hot.

    Your final step to clipping your horse is another bath. The tiny hairs produced by clipping are incredibly itchy. Make sure they are all off your horse and give them a good condition to rehydrate the open hair follicles. Cover your horse in a thick, wool cooler to dry and give them some hay to munch on. Keep a close eye on how your horse reacts to the weather in the next few days, as they may need an extra blanket or sheet without their long coat.

    How to clip your horse

    It is crucial to give a freshly clipped horse a thorough bath.

    Not only can clipping be useful, it can also lead to a career or supplemental income. Check out the Michigan 4-H Horse Program’s Facebook page for an interview with Gabrielle Dingell, professional body clipper and co-author of this article.

    This article was published by Michigan State University Extension. For more information, visit To have a digest of information delivered straight to your email inbox, visit To contact an expert in your area, visit, or call 888-MSUE4MI (888-678-3464).

    Did you find this article useful?

    Horse Clipping; not every horse needs clipping in winter, but under certain circumstances you may want to consider removing part, or all, of his coat.

    The usual time to begin is from September to October. The hair will grow back, so you’ll need to repeat the process at three to four week intervals during the cold months. The final clip is in January.

    Why Clip Your Horse?

    As daylight hours decrease with the onset of fall, your horse will start to grow a thicker coat. If you plan to ride regularly during the cold months, clipping your animal reduces the amount he sweats and allows him to dry off faster after work. It also takes a lot less time to groom a clipped horse!

    What Type of Clip Is Best?

    The amount of coat to remove depends on your horse’s anticipated work load and his living conditions.

    Note: After being clipped your horse will need blankets to keep warm, as he’ll have lost his natural protection against the elements.

    A full clip is suitable for horses being exercised hard throughout the winter, and stabled with no pasture turnout. It entails removing all the horse’s hair: not only from his body, but also his head, ears and legs.

    A hunter clip leaves hair on the saddle area to keep it protected, and on the legs for warmth. In some cases the lower half of the head is left untouched. This clip suits horses in medium to hard work.

    The blanket clip is another good choice for horses in regular winter work. The hair from the head, neck, under belly and part of the rump is removed, leaving the legs warm and protected. The large area of coat left on the body resembles the shape of a blanket.

    A trace clip suits a horse in light to medium work if he is turned out during daylight hours. The hair is removed from the lower half of the neck, chest, stomach and upper part of the hind legs where the horse sweats most. The low trace clip leaves more hair on than the high trace clip, where the lower half of the head hair is removed, and more is taken off the neck, barrel and hind end.

    The Irish clip removes only the hair round the head, neck and chest area which makes it perfect for horses in light work and turned out in the daytime.

    Its cousin, the bib clip, takes the coat off just the front of the neck and chest areas. This is useful if your horse is turned out year round.

    The horse clipping website created by Lister Shearing Equipment suggests giving a bib clip to a horse that hasn’t previously been clipped as a good introduction to the process.

    The clipping styles you choose will depend on how hard your horse will work and what his turn-out situation is.

    If your riding will be intermittent during the cold months, he is best left with a full winter coat. Plan extra time after exercise to dry him off before he is turned out again – with a blanket, if appropriate.

    Image via

    By Helen Anne Travis

    For many horse owners, clipping can be a quite the chore, especially if your horse is frightened by the process. But keeping your horse’s coat properly clipped is important for the animal’s health and comfort.

    Here are some tips to help you feel more confident and in control when clipping your horse, including helpful information on buying the right horse clippers, keeping the animal calm and deciding which clipping style is best for your horse.

    Why You Should Clip a Horse’s Coat

    When horses’ coats are clipped properly, they are better able to regulate their body temperature.

    “In the summer, an unclipped horse can become extremely sweaty when worked,” says Antoinette Daddario, a horse owner with 22 years of experience grooming and caring for horses. “In the winter, an unclipped horse can catch a chill if they are put away sweaty.”

    Having a clipped horse also saves time if he is ridden regularly. When your horse is clipped, his coat dries faster after a bath or intense workout, she says. Being able to better see his skin also helps you find and address any cuts or injuries that could lead to infection down the line.

    But keep in mind that you need to pay extra attention to insect and sun protection for horses that are clipped in the summer and to blanketing for warmth for horses that are clipped in the winter.

    Finding the Right Horse Clippers

    Having the right horse clippers can make clipping your horse an efficient and less stressful experience for both of you. But there’s no one-size-fits-all solution for every horse.

    To figure out which horse clippers make the most sense for you and your horse, you have to consider your needs as well as your horse’s, says Sally Morgan, PT, CST, a holistic physical therapist for people and animals and PATH certified Therapeutic Riding Instructor.

    You want to buy horse clippers that are light enough to hold for long periods of time and easily maneuverable so that you can move around your horse’s body effectively; one such example is the Andis ProClip AGC2 UltraEdge two-speed detachable blade pet clipper. You also want to consider how sensitive your horse is to noise and physical sensations. Some horse clippers are louder and vibrate more strongly than others.

    Make sure to keep the layout of your barn in mind as well. If you do not have easy access to a power outlet, you will want to consider battery-powered horse clippers like the Oster Lithium+Ion Pro3000iTM cordless horse clipper or the Andis Plus ZR cordless detachable blade clipper.

    Having blade wash on hand is also helpful in case hair and dirt start to stick to the blades. Be prepared to take them apart and clean them as needed if they get clogged.

    Since there is a lot of surface area to cover while horse clipping, be sure to continually check that the blades are not getting too hot for your horse. A cooling spray can help ensure your horse stays comfortable and relaxed during the process, says Daddario. Andis Cool Care Plus is a blade coolant that also serves as a disinfectant, lubricant, cleaner and rust preventative.

    A blade lubricant can keep your horse clippers in top condition. You should lubricate them as needed or whenever they start to leave lines on the horse, she says. And always wash and dry them after every clip.

    Remember, it’s a messy process. Wear comfortable clothes that you can easily move in. You’ll be covered in hair by the time you’re done; Daddario and Morgan both recommend wearing extra layers. “I’ve found that a plastic rain slicker is one of the best materials for keeping the hair off of your skin,” says Daddario.

    Preparing Your Horse to Be Clipped

    The first step to successfully clipping your horses is to groom them thoroughly. Give them a bath, a vacuum or a good brushing to remove as much dirt as possible from their coat. Excess dust and dirt can get stuck in the blades of the horse clippers, slowing down the process and possibly damaging your equipment, says Daddario.

    But if you opt to wash your horse, don’t clip him near the same location where you gave him his bath. “A lot of people don’t consider this, but it’s very dangerous to have electrical equipment around standing water and horses,” says Morgan. Many horses wear metal shoes, so it is important to mindful of their safety.

    Morgan also recommends introducing the horse to the clippers slowly and gently and waiting for a time when the barn is quiet to clip. “When clipping a horse for the first time, I tend to start with the clippers at a lower setting,” says Daddario. “I set the blades against their skin so they can get used to the sensation and sound. Then I slowly turn them up and begin clipping less sensitive areas, such as their abdomen and hips.”

    Moving slowly and talking to your horse can help ease his nerves, says Daddario. You can also ask another person to hold the horse still and keep him distracted while you work.

    Six Horse Clipping Patterns and When to Use Them

    The most popular horse clipping patterns include full-body, hunter, blanket, trace, Irish and bib.


    As the name implies, this involves clipping the entire body. It’s often used on show horses or those working in hot climates, says Daddario.

    “This is the type of clip I use most often.”

    A full-body clip makes it easier to bathe horses, cool them off after workouts and keep them clean. Just be sure to keep them properly blanketed in winter, she says.


    A hunter clip is similar to a full-body clip, but the legs are left unclipped along with a saddle patch on the back and belly.

    This helps keep them comfortable during long trail rides in dense brush, says Morgan.

    “The hair remaining under the saddle helps to keep the back muscles warm and protects the back from bits of debris that may gather under the saddle pad,” she says.

    Leaving the legs unclipped helps keep the horse warm during winter months, says Daddario, but you’ll still have to change their blankets as needed.


    With this pattern, a majority of the horse’s coat is left intact. Usually only the neck, chest, lower belly and hips are clipped.

    A blanket clip helps the horse stay warm in the winter while allowing areas that tend to accumulate sweat to dry quickly. With this clip, you’ll want to make sure your horse has plenty of time to cool down and dry off after a sweaty workout, says Daddario.


    A trace clip is similar to a blanket clip, but less of the neck is clipped. You can modify the cut as needed depending on how much your horse works—the harder he works, the more of the neck you’ll clip, says Daddario.

    Starting with a trace clip is a low-stress way of introducing your horse to the horse clipping process, says Morgan.


    An Irish clip involves clipping the hair on the belly, neck and chest and leaving the rest of the body unclipped. It’s often used on horses who live outside in the winter but still need to cool off after working.

    In this pattern, only the underside of the neck and chest are clipped. It’s best for horses who live in cold conditions and are ridden occasionally. But horses with this clipping pattern often need extra time to cool off after a ride or workout.

    A guest post by Liv of Proequinegrooms.

    Let’s take away all notions of how your horse looks. Focus on his health and comfort, and then decide if clipping him in the spring is a good idea or not.

    There’s a good chance that a springtime clip will help him regulate his body temperature a bit more as spring warms up. The main thing is to take off the hair that’s making him sweat.

    How to clip your horse

    Sweaty horses with thick coats tend to get overheated and trap things like skin funk and infections in their coats, and generally take a long time to dry. The main thing is to take off the hair that’s making him sweat. This helps all of those situations.

    For horses that only sweat in a few locations, it’s totally fine to custom make a clipping pattern. Common places to give your horse some air conditioning include around the flanks and under the neck.

    Another option is to use clipper combs or guards. These stand the clipper blade a set distance, and you end up doing just a trim. For horses with sensitive skin and are prone to being gritty and sweaty and with skin funk, skip this. This is best for horses that dry quickly already and just need a trim all over.

    You may have some concerns about how he’s going to look. Well, depending on how much you clip off, he may look like he has a trace clip or he’s been fully body clipped. Or he may look like a blotchy weirdo, but this usually happens if your horse and/or tools and clippers are not clean and oiled.

    Know that your horse’s coat is ALWAYS turning over and going through the growing and shedding cycle. If it turns out that you clip off the tips of his new coat coming in, no biggie. It will be replaced over the summer.

    A few things to consider when you are clipping your horse:

    Make sure you have some sheets available for cooler weather and chilly nights. This will also help your horse stay clean.

    You may need to switch to softer brushes after a clip, as it will be a whole new feel for him while grooming. Most horses are just fine to use their regular brushes, but some are more sensitive than others.

    How to clip your horse

    Treat your horse as if he was going to a show before you clip. Use one of those warm spring days to bathe him, then use a grooming oil like Shapley’s No. 1 Light Oil to condition his coat before clipping.

    A clean and shiny horse is easiest to clip and won’t yank his skin. Silicone sprays can work, but they sometimes contain alcohol, which is drying to both your horse’s skin and your clipper blades.

    Use razor sharp clipper blades that have been oiled. Clipper oil is critical, and it’s not the same as spray lube or coolant! You should be oiling your clipper blades about every 5 minutes when you are working.

    If you find that your clippers are catching, lagging, not cutting well, or otherwise misbehaving, do some investigation. Add more oil. Then switch to another blade.

    Then consider that your clipper motor is lagging and needs service. Your horse’s hair coat may be too thick for a trimmer style clipper, and you need to move up to a body clipper or even the larger shear style of clippers.

    Follow up with a deep grooming, a rinse if appropriate, and another massage with grooming oil to bring back your horse’s shine.

    How to clip your horse

    What to wear when clipping your horse

    • Perhaps the oldest joke in the book about clipping your horse is to not wear lip balm while you are doing it. Logically. While this is excellent advice, I have some other tips that can help you stay relatively hair-free when clipping.

    How to keep your clothes mostly clean when you are clipping your horse.

    Avoid the wind.

    • Freshly clipped hair is just downright out of control in a breeze. If you are clipping indoors, find a nook in your barn or shelter out of the wind. This can help keep the hair out of your clothing.

    But also, harness the wind.

    • If you have no choice but to clip in the wind, keep it at your back. This might require some creative positioning of your horse so the wind is at your back, and do so with caution and safety in mind. Asking or bribing a friend to help you here is a great idea. And to help share the hair.

    How to clip your horse

    Prep your horse for clipping with a grooming oil, this keeps the hairs a bit more together and less likely to settle in your skivvies.

    Keep your horse’s coat a bit oily.

    • The ultimate pro tip for horse clipping is to start with a clean horse and a conditioned horse. No. 1 Light Oil is a fantastic product to rub into your horse before you start clipping.
    • Not only does this condition your horse’s coat, but it also makes the hair heavy and stuck together. This makes it more likely to fall on the earth, not into your clothes. And yes, you will absolutely be able to tell if you have applied too little or too much. Which doesn’t matter, and either way, your clippers will thank you.
    • For more tips on prepping your horse for clipping, this article outlines it all.

    What about clipping a wet horse?

    • Isn’t this like an oily horse where the hair just falls to the ground? While you technically CAN clip your horse when he’s wet, this will seriously gunk up and create dullness on your blades. This makes your clipper motor work overtime and can tug at your horse’s skin. Not fun for your clippers, your horse, or your wallet when replacing blades. You might find that a mildly damp horse creates less hair floating around, and you can even use conditioners and grooming oils to create this effect on your horse without being wet.

    Dress appropriately.

    • Skip any body lotions and potions in the morning and anything that might make the hair stick to you! I like to wear a top that zips up. You know, that super fashionable mock turtleneck style, zipped up to my chin.
    • I keep the long sleeves tight around my wrist, you can even use hair bands if you need to. You can also wear an undershirt tucked into pants. If you do this, keep an outer layer hanging out and long so nothing slips into your pants.
    • I also tuck my jeans into my socks to keep my legs mostly free of hair. Or, I wear extra log pants that balloon over my shoes, which is a better idea. Jumpsuits can help, as can avoiding certain fabrics.
    • Flannels are out, sleek and slick fabrics are in! I think that some of the technical fabrics are so airy that hairs can get stuck in them, I generally prefer something a bit thicker and slippery. Think of a shirt that is almost stiff with starch, nothing’s getting through that. Ultimately, it’s a big experiment anyway!
    • And I didn’t know these things existed until someone from social media mentioned it – RAIN PANTS. Whaaaa? Genius.

    Also – think about your lungs and mouth and eyes when clipping your horse.

    • Clipping does stir up a ton of tiny bits of hair and dust and “stuff” – so many levels of yuck. Covering your mouth with a bandana is a good idea. And, a wickedly sexy fashion statement.
    • Has anyone seen one of those hats that has mosquito netting attached? Much like a bee keeper’s uniform? Consider one of these shocking fashion statements if you are especially prone to hair and dander in your eyeballs.

    How to clip your horse

    This lovely stock photo shows a sporty and practical way to fend off bees, wayward hair when clipping your horse, and any potential dates.

    Planning your day around clipping is also a great thing to do.

    • Having a change of clothes so you can slip into a hair-free outfit before you leave the barn is a good idea. I will even use a damp washcloth to tidy up any areas that are itchy as I change. I also clip my horse when I know I can go home and shower right away.

    How to clip your horse

    As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases, and this is ZIPPO extra charge to you! I thank you for your support – this helps me keep this horse grooming info boat afloat.

    Rain jacket and pants. For clipping.

    Shapley’s No.1 Light Oil – for deep conditioning and wind knot removal.

    My Soapbox for Equestrian Writings

    Whenever I go out for a hack and run into people walking on the trails the first thing I’m asked is why my horse is two colors.

    “It’s because I paid extra,” I like to tell them. “The second color costs more.”

    Of course then I explain that I do what’s called a “trace clip” on my horse because he gets hot working in the snow and this helps him cool down without getting chilled.

    My philosophy on clipping is to start with as little as possible then take off more hair as the weather and the workload warrants. That approach also lets me correct mistakes that I make while clipping! Of course the best part about clipping a trace clip is that people cannot see both sides of your horse simultaneously so it really doesn’t matter if it’s slightly different on each side.

    Often you need to “refresh” a clip two or three times over the winter.

    Now that the weather is changing, I’m going to clip off the rest of my horse’s winter coat. Contrary to popular opinion, clipping in the spring will not ruin your horse’s summer coat. It merely gets rid of the remnants of winter hair. It does take a few weeks for the coat to “bloom” but since many people clip their horses year ’round, if you don’t like shedding, don’t hesitate. Results from a recent poll on the Chronicle of the Horse Forum show that 40 out of 67 people believe in skipping the shedding process.

    In my part of the country, clipping also allows me to find ticks more easily so not only is the horse immediately more comfortable, but it’s also imminently practical.

    Clipping is not rocket science. The basic requirements are a clean horse and sharp blades. However, don’t clip your horse for the very first time right before you show or go someplace important. I’ve seen some pretty ugly clip jobs over the years!

    Much has been written on how to clip and how much to clip off. Here are some of the articles that I think are good:

    And here’s a great series on how to clip a horse from Horse and Hound TV. They feature Jodie Summers who grooms for British eventer Mary King.

    A woolly winter coat might be a necessary survival tool in the wild, but it’s often more of a hindrance for domesticated horses. We’ve got some great tips to help you get the perfect clip

    How to clip your horse

    The thick coat your horse grows in winter is naturally designed to protect him from the elements. However, in an environment of rugs and exercise regimes, it can sometimes be easier and more practical to clip all or part of it off.

    Clipping helps your horse keep cool when he’s working – excessive sweating can lead to discomfort, loss of condition and an increased risk of him catching a chill, as his winter coat will take a long time to dry out. However, keep in mind that a clipped horse will need thicker rugs to replace his lost coat and natural grease will have been removed from the clipped areas, so he’ll have less protection from the winter weather.

    Top clipping tips

    1 Make sure your clipper blades are sharp and clean before you start – dull, dirty blades will cut less cleanly and are more likely to overheat or catch his skin. It’s a good idea to have a spare pair of blades handy, too – the last thing you want is a half-clipped horse.

    2 If it’s warm enough, bath your horse thoroughly before clipping him to remove dirt and excess grease from his coat. If the weather is too cold for a full bath, spot cleaning particularly grimy areas, hot clothing or a thorough groom will remove the worst of the dirt. Roughly plait his mane and tail or put on a tail bandage to keep them out of the way while you work.

    3 Choose to clip on a bright day or in a well-lit area so you can see what you’re doing. Start early in the day so that you aren’t rushing and have enough time at the end to take your horse outside and look at him in daylight to check if you’ve missed any bits. If you’re clipping in his stable, rake back all the bedding so it’s easier to tidy up the clipped hair when you’re finished. Rubber mats on the floor will also help to insulate you in the event of an electrical fault.

    4 Wear overalls or scruffy clothes – clipped hair is very difficult to remove from fabric, particularly fleece. Take off rings and other jewellery to save them from getting covered in clipper oil, and sturdy, rubber-soled boots will protect and insulate your feet.

    5 Fit a circuit breaker between the plug of the clippers and the socket – this will cut off the electrical supply if the cable is damaged, and protect you and your horse from potentially dangerous shocks. If you’re using an extension lead, roll it out fully so that it doesn’t overheat and check all cables for any damage or wear.

    6 If you haven’t clipped your horse before, take some time to let him become accustomed to the clippers before you start. An electric toothbrush can simulate the feel of the clippers without the danger of removing chunks of hair, or you can download apps for your phone, originally designed for practical jokes, that mimic the sound and vibration of hair clippers.

    7 If your horse is a fidget or can get tense, turn him out for a few hours or exercise him first to get rid of any excess energy. Just remember that he’ll need to be clean and dry before you start clipping. Give him a haynet to distract him while you’re working.

    8 Use a stick of damp chalk to mark out the edges of your clip. A taut piece of string along his body or over his withers will give you a straight line to draw along, or put your saddle on your horse and draw around the edge for a hunter clip. Remember to remove the saddlecloth, as this will make the area too big.

    9 The clipper blades will get hot as you work, particularly if the blades are blunt, your horse has a dirty coat or you don’t regularly oil the blades as you go. If you can’t comfortably touch the turned-off blades with the back of your hand, they’re too hot and should be left to cool down, otherwise you’re at risk of burning your horse.

    10 Standing on a step will help you achieve a correct clip along your horse’s topline, particularly if he’s tall.

    11 To get an even clip in the folds of your horse’s elbow without nicking his skin, ask an assistant to hold his foreleg forwards. They should hold him securely under the knee in case he tries to move – this can also stop him kicking out when you’re clipping sensitive areas. If your horse reacts badly to the clippers, you and your assistant should consider wearing riding hats.

    12 If you’re taking off a lot of hair, cover your horse with an old cotton sheet to keep him warm. Cover his quarters while you do his shoulders and neck, then swap over. Avoid using a new rug or a fleece, as it will get covered in clipped hair.

    13 Consider switching to small trimmers to clip his face and legs. These are quieter and less intrusive than standard clippers, so many horses are happier having them around their face. Take care in these areas because there are projecting bones to clip around, making it easier to nick his skin.

    14 Hot clothing your horse when you’re done will remove loose hair clippings from his coat, which could cause irritation. Bathing him with an antiseptic shampoo will also achieve this if the weather is warm enough and the shampoo will disinfect any nicks or cuts from the blades, too.

    15 When you’re finished, remove the blades, and clean and oil them. Brush any hair from the clippers and oil all moving parts before storing both the clippers and the blades in a safe, dry place. This means they are ready to use next time you come to clip.

    16 You can clip as many times as you need throughout the winter, but think carefully about clipping after New Year and avoid it after the beginning of February if you’re worried about damaging your horse’s summer coat.

    Written by Erin Gaul – 13 August, 2019

    How to clip your horse

    Clipping a horse’s head is the most intimidating part of body clipping for many owners. A slip of the hand and you could lose a chunk of forelock. Working around the horses eyes just makes people nervous, and with good reason. Of course we all know that horses quickly pick up on what we are feeling so the first step is to take a deep breath and relax. Do not walk into the process thinking it will only take a few minutes; leave yourself a bare minimum of 30 minutes to finish.

    For starters, be sure you have the appropriate equipment and that it is all in working order. Following is a list of equipment you will need.

    1: Wahl KM-10 or KM-Cordless clippers with Wahl Ultimate Competition Series #10 Blades

    2: Wahl trimmers with the 5-in-1 blade. I prefer the feel of the Chromado but many people love the Bravura and the new Creativa. Any will do, just chose what feels best in your hand.

    3: Wahl Blade Oil

    6: Spray on conditioner or lotion

    Anytime you are clipping, start with a perfectly clean and dry horse and sharp and oiled blades. Anything less will result in discomfort for the horse, frustration for you and a badly clipped head! Continue to oil your blades approximately every 10 minutes.

    Which clipper you start with depends on the thickness of the horse’s hair. For thicker hair you will need the KM-10 or KM Cordless to start and then clean up the hard to reach areas with the trimmers. If the hair is thinner you can go ahead and use the trimmers for the whole thing. Make sure your trimmers are set to the #10 setting before you start. This is so important that I will say it again, make sure your trimmers are set to the #10 setting before you start. One swipe of the face with a #40 blade and you have an unfixable mess.

    Beginning on the flat surface of the cheek allows the horse to become accustomed to the feel and sound of the clippers. These areas are pretty straightforward but keep in mind that the key to any good clip is to go over every section at multiple angles. From here I move down the jaw toward the muzzle and then to the underside of the jaw. This gets tricky if your horse is chewing, so no snacking while clipping here. This is also where you will start to get into some tight spots at funky angles. Moving the skin around helps you to be able to get to the tight areas from different directions.

    How to clip your horse

    Figure 1: Notice how I am gently pulling the skin down so that it is stretched tight.

    Now I grab my stool (I’m only 5’2” so I use it a lot!). Many horses don’t love to have their ears clipped so I head there, while I still have plenty more to do. This allows me to give a few breaks if necessary. My goal is always a positive and relaxing experience and sometimes that just means taking your time. With time, patience, trust and sugar they will quickly learn that it is not scary or painful…in fact many think it feels pretty good! If your horse is being “naughty” I invite you to try a different approach and assume that he is not naughty but just unsure of the process. Before you get upset with your horse remember that you are sticking buzzing clippers in her ears! Look out for my commentary on dealing with difficult horses coming next month for further details on this. Definitely use your trimmers for the ears as they are quieter but just triple check to make sure they are on the #10 setting (did I already mention that)? I use the #10 setting on the outside of the ear, being sure to move the ear forward and back, especially when clipping the base, and looking at it from as many viewpoints as possible to make sure I am not missing a spot. Go over any cowlicks at the base of the ear in every direction!

    How to clip your horse

    Figure 2: Always use one hand to cover the forelock

    As I approach the forelock I use one hand to cover it just in case a sudden movement happens (learned this the hard way…thank you to my former boss and trainer for not shaving my head in retaliation). Once the outside is complete, I change the setting on my trimmers to #15 and do the edge of the ear. If the insides are to be clipped, I move on to the #30 setting on my 5-in-1 blade being careful to fold the ear gently inside out or flatten the ear in a downward facing direction so that hair is not falling inside. Just remember to always be gentle so that your horse never fears having his ears clipped!

    How to clip your horse

    Figure 3: The ear is gently turned inside out to prevent hair from falling inside

    Eyes and forehead are up next. Really pay attention to your horse when clipping around the eyes. If they are upset about it, work on finding a different approach, angle, method that works better for her. The depression above the eye can be tricky. This is another spot where you need to stretch the skin in multiple directions to be able to get at every hair. You must do this however while having the eye covered with a hand. If you need help, ask for it…your horse’s eyes are kind of important! This can be tough but just take your time and keep moving the skin around until you get perfection.

    How to clip your horse

    A lot of people make mistakes on the cowlick(s) on the forehead. Any time you are clipping a cowlick you need to go over it not just in several directions but in EVERY direction…usually twice. Again, cover the forelock or eyes when you are approaching them. Sliding down the front of the face we get to a lot of really bony areas where there is less loose skin to move around. Just take your time and slide the skin over the bones and curves to get at the tough to reach hairs.

    The muzzle is controversial and I will keep my opinion to myself in this public setting. If you are going to clip the whiskers, go back again to the #30 setting anywhere on the muzzle and chin where the hair is thin. I then use the #10 setting to finish any whiskers that are higher up the nose and surrounded by thicker hair.

    From here, you just switch sides and repeat.

    I generally finish up with a wash cloth and some conditioner to help wipe off as many loose hairs as possible. This gives me the opportunity to go over every single section of the head carefully to check for any uneven places or long hairs. In the end, the horse’s head should not look like you just clipped it and it needs a week to even out. It should look horse show ready!

    How to clip your horse

    Figure 5: Chicago is feeling clean, cool, and handsome

    Please remember a few things:

    1: Clipping is not rocket science; it just takes a lot of practice.

    2: Your horse is probably not being naughty because he doesn’t like you; he is trying to get away from something that he finds scary or uncomfortable. You can help him with this!!

    3: Feel free to get in touch with any questions or if you see me in the barn, I’m always available to help.

    How to clip your horse

    I can’t wait to body clip today… said no person ever! But with professional groom Amanda Geerlinks’ body clipping tips, this chore is sure to go off much smoother than ever before.


    Body clipping. A necessary evil for any show horse, but a dreaded job for horse owners. The hair ends up in your mouth, ears, down your shirt, in your pants, and anywhere possible! And it itches!

    Today, we’ll show you tips that will help you get the job finished quicker by making it easier on you, your horse, and your clippers.

    Tip #1: Bubble bath your horse before you clip

    A bathed horse will make the job much easier for you, more enjoyable for your horse, and reduce the amount of clip lines. Not just the top coat of the horse needs to be clean. The roots of their hair is where the dirt is, and that is what will wreck your blades. The cleaner the coat, the sharper the finish.

    Clipping a dirty horse will dull your blades faster, make your clippers become hot quickly, and ultimately put more wear and tear on your clippers.

    When you bathe your horse, make sure to really scrub them, especially the top of their bum! This is where all the dirt tends to gather and is not easily brushed out. After bathing, spray show sheen all over your horse. This will help the blades zoom through the hair.

    Tip #2: Reposition your horse so their skin is taught

    Elbows, stifles, and legs can be hard to clip. Reposition your horse throughout the clip so that the skin is as taught as possible, so your clippers can glide through the hair.

    For example, this might mean making the horse fully stand on all four legs so that there isn’t loose skin on their bum, or pushing their neck to the opposite side that you’re clipping to make the neck skin tighter and hair easier to clip.

    To clip the hair around the tendons in the lower leg, pick up their foot as if you’re going to pick it out, and then clip the sides of their lower legs. The tendons are loose in that position, and you can clip easier than when they’re standing on that leg.

    For the elbows, stretch the leg forward to make the elbow skin taught.

    Tip #3: Oil your blades every 5 – 10 minutes

    That little tube of oil you got with your clippers is essential for a good clip job! The oil will keep your blades running smoothly against each other, reducing friction and heat.

    Recently we received a message asking how to eliminate the lines that happened because of clipping. The answer is oil! Those lines that are close to each other in a perfect row are from the blade not being able to move across the hair easily. Especially when a horse is dirty or excessively hairy you’ll see these lines if you don’t oil enough.

    While the clippers are running, turn them sideways and put two drops of oil at the two points that the blades meet. Hold them there until you hear the clippers start running quieter and smoother. Wipe any excess off on a towel and start clipping.

    When do you apply the oil? Anytime! At the start of every clip, when you feel like the hair is pulling, after you go through a dirty section, when you see lines where you’ve clipped, or when the blades start to feel hot.

    Tip #4: To clip along the mane, hold your clippers perpendicular to their neck

    Clipping a straight line from the withers to the bridle path is super hard! Especially if your horse tends to move or twitch…even the slightest bit.

    You’d be surprised at all the different directions the hair grows right by their mane. Therefore, going perpendicular to their neck often works so well, because the hair growth is different along the mane line than the rest of their neck.

    Start at the top near their ears. Hold the mane over to the other side of their neck with your left hand/arm. If you hold the mane down tight enough, you should see the ends of their coat hair stand up and separate from the mane. Now with your clippers in your right hand, hold them perpendicular to their neck and clip down against the hair.

    Tip #5: Eliminate lines by clipping at a 45 degree angle

    Yes, it’s true that you need to clip against the growth of the hair, but going at a 45-degree angle can help “grab” the hairs that didn’t get caught the first time.

    It is especially helpful to clip in a W pattern when you’re clipping a horse with a short coat. It can be difficult for the blades to catch those short hairs when simply going against the hair growth.

    Remember to keep your blades flat against their body to ensure an even clip. It is best to not even take the clippers off their body, lifting and placing back down will cause lines and an uneven coat.

    Body clipping can be hard but with the few tips and tricks we’ve shared with you today, we hope that it is an enjoyable experience next time for you and your horse. Happy clipping!

    For more great grooming tips, make sure to follow A. Geerlinks Grooming on Facebook and Instagram.

    Here are eight winter clipping tips for horse owners, as well as descriptions of standard equine clipping patterns.

    How to clip your horseClipping horses that are active during the winter can help keep them cooler during work and ensure they dry faster afterward.

    As temperatures start to drop, you might want to consider adding clipping to your management regime of your school or competition horses. A professional clipper at Andis clipper company gave us eight tips for ensuring your horse gets the best haircut to suit its needs as well as describing some standard clipping patterns for horses.

    Here are some tips from Andis:

    Tip 1: The time and effort spent upfront will quickly be offset by the benefits—faster drying times, easier grooming and a better overall look—especially if the horses in your care are in an exercise or training program.

    But which clip is the right clip?

    Tip 2: Match the clip to the intensity of the horse’s workload.

    Tip 3: Wear weather-proof clothing (rain gear) when you are clipping to keep the horse hair from sticking to you.

    Tip 4: Clip against the grain (the way the hair grows).

    Tip 5: Stretch loose skinned areas by stepping a leg forward or backward for easier access to the area (remember to step the leg back when you’re finished).

    Tip 6: Follow the shape of the muscles (use the muscle structure to determine the pattern location).

    Tip 7: Use 8”– 10” strokes and overlap them slightly to eliminate lines.

    Tip 8: Maintain even pressure when clipping.

    Types of Clips

    Strip Clip (Under-Belly and Neck Clip)

    This is a good clip for horses that are used for light work, or who live out during the winter. Only the areas under the neck, chest, and between the front legs to the girth area are clipped to allow for quick drying times, but also to provide protection against the elements.

    Even though much of the coat is left intact, it’s still a good idea to blanket particularly in cold weather regions.

    How to clip your horseStrip clip

    The Low Trace Clip

    An alternative clip for horses in light work, the low trace clip outlines the underside of the neck, chest and belly, extending above the shoulder to the stifle and around the buttocks. However, the hair should remain on the legs for extra warmth and protection.

    As with the under-belly clip, blankets are recommended.

    How to clip your horseLow trace clip

    The High Trace Clip

    This clip, which is similar to the low trace clip, encompasses more of the neck and body (just below the hip), and also includes the face at the jaw line. Consider this clip for the light to medium performance horse.

    Blankets are a necessity for the high trace clip.

    How to clip your horseHigh trace clip

    The Blanket Clip

    This is a good clip for horses in a regular work program. The coat is removed from the head, neck and body, except for a rectangular area around the back extending to the kidneys, similar in shape to a small blanket.

    As with the other clips, the hair on the legs remains intact. And, here too, blankets are a must.

    How to clip your horseBlanket clip

    The Hunter Clip

    A good clip for horses in a medium to high level work program. The entire coat is removed except for the saddle area, the legs and an inverted V above the tail.

    When exercising outdoors or in a cold indoor arena, it’s recommended to use a quarter sheet to keep muscles warm and loose.

    How to clip your horseHunter clip

    The Full Clip

    This is typically a high performance clip, as the entire coat is taken off with only an inverted V above the tail remaining.

    While this is considered to be the most attractive clip, it also requires the most maintenance. The horse needs to be blanketed at all times, and bandages may be needed to keep legs warm.

    How to clip your horseFull clip

    Take-Home Message

    The experts at Andis sum it up by saying that clipping gives an added edge to horses in all levels of exercise or training programs. They stay in better condition and they’re easier to manage. Clipping also makes life easier for riders who no longer have to endure frozen toes as they spend an eternity towel drying sweat-soaked horses.

    A special thanks to Andis for providing the illustrations for this article.

    So you want to clip your horse? Here are some pro tips on how to go about it.

    Photo courtesy of Banixx

    As you prepare to clip your horse, be sure to plan ahead and allow plenty of time for the task. Here are some tips that may help to make it a smooth process.

    1. Organize equipment, supplies etc. Are the blades clean, sharp and oiled? Do you have backup blades? Blade wash? Clipper oil? Something safe to stand on?

    2. In advance, wash the horse thoroughly with a residue-free shampoo—such as Banixx Medicated Shampoo. A dirty horse will not clip well and it may cause pain.

    3. Once dry, select a quiet area with low activity and arrange for sedation, beforehand, if needed.

    4. Don’t get into a fight with your horse, and allow for plenty of time.

    5. Turn on the clippers (away from the horse) and familiarize your horse with the noise. Depending on his experience, run the clippers gently but firmly on less sensitive areas of his body (it may be his shoulder) so that he knows what to expect.

    6. Monitor your horse for mood changes and areas of sensitivity. Check blades every 10-15 minutes for heat and take a break to cool them off; this also allows your horse a chance to relax.

    7. At these breaks, apply blade-wash as a coolant and cleaner for the blades-don’t be stingy! And re-apply blade/clipper oil to keep the clippers working well.

    8. When complete, wash the horse to get rid of clipper oil and hair. Washing with Banixx Medicated Shampoo will not dry out the horse’s skin nor irritate. If any areas are irritated apply Banixx Wound Care Cream.

    ***If this is your first time, consider having a buddy for extra help and safety.

    How to clip your horse

    The Spruce / Meg MacDonald

    • Working Time: 30 mins – 1 hr
    • Total Time: 30 mins – 1 hr
    • Skill Level: Beginner

    Encourage a bond with your horse while grooming. Taking care of your horse’s coat, hooves and hair provides an opportunity for you to check for injuries or irritations. Ideally, grooming should occur daily, but it’s a must before riding. Grit beneath the saddle or girth or cinch will be uncomfortable for your horse and could cause saddle or girth sores.

    Preparing to Groom Your Horse

    Gather and arrange your grooming tools in a convenient, safe place. A wide bucket may be cheapest and easiest to put your brushes in, although there are lots of grooming boxes on the market that keep your tools organized and handy.

    Don’t sit your bucket or box too close to your horse where he could knock it over, or where you might trip over it as you move around your horse. Tie the horse securely and safely with cross ties or with a quick-release knot.

    What You’ll Need

    Equipment / Tools

    • Curry comb or grooming mitt
    • Body brush with fairly stiff bristles
    • Mane and tail comb (plastic causes less breakage than metal)
    • Fine soft bristled finishing brush
    • Hoof pick
    • Scissors or clippers (optional)


    • Clean sponge or soft cloth
    • Grooming spray (optional)
    • Hoof ointment if recommended by your farrier (optional)


    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    The Spruce / Meg MacDonald

    Clean Your Horse’s or Pony’s Hooves

    Slide your hand down the left foreleg. Squeeze the back of the leg along the tendons just above the pastern and say “up,” “hoof,” or whatever word your horse responds to.

    Hold the hoof and with the hoof pick pry out any dirt, manure, or grit lodged in the frog or sole of the foot. Check for any injury and signs of thrush, grease heel, or other problems, and take note of any cracks in the wall of the hoof, so you can consult with your farrier as to what should be done. Gently place the foot back down on the ground and continue until all four feet are done.

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    The Spruce / Meg MacDonald

    Curry Your Horse or Pony

    Starting on the left side, or “offside,” use your curry comb or grooming mitt to loosen the dirt in your horse’s coat. Remove any mud, grit, dust, and other debris before trying to put a real shine on your horse’s coat.

    Curry in circular sweeps all over the horse’s body, but be careful over the bony areas of the shoulders, hips, and legs. Many horses are sensitive about having their bellies and between the back legs brushed (although some love it). If your horse reacts by laying back his ears or swishing his tail in agitation, he is telling you that the brushing is too vigorous.

    While currying, look for any skin lesions or wounds. If you find anything, assess the injury to decide if you want to treat it yourself or if you need a vet.

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    The Spruce / Meg MacDonald

    Comb out the Tangles

    A flowing, shiny mane and tail are a joy to behold. Get that full, healthy look by being gentle and patient as you groom your horse’s mane or tail.

    Start with a mane comb or brush at the bottom of the strands and brush downward in sections until you can smoothly comb from the top to the bottom. When brushing the tail, stand to one side and pull the tail gently over to you, making sure you are out of the way should the horse kick.

    A grooming spray that detangles hair is nice to have, as it makes brushing out the long strands easier while cleaning, shining and protecting the hair. A grooming spray may also help prevent the hairs from tangling too much between groomings.

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    The Spruce / Meg MacDonald

    Use the Body Brush to Whisk Away Dirt

    After currying the body to get rid of the coarser dirt, it’s time to go to work with a body brush. This longer-bristled, stiff brush will get rid of what the curry comb missed.

    With the body brush, whisk out the dirt brought to the surface. Start on one side and move around the horse brushing in sweeping strokes following the direction of the hair growth. Some people find the body brush is more useful for cleaning the legs than the curry comb. This is a good time to check for lesions and skin irritations on the legs, knees, and pasterns like small cuts and nick, or perhaps even problems like grease heel.

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    The Spruce / Meg MacDonald

    Use the Finishing Brush

    A finishing brush, which has shorter, softer bristles, helps to bring out the shine on your horse’s coat and can be used on your horse’s or pony’s face if you don’t have a special brush just for that.

    Gently whisk away dust from the broader areas on your horse’s face, ears, and throat. With sweeping strokes, whisk away any dust missed by the body brush. The finer bristles help smooth out the body hair and leave your horse looking more finished and glossy.

    When you think you are done, apply a grooming spray. Depending on the type, these can provide sun protection and add shine to your horse’s coat, but they aren’t necessary.

    If you plan to ride after grooming, you must be aware that some grooming products may make the hair slippery and could cause your saddle to shift. Try to avoid application to the saddle area.

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    The Spruce / Meg MacDonald

    Clean the Ears, Eyes, Muzzle, and Dock Area

    So far, you have cleaned up your horse’s body, mane, and tail—now it’s time for detailing. With a damp sponge or soft cloth, wipe around the horse’s eyes and muzzle and clean away any dirt or chaff. You may prefer a soft cloth, as it can be more easily laundered between uses.

    At this point, check your horse’s eyes. A bit of tearing at the corner of the eye is not uncommon, but take note of excess tearing, redness, or swelling. Eye infections need to be treated promptly.

    Check ears for lodged seed heads or dirt. Some horses are fussy about having their ears handled, so go slowly and be careful not to pinch or pull hairs. Eventually, your horse may come to love having its ears groomed. When you are done with the face, use the cloth to wipe around the dock and tail head.

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    Created by Horse enthusiasts for Horse enthusiasts

    Everyone loves a shiny horse coat. Albeit blinding, a coat with shine beats a dull one any day. Horse owners take pride in showing off their horse grooming skills and well-maintained horse health with their horse’s coat, a symbol of beauty for horses.

    Want to get your horse’s coat to be at its best? Read these 5 tips below.

    Ensure Your Horse’s Nutrition is Complete

    It’s easy to miss out on some mineral and vitamin requirements in your horse’s diet. And when a horse is not getting all the essential nutrients in their diet, the result could be a dull coat.

    You need to pay attention to seasonal changes in the soil content of your location to ensure the pasture grass has all the nutrients it requires. Another factor is the maturity when the hay is harvested and the length of time between cutting, drying and using it as horse feed. Consult an equine nutritionist if you’re unsure about your horse’s nutrition, suspect deficiency, or require a ration balancer to supplement your horse’s diet.

    Add Fatty Oils to Your Horse’s Diet

    Naturally, horse diets are low in fat so you may need to add supplementary high-fat products or oils to boost the fat content. Over many years, horse keepers/owners have discovered that doing this improves the luster in a horse’s coat.

    Some oils that can be used include vegetable, soy or corn oil, as well black oil sunflower seeds, flax seeds or stabilized rice bran. Usually, two-quarter cups of oil/high fat product a day (about 45ml) is enough to enhance coat shine and quality.

    Use Better Bathing Practices

    Over-shampooing or using harsh soaps/detergents will cause your horse’s coat to appear dry and dull as it strips the natural oils that let it shine.

    Invest in good equine shampoos that are formulated for the skin and finish with a conditioner for retaining moisture. Limit the number of times you wash even when using special body washes or shampoos. If you feel your horse looks dirty between washes, you can always just hose them down or spot clean and smooth the hair.

    Hosing them down with only water could prove effective after exercise or intense physical activity that may lead to salt build-up on the skin from sweat.

    Groom Often and Condition Your Horse’s Coat

    It may not be what you want to hear but the old-fashioned daily grooming is key for keeping your horse’s coat healthy. The more time you spend currying and grooming, the better the shine and appearance.

    Even if you’re short on time, a grooming session of 30 minutes a day will bring noticeable results in a short period of time. All that elbow-grease is great exercise, too, because proper grooming requires a lot of arm strength.

    Going in circular motions to rub will bring the hair up, smoothing it out and bringing dead skin to the surface. Use a rub rag for this and then polish after dusting for best results. A good conditioner for bathing is also a really important investment. Buy one that will add shine and moisturize the horse coat and avoid those with any silicone content.

    Deworm Your Horse Periodically

    Setting up your horse on a deworming program could be the answer to improving their dull coat’s appearance. Poor coat quality is sometimes a result of internal parasites that can harm your horse’s health in many ways. In addition to internal damage, there is the less healthy external appearance which is more evident.

    Finally, if you’ve tried out the above tips without results consult with a vet to understand whether it’s a medical issue.

    Image credit:

    Disclaimer: Of Horse! and sponsors do not endorse nor validate the accuracy of a blog post. Each article is the opinion of the blogger.

    The Safe Clipв„ў, available in Australia.
    The best way to tie-up a horse to a post, rail, tree, float or truck.

    • Never Use Baling Twine Again – when a horse breaks the baling twine, it teaches the horse that it can get free and so, the habit begins. The Safe Clipв„ў avoids this and will retrain your horse if the habit is already established.
    • Never Have Your Horse Untie Your Knot – the smart, playful horse can often work out how to undo your ‘quick-release’ rope knot. Problem solved with The Safe Clipв„ў.
    • Teach Your Horse to Quit Pulling Back – the key to teaching a horse not to pull back, is safety for the horse, especially for its poll. Also, instantaneous positive reward, which is what The Safe Clipв„ў provides.
    • Increased Safety and Security – The Safe Clipв„ў is safe and secure for you and your horse and the handler. It eliminates many risks associated with tying up a horse.

    The safe, versatile, horse tie-up system, that also trains your horse!

    Automatically train your horse to STOP pulling back whilst tied.

    Enjoy the flexibility and fantastic convenience of The Safe Clipв„ў.

    Watch This Short Demonstration

    See how easy and versatile it is to use!

    The Safe Clipв„ў provides the ultimate
    tie-up safety, versatility
    and training benefits!

    These pictures show some of the options

    How to clip your horse

    Tether Ring Flexibility

    The Safe Clipв„ў allows you to tie up your horse anywhere with the Tether Ring accessory.

    How to clip your horse

    Hay Nets and Water Buckets

    You can fix the net and water bucket to elevate the feed and water when needed.

    How to clip your horse

    Ultimate Control

    The Safe Clipв„ў has feather-control for the tension via the easy-to-use screw mechanism.

    Play this video – the why and how to use the Safe Clip when tying your horse

    The Tether Ring

    The Tether Ring sets you up for ultimate portability.
    Tie up anywhere when a fixed ring is not available.

    How to clip your horse

    Amazing Strength: Made from non-stretch military grade rope, with a strength capability of 2000lbs /900 kilos.

    Excellent Portability: Tie-up to trees, posts, rails, stables, cross-ties, floats, trucks, anywhere!

    Great for Hay Nets and Buckets: You will let your mind run with ideas and possibilities.

    The Tie-Up Lead

    How to clip your horse

    There are so many lead ropes on the market, we cannot guarantee yours is the right type to get the smooth action that is best for The Safe Clipв„ў.

    Therefore, we offer a 3.0 metre long, 12mm thick double braid polyester. This tie-up lead works perfectly with the clip.

    The lead does not have a headstall attachment clip. As you will see from the video below, a headstall attachment clip is unnecessary.

    Scroll Down to Order The Safe Clip

    Note: We use PayPal for secure transactions. You do not need a PayPal account, you can be a ‘guest’ without joining PayPal. Click here to see our delivery and privacy policy.

    Scroll Down To See All Order Options

    • Read each of the 5 options prior to making your order selection.
    • Note that when you click on ‘Add to Cart’ a new window will open, you can click the previous window to get back to this page
    • Australian delivery only. $12 postage will be added for any one of the selections below. If more than one, postage will be calculated at Checkout before finalising the order.
    • The Tether Ring is 43 cm or 17″ (inches)

    $44.90 The Safe Clip
    (no tether or lead)

    $56.80 Safe Clip + Tether Ring
    (no lead)

    $71.80 The Complete Set
    The Clip, Tether Ring and Tie-Up Lead

    $11.90 The Tether Ring 43cm
    (no clip or lead)

    $15.00 Tie-Up Lead
    (no clip or tether)

    Note: All prices are Australian dollars (AUD) including GST.
    Rope colours may vary.

    Tuesday, September 30, 2008

    Shave and A Haircut: Teaching Your Horse to Stand for Clipping

    If you have been around horses for any length of time, you have probably encountered a horse that will not tolerate being clipped. Perhaps the horse believes those noisy, tingly clippers to be a horse-eating monster or perhaps the world’s largest horsefly. Regardless, he’s going to have none of it! Further attempts of clipping a horse that is fearful can be dangerous for you and him.

    If you have a horse that is not comfortable with your hand touching his ears, face, legs, etc., you’ve got a horse that will not tolerate clippers. You want your horse to be comfortable and relaxed as you clip him; worry free and without a care. But how do you get there? As with many other training methods, you need to desensitize your horse to the sight, sound, and feel of the clippers.

    The following steps will enable you to accomplish clipping your horse safely:

    Once he stands calmly as you rub the clippers over his body as they are turned off, you can then move on to the next step.

    Move the clippers toward his ears, letting him hear the sound close up. He may lift his head higher to move away from the sound, but when he drops his head turn off the clippers and pat him, speak softly to him to reward him. It may take you a while to get him used to having the clippers around his ears, but continue the method of turning off the clippers and rewarding him with a pat each time he lowers his head.

    Do the same thing with his legs. Again, starting at the elbow and working your way down to the fetlock, lay the body of the clippers against his leg and work your way down. Once he stands still, reward him by turning the clippers off.

    For the legs, turn the clippers on and start from the elbow move the clipper body down to the fetlock. Once there, initiate the blade on the feathers of the fetlock. If there is any reaction from your horse, move the body of the clippers back up the leg and then return to the fetlock.

    Patient consistency will allow you desensitize and train your horse to stand while being clipped. You will, most likely, need to repeat these steps several times before your horse is fully comfortable with the clipping process. However, your efforts will be worth it once you see how nice your horse looks with his new shave and a haircut.

    As spring draws near, horses will begin to shed their thick winter coats. Consider these suggestions to speed up the process or to just help your horse along.

    How to clip your horse

    In order to help your horse shed its thick winter hair, it is first important to understand what makes its hair grow. Although hair growth generally coincides with colder temperatures, it is primarily the amount of daylight hours that affects a horse’s hair growth, or lack thereof. As the daylight hours and temperatures slowly start to decrease in autumn, you may notice your horse starting to grow a soft fuzzy coat over their short, slick summer coat.

    Likewise, as the daylight hours and temperatures begin to increase in the springtime, you will notice that the thick, long winter hair starts to shed. It is actually the horse’s pituitary gland that recognizes this change in daylight hours and produces hormones that cause a horse to shed its winter coat.

    If you are looking to speed up the shedding process, adding light and vigorous grooming can help.

    First, by adding artificial light to a horse’s environment, likely their stall, you can fool the horse’s body into thinking it’s closer to springtime than it actually is. This can cause the horse to shed its hair coat earlier than it naturally would. It is important to remember that the environmental temperatures may require extra blanketing or protection to keep your horse comfortable with their new hair coat.

    The light source should be turned on to supply enough additional light to produce a total 16 hours of daylight (natural and artificial). Perception of day length must be constant from day to day; using automatic timers can make this task easy. Light intensity should be comparable to one 200-watt bulb for a 12-foot by 12-foot stall.

    Also, too much light will not speed up this process, so do not add too much artificial light. It will take the horse approximately 60 days before you start to notice the effects of the light (i.e., increased shedding); this should be taken into account so that you start adding lights at the appropriate time.

    Secondly, vigorous grooming can help get your horse’s coat ready for show season. Here’s a great YouTube playlist on grooming for success, brought to you by Extension Horses. In order to make a distinct impact on your horse’s hair coat, you’ll have to do more than the occasional light brushing. It’s currying and elbow grease that will be needed to get this job done!

    A curry comb is a useful tool in removing dirt, old hair and debris from your horse. To be most effective, it should be used in a circular motion. You’ll want to be careful when using this brush on areas of the face and below the knees and hocks, as these areas have little to no muscle and are sensitive areas.

    Visit this eXtension article to learn even more about proper grooming techniques.

    This article was published by Michigan State University Extension. For more information, visit To have a digest of information delivered straight to your email inbox, visit To contact an expert in your area, visit, or call 888-MSUE4MI (888-678-3464).

    Did you find this article useful?

    Created by Horse enthusiasts for Horse enthusiasts

    Everyone loves a shiny horse coat. Albeit blinding, a coat with shine beats a dull one any day. Horse owners take pride in showing off their horse grooming skills and well-maintained horse health with their horse’s coat, a symbol of beauty for horses.

    Want to get your horse’s coat to be at its best? Read these 5 tips below.

    Ensure Your Horse’s Nutrition is Complete

    It’s easy to miss out on some mineral and vitamin requirements in your horse’s diet. And when a horse is not getting all the essential nutrients in their diet, the result could be a dull coat.

    You need to pay attention to seasonal changes in the soil content of your location to ensure the pasture grass has all the nutrients it requires. Another factor is the maturity when the hay is harvested and the length of time between cutting, drying and using it as horse feed. Consult an equine nutritionist if you’re unsure about your horse’s nutrition, suspect deficiency, or require a ration balancer to supplement your horse’s diet.

    Add Fatty Oils to Your Horse’s Diet

    Naturally, horse diets are low in fat so you may need to add supplementary high-fat products or oils to boost the fat content. Over many years, horse keepers/owners have discovered that doing this improves the luster in a horse’s coat.

    Some oils that can be used include vegetable, soy or corn oil, as well black oil sunflower seeds, flax seeds or stabilized rice bran. Usually, two-quarter cups of oil/high fat product a day (about 45ml) is enough to enhance coat shine and quality.

    Use Better Bathing Practices

    Over-shampooing or using harsh soaps/detergents will cause your horse’s coat to appear dry and dull as it strips the natural oils that let it shine.

    Invest in good equine shampoos that are formulated for the skin and finish with a conditioner for retaining moisture. Limit the number of times you wash even when using special body washes or shampoos. If you feel your horse looks dirty between washes, you can always just hose them down or spot clean and smooth the hair.

    Hosing them down with only water could prove effective after exercise or intense physical activity that may lead to salt build-up on the skin from sweat.

    Groom Often and Condition Your Horse’s Coat

    It may not be what you want to hear but the old-fashioned daily grooming is key for keeping your horse’s coat healthy. The more time you spend currying and grooming, the better the shine and appearance.

    Even if you’re short on time, a grooming session of 30 minutes a day will bring noticeable results in a short period of time. All that elbow-grease is great exercise, too, because proper grooming requires a lot of arm strength.

    Going in circular motions to rub will bring the hair up, smoothing it out and bringing dead skin to the surface. Use a rub rag for this and then polish after dusting for best results. A good conditioner for bathing is also a really important investment. Buy one that will add shine and moisturize the horse coat and avoid those with any silicone content.

    Deworm Your Horse Periodically

    Setting up your horse on a deworming program could be the answer to improving their dull coat’s appearance. Poor coat quality is sometimes a result of internal parasites that can harm your horse’s health in many ways. In addition to internal damage, there is the less healthy external appearance which is more evident.

    Finally, if you’ve tried out the above tips without results consult with a vet to understand whether it’s a medical issue.

    Image credit:

    Disclaimer: Of Horse! and sponsors do not endorse nor validate the accuracy of a blog post. Each article is the opinion of the blogger.

    How to clip your horse

    When to clip?

    I’ve heard that body clipping in the spring is “too late” because you’re clipping over the newly growing in coat… What do you think? What’s the best body clipping schedule? – Jessica N., Charlotte, VT

    For many people the thought of clipping their horse is seen as daunting rather than a fun time! I wouldn’t even be able to count how many horses I have clipped over the years. Although I wouldn’t say I relish the process, I do enjoy taking a scruffy unkempt horse and turning him into a well-groomed eventing athlete.

    For me personally, when to clip is more decided upon what the horse’s workload is and the amount of time required to cool out the horse after work. In general let the horse tell you when he needs to be clipped. I know many people do not believe in clipping after the solstice. If your horse is gearing up for the early spring eventing season this would be an impractical rule to follow. Hot horses that cannot get totally cooled and dried quickly are at risk from getting the chills, sore muscles and ultimately can lead to illness.

    Obviously every rider’s schedule is different. Generally speaking, if still competing in October, I would hunter clip the horses for the first time. Knowing that they would be on vacation in November this allows for these horses to be taken care of properly whilst in work, but I can then turn them out to pasture blanketed knowing their legs are protected from the elements.

    When the horses come back into work, I leave clipping until mid December. Again, let the horses tell you. I have had some that would need clipping monthly from November till March, no matter how well I blanket. Others I can clip in December and not have to touch them again until late February.

    How to clip your horse

    Other factors to think about include where you are training, when is your first event, is you horse on 24 turnout, or stabled at night and out by day. For those of you training in the south and starting to compete early, a hunter or body clip would be the norm, done once in January then on an as-needed basis. If you are aiming for a three day in late April/early May, then you might find that you will need to clip in late March/early April. Should you be aiming for a three day in late May or early June, you need to consider how hot these events can get. Again emphasizing cooling out the horses as quickly as possible after XC is paramount to an all important good recovery and fresh horse for the Sunday jog and Stadium Jumping. Getting rid of that extra hair can shorten your horse’s cool out time by 10 minutes. If you’re worried about losing that summer coat sheen, a couple of tips: prewash your horse prior to clipping and then spray them with a coat conditioner product, my personal favorite is Cowboy Magic Super Body Shine. Once clipped bathe again with Head & Shoulders, this human shampoo is great at picking up the grime that clippers leave behind, but is also gentle enough not to dry out the freshly clipped skin and coat.

    For those staying north and not competing until later in the spring, I would be inclined to use either a trace or blanket clip when the horse is not easy to cool out, but still needs to spend some time outside. These clips are quick and easy to do and can be touched up on an as-needed basis. Start with a low trace and you can always take more off if you find your horse is sweating in areas you have not yet clipped. Personally I would then full or hunter clip the horse in March, to be ready for the event season.

    To summarize I think you should ask yourself the following questions to know if clipping is required:

    • What is the workload of my horse?
    • Is he dry by the time I leave the barn?
    • What is his turnout schedule?
    • When is my first competition?
    • Does he take a long time to cool out after XC?

    Good luck and happy clipping!

    Emma Ford is one of the most respected grooms in US Eventing. Born and raised in the UK, Emma came to the US in 1998 to groom for top eventer Adrienne Iorio. After seven years with Adrienne, Emma moved to True Prospect Farm to work with five-time Olympian and 13-time USEA Leading Rider of the Year, Phillip Dutton. During her tenure with Phillip, Emma cared for many famous equine athletes including Connaught, TruLuck, Woodburn, and Mystery Whisper. She’s groomed at Burghley, Blenheim and Boekelo, cared for horses at the 2006 and 2010 World Championships, 2007 Pan Am Games, and 2008 and 2012 Olympics, and groomed at Rolex Kentucky and Fair Hill International every year since 2001. And now she’s here to help you! Submit your grooming questions and Emma just may be able to teach you a few of her tricks!

    I provide full and partial body clipping for horses. Services include:

    • Brushing & Combing
    • Full and partial body clips
    • Clipping for horses with Cushings
    • Body rub-down after clipping
    • Cleanup of barn to remove hair from stall/aiselways


    Please have your horse caught and ready in his/her stall prior to clipping. If you are able, bathing your animal the day before will enable me to do a much smoother job. Please alert me to any physical or behavioral issues that I should be aware of when working with your animal.


    I have worked as a professional shearer of alpacas, goats, sheep, and llamas for over a decade and my trademark has always been to treat the animals I work with in a kind and gentle (but practical) manner. I originally started clipping horses as a service to owners whose horses had Cushings disease and could not shed their coats properly. I now offer full and partial body clips to horses who need greater comfort in the winter months when being worked. While it is a favor to them to help them “air out” by removing hair, remember that you also need to be sure that you have the appropriate blankets and housing for them, since removing their hair will make them more susceptible to the colder weather.


    Clipping prices include brushing and post-clipping rub down and blanketing, if desired
    Horse full body clip: $150
    Trace or blanket clip: $90
    Pony or donkey body clip: $75

    Please see our clipping request form to view area of service. For stables located more than 30 miles from my home base in Boyds, Maryland, there may be a small travel fee.

    If you do not wish legs to be clipped, the price is reduced by $20. Extra large draft horses will require an additional $30.

    Please note: I am not qualified to trim cow or horse/pony/donkey hooves; for clients in central Maryland I will be happy to recommend my own farrier. For other areas, please ask me – my clients often give me referrals to their farriers/blacksmiths.


    Shroeder Shearing is a service that benefits Star Gazing Farm Animal Sanctuary.

    Areas served

    • Maryland (home base)
    • Virginia
    • New Jersey
    • Southern Pennsylvania
    • North Carolina
    • South Carolina
    • Georiga
    • Florida
    • Alabama

    If you need service in another area, please email me; I may be willing and able to make a trip to your area. If not, I will try to refer you to another good shearer!

    Tuesday, September 30, 2008

    Shave and A Haircut: Teaching Your Horse to Stand for Clipping

    If you have been around horses for any length of time, you have probably encountered a horse that will not tolerate being clipped. Perhaps the horse believes those noisy, tingly clippers to be a horse-eating monster or perhaps the world’s largest horsefly. Regardless, he’s going to have none of it! Further attempts of clipping a horse that is fearful can be dangerous for you and him.

    If you have a horse that is not comfortable with your hand touching his ears, face, legs, etc., you’ve got a horse that will not tolerate clippers. You want your horse to be comfortable and relaxed as you clip him; worry free and without a care. But how do you get there? As with many other training methods, you need to desensitize your horse to the sight, sound, and feel of the clippers.

    The following steps will enable you to accomplish clipping your horse safely:

    Once he stands calmly as you rub the clippers over his body as they are turned off, you can then move on to the next step.

    Move the clippers toward his ears, letting him hear the sound close up. He may lift his head higher to move away from the sound, but when he drops his head turn off the clippers and pat him, speak softly to him to reward him. It may take you a while to get him used to having the clippers around his ears, but continue the method of turning off the clippers and rewarding him with a pat each time he lowers his head.

    Do the same thing with his legs. Again, starting at the elbow and working your way down to the fetlock, lay the body of the clippers against his leg and work your way down. Once he stands still, reward him by turning the clippers off.

    For the legs, turn the clippers on and start from the elbow move the clipper body down to the fetlock. Once there, initiate the blade on the feathers of the fetlock. If there is any reaction from your horse, move the body of the clippers back up the leg and then return to the fetlock.

    Patient consistency will allow you desensitize and train your horse to stand while being clipped. You will, most likely, need to repeat these steps several times before your horse is fully comfortable with the clipping process. However, your efforts will be worth it once you see how nice your horse looks with his new shave and a haircut.

    Show Horse Promotions
    The Show Planner

    Mary Murray
    Certified Internet Webmaster
    i-Net+ Certified
    A+ Certified

    Body Clipping

    This is a controversial subject at the very least. I’ve body clipped various horses (and dogs) many times over the years and I find that if done properly it is well worth the effort. I’ve had those horses that would look like a Shetland even while wearing the best of blankets all winter under lights. Those horses would get an annual body clipping in the Feb-Mar time frame so that riding in the Spring heat of North Carolina would not cause them to sweat unduly.

    I’ve clipped horses as late as April and not experienced any problem with their show coats for that summer even though I constantly hear that body clipping ruins their natural hair coats. For this you have to form your own opinions, I just don’t think it does. It does take 2-3 wks before a body clipped horse looks natural (I’ve seen some that were gorgeous just after clipping).

    I don’t body clip a pasture horse until all danger of cold/cool weather has passed. I body clip these horses as a convenience for me and for them. I will body clip a stalled horse only if I have a blanket for that horse to wear.

    Items to have on hand

    I like to start on the neck and work backwards. For the first pass, always go WITH the lay of the hair (face the blades towards the rear of the horse). Stop at the top of the legs with the large clippers and after finishing the entire body you can use smaller clippers to trim the legs. Be cautious around the mane – you don’t want to end up roaching your horse’s mane.

    I usually do the head and legs last or sometimes even the next day. I have a miniature horse that stays in the pasture and I trim his entire head several times during the winter. If I don’t his halter gets too tight on him – when his head is trimmed his halter is very loose (he grows a massive amount of hair). I body clip a path for his harness surcingle in the winter when I’m doing any winter driving. It is the only way his harness will fit. I body clip his neck when it is time for the vet to give shots (so the vet can find his neck).

    On your first clipping task, make sure you set aside several hours for completion of the task. The more you do this the faster you will become. I can usually trim an entire horse (that is cooperative) in 45 minutes.

    © 2000 – 2010 Show Horse Promotions
    All Rights Reserved
    Privacy Statement

    The Show Horse Promotions web site is an informational web site, this information is subject to change without notice. Any use of, or actions taken based upon any of the information contained on this web site is done entirely at your own risk.

    Show Horse Promotions expressly prohibit you from republishing or redistributing this content without first receiving our written consent. By using this site, you agree not to hold us liable for any errors or delays in this content, or for any actions that you take in reliance thereon. This site contains links to other Internet sites. These links are not endorsements by us of any products or services in those sites, and we have not endorsed or approved any information in those sites.

    My Soapbox for Equestrian Writings

    I rarely do a full clip on my horses since they’ve always spent lots of time outside. However, each year, I do a slight variation on the trace clip depending on how the mood strikes me and how long it takes for me to get a straight line.

    One of the resources I’ve always used is the Peasridge Clipper Advice site which shows handy diagrams of the different clip styles.

    Here are some of Freedom’s “looks” over the years! I’ve still not decided how I’d like him to end up this year although I’m leaning toward a “Chaser Clip.”

    Share this:

    • Twitter
    • Facebook
    • Email

    Like this:

    4 thoughts on “ A guide to trace clips ”

    I’m still debating too. I did a modified trace clip last year that ended with the cut out up the flank. Nothing off the hip. That worked well. I may go with the Irish clip, less work for me. And easier lines.

    I’m hoping I don’t have to clip this year. Last year was the first time my horse had to be clipped, and he was outside with no lights. This year he’s under lights, and I’m actually blanketing him on the colder nights because he doesn’t have a lot of coat yet. If he doesn’t get too heavy, I will happily leave him a little fuzzy. Last year he would come in soaking wet from turnout, just dripping everywhere, and riding he would sweat all over, so I HAD to clip him. I’ll do a hunter clip if I have to. But here’s hoping I can avoid it…. (I live in AZ – rides are often in warmer weather, where their hair is just too much!)

    I’m so glad I didn’t clip last year – as the weather here in Ireland was extreme (relatively speaking of course!) I was only hacking out 2 or 3 times a week and he stays out in winter. It seemed unfair to have him standing out the rest of the time without his own natural insulation. This year I’m doing a bit more but still not convinced it’s enough for a clip. He was warm and wet after hunting a couple of weeks ago but I kept him in till he dried and cooled, light coat on and he was happy! Is this clipping a ‘human’ thing’?

    I’ve tried to go without clipping my horses because I like the idea of them having their own coat. But at least with my TB, clipping really helps because he gets himself SO worked up at times that he gets quite lathered. I worry that without clipping that he’ll get too chilled. My Trakehner was a much more laid back horse and he cooled out more easily. I do agree there’s a ‘human” element to it but at least if they’re clipped you can help them acclimate to the temperature swings.

    Like finding perfect fit breeches or a dirt repellent horse, few things are as appealing and as hard to attain as a well cut mane. UNTIL NOW.

    Professional groom Jason McQueen of Boston, Massachusetts shares the secret to a quality cut. He’s so anal particular about mane cutting, the jumpers he looks after have better haircuts than a lot of people on the circuit. And he’s given them to some pret-ty famous horses—horses ridden by the likes of Eric Lamaze, Kimberly Prince, Amy Millar.

    Skeptics, prepare to have your MIND BLOWN.

    Step 1: Use the right tools. “I suggest getting a sharp, long bladed pair of scissors at Office Depot—the ones with a big handle. You’ll need these if the tail is very thick,” says McQueen.

    “While you’re there, get a matching pair of sharp, short, micro-tip scissors for the mane. Mine are made by Fiskars. All together, they should cost $20. You’ll also need a plastic mane comb and some disposable latex gloves, too.”

    Step 2: Prepare the hair. “Bathe the horse the day before, washing the tail, mane and forelock. You want to scrub right down to the tail bone and base of the mane and forelock. Rinse well. Do not condition,” he says.

    Step 3: Pull the mane. “Manes can be tricky. Most have to be thinned often. They tend to get thick and bushy and that makes them hard to handle,” he says.

    Use a plastic comb, says McQueen. (The metal ones tend to break the hairs.) And work with small sections of mane.

    “Put on your latex gloves, they help you hold the hairs. Grab a few hairs with your fingers, push the rest of the hairs up with the comb like you are teasing the hair, hold on tightly to the hairs you’ve separated, use the comb as leverage and pull down quickly and with force. If the hairs don’t come out, try grabbing less hair next time.

    “Check after each pull that the hairs are pulling from the root,” he continues. “You will see the roots attached to the hairs.”

    Pull section by section until the entire mane is the same thickness. “You usually don’t have to pull near the top or the bottom of the mane where the hair is naturally thinner,” he adds.

    Step 4: Trim the mane. Now we’re getting to the secret in the mane cutting sauce. Use the small scissors and start with a well combed mane.

    “Comb the mane straight down. If the horse shakes its head, comb again,” says McQueen.

    “Start at the top, hold your scissors at a 45 degree angle, pointing them at 10 o’clock. Cut straight into the bottom of the mane. Keep making cuts, one beside another all the way down to the bottom. The mane will look very jagged. You can cut quite far in at this step—up to an inch.”

    Comb out the mane and cut all the way down again, this time the cuts a bit shorter. Then comb out and do it again.

    “Keep combing out and cutting, each time making the cuts a bit shorter until you are just cleaning up stray hairs.” This technique makes the mane appear straight.

    Step 5: Trim the forelock. The forelock is often overlooked in mane maintenance, says McQueen. “I always use Cowboy Magic detangler in the forelock. Apply a small dollop, massage it in, comb it straight down and cut with the long blade scissors. You can do a lot with the forelock. Cut it straight across or get creative,” he says.

    “I prefer a blunt bang. However, most people do prefer a natural looking forelock. If you’re not into the blunt cut, you can clean up the forelock with a 10 o’clock cut.”

    Step 6: Bang the tail. “Spray Show Sheen in the tail and let it dry. Comb out the tail, ensuring not to break off any hairs. The tail and forelock should never be thinned, in my opinion,” says McQueen.

    Once combed, hold the tail up slightly from the underside of the tailbone before cutting. “Most horses hold their tails slightly raised when they move,” he explains.

    “Comb out the tail again, then bunch it together and run your hand down the tail to the bottom and cut bluntly. Comb it out again and clean up the blunt cut,” he says. “If the tail is very thick, you can use clippers with a #40 blade instead of scissors.”

    How to clip your horse

    Banging a tail means to cut it off blunt at the bottom. Traditionally horse’s tails were banged to avoid them becoming soiled and straggly at the bottom. Not all horses should have their tails banged. Arabians and Welsh ponies and cobs should have manes and tails left natural. If you are showing in breed shows check to see what the requirements are.

    If you are headed for the jumper or hunter ring or ride western tails are not generally banged. Horses ridden dressage will often have their tails banged. Again, check the grooming requirements of your sport before proceeding. Also if your horse’s tail is on the short side, banging it may only make it look shorter.

    If you’re a pleasure rider, and not heading to the show ring, there’s no need to bang your horse’s tail, unless of course, you like the look.

    Banging a tail is not just a matter of chopping it off at the bottom. Before you begin, pay attention to how high your horse carries its tail while it is trotting. Some horses carry their tails quite high, while others keep their tails flatter. You want the cut to be ​parallel to the ground while the horse is moving. If you just chop it off while the horse is standing, when the horse is moving the tail will look uneven. The banged tail should end about 4”/10 cm to 5”/12cm below the hocks. Any shorter may detract from the look of the tail. If your horse has a short or skimpy tail, you might want to skip banging it altogether. To get the right length, you can mark the desired cutting line with a little piece of masking tape or a chalk mark before you cut. Better to leave the tail too long, than cut it off too short.

    The Banging Process

    To bang your horse’s tail, you’ll need:

    • Mane comb
    • Sharp scissors
    • A plastic bottle or cardboard tube about 4 in/10cm in diameter (optional).
    • Or in place of a tube or bottle an assistant who will ‘lend an arm’ (optional).

    Your horse should be accustomed to being groomed and handled and be calm when you work around its hindquarters. Follow these instructions to bang your horse’s tail:

    1. Brush the tail smooth. Don’t wet it. Grooming sprays and de-tanglers may make it harder to keep the scissors steady for a straight, clean clip because they make the hair more slippery.
    2. Have your assistant place the bottle sideways beneath the base of horse’s tail so that it lifts the tail more or less into the position it would be if the horse were moving. If your horse isn’t going to squirm, it might be relaxed enough to hold the bottle in place on its own. Alternatively, you could just hold the tail up with your arm, but this is more work, and you could easily move your arm without realizing it. An assistant can be helpful to either cut or hold the tail up.
    3. Grasp the bottom-most portion of the tail and hold it into a tight bundle. Cut straight across the tail hairs. When the tail is dropped (bottle, tube or arm removed) the cut ends of the tail will be at a slight angle to the ground—the front being slightly shorter than the back. The cut will now be square to the ground when the horse is moving.

    As your horse’s tail grows, the tail will have to be trimmed again. How often will depend on how quickly the hairs grow.

    How to clip your horse

    Doing the Paperwork- you will need:
    •Miniature horse
    •Breeding documents
    •Registration papers
    •Show registration forms

    Having the best confirmation and
    qualities in your miniature horse makes
    all the difference in the ring.

    Presenting your miniature horse to the judge:
    When showing your mini, your goal is to keep the judge’s attention on your horse, and to reduce the
    time you are between the judge and your mini.
    1) When leading your horse, always lead from the left side.
    2) When leading, your shoulder should be even with your horse’s throat latch. You should not be pulling
    your horse, or being pulled by your horse.
    3) Your right hand holds the lead below the snap or chain of the lead, and the tail of your lead is
    coiled in your left hand in a figure-8. (Never wrap the lead around your hand)
    4) Your hands are generally held at waist height.
    5) You should be beside your horse, not touching or rubbing your horse when leading.
    6) Keep your eyes on the judge. When you are on the move, you should watch where you are going, but
    every 3 or 4 steps, look at the judge.
    7) When asked to line up, make sure there is at least one-horse length between you and the next
    horse. You should always have at least a horse length between you and the next horse when you are in
    the arena.

    This is important when the line stops… make sure you don’t crowd the horse in front of you. Watch
    for red-ribbons. Horses wearing a red-ribbon in there tail are prone to kicking. When you are on the
    move, you should watch where you are going, but every 3 or 4 steps, look at the judge.

    8) Stop your horse so that his nose is even with the horses in line before you.
    9) When stopped, set up or “square” your horse’s feet. Then look for the judge.
    10) If the judge is on the right side of your horse, you should be on the left. If the judge is on the
    left side, you should step around the nose to the right side of your horse.
    11) Patterns are very common in Shows. Be prepared to back, trot, turn on the hind legs or answer
    questions about your mini.

    Grooming Your Mini for a Show
    It is recommended that you have an adult or experienced horseman help you fit your mini if you have
    not done this in the past. It is always a good safety rule, to have another person with you when you
    working around your horse. For best results on show day, practice several times before the show.

    1) Bathe your horse before the show using an animal friendly product. You can purchase a shampoo
    intended for livestock or horses at your local feed store.

    2) After your mini is dry, you need to clip various spots. Make sure you plan your washing to leave
    plenty of time for drying and clipping.

    3) Clip all of the following:
    a. Ears
    b. Bridle Path
    c. Fetlocks
    d. Muzzle
    e. Jaw
    f. Other long hair
    g. Optional is a full body clip

    4) Include grooming of the Mane and tail:
    a. Comb out all snarls
    b. Can braid both to keep clean until show.
    c. Braiding the mane can help train it to the side
    d. Braids are not allowed in the show ring

    5) Hooves
    a. Well cleaned of any manure and mud
    b. Hooves should be properly trimmed
    c. Hoof polish is option; clear on striped or light colored hooves, black on dark hooves
    d. Hoof polish should be applied just prior to entering the ring for show (leave enough time for it to

    How to graduate early from high school

    A traditional high school education lasts four years, but this time is more flexible than you may think. Depending on the online high school you choose, you can cut as much as a year off of that timeline. Even if you have already completed some high school, you can still graduate early. How? Take more classes at a time or take classes in the summer so you can attend high school for a shorter time period. Graduating early gives you the exact same high school diploma as you would earn if you graduated in four years – you just get it sooner. If this is your goal, you have to be willing to put in the extra work.

    Online high school programs make it easier than ever to finish your diploma. They offer the flexibility to work while you learn. Many also give the flexibility to take more courses at a time or during the summer so you graduate sooner. This helps you achieve your goals faster.

    What Are the Reasons People Graduate Early?

    There are plenty of reasons why students want to graduate early. This is part of why more students are opting to enroll in an online high school.

    • Graduating from high school early means you can take your next step sooner. Whether your goal after high school is a different job, career training, part- or full-time study, you’ll be able to get started earlier. Your goal might just be the feeling of pride you have knowing you finished high school.
    • Finishing high school sooner gives you time to pursue other interests. Maybe you’d like to do an internship or take a gap year to travel or save up for school. Graduating earlier gives you the flexibility to do as you wish.
    • Some people prefer to take high school summer classes online to graduate early because they don’t enjoy high school and want to be able to finish their education as soon as possible.

    Regardless of your reasons for graduating early, attending a high school online summer school can be a great way to finish your graduation requirements at your own pace.

    How to Graduate Online High School Early

    It may be much easier at an online high school to graduate early than it is when you’re enrolled in traditional schooling. Online high school programs still require the same amount of credit hours, but because you don’t have to sit through a class during specified hours, you can learn whenever you have time. You might also combine your traditional schooling with an online program. To do this, you need to talk to a guidance or career counselor. They can help you create a schedule that includes high school classes during the summer. Earning credits from high school online summer courses will let you complete the requirements for your diploma faster so you can graduate early.

    You’re probably asking yourself now, “how to graduate high school early?” Just like in college, it’s possible to graduate high school early with your diploma. It’s not easy because of how much hard work it takes, but it’s definitely possible.

    Here’s the basic game plan on how to graduate high school early.

    While still in high school, make the most of your standardized test scores with either our SAT prep or ACT prep classes now.

    How to graduate early from high school

    Reasons To Graduate Early

    Crazy as it may sound, there are valid reasons to graduate early from high school.

    The most common reasons include:

    • Pursuing a college scholarship for student-athletes
    • Getting started in a specific trade
    • Taking a gap year

    Whatever the reason, it’s important to know that it’s absolutely possible to graduate high school early.

    Figure Out Your Early Graduation Timeline

    The first step is figuring out how early you want to graduate.

    Just how early do you want to get out of school:

    • A semester early?
    • A year early?

    If you have a specific activity in mind after graduation, how long will that take to pursue before college? Keep this point in mind – It’s normally much easier to graduate a semester early than an entire year.

    Don’t worry if you think that’s not enough time. If you graduate a semester early your senior year and go to college the following fall, you could have up to eight months of free time available.

    Figure Out Your Credit Requirements

    The next step is figuring out how many credits you need to graduate.

    This step boils down to simple math. Every school has different requirements, so the first thing to do is to talk with your guidance counselor.

    Your student handbook may have the information as well but talk with a counselor first. You’ll get that information quicker and can ask any other questions immediately.

    From there, it’s again simple math:

    • Add up how many credits you’ve earned so far (based on what year you’re in)
    • Subtract accumulated credits from the total necessary for graduation

    Now you have a baseline number to hit.

    Work Out Specific Class Requirements

    Now you have to know which classes you have to get done first.

    Besides actual credit numbers, you have specific subject requirements to fulfill too. Examples include:

    • Math,
    • English
    • Science
    • Social Studies
    • Additional Electives

    Depending on the school, you may have to take very specific courses, like Geometry and Biology, or it could be more general like X semesters of Math and English.

    Account what you’ve taken so far, and then plot out what’s left subject-wise. Don’t worry as hard about electives, because you’ll have more flexibility in what to pick there anyway.

    Think About College Requirements

    Next, think about what you’ll need to have for college itself.

    If you have specific schools you’re applying to then:

    • Check out credit requirements on their admissions website pages
    • List out what you’ve already taken subject-wise and credit amount
    • Calculate what’s left to take

    Here’s a good way to use up your elective credits to plug holes up when applying to schools. If you need to take more science courses, then skip taking a phys ed class and take the science one instead.

    Map Out Your Remaining Classes And Credits

    After research, build out your plan.

    Now that you have collected all this associated data, it’s time to use it. With your guidance counselor, do the following:

    • Clearly define how early you want to graduate
    • List out your current class and credit accumulations
    • Mark out what you need to still take for graduation fulfillment
    • Divide those remaining requirements over your remaining semesters
    • Address any specific courses you have to take for college application purposes

    At this point, you will have an actionable game plan for finishing off high school early. However, make sure you have hobbies or meditation practices in place to handle the added stress.

    For more test strategy, college admissions, and scholarship application tips sign up for our FREE class happening right now!

    It won`t be wrong if we call the online high school education as an evolution in the field of education. Along with the development and advancement of the education given in the traditional schools, there was an utter need of a system that could provide education and degree to the home schooled ones. Many students opt for online education later in their lives because somehow they were unable to complete their formal education in a traditional school. These unfortunate students deserved some way or the other which paves the way for them so that they succeed in getting their diplomas. Recruiters or even the small-scale companies consider the diploma as basic eligibility criteria of the students for employment. The doors to higher employment and higher remuneration just boosts up once a student gets a high school diploma.

    Also, it isn’t that the recruiters don’t consider or deject these degrees. This is a sheer myth and misconception of the people. The diplomas attained from these online schools as well as the diploma attained from a traditional school goes in equal proportions and they are given equal relevance by the employers.

    Why Graduate Early?

    The answer to this question is simple i.e. just to save time. No one wants to spend years in education because that not only disallows or prevents him from applying in companies for jobs but also makes him or her expend fee on his courses. A smart student would always eye the subjects he has to master, credits he has to achieve and the knowledge he has to garnish. Eyeing these things, he goes on to attain his diploma in the shortest time possible i.e. 2-3 years and comes out with flying colors.

    Another reason which lets them graduate early is that here in the online high school, students learn at their own pace. It all is dependent upon the number of hours they put into their studies. The more they focus on their coursework, assignments and credit score, faster they would be able to attain their diplomas. In the USA, the typical diploma course requires a maximum of 4 years to get completed. Even if you are attending a real-time school, it would minimum take 3 years for you to graduate with a diploma at the earliest. If you are graduating from your school early, you will be receiving the same diploma which you would have achieved in 4 years. Now let`s go deep into this regarding how to graduate early from high school?

    If a student wants to graduate from high school early, he or she must first acquire the assistance of their high school counselor, and the procedure may also include the participation of a school administration and the student’s parent or guardian. It is likely that the student will be required to develop a plan for his or her future after high school.
    What courses do you need to take in order to graduate from high school?

    • What Courses Are Necessary to Graduate from High School. Students who intend to attend college in the near future should enroll in at least 23 credits throughout their high school years. Credits are necessary in the following areas: 3.0 points in English Language Arts, 2.0 in Mathematics, 2.20 points in Science (2.5 points in Social Studies), 2.20 points in Physical Education (Health), 1.20 points in Arts, 1.20 points in Career and Technical Education (0.5 points in Educational Technology)

    Is it bad to graduate high school early?

    Graduating early may have a number of disadvantages as well. If you are attempting to complete your graduation requirements ahead of schedule, it might be intimidating. Furthermore, being on an entirely different route from your friends and classmates might be socially isolating. In addition, you will have less time to devote to developing a competitive college application profile profile.

    Is it worth it to graduate early high school?

    It’s possible that graduating early has certain drawbacks. Trying to complete your graduation requirements ahead of schedule can be a stressful experience. The fact that you are on a different route than your friends and classmates might be socially isolating. In addition, you will have less time to devote to developing a strong college admissions profile.

    Can you graduate at 15?

    Some students graduate a year or two early, while others graduate significantly earlier. I skipped two primary classes and graduated from high school at the age of 15, which was many years ago. I had earned enough high school credits to graduate a year before they agreed to let me take high school courses in junior high and high school.

    Is graduating in 3 years worth it?

    Several factors lead students to contemplate leaving college early, including financial need. According to the College Board’s study on the average cost of attending a private college in 2020–2021, a student who graduates in three years will save almost $50,000 compared to a student who finishes in four years.

    Is it dumb to graduate early?

    The fact that you graduated from high school early is not a bad thing! In any case, not to colleges. They’re on the lookout for bright, driven students, so an early graduation is a great indicator in their books. Furthermore, as a junior, you will graduate ahead of schedule, but not so ahead of schedule that you will appear entirely out of place with the typical high school graduate.

    How do you skip a grade?

    Prerequisites for Skipping a Grade

    1. A written request must be submitted. Send your request to skip a grade to the school principal in writing, and preserve a copy of the letter for yourself. Expert Advice and Guidance Check to verify that only genuine needs are being considered while evaluating your request.
    2. Accomplishment in the classroom, emotional readiness, student acceptance, and the desire to change.

    Can online school help graduate early?

    It is advantageous for students to complete their education through an online school since the flexible and convenient schedule of the online school makes it easier for them to change their study hours. As a result, the sooner you finish the requisite amount of credits for a course, the sooner you will graduate from high school.

    Can I graduate early as a junior?

    Students often indicate an interest in graduating early around the time of their junior year, according to counselors, but having the conversation sooner will provide students a significant advantage in the process. Block schedules, which allow students to attend more classes in a day, and trimester calendars may be beneficial to students who want to graduate as soon as possible, according to the National Center for Education Statistics.

    Can u graduate at 16?

    Yes, it is possible to complete high school at the age of sixteen. You could pass a state high school equivalency exam and skip high school altogether, allowing you to attend college right away. Of course, your high school counselor will not inform you of this, so search it up on the internet for your state’s education department.

    Who is the youngest person to ever graduate from college?

    At the age of thirteen, Jack Rico has already obtained four associate degrees. With his graduation from the University of Nevada, Las Vegas, 15-year-old Jack Rico of the United States has become the youngest individual ever to obtain his undergraduate degree at the institution (UNLV).

    How can I go to college early?

    Consider some of the alternatives available to you for obtaining a jump start on your college career.

    1. Advanced Placement courses and standardized assessments AP courses are similar to college courses but are taught in a high school context. Dual enrollment at a college or university
    2. community college courses
    3. and other options are available. Summer college programs are available. Intensive college preparation programs.

    What age do you graduate HS?

    The United States of America After kindergarten, the twelfth grade is the twelfth school year after that. In addition, it is the final year of obligatory secondary education, usually known as high school. Students are typically between the ages of 17 and 18.

    At what age do you get out of college?

    Generally speaking, the vast majority of pupils graduate from high school when they are 18 years old. They will graduate from college at the age of 22 if they enroll in college immediately and complete the curriculum requirements in the standard four-year time frame allotted to them.

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    • Become A Writer
      • How It Works
      • Why write for us?
      • FAQ
      • Writer Testimonials
      • Apply Now
    • Hire a Writer
      • Subject Matter Experts
        • Automotive
        • Medical
        • Travel
        • Science
        • Education/Academia
      • Contact us to Hire a Writer
    • Current Writers
      • Style Guide For Writers
      • SEO Writing For Dummies
      • OWJ Writer Panel
    • Blog
    • Contact Us

    Apply as a Freelance Writer

    Where great writers meet great brands!

    Get paid up to $50 per article writing Web content about what interests you for some of the most recognizable brands in the world.

    How We Work

    Apply as a freelance writer today and let Online Writing Jobs bring the writing work to you. Become an official Online Writing Jobs freelancer and take advantage of writing jobs that pay well and weekly. We offer variety of online website copy-writing opportunities, making it easier for writers to find freelance work online.

    Turn Experience into Income

    Leverage your unique knowledge and experiences to help you find freelance writing jobs online. Apply real-word knowledge to website copy-writing to start earning now. We value the hard work it’s taken you to become an expert. For that reason, you’ll find our rates to be among the highest in the online writing industry.

    Hire the Right Freelance Writers

    Online Writing Jobs offers content-writing services to top companies in a variety of industries and all over the globe. We aim to pair quality writers with our clients to creation authoritative website content for a number of different functions, including SEO content with the goal of increasing search engine visibility and a positive web presence.

    Recently on our blog

    As anyone who checks this space regularly must surely have gathered by now, our blog’s on a bit of a hiatus. We’ve just been too busy creating great content for our clients to write blog posts (what’s that saying about …

    When you’re writing for the Internet, one of the most important things to remember is that readers don’t have time to waste poring over your content, reading paragraph after paragraph to see if you’re going to give them the information …

    We’ve given people plenty of guidance about writing over the years, from how to use a semicolon to how to avoid common typos to how to write title tags and meta descriptions. But we’ve never addressed the entire process of …

    Once you begin thinking about portmanteaus and learn to identify them, you may start to feel a bit cursed. Why? Because you’ll soon discover that portmanteaus are everywhere these days. So unless you love being fixated on a single subject …

    Since 2011, The Write Practice has been helping millions of people accomplish their writing goals through deliberate practice. Let us help you too!

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    Take Our Free Assessment

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    Your First Practice

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    Get the Feedback You Need in Our Writers Workshop

    Read our daily articles and use our creative writing exercises to help you become a better writer faster.

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    Writing Sprints: A Simple Exercise That Benefits Every Writer

    How do you defeat procrastination, write more in less time, and do it with less struggle? Two words: writing sprints.

    Word sprints are an amazing writing tool that you can use to improve your writing. Sprinting pushes you to write more words fast, by forcing you to start writing and ignore your inner editor.

    They also get you to concentrate on one of the most important ways to improve your writing life: consistent practice.

    With continuous practice, word sprints can even help you develop a writing habit that will empower you to write and actually finish a novel or a screenplay—and maybe even develop a career as a writer.

    But what are writing sprints? And how can you use them effectively?

    I’ll teach you in this post!

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    I Wrote a Book. Now What? 3 Unexpected Ways to Practice Writing After You Publish

    Congrats, you wrote a book and launched it! It’s on to the next book. But maybe you’re feeling tired. As for writing a whole book, you need a break. Maybe you’re thinking, “I wrote a book. Now what?”

    But can you take a break and still practice writing, if you’re not writing?

    Yes, you can! By taking a different, brief and temporary, writing approach.

    In this post, I’ll share how focusing on 3 R’s—Reviews, Reading Panels and Residencies—can help you develop your writing platform in new and unexpected ways.

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    How to Revise a Novel: A Revision List to Edit With Confidence

    Finishing a first draft is a huge deal. If you just accomplished this, be proud of yourself! At the same time, you might be wondering how to revise a novel after that first draft is done. There’s a lot of advice out there. Which do you listen to?

    The revision process doesn’t have to be complicated. However, you might feel—especially if this is your first completed draft ever—intimidated to edit your book. There’s a lot of words and scenes to review. Where do you begin?

    In this article, I’d like to share how I took a daunting editing process and created a simplified, concise, and clear strategy to revising your first draft. I do this with what I call a Revision List—a table with five columns that can help you simplify big ideas.

    If you’re like me, you won’t ever want to edit a first draft without it!

    Writing has its rewards when you join the Partner Program. Learn how to get paid for the content you publish and the audiences you build.

    Writing has its rewards when you join the Partner Program. Learn how to get paid for the content you publish and the audiences you build.

    Writing has its rewards when you join the Partner Program. Learn how to get paid for the content you publish and the audiences you build.

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    Two ways to earn.

    Member reading time.

    The more time Medium members spend reading your content, the more money you earn. Learn more about how we calculate reading time.

    Referred memberships.

    In addition to the content you publish, you can refer readers to become Medium members and get half of В their membership fee, net of standard payment processor fees, for as long as they remain a member. Learn more about Referred Memberships.

    How to get started.

    Eligibility criteria.

    Publish a story.

    You must publish at least one story to apply to the Partner Program.

    Gain 100+ followers.

    You need to have at least 100 followers to apply.

    Stay active.

    You should publish at least once every six months to keep earning.

    Grow your audience and yourВ engagement.

    Medium gives you the tools to connect and build relationships with over 100 million readers around the world.

    FAQs about the Partner Program.

    Do you need a Medium membership to publish in the Partner Program?

    No, you don’t have to be a paying Medium member to join the Partner Program and start earning. If you do subscribe to be a member, your monthly membership fees will directly support writers on Medium.

    How much will I make under the Partner Program?

    There are two ways to earn money with the Partner Program:

    • Partner Program writers are paid monthly based on how much time Medium members spend reading their stories. The longer members read, the more writers earn.
    • Every time you convert a reader to a paying member you get half of that reader’s membership fee, net of standard payment processor fees, for as long as they are an active member.

    Learn more about how Partner Program earnings are calculated here.

    How does the Partner Program work for publications?

    Writers can earn money through the Partner Program and include their story in a publication at the same time. It will have no impact on how much they earn.

    Can I add to or remove stories once they’re published under the Partner Program?

    Yes. You can add to or remove any story even if it’s already published. If you choose to edit a story after publishing, please keep our editorial guidelines in mind.

    Can non-members read stories that are published through the Partner Program?

    Yes. Readers who aren’t yet members can access a select number of free stories per month, so your ideas still reach everyone on the internet. For unlimited stories, readers can upgrade to membership for $5/month.
    However, you’ll only earn money based on reading time when a subscribing member reads your story, or when a reader becomes a member within 30 days of reading your story.

    What’s the best way to increase my Referred Memberships?

    Here are some tools and tips to increase referrals:

    • Referrals landing page: Every Partner Program writer has a personalized referral landing page where readers can become a paying member for unlimited access to their writing, plus everything else on Medium. Writers can promote their landing page on other platforms to try to drive more Referred Memberships.В
    • Email subscriptions: When a non-member subscribes to receive your stories via email (see details on email subscriptions here), they’ll be asked if they want to become a member. If they convert via that prompt, that membership will count toward your referral earnings.В
    • You may promote your referral link in your posts. As a best practice, we recommend that the link is as unobtrusive as possible (stick it at the beginning or bottom of your story) and that you give the reader a sense of why they should support your work and what they can expect. If it’s not already explained in your message, you’ll also need to let your readers know that you’ll receive a portion of their membership fees. Here is a helpful Federal Trade Commission FAQ about affiliate referrals.В

    Do I have to promote Referred Memberships to earn money in the Partner Program?

    No. Promoting Referred Memberships is optional and in addition to earnings generated based on member read time. Medium writers who prefer to earn solely based on member reading time are more than welcome to do so.

    Where can I find the full criteria for Partner Program eligibility?

    Please review the Partner Program Terms here and the Eligibility Requirements for the Partner Program can be found here.

    Good ideas need spaces to take shape before they can take off. So we built Medium to make it easier for more people to read, write and explore ideas together. That’s why we’re an open platform 20,000 people use to share their expertise and experiences every day. It’s also why we’re a publisher, creating the stories 150-million Medium readers are asking for. And why we work with well-known authors, magazines and newspapers to help more people find great thinking that expands their perspective.

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    A place to think,
    “I never thought of that.”

    Find writing from world-class publications and undiscovered voices that dive into the heart of the matter—no matter the topic—to bring new ideas to the surface.

    Ghost is a powerful app for new-media creators to publish, share, and grow a business around their content. It comes with modern tools to build a website, publish content, send newsletters & offer paid subscriptions to members.

    Advanced creator tools

    Don’t settle for another basic profile that looks just like everyone else. Make it yours.

    Launch your website with a selection of beautiful free themes and tweak the design settings to perfectly match your brand and style.

    Go even further with hundreds of custom themes in our marketplace, or build your own completely custom design from scratch.

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pagesHow to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pagesHow to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pagesHow to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pagesHow to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pagesHow to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    Advanced creator tools

    Publish by web & email newsletter.

    An editor built from the ground-up for professionals. Calm by design, with advanced workflows by default. No more suffering through clumsy toolbars or drag & oops. Immerse yourself in the story with an interface that’s invisible until you need it, and powerful when you do.

    Rich media & dynamic cards.

    Modern publishing requires more than just words. Expand your story with image galleries, gifs, video, audio, products, info boxes, accordion toggles, downloadable files, bookmarks, and so much more.

    Newsletters built-in.

    Deliver posts by email newsletter to your audience, so they’ll be in the loop whenever something new goes live. Segment your audience and send multiple different newsletters based on preference.

    Grow your audience

    Transform those clicks into contacts.

    Until now, building an indie publication with memberships and subscriptions has been difficult and complicated.

    Ghost makes it easy, with native signup forms that turn anonymous views into logged-in members.

    Allow people to sign up for free, or purchase a paid subscription to support your work across monthly and yearly premium tiers.

    Hello, new friends.

    Run your business

    Manage your memberships.

    See who’s signing up, who’s paying, and what they’re reading, so you can get a better understanding of your core audience.

    Native analytics.

    Understand what’s working. Detailed engagement analytics for your audience so you can understand what content is getting the most attention, and who your biggest fans are.

    Offers & promotions.

    Entice new subscribers with offers and promotions to grow your business. Run a 30% discount for your first 100 subscribers, an 80%-off Black Friday sale, or a special promotion for a live event.

    Promote and Grow Your Home Business

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    Bjorn Rune Lie / Getty Images

    The term blog comes from the combination of “web” and “log” or “weblog,” and was eventually shortened to “blog.”

    In the 1990s when blogs first appeared, they were primarily online diaries, where people would provide personal accounts of their lives. They since have grown to include writing and media on topics such as news, politics, music, food, business, and much more—there are even blogs about blogging.

    Like many new resources that pop up, visionary entrepreneurs recognized the blog format as a marketing tool and began using it to provide information and updates to their customers, and as a way to draw in new business. From there, blogging grew into a new and effective marketing strategy.

    What Blog Marketing Is

    Blog marketing is the process of reaching your home business’ target market through the use of a blog. Initially, business owners had a blog separate from their websites, but today, you can easily integrate the two to make it easier for you to manage, as well as easier for visitors to access. Many business owners use a blogging platform, such as WordPress, for both their website and blog.

    Further, as blogging has grown in ease and popularity, many people have created businesses from blogging all on its own, as opposed to having a business first and then blogging. For example, some food blogs are businesses in and of themselves.

    The Pros of Blog Marketing

    The very nature of blogging makes them ideal for marketing since they provide new content to draw people back, and offer a way for consumers and businesses to interact. Here are a few other benefits:

    1. Inexpensive to Start and Run: For the cost of a domain name and web hosting, you can have a customized blog marketing setup.
    2. Easy to Use: Most blogging platforms are simple to use. If you can copy, paste, type, drag and drop, and upload, you can have a professional-looking blog.
    3. Builds Website Traffic: Offering tips, updates, and other new content gives people a reason to come and return to your business website, which gives them the opportunity to buy.
    4. Improves Search Engine Ranking: Google, in particular, likes to find and rank new content. For that reason, many entrepreneurs use blogging specifically for search engine optimization (SEO).
    5. Allows You to Gain Trust and Credibility: People like to know who they’re doing business with. With a blog, you can prove you’re an expert and provide helpful tips and other valuable information—all of which help consumers feel good about spending money on your product or service.
    6. Engages Your Market: While most businesses now use Twitter and other social platforms more than blogs for engagement, blogs can allow you to have a conversation with your market. This gives you the opportunity to build trust and rapport, as well as get feedback and provide customer service.
    7. Creates More Opportunities for Revenue: You can accept advertising, promote affiliate products and get sponsors, adding additional sources of revenue to your business.

    The Cons of Blog Marketing

    Like just everything else in life, there can be a downside to blogging.

    1. Can Be Time-Consuming: Creating new content and updating your blog can take a significant amount of time. Hiring freelance writers and a virtual assistant can help.
    2. Needs a Constant Stream of Ideas: Along with time, thinking of new content ideas is one of the biggest challenges bloggers face.
    3. It Can Take Time to See Results: It can take time to begin building an audience for your blog—you won’t necessarily see traffic right away.
    4. It Needs to Be Marketed Too: You’re using the blog to market your business, but for it to work, people need to know about it, which means you have to find your target market and entice them to your blog.

    How to Do Blog Marketing

    Starting a blog and using it to promote your business can be set up within minutes. It’s the ongoing management and marketing that will take time.

    I’m a

    Help me make
    money writing.

    I want to hire writers

    Help me find top quality freelancers.

    Writing Job Board

    The #1 source on the web for freelance writing jobs.

    Freelance Writing Resources

    Want to make money from your writing? Learn how to improve your freelance writing skills today.

    Writing Contests

    Writing Contests – Poetry, Short Story, Essay, Screenwriting & More


    • New Articles for Writers
    • Top 10 Tips Series
    • Hot Topic Articles

    3 Reasons You’re not Making Money as a Copywriter… and How to Turn it Around

    If your business is causing you pain right now, here are three reasons you might not be making enough money as a copywriter so you can fix it now!

    5 Reasons Hiring Freelance Writers is Worth the Money

    A great copywriter can turn a dull piece of writing into something captivating – something that truly captures your brand’s tone of voice. If you’re serious.

    Top Tips for Putting Together a Successful Freelance Portfolio

    A well-assembled portfolio is an essential marketing tool for any successful freelancer. But how do you ensure your portfolio will attract new business?

    7 Practical Tips to Start Freelance Writing as a College Student

    Want to start freelance writing as a college student? Here are 7 practical tips which will teach you how to get your foot in the door.

    Top 10 Tips to Create a Bid Proposal to Write for a Popular Job Site

    Every job marketplace (e.g., and require you to write a competitive proposal to bid on freelance jobs.

    Top 10 Tips to AVOID in Writing an Email Query Letter

    Email queries are the latest avenue for sending unsolicited submissions to a magazine office. As long as their writer’s guidelines allow it, most editors are.

    Top 10 Tips to Convince Businesses to Outsource Freelance Work to You

    Businesses will outsource work to you if you can prove that you can produce exceptional work; you meet deadlines; you can achieve what the client wants; you.

    10 Tips to Create Your Writer’s Resume Before Applying to Freelance Jobs

    Not every freelance writing job requires you to submit a resume; however, many high-paying writing jobs do, especially in the fields of copywriting, public.

    What is a Ghostwriter?

    Ghost writers are writers for hire who take money but none of the credit for the work produced. The original writer, or author, is hiring the ghost as a.

    Top 10 Topics to Pitch to Teenage Magazines

    Learn about the hottest topics that teenage magazines editors frequently want from freelance writers and how to successfully pitch them.

    Top 10 Hot Topics to Pitch to Editors at Health & Fitness Magazines

    Today, Health and Fitness publications are booming. This makes them great places to pitch freelance articles. Learn how with these top tips.

    Writing an Author Bio – Examples of Professional Bios

    Learn to write an attractive author bio by following the six rules of author biographies and our breaks down of two professional sample bios.

    Perfect Sample Query Letter Templates by Industry

    Learn how freelance writers compose query letters to pitch their articles to magazines and websites from these real query letters written by real writers.

    Get Paid More

    Learn all of the tips and tricks you need to make bid proposals, set your rates, and avoid working for peanuts as a freelance writer.

    Hot Topics Magazines Love to Publish

    Feature Articles

    Free eBooks for Writers


    Thanks for your submission! hosts some of the most talented freelance writers on the web, so you’ve come to the right place to find contestants. We are proud to post your contest here, free of charge. Please come back and submit a new contest anytime!

    Thanks for your submission!

    If you want make a change or wish to remove your job ad in the future, please email [email protected]

    We strive to be the best source of freelance writing jobs on the web, and we maintain our quality thanks to employers like you. Please continue to submit jobs early and often!

    My Best Content

    Ultimate How-To Guides, Lists of Ideas, Inspiration, Resources and lots more.

    About Me

    learn who I am, how it all started and what’s planned for the future!

    My Podcast

    including best-selling authors, bloggers, startup founders and more.

    I’m not a “business” expert or all-knowing guru.

    I’m not even an authority at all that much, to be honest.
    But I do know what I’m great at. And that’s 2 things.

    Building a profitable blog.

    Learn how to start a blog and grow it to profitability in a matter of months.

    Over the past six years, I’ve grown my blog to 500,000 monthly readers, more than 311,248+ subscribers and $450,000+ in revenue.

    I launch tons of experiments and share behind-the-scenes of my own journey in how I make money blogging from this site.

    Large scale content marketing.

    I work hands on as a content marketing consultant with high-growth startups and Fortune 500 brands like LinkedIn, Google, Intuit, Zendesk, SoFi, Gusto, Vistaprint, Close and more to help them create & promote content that grows their audience.

    Check out more about my content marketing work or learn more if you’d like to book me as a speaker.

    If you’re looking for easy tips to make a quick buck, a template for creating a drop-shipping business, or advice for exploiting random market opportunities,
    you won’t find any of that here.

    This community is for people who are here to hustle and build a meaningful business.

    For people who are willing to work hard. To do whatever it takes to bring your vision to life. To summon small moments of courage and push yourself outside of your comfort zone.
    To begin the transformation you’ve been craving in your life.

    For those of you who know you’re meant for more than just a mindless 9-to-5.

    If you’re ready to commit to building a business that gives you the lifestyle you want, this is for you.

    In this article we will see what is a wiki software, its uses and applications, the best wiki software with premium, free and opensource wiki options.

    What is a Wiki Software?

    A ‘wiki software’ is a software which is used to create a collaborative environment known as a “Wiki”.

    With the help of wiki software, people can collaboratively create, edit, and share content on the Wiki.

    The wiki software is installed on a web server and usually runs as a web application, and the contents of the wiki are typically stored in a database.

    Wiki software is also known as Wiki engine, and many of them are free and open-source wiki software which requires a wiki hosting. Usually, companies use these wiki software on their company intranets to create a private wiki network for themselves. There are also hosted wiki solutions where the company gives the wiki software and wiki hosting.

    Note: Sometimes a Wiki is misspelled as ‘Wikki’, example people search the web for a “Personal Wikki’.

    If you are interested in creating an internal wiki website, you should read our guide to creating an internal wiki website using WordPress.

    Uses of Wiki Software

    You could use a wiki software on a public-facing wiki, private network wiki or a personal wiki. Wiki software can be used in different ways based on use cases. They are,

    • As an internal wiki software for your team collaboration
    • As an enterprise / corporate wiki software for storing and sharing your company’s knowledge
    • A classroom wiki software for teachers to share materials with students
    • As a simple personal wiki software for taking notes

    Best Wiki Software

    So many wiki tools are available. Discussions on social forums like Reddit and Quora are never-ending. We have read many of them and found some of the best options. Some are free and open-source wiki software, and some are premium wikis.

    Premium Wiki Software

    As the name suggests, you have to pay to get these wiki software. They simply self-hosted software (you need to hosting separately) or You can get hosted wiki software as a service (SAAS). The best about getting a premium tool is that you get dedicated support and it’s much better than merely relying on community support.

    Note: If you’re not interested in paying for a wiki software you can skip down this part to the free and open-source wiki software list.

    Philip Westfall, November 3, 2017

    We’ve all been there:В

    Staring at your website and just obsessing over a few little things that just don’t seem “right”.

    Maybe it’s the text, the font, the spacing, the colors, or something else.

    Either way, youВ wishВ you could simply make a quick edit and hit save when everything looks perfect.В

    The good news is that modern browsers, (like Chrome, Firefox and Safari) offer a couple ways to preview simple changes to any webpage. Yes, any web page. Even ones that aren’t yours!

    This means you can modify the HTML and CSS (also known as source code) right in your browser.

    Keep in mind, this only modifies the local version on your computer and doesn’t actually rewrite anything on the server. It’s just a preview.В

    But wait, there’s more!В

    There is nowВ a wayВ to make edits to your website using your browser’s developer tools that can be permanently saved on the server, so keep reading!

    Here is the step-by-step process for editing a web page using Google Chrome.

    How to edit a website using developer toolsВ

    • Open any web page with Chrome and hover your mouse over the object you want to edit (ie: text, buttons, or images).
    • Right-click the object and choose “Inspect” from the context menu.The developer tools will open in the lower half of your screen and the selected element will be highlighted within the interface, also known as the DOM.В
    • Double-click the selected object and it will switch to edit mode. You can replace the text or style attributes (ie: colors, fonts, spacing) and then click outside the DOM to apply the changes.
    • Use the “find” shortcut to help you look for specific text or style attributes. (“CMD + F” on Mac or “CTRL + F” on PC)

    Edit any website’s text using our handy bookmarkletВ

    • Highlight the bolded below:

    javascript:document.body.contentEditable = ‘true’; document.designMode=’on’; void 0

  • Drag the highlighted text into your bookmarks bar.
  • Click the icon whenever you want to edit text on a page!
  • How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    Now that you know how to modify any website, let’s get back to what’s most important.

    How to edit your website and save the changes

    This could not be any simpler. If your website is built and hosted with Pagecloud, you can use your browser’s developer tools to make permanent edits to any of your web pages.

    Using the developer tools with Pagecloud:

    • Log in to Pagecloud.
    • Go to the page on your website you want to modify.В
    • Click on the ‘edit page’ symbol in the bottom right hand corner. If you can’t see it, refresh the page. (“CMD + R” on Mac or “CTRL + R” on PC).
    • Once the editor is loaded, followВ these steps.
    • Hit save in the editor or use the shortcut: (“CMD + S” on Mac or “CTRL + S” on PC).

    Easy right?

    How about some even better news? You can bypass the developer tools and simply make changes right in the editor.В

    PageCloud lets you completely customize your pages without ever having to go into the source code. Just click, and edit using the palette. If you’ve never written code, this will be a much more user-friendly interface!

    Check out How to build a professional website for more tips on creating a website with PageCloud

    If you’re a developer and want to take your site to the next level, you can access the JavaScript editor by using the “J + S” shortcut while logged into the PageCloud website editor.

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    Never heard of Pagecloud?В

    Try it for free today andВ build a custom websiteВ that offers you complete freedom to make all the changes you want! Pagecloud also offers e-commerce, which allows you to build and design an online store to sell products, services, and more!В В Sign up for freeВ and get started with Pagecloud!

    Philip Westfall


    • How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages
    • How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages
    • How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages
    • How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    Create your no-code landing page, website, or online store in no time.

    Publish your homepage for free, no credit card required.

    Enjoyed the read?

    Join our monthly newsletter for helpful tips on SEO, Web design, and more!

    Wix Alternatives – Top 5 Site Builders To Use Instead of Wix [Infographic]

    Video Editing Software: Top 4 Free Tools Without Watermarks for Mac, PC, & Linux

    Do more of what you love and share it with the world with a custom landing page, website, and online store. Pagecloud’s intuitive editor makes it easier than ever to create a website that showcases your brand.

    Following a recent hack on Wikidot servers conducted from the Russia territory, as well massive abuse of human rights, international laws and sovereignty of other countries, we have decided to block access to Wikidot to the following regions: Russian Federation and Belarus.

    We cannot stay quiet about the fact that over the last years we’ve seen numerous abuse and hacking attempts of Wikidot services originating in Russia territory. Now, since the start of war in Ukraine, these incidents increased in numbers and started posing a real threat. We cannot accept the fact that such attacks on foreign companies and institutions are silently approved or even encouraged by the Russian state.

    As a result we cannot provide services in countries that do not respect common human values and at the same time pose a threat to Wikidot itself.

    Although we believe there are good people in both Russia and Belarus, our decision to block Wikidot is a direct result of recent abuse and hacking events and state-level policy of these countries.

    The Wikidot Team

    Пасля нядаўняга ўзлому сервераў Wikidot з тэрыторыі Расіі, а таксама масавых парушэнняў правоў чалавека, міжнародных законаў і суверэнітэту іншых краін, мы вырашылі заблакаваць доступ да Wikidot для наступных рэгіёнаў: Расійскай Федэрацыі і Беларусі.

    Нельга маўчаць пра тое, што за апошнія гады мы назіраем шматлікія злоўжыванні і спробы ўзлому сэрвісаў Wikidot, якія паходзяць з тэрыторыі Расіі. Цяпер, з пачатку вайны ва Ўкраіне, гэтыя інцыдэнты павялічыліся і сталі ствараць рэальную пагрозу. Мы не можам змірыцца з тым, што такія напады на замежныя кампаніі і ўстановы моўчкі ўхваляюцца ці нават заахвочваюцца расійскай дзяржавай.

    У выніку мы не можам аказваць паслугі ў краінах, якія не паважаюць агульначалавечыя каштоўнасці і ў той жа час прадстаўляюць пагрозу для самой Wikidot.

    Нягледзячы на тое, што мы лічым, што і ў Расіі, і ў Беларусі ёсць добрыя людзі, наша рашэнне заблакаваць Wikidot з’яўляецца прамым вынікам нядаўніх злоўжыванняў і ўзломаў, а таксама дзяржаўнай палітыкі гэтых краін.

    The Wikidot Team

    После недавнего взлома серверов Wikidot с территории России, а также массовых нарушений прав человека, международного права и суверенитета других стран, мы приняли решение заблокировать доступ к Wikidot в следующих регионах: Российская Федерация и Беларусь.

    Мы не можем молчать о том, что за последние годы мы стали свидетелями многочисленных злоупотреблений и попыток взлома сервисов Wikidot, происходящих с территории России. Сейчас, с началом войны в Украине, эти инциденты участились и стали представлять реальную угрозу. Мы не можем смириться с тем, что подобные атаки на иностранные компании и учреждения молчаливо одобряются или даже поощряются российским государством.

    В результате мы не можем предоставлять услуги в странах, которые не уважают общечеловеческие ценности и в то же время представляют угрозу для самого Wikidot.

    Хотя мы считаем, что и в России, и в Беларуси есть хорошие люди, наше решение заблокировать Wikidot является прямым результатом недавних злоупотреблений и хакерских атак, а также государственной политики этих стран.

    Depending on your experience with this topic, it may surprise you to learn that not all medical writers have any sort of medical degree. Furthermore, not all clinicians who write identify as ‘medical writers.’

    When I first published this article in 2018, I made a few inaccurate assumptions. I assumed you are a healthcare professional from the United States, either early to mid career or approaching retirement. I was spot on with some of you (you know who you are) but I soon learned that entry-level medical writing is a far-reaching interest, globally and otherwise.

    I think we can agree that it takes a certain type of person to be a writer. Or to be an anything, really.

    Your having earned a medical degree does not inherently confer you the skills, nor interest or obligation, to write about medicine. On a similar note, obtaining a medical degree is not a pre-requisite to medical writing. It may open more doors, but a lack thereof won’t close them.

    So for those rare combinations of healer and poet , there is a world of opportunity awaiting you.

    If you aspire for technical, scientific, or even poetic greatness (or even mediocrity), this post will give you an overview of what you’ll need to know before starting this journey in medical writing.

    Individuals new to any field, particularly a subspecialty like medical writing, usually want to learn a few major concepts before applying for a medical writing job .

    Click here for 22 free Instagram post templates for your business.

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    Instagram is an undeniably powerful marketing tool, but with over 25 million businesses on the platform today, it’s critical you take the time to create well-designed and thoughtful Instagram posts to stand out.

    You’ll need to apply a strategic design plan to your business’s Instagram to attract a loyal following and find success on the app, long-term.

    However, creating a clean and cohesive Instagram feed takes design skills you might feel you lack. Plus, Instagram’s algorithm favors brands that post at least once a day — that time commitment could be adding to your stress.

    If that’s the case, you’re in luck — there are ways you can create pre-made Instagram post templates, so you’ve got a stash ready-to-go. Plus, by ensuring you use the same templates for different posts, you’ll have an easier time creating a cohesive and aesthetically-pleasing feed.

    How to Create Posts for Instagram

    1. Use Instagram Post Templates
    2. Choose Your Post Format
    3. Choose an Image
    4. Add Design Elements
    5. Save the Photo
    6. Upload to Instagram

    1. Use Instagram Post Templates

    Let’s face it — you don’t always have the time, resources, or personnel to design noteworthy Instagram posts. That’s why we recommend using Instagram Post Templates for Business which you can build from and customize.

    Here are some options to create and save Instagram post templates, so you can have stunning posts on-hand whenever you’re ready to publish.

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    Need templates to get started? Download HubSpot’s free Instagram post templates for both traditional posts and stories, which you can tailor as you see fit when it comes to your brand. You can alter any and all parts of the template – the image, the copy, and the design elements – to ensure you’re publishing posts to grow and engage your follower base.

    2. Choose Your Post Format

    While traditional Instagram posts to your permanent timeline are more long-lasting and allow for comments and likes, you shouldn’t underestimate the power of Instagram Stories, which can be used for more immediate needs and occasions.

    In fact, 500 million accounts use the Instagram Stories feature daily. So, when you’re creating your post, ask yourself if it warrants publication as a story or as a traditional post.

    3. Choose an Image

    Maybe you’ve decided your post doesn’t need a photograph and that text overlay on a solid-color background will work for you. If that’s the case, hop over to the next step.

    If you’ve decided you do want to use a photograph – particularly if you want one as the background for text overlay – you’ve got a few options.

    • Take a photo on your phone or with a camera. No need to be a professional photographer for your Instagram posts – you can learn how to take great photos with your phone here .
    • Use a photo from your company’s files. This works well if you need to utilize team photos or product photography, which may be better quality.
    • Use a stock photo that pertains to your business (just make sure you don’t use the same one multiple times!).

    Whichever photo you do decide to use, simply replace it as the background for the template you’re using in the HubSpot Instagram Post Template collection and resize the photo so it’s to your liking (and is good quality).

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    Recently at the Job Board

    • Health and Wellness Copy Writer
    • Freelance Writers Wanted: 25-35 Hours per week: Starting Rate $12/hour
    • OnlyFans Article Writer
    • Ongoing Work Available for an Experienced Content Writer in the SEO Niche
    • In Search of Awesome Remote Content Writers for All Industries!

    Problogger Top Articles

    • How to Start a Blog
    • How to Create Great Blog Content
    • How to Find Readers for Your Blog
    • 7 Strategies to Build Community on Your Blog
    • How to Make Money Blogging
    • 5 Ways to Make Your Blogging Life Easier

    Top Resources

    • 31 Days to Build a Better Blog
    • ProBlogger’s Guide to Your First Week of Blogging
    • ProBlogger’s Guide to Blogging for Your Business
    • Blog Wise: How to Do More with Less
    • The Blogger’s Guide to Online Marketing
    • Recommended Blogging Resources
    • About
    • Blog
    • Podcast
    • eBooks
    • Resources
    • Jobs
    • Courses
    • Speaking
    • Privacy
    • Terms
    • Contact

    Copyright © 2022 · All Rights Reserved

    A Practical Podcast… to Help You Build a Better Blog

    Following a recent hack on Wikidot servers conducted from the Russia territory, as well massive abuse of human rights, international laws and sovereignty of other countries, we have decided to block access to Wikidot to the following regions: Russian Federation and Belarus.

    We cannot stay quiet about the fact that over the last years we’ve seen numerous abuse and hacking attempts of Wikidot services originating in Russia territory. Now, since the start of war in Ukraine, these incidents increased in numbers and started posing a real threat. We cannot accept the fact that such attacks on foreign companies and institutions are silently approved or even encouraged by the Russian state.

    As a result we cannot provide services in countries that do not respect common human values and at the same time pose a threat to Wikidot itself.

    Although we believe there are good people in both Russia and Belarus, our decision to block Wikidot is a direct result of recent abuse and hacking events and state-level policy of these countries.

    The Wikidot Team

    Пасля нядаўняга ўзлому сервераў Wikidot з тэрыторыі Расіі, а таксама масавых парушэнняў правоў чалавека, міжнародных законаў і суверэнітэту іншых краін, мы вырашылі заблакаваць доступ да Wikidot для наступных рэгіёнаў: Расійскай Федэрацыі і Беларусі.

    Нельга маўчаць пра тое, што за апошнія гады мы назіраем шматлікія злоўжыванні і спробы ўзлому сэрвісаў Wikidot, якія паходзяць з тэрыторыі Расіі. Цяпер, з пачатку вайны ва Ўкраіне, гэтыя інцыдэнты павялічыліся і сталі ствараць рэальную пагрозу. Мы не можам змірыцца з тым, што такія напады на замежныя кампаніі і ўстановы моўчкі ўхваляюцца ці нават заахвочваюцца расійскай дзяржавай.

    У выніку мы не можам аказваць паслугі ў краінах, якія не паважаюць агульначалавечыя каштоўнасці і ў той жа час прадстаўляюць пагрозу для самой Wikidot.

    Нягледзячы на тое, што мы лічым, што і ў Расіі, і ў Беларусі ёсць добрыя людзі, наша рашэнне заблакаваць Wikidot з’яўляецца прамым вынікам нядаўніх злоўжыванняў і ўзломаў, а таксама дзяржаўнай палітыкі гэтых краін.

    The Wikidot Team

    После недавнего взлома серверов Wikidot с территории России, а также массовых нарушений прав человека, международного права и суверенитета других стран, мы приняли решение заблокировать доступ к Wikidot в следующих регионах: Российская Федерация и Беларусь.

    Мы не можем молчать о том, что за последние годы мы стали свидетелями многочисленных злоупотреблений и попыток взлома сервисов Wikidot, происходящих с территории России. Сейчас, с началом войны в Украине, эти инциденты участились и стали представлять реальную угрозу. Мы не можем смириться с тем, что подобные атаки на иностранные компании и учреждения молчаливо одобряются или даже поощряются российским государством.

    В результате мы не можем предоставлять услуги в странах, которые не уважают общечеловеческие ценности и в то же время представляют угрозу для самого Wikidot.

    Хотя мы считаем, что и в России, и в Беларуси есть хорошие люди, наше решение заблокировать Wikidot является прямым результатом недавних злоупотреблений и хакерских атак, а также государственной политики этих стран.

    When you want to share a presentation or a picture slide show with your friends, family, or colleagues, save it to OneDrive, then you can embed it in a web page or blog.

    The embed code you need must be gotten from PowerPoint for the web. It isn’t available from the PC or Mac versions of PowerPoint.

    Get the embed code

    Save your presentation to (Storing the presentation to a public folder online is what allows you to embed it on a web page.)

    Open your presentation in PowerPoint for the web. On the File tab of the Ribbon, click Share, and then click Embed.

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    To create the HTML code to embed your file in the web page, click Generate .

    In the Embed box, under Dimensions, select the correct dimensions for the blog or web page.

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    Under Embed Code, right-click the code, click Copy, and then click Close.

    You’ll use this embed code in the next procedure. You may want to paste it somewhere handy, like Notepad, so that you don’t lose it.

    The HTML that you copied from the OneDrive page is an iframe tag, which is supported in many web authoring systems and blog services. The steps provided here work in some of the most popular blogging services, such as WordPress, Blogger, and TypePad.

    Even though WordPress ordinarily doesn’t allow iframes in posts, an exception is made for iframes that host Office for the web. To use HTML editing, don’t use the New Post command at the top of the page. Go to your blog’s dashboard and click Posts > Add New.

    In TypePad, don’t use the Quick Compose editor. Go to Blogs, click the name of your blog, and then click Compose, where you can switch from Rich Text to HTML editing.

    In Blogger, change the compose window to Edit HTML. You can switch back to compose mode after you finish the next step.

    In your blog editor or web page editor, write your content, and then switch to HTML editing.

    If you use a blogging service that does not support iframes in posts, consult your blogging service provider for assistance.

    With the HTML tag that you copied from the OneDrive page as the most recent item in your Clipboard, press ⌘+V.

    Finish writing your post. Preview and publish as you normally would.

    Updates to the presentation on OneDrive are automatically reflected on the page where the presentation is embedded.

    Once you have the embed code as described above, you can also embed the presentation in a SharePoint wiki. In this case, you paste only the src portion of the copied iframe tag into a Page Viewer Web Part.

    On the wiki page click Edit.

    With the HTML tag that you copied from the OneDrive page as the most recent item in your Clipboard, press Ctrl+V to paste the tag on the wiki page. This is so that you can easily copy a portion of the tag into the Web Part. You’ll delete the tag from the wiki page before you’re done.

    Copy the portion of the tag between quotation marks that begins with http. Don’t include the quotation marks.

    On the Editing Tools tab click Insert, and then click Web Part.

    In the list of categories, click Media and Content.

    In the list of Web Parts, click Page Viewer, and then click Add.

    To paste the address you copied in step 3, click open the tool pane, and then in the Link box, press ⌘+V.

    Click Apply to preview the page.

    Make adjustments to the Web Part as desired. For example, in the Page Viewer editor, expand Appearance and specify height of 332 pixels and width of 407 pixels to fit the presentation in the frame with no scroll bars.

    When you are finished, click OK in the Page Viewer editor, and delete the iframe tag from the wiki page.

    Updates to the presentation on OneDrive are automatically reflected on the page where the presentation is embedded.

    Steam Workshop and How to Make Mods


    Steam Workshop

    The Rome II Steam Workshop is a directory of user created modifications for the game that can alter many different areas of the game, from simple balance mods to adding new units to changing the graphics in the game.

    You can browse the Workshop for mods you would like to have in your game and subscribe to them. The tags can be used to filter for mods of different types, so if you just want to find mods that add new units, the Units tag is the one for you.

    Mod Manager

    Once you have subscribed to items in the Workshop, when you next load up the game you can see these mods by clicking on the Mod Manager button in the launcher.

    This will show all the Workshop items you are subscribed to and the download progress of them. You can also choose which mods you want active via the checkboxes for each one. So you can subscribe to more mods than you want active at any one time and you can have them downloaded on your computer and ready to go whenever you want them to have an effect in-game.

    You can also upload mods to Steam Workshop from the Mod Manager, but that will be covered later. First there is information on how to make a mod.

    Creating a Mod

    For now community made tools are required to create mods. There are already many great tools and tutorials out there, below is a list of them that will get you started.

    • Warscape Modding Primer– A good beginners guide to modding Rome II.
    • Pack File Manager – The main community tool, this can open pack files, create new ones and edit database tables
    • Rome 2 Editor – A tool designed for dealing with large amounts of data in the database.
    • How to create a mod pack in 5 easy steps with Pack File Manager – A great guide on how to create a mod pack, the crucial element of any Workshop mod.
    • How to make a custom unit with Pack File Manager – Another useful tutorial this time focused on adding units.
    • Tools, Tutorials and Resources – A list of all tools and tutorials for Rome II modding.

    Uploading a Mod to Steam Workshop

    Now you have made a mod, uploading it to Steam Workshop is a simple process.

    Make sure your mod pack has a unique name so it will not conflict with other mods, and that it is located in your Rome II data folder along with an image for your mod. This should be a 256×256 png image with the same name as your mod pack. If you do not have this image you will get an error message on trying to upload.

    Run the game and go to the Mod Manager. You should see a new entry there with the name of your mod pack along with an upload button. Clicking it will prompt you to select which tag you want for your mod. The tags are:

    • Graphical
    • UI
    • Overhaul
    • Battle
    • Campaign
    • Units
    • Compliation
    • Maps

    Pick the one that is most relevant.

    Once your mod has been uploaded you will be taken to the Steam Workshop page for it where you can edit its title, description and upload additional images/videos to help promote it. Save the details and it will be available for everyone who owns Rome II to subscribe to and use themselves in their games.

    Get Paid $100

    Do you want to earn money online? Listverse was built on the efforts of readers just like you. Readers who didn’t have any experience as writers but decided to put a list together and send it in.

    So here is the deal: We will pay you $100 for your efforts. You don’t need to be an expert—you just need to have English equal to that of a native speaker, a sense of humor, and a love for things unusual or interesting.

    It works like this: You write your list (10 items per list minimum), you send it in, we reply and say “Great—we’ll publish it” and send you $100 by PayPal (don’t have an account? just make one—it’s easy and free); or we reply and say “Sorry—it isn’t the sort of thing our readers will love—give it another shot.” Just remember, your list should be at least one or two paragraphs per entry.

    Either way you win—your list will be read by us and reviewed, and if it’s amazing it will appear on the front page of Listverse to be read by millions of people a month!

    We can not accept lists from writers who do not have a PayPal account; this is non-negotiable. If PayPal doesn’t support your country, please don’t request alternative methods of payment.

    The Rules

    The rules are really pretty simple. As long as your list (and we do mean yours—don’t steal other people’s stuff) is one or two paragraphs per item you can choose any topic you like. We also need you to link to reputable sources (see Section 7 of our author guide for more details) so we can verify the facts of what you’re saying. Just remember—if it’s good enough to publish (by our standards) you get 100 bucks—simple as that.

    To help you out with some ideas, the lists that our readers love the most (and the ones we will most likely pay for) are lists that are offbeat and novel—lists that are looking at something normal in an unexpected way (ways college makes you dumb, for example), unsolved mysteries, hidden knowledge (things most people don’t know), misconceptions, and just really astonishing general knowledge about anything—science, for example. What we don’t want to see are lists on sports, self-help, personal stories, or gaming. We don’t publish opinion lists.

    Oh—and there’s one more thing: If you have a blog, a Twitter account, or a book you want to promote, mention it in the submissions form and we will stick it at the bottom of your list.

    Pictures and Video

    When you send in your list you don’t need to include images or videos. Our team of editors does a great job selecting the best images to complement your writing. However, if you are desperate to include some of your own supporting imagery or videos, just include a link to the YouTube page or a URL of the picture you like with each item on your list. We don’t promise we’ll use them, but we’ll definitely consider them.

    Please note that we publish original articles. We do not post infographics, slideshows, or “re-blogged” content. We do not publish sponsored articles or content from other sites or YouTube.

    Ready to start? Just head over to the submissions form and get writing!

    Hosted directly from your GitHub repository. Just edit, push, and your changes are live.

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    You get one site per GitHub account and organization,
    and unlimited project sites. Let‘s get started.

    • User or organization site
    • Project site
    • Create a repository

      Head over to GitHub and create a new public repository named, where username is your username (or organization name) on GitHub.

      If the first part of the repository doesn’t exactly match your username, it won’t work, so make sure to get it right.

      What git client are you using?

      • A terminal
      • GitHub Desktop
      • I don’t know
    • Download GitHub Desktop

      GitHub Desktop is a great way to use Git and GitHub on macOS and Windows.

      Download GitHub DesktopHow to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

      Clone the repository

      Go to the folder where you want to store your project, and clone the new repository:

      $ git clone

      Clone the repository

      Click the “Set up in Desktop” button. When the GitHub desktop app opens, save the project.

      If the app doesn’t open, launch it and clone the repository from the app.

      Clone the repository

      After finishing the installation, head back to and refresh the page. Click the “Set up in Desktop” button. When the GitHub desktop app opens, save the project.

      If the app doesn’t open, launch it and clone the repository from the app.

      Hello World

      Enter the project folder and add an index.html file:

      $ echo “Hello World” > index.html

      Create an index file

      Grab your favorite text editor and add an index.html file to your project:

      Push it

      Add, commit, and push your changes:

      $ git commit -m “Initial commit”

      $ git push -u origin main

      Commit & publish

      Enter the repository, commit your changes, and press the publish button.

      How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

      …and you’re done!

      Fire up a browser and go to

      Use a theme, or start from scratch?

      You have the option to start with one of the pre-built themes,
      or to create a site from scratch.

      • Choose a theme
      • Start from scratch

      Repository Settings

      Head over to and create a new repository, or go to an existing one.
      Click on the Settings tab.

      How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

      Theme chooser

      Scroll down to the GitHub Pages section. Press Choose a theme.

      How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

      Pick a theme

      Choose one of the themes from the carousel at the top.
      When you’re done, click Select theme on the right.

      How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

      Edit content

      Use the editor to add content to your site.

      How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages


      Enter a commit comment and click on Commit changes below the editor.

      How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

      Create an index file

      Head over to and create a new repository, or go to an existing one.
      Click on the Create new file button.

      How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

      Hello World

      Name the file index.html and type some HTML content into the editor.

      How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

      Commit the file

      Scroll to the bottom of the page, write a commit message, and commit the new file.

      How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

      Repository Settings

      Click on the Settings tab and scroll down to the GitHub Pages section.
      Then select the main branch source and click on the Save button.

      How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

      …and you’re done!

      Fire up a browser and go to

      Blogging with Jekyll

      Using Jekyll, you can blog using beautiful Markdown syntax, and without having to deal with any databases. Learn how to set up Jekyll.

      Custom URLs

      Want to use your own custom domain for a GitHub Pages site? Just create a file named CNAME and include your URL. Read more.


      Learn how to create custom 404 pages, use submodules, and learn more about GitHub Pages.

    • Status
    • API
    • Training
    • Shop
    • Blog
    • About
    • © 2022 GitHub , Inc.
    • Terms
    • Privacy
    • Security
    • Contact

    Welcome to the Python Wiki, a user-editable compendium of knowledge based around the Python programming language. Some pages are protected against casual editing – see WikiEditingGuidelines for more information about editing content.

    Python is a great object-oriented, interpreted, and interactive programming language. It is often compared (favorably of course ) to Lisp, Tcl, Perl, Ruby, C#, Visual Basic, Visual Fox Pro, Scheme or Java. and it’s much more fun.

    Python combines remarkable power with very clear syntax. It has modules, classes, exceptions, very high level dynamic data types, and dynamic typing. There are interfaces to many system calls and libraries, as well as to various windowing systems. New built-in modules are easily written in C or C++ (or other languages, depending on the chosen implementation). Python is also usable as an extension language for applications written in other languages that need easy-to-use scripting or automation interfaces.

    Getting Started

    Events, Courses, Conferences, Community

    Python Conferences – information about the Python conference scene

    Local User Groups – find a Python group near you

    Python Training – Python training courses

    Python Events – event listing for conferences, training courses and more

    Python Event Calendars – calendars for Python conferences and user groups

    Participating in the Community – where people using and producing Python get together

    Python Software Foundation – show your support by joining the Foundation behind Python

    Python Software

    Python Core Development Tools

    Using this Wiki

    This Wiki is a community place to gather and organize all things about Python. Feel free to exercise your editorial skills and expertise to make it a useful knowledge base and up-to-date reference on all Python-related topics.

    There are some guidelines describing the policies and rules governing this Wiki and how you can most effectively contribute to it. A list of site improvements describes various tasks where your help would be appreciated. To keep up with changes on this site, check RecentChanges frequently or follow it using RSS: RSS feed.

    Creating a Wiki account

    In order to sign up for a wiki account, please go to the Create new account form, enter your account name (using the format FirstnameLastname to avoid issues – please don’t use spaces in the name) and provide a password, plus email address (for password recovery).

    Editing pages

    Since spamming and vandalism on this wiki had reached a level that required constant intervention, unfamiliar users are no longer allowed to edit pages. However all you need to do is introduce yourself to the wiki admin group to become an editor.

    If you want to edit a page and have just signed up, or find that you can no longer edit a page that you could edit before, please write to the pydotorg-www mailing list describing what you would like to edit, and we’ll add you to the EditorsGroup. Please include your account name (wiki name) in this message.

    Sorry for any inconvenience, but we want to keep this wiki a useful tool for the community, while at the same time preventing the wiki admins from burning out cleaning up junk.

    Reporting problems

    In case of emergency, please contact the maintainers, or if experiencing difficulties, contact the pydotorg-www mailing list to say “help”.

    Wiki Attack in January 2013

    The wiki was subject to an attack on January 5 2013. Since it was not clear whether user account data was stolen, all passwords were subsequently reset, so you will have to use the password recovery function to get a new password.

    See the wiki attack description page for more details. If you find problems, please report them to the pydotorg-www mailing list

    HTTPS access to the Wiki

    We have enabled HTTPS access to the wiki to further enhance security and avoid having to send clear text passwords over the network in order to log in to the wikis.

    If you have not been using HTTPS links to the wiki login page, please be advised that your password may have been sniffed on the network at e.g. a conference. It is best to change it and stop using HTTP links to the wiki login page.

    FrontPage (last edited 2018-09-16 15:22:36 by SteveHolden )

    In light of an ever-growing text editor market, we are constantly thinking of ways to make UltraEdit better. Our most recent release, which includes the oft-requested Markdown support, is one product of those efforts. So as of v25.20, UltraEdit includes full support for Markdown highlighting, editing, and previewing!

    Coupled with our new live preview feature in UltraEdit v25.20, if you’re already writing Markdown documents you’ll be able to enjoy a real-time preview of your rendered Markdown as you make them in your source file. Additionally, we’ve added a completely new syntax parser for Markdown, so you’ll get full, context-aware Markdown code highlighting support out of the box. No plugins to download and install, no config files to set up. It just works—and that’s the way it should be.

    Those of you who are already familiar with Markdown will understand why this is so exciting. But there are others among you who have heard of Markdown but have never used it, or who haven’t heard of it at all! So we wanted to talk about some of the reasons why Markdown is so great.

    What Is It?

    Markdown is a plain text formatting syntax aimed at making writing for the internet easier. The philosophy behind Markdown is that plain text documents should be readable without tags mussing everything up, but there should still be ways to add text modifiers like lists, bold, italics, etc. It is an alternative to WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) editors, which use rich text that later gets converted to proper HTML.

    It’s possible you’ve encountered Markdown without realizing it. Facebook chat, Skype, and Reddit all let you use different flavors of Markdown to format your messages.

    Here’s a quick example: to make words bold using Markdown, you simply enclose them in * (asterisks). So, *bold word* would look like bold word when everything is said and done.

    All told, Markdown is a great way to write for the web using plain text.

    Why Use It?

    It’s Easy to Learn and Fast to Use

    Markdown is dead simple to learn. The official syntax can be found here, but most of what you’ll need to know is that typing *word* will make it bold, typing **word** or _word_ will italicize the word, links are written like this [anchor text](, and lists are written exactly how you’d expect: just hit enter and add any of these three characters at the start of each line: -, *, +. So this:

    • List item 1
    • List item 2
    • List item 3

    Or you could always use a tutorial to learn how to write Markdown, like this one.

    So typing Markdown is almost always faster than writing with a rich text editor, especially when you start getting into things like links or bulleted lists, which either make you use the mouse or force you to memorize a complicated sequence of keyboard shortcuts. One caveat is that if you need complicated text elements, such as tables, you’re better off sticking to HTML. Fortunately, Markdown has full HTML support, so you can code a table in HTML and go right back to Markdown in the same document.

    Plus, it’s much easier to read raw Markdown than it is to read raw HTML. Which, you know, was part of the reason Markdown was even invented.

    It Converts to HTML Easily

    Now, if you’re going to be writing HTML, you should just…write HTML. But if you’re, say, writing an email or a readme file where you need HTML’s formatting options but not the full breadth of its features, Markdown is perfect.

    Markdown converts to HTML flawlessly, sparing you the hassle of opening and closing all those tags. So. Many. Tags.

    In fact, Markdown has the software to convert the plain text to HTML built in! So Markdown is actually a text-to-HTML conversion software in addition to being a markup language.

    Plus, have you ever tried to convert from a .docx file to HTML? You often get so much extra formatting and spacing that it’s not worth the effort.

    Markdown is Futureproof

    By “futureproof,” we mean that Markdown is a plain text format. For as long as plain text is the standard (which it will be for a long, long time), Markdown will be usable and openable by modern programs. Compare this to Microsoft Word, which has 8 different filetypes as of 2018. Keeping things plain text ensures there will never be an outdated version, so software doesn’t need to update to keep up with the format.

    Markdown does have its own filename extension: .md, but it was designed to be perfectly readable as a raw text file. So it’s safe to say that Markdown isn’t going anywhere.

    It’s Used Everywhere

    You might expect that Markdown’s use has stalled as rich text becomes more and more popular, but that’s actually incorrect. Markdown’s presence has only grown since its introduction, and it continues to do so.

    Markdown is the unofficial standard on popular coding sites such as GitHub. It is also the default formatting option for popular communication tools such as Skype, Slack, and (to a lesser extent) Facebook Messenger. Wikipedia even uses a modified Markdown syntax they call wikitext.

    In a world of social coding that’s only becoming more social, the programmer who doesn’t know Markdown will find themselves at a disadvantage (or, at the very least, confused for a little while).

    So learn Markdown, if for no other reason than so you can keep up with the industry.

    You Don’t Have to Switch Editors to Write Prose

    Writing prose has always been something of a challenge using text editors. It isn’t as though it can’t be done, but plain text removes a lot of the formatting options that tend to come in handy when writing prose. This is more of a small inconvenience than a big issue, but it’s still enough that many people would rather switch to their email program to write an email or their word processor to write prose, as opposed to staying in UltraEdit and writing everything there. But with the introduction of Markdown, writing an email or blog within UltraEdit is now a perfectly viable way to proceed. Of course, you don’t have to do that, but giving people options for how to handle each situation is one of the things UltraEdit does best!

    Try UltraEdit Today!

    If you haven’t tried UltraEdit yet, give it a shot. Its commercial support, world-class security, and generous 30 day money back guarantee are just a few of the reasons why UltraEdit has been going strong for 25 years. With it’s new Markdown support features, there is even more to love.

    Editorial cartoons always catch the eye. When you get them in an email — you stop what you’re doing and take a peak. When you see one on Facebook or Twitter — you stop scrolling and start laughing.

    They’re what you share, what you love, and what you can’t get enough of. But the biggest problem with editorial cartoons is that they’re limited to the professionals. Imagine if you had an idea to make some hilarious ones yourself – how on earth would you be able to make one?

    Here’s the great news: With Powtoon — you can make as many editorial cartoons as your heart desires. You can make one to stand out on your next blog post, in an email to your subscribers, an in-office joke or just to share to your social media followers.

    How To Make Editorial Cartoons With Powtoon… In Just 3 Steps

    1. Choose your scene

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    For the first one I did, I chose a background found in the ‘Marker’ style, to set the scene. So, inside of Powtoon Studio (as you see below) just click “Backgrounds” on the side panel and you’ll discover a library full of gorgeous backgrounds to choose from.

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    Then, just click the background you want and…

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    …boom, it appears:

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    2. Choose your character

    Once you choose your background for your scene, the next step is to choose a character. All you have to do is click on the ‘Animated Character’ or ‘Character’ menu and choose the one you want. I chose the Animated Character above, from the ‘Paper Cut’ template.

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    3. Choose Your Text

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    I chose to use a ‘Quote Box’ which you can find in the ‘Objects’ section in the sidebar. Then I clicked to add ‘Text’ on the menu at the top and you can edit your text instantly.

    Always Be Timely — Editorial Cartoons in a Snap

    Here’s another quick one I made — just by using the Donald Trump character we created for the 2016 election campaign. I also chose a background appropriate for a president. You can create any editorial cartoon you like, using it in as many creative and strategic ways you can dream of 🙂

    We all know how quickly the news can change. The thing that was timely and engaging a week ago might be all but forgotten today. So use this easy hack to churn out tons of timely and relevant editorial cartoons for your audience. They’ll think you have a team of artists backing you up!

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    These are the only 3 steps you need to make editorial cartoons with Powtoon, for FREE.

    We have a library full of characters, backgrounds, fonts, hundreds of props and objects and a ton more for you to use.​ So go on an unleash your own creative genius with Powtoon right now. Click here to sign up for your free account and start making as many editorial cartoons as your heart desires 🙂

    This post has been updated for clarity and accuracy.


    This article describes how to make Web pages available for offline viewing using Internet Explorer 5. When you make a Web page available offline, you can read its content when your computer is not connected to the Internet.

    The following topics are discussed in this article:

    Making a Web page available for offline viewing

    Disabling offline viewing for a Web page

    Customizing offline viewing settings

    Offline viewing options

    Viewing Web pages without being connected to the Internet

    NOTE: Some Web sites use HTTP headers or META tags within a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) or Active Server Pages (ASP) document itself, to prevent their contents from being stored in your disk cache (Temporary Internet Files). In this case, the Make available offline and Synchronize options may appear to work, but the Web site content is not stored in your disk cache. As a result, the site is unavailable for offline viewing. For example, after you click the Make available offline option and then synchronize your inbox, you are unable to view your inbox offline.

    More Information

    Making a Web Page Available for Offline Viewing

    To add the Web page you are currently viewing to your Favorites list and then make it available for offline viewing, follow these steps in Internet Explorer:

    On the Favorites menu, click Add To Favorites.

    Click the Make Available Offline check box to select it, and then click OK.

    To make an existing favorite Web page available for offline viewing, follow these steps in Internet Explorer:

    On the Favorites menu, click Organize Favorites.

    Click the Web page you want to make available offline.

    Click the Make Available Offline check box to select it, and then click Close.

    Disable Offline Viewing for a Web Page

    To disable offline viewing for a Web page, follow these steps in Internet Explorer:

    On the Favorites menu, click Organize Favorites.

    Click the offline Web page you want to disable, click the Make Available Offline check box to clear it, and then click Close.

    Customizing Offline Viewing Settings

    For a New Offline Web Page:

    You can customize the options for an offline Web page. After you make a Web page available for offline viewing, click Customize in the Add Favorite dialog box to customize the settings.

    For an Existing Offline Web Page:

    In Internet Explorer, click Organize Favorites on the Favorites menu.

    Click the offline Web page you want to modify, and then click Properties.

    Specify the settings you want, and then click OK.

    Offline Viewing Options

    For a New Offline Web Page:

    When you make a new Web page available for offline viewing, click Customize in the Add Favorite dialog box to start the Offline Favorite Wizard. The Offline Favorite Wizard can be used to configure the following settings:

    You can make other Web pages that are linked to the selected Web page available offline. If you have limited hard disk space or you want to reduce synchronization time, click No.

    You can schedule Web page synchronization using one of the following options:

    The “Only when I choose synchronize from the Tools menu” option enables you to manually synchronize your Web pages.

    The “I would like to create a new schedule” option enables you to specify a synchronization time based on your preferences. You can the schedule a unique name so you can easily identify it.

    The Use This Existing Schedule option enables you to choose a default daily, weekly, or monthly scheduled time. You can also choose from previously created custom schedules.

    The “Does this site require a password?” option enables you to specify a user name and password for the offline Web page if it is required. The user name and password are automatically provided when Internet Explorer synchronizes the Web page.

    For an Existing Offline Web Page: To customize an existing offline Web page, click Organize Favorites on the Favorites menu, click the offline Web page you want to modify, and then click Properties. You can specify the following settings:

    The “Only when I choose Synchronize from the Tools menu” option enables you to manually synchronize your Web pages.

    The “Using the following schedule(s)” option enables you to specify a default schedule.

    The Add button enables you to specify a synchronization time and give the schedule a unique name.

    The Remove button enables you to remove any schedule.

    The Edit button enables you to customize the following settings:

    Synchronization Items tab: You can specify the network connection to use for the selected schedule. You can also select which offline Web pages to synchronize with this schedule. Internet Explorer can also automatically connect to your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to synchronize your Web pages.

    Schedule tab: You can modify the time settings for the selected schedule and choose advanced schedule options such as start date, end date, and how often the task can be repeated. Multiple schedules can be configured, schedule, and removed.

    Settings tab: You can specify what to do with a task once it is completed, whether or not the computer has to be idle when the task is started, and power management settings.

    For more information about scheduled tasks, click Start, click Help, click the Index tab, type scheduled tasks, and then double-click the “Overview” topic.

    The “Download pages links deep from this page” setting enables you to specify how many links deep Internet Explorer should download Web pages for offline use. You can choose to follow links outside of the page’s Web site and limit the amount of hard disk space allocated to the Web page. You can also specify what type of content to download or omit from your Web pages by clicking the Advanced button.

    The “When this page changes, send e-mail to” check box enables e-mail to be sent to you when the content of the offline Web page changes.

    If the site requires a user name and password, you can click the Logon button to specify your user name and password.

    Viewing Web pages Without Being Connected to the Internet

    To view your offline Web pages, follow these steps:

    Before you disconnect from the Internet, click Synchronize on the Tools menu.

    When you want to work offline, click Work Offline on the File menu to add a check mark.

    In your favorites list, click the offline Web page you want to view.

    NOTE: When you choose to work offline, Internet Explorer always starts in Offline mode until you click Work Offline on the File menu to clear the check mark.

    For additional information, click the article number below to view the article in the Microsoft Knowledge Base:

    234067 HOWTO: Prevent Caching in Internet Explorer

    How to make money writing blogs or editing wiki pages

    Written communication is used in every part of your day. Whether you’re writing an essay for school, writing a formal report for work, or writing a message or email online, it’s important to reread the text to ensure it’s written accurately and clearly.

    This is where proofreading comes in. Learn how proofreading your work for writing mistakes can help you avoid confusion and miscommunication in your message.

    What is proofreading?

    The word “proofreading” came from the traditional publishing industry. Before digital publishing gained popularity, publishers would print an early copy of a text (the “proof”). A final review of the proof was performed by a proofreader who’s responsible for catching any grammatical, spelling, and formatting errors or inconsistencies.

    Although the text or manuscript might’ve gone through top editing, line editing, and copy editing, some errors can still get missed in these early review stages. Proofreading, however, is the last opportunity to correct any errors that might’ve slipped past before it’s published.

    Proofreading tips

    Since proofreading is such an important step in the writing process, it helps to know a few ways to improve your proofreading skills . One or all of the following tips can help you catch mistakes before your document is submitted:

    • Stepping away from your work. After spending a lot of time writing and rereading the same text, it’s easy for your brain to fill in missing words in a sentence for you or for your eyes to glaze over grammatical details.
    • Read the text out loud. This strategy helps you spot confusing points or jarring structure. It also helps you identify awkward or abrupt sentences.
    • Print out the document. Getting your eyes away from a computer screen and onto a physical page can help you find errors that fell through the cracks.

    These are just a few ways to develop your proofreading skills on your own. You can try one approach or a combination of them to see what’s most effective for you.

    Proofreading vs. editing

    Although proofreading is a part of the editing process, editing involves a few key differences. Editors who reviewed the document before a proofreader are often focused on other elements of the text.

    For example, a top editor might review the document to ensure the ideas and arguments are effective or rework sentences and sections so the entire document flows cohesively. And although a copy editor is responsible for fixing grammatical and spelling errors, they also focus on keeping a publication’s style preference consistent throughout.

    In addition to correcting errors that might’ve slipped past previous editing steps, proofreading ensures that other pre-publication factors, like page formatting, line spacing, and typography are accurate.

    Using a proofreading service

    Practicing the proofreading techniques shared above can help you minimize the errors on your document before submitting it. Although self-proofing is a skill all writers should practice, using a professional service like Grammarly’s add-on proofreading service can offer extra assurance that your final text is mistake-free.

    You can choose to have a Grammarly proofreader review your document for correctness, like fixing grammar, punctuation, spelling, and syntax. Another proofreading service option is having an expert proofreader review the text for correctness and clarity. For this selection, Grammarly’s proofreader will check for all areas of correctness above, but also ensure that the text is concise and understandable.

    To submit a Grammarly proofreading request, click on “Get Expert Writing Help” in the Grammarly Editor, or order this service through Grammarly for Microsoft Office.